This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/
r
ckxA.e."T ItT l1y.'T- •+.%"! O
ShiftU? Jf! ««i4tBrt ?) 1
HARVARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY
3 2044 102 851 078
J
GRAMMAR
OVTHB
FRENCH LANGUAGE,
WITH
BY N- WANOSTROCHT, LL- D.
SJEYBHTH AHSBICAV VROM THE LAST hOSDOV XDXTIOir.
TO WHICH IS ADDED,
A VERY COMPREHENSIVE TABLE OF CONTENTS,
▲VD Alf ALFHABHTICAli AURAlTGEMEirT 01 THE
IRREGULAR VERBS,
WITH KEFE&fijrCE TO THE PLACES WHERE THET ARE COlTJiroATED.
ALTERATIOm, ADDITIONS JiJ^D mPROVEMENTS ;
AND A SCHEME FOR PARSING.
ALSO, A
TREATISE ON FRENCH VERSIFICATION,
BY M. DE WAILLY,
Member of the NaUonal Institute of France, &c. &c.
BOSTOJ^:
PUBLISHED BY RICHARDSON & LORD.
PRINTED BY J. J^. a. FROST.
1824.
^^WBxd. OoU^fire Librftry
aiftif
DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit:
DUtriet ClerkU Office.
BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the eighteenth dar of March,
A. D. 1824, and in the forty-eighth year of the Independence of the
United States of America, Rickardson k Lord^ of the said District,
have deposited in this Office the Title of a Book, the right whereof
they claim as Proprietors, in the words following, to vnt :
A Grammar of the French lAnguage, with Practical Exercises, by
N. Wanostrocht, LL. D. Seventh American from the last London
Edition, to which is added, a very comprehensive Table of Contents,
and an Alphabetical Arrangement of the Irregular Verbs, wi^h re-
ference to the places where they are conjugated, with Alterations,
Additions and improvements, and a Scheme for Parsing, also a Trea-
tise on French Versification. By M. De Wailly, Member of the
National Institute of France, &c. &c.
In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, en-
titled, ^^ An Act for the Encouragement of Learning, by securing the
Copies of Maps, Charts and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of
such copies, during the times therein mentioned i"*^ and also to an
Act entitled, '^ An Act supplementary to an Act, entitled, *• An Act
for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies of Maps,
Charts and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of soch copies
during iht tiroes therein mentioned ; and eztendin|^ the benefits
thereof to the Arts of Designing, Engraving and Etching Historical,
and other Prints.' '^
JOHN W. DAVIS,
Clerk of (he Dutrict of JfHanaehwetis.
ADVERTISEMENT.
THE publishers of the previous Boston editions of
this Grammar, now offer a new and improved edition
of a work which has become generally known and
esteemed.
When it was first determined to reprint this judicious
system of theoretically and practically teaching the
French language, a perfect conviction was felt that it
would meet the approbation of the wise and learned
as soon as it was known ; and the rapid sale of six
editions in the United States within a few years has
fully realized that expectation and given indubitable evi-
dence of the intrinsic merit of this mode of instruction.
In London this Grammar has passed through sixteen
editions, and it has likewise been* printed several times
at Paris.
Previous to the printing of every new edition the
American publishers have always been careful to pro-
cure the latest English copy, in order to profit by any
improvement which may have been made in succeeding
editions, and this attention has always proved advan-
tageous. Besides this, every edition has been carefully
revised, 'enlarged and improved by the same editor,
who, in the present, has availed himself of the altera-
tions and meliorations liberally furnished by a worthy
and intelligent Jnstructer. Therefore, it is confidently
believed that this GrauHnar will continue to deserve
the high standing it has attained, both in Europe and
America, among the real judges of similar publications.
This work is now introduced into some of the first
literary institutions in the country, and particularly into
the University at Cambridge, and St. Mary's College in
Baltimore.
Boston, March, 1824.
PREFACE.
THAT " a great book is a great evil" is generally a great tmtb,
for the discovery of which we moderns must hold ourselves indebted
to the sages of antiquity. In the following sheets, I have endeavour-
ed to improve upon the ancient maxim, and bring the two ends of the
book as near together as I pbssibly could. On this frugal plan, the
preface might have been spared, but custom must be complied with :
some part of our time must be spent on superfluities ; and what is
rendered venerable by age must not too hastily be rejected. To
enter abruptly upon the main subject is generally considered as a
i)reach of politeness. What is useful must sometimes gixe place to what
is convenient, and what rigorous justice cannot defend, may yet enjoy
the security of prescription. In compliance, therefore, with univer-
sal custom, with the general practice of the ancients, and, what is
still more forcible, the urgent solicitation of the boolteellers, I pro-
ceed to lay before the Reader the general Plan of the Work.
The idea of the Practicai. Grammar was first suggested to the
Author in the course of his private teaching. He found daily the in-
convenience of referring from book to book, and determined to sup-
ply the defect in the best manner he could. Whatever was neces*
sary to furnish a tolerable acquaintance with the elements of the lan-
guage, and point out the nature of its construction, he proposed to
admit; and reject everything that was not esgenlially connected
with his principal design. His first object was to comprise, in as little
room as possible, every thing that was really useful in the grammar^
the exercise-book, and the book of dialogues. To this plan,he has
strictly adhered in the composition, and has brought the whole to-
gether in a much smaller compass than, at first, could reasonably
have been expected.
The several parts of speech are arranged in the usual order, and
each part is discussed under a separate section.
Each rule is followed by a familiar exercise, which the master may
use in the place of a dialogue.
The advantages resulting from the scholars learning and then re-
peating their own tranilationt by heart must, in the opinion of impart-
iial and disinterested miiK^s v^tejrially tend to their unproy^ment ;
PREFACE. ▼
by these means, the pupils, nnithig practice to theory, not only be-
come imperceptibly acquainted with the French phraseology, which
in many instances differs so much from the English construction, but
immediately know what is the English word that corresponds with
the French, and vice versA^ which cannot absolutely be done, in a
dialogue where the French is ready made for them. Therefore, in
order the more fully to answer the Author's intention, he has, instead
of fine sentences, extracted from the most elegant writers, and often
above the comprehension of young people, preferred, and made nse,
throughout all the exercises, of plain and easy sentences, which, at
the same time they are withhi the reach of the young learners' facul-
ties, will soon enable them to speak the French language with pro-
priety and elegance. What more can be expected from an elemen-
tary book ?
At the close of every section, a recapitulatory exercise is given
npon all the preceding rules.
When there is any difference hk the order of arrangement, the
French construction is pointed out by the small figures placed against
the top of the words in the English sentence.
Some of the most remarkable French idioms are noticed, and ex-
emplified by various instances. Many others might have been ad-
duced, perhaps, to very little profit. The idiomatical expressions
are daily giving way to a regnlar syntactical form, and growing into
disuse with the best masters.
A few general rules for pronunciation only have been given. From
all the attempts that have hitherto been made, it does not appear
that any adequate idea of it can be conveyed in writing. The ear
cannot be properly formed without the assistance of a good speaker*
Throughout the whole composition, the Author's chief aim has been
to unite ease and simplicity with accuracy and precision. That he
has sometimes said too little where more was required, and some-
times too much where less would have been sufficient, he does not
take npon himself to assert. That he has sometimes failed through
negligence, and many times through ignorance, he has also great rea-
son to fear. His daily avocations left him but little time for study,
and his want of a better acquaintance with the English language
may have subjected htm to many inaccuracies in his style, and some-
times, perhaps, to palpable improprieties.
The author cheerfully embraces this opportunity of making his
most grateful acknowledgments to the Public, for the favourable re-
ception given to the former editions of this Grammar, and, in general.
VI FRSPACE*
to all his other works : while he is perfectly sensible of the oBIk
gatioD, he is also sensible that much indulgence was required to
justify the favours he has already received, either as a teachxr or
as an author* That generous indulgence he again solicits for their
acceptance in this new edition, and begs to assure them, that, in
every situation of life, it will be his constant care, as well as bis
highest ambition, to deserve the flattering encouragement he has
met with in this country, and never forget the obligations already
conferred.
In this edition the errors in the former publications are carefully
corrected, the several expressions which did not so well please in the
course of practice, have been altered, and every improvement added,
that could tend to facilitate the attainment of the French language.
It having been suggested, by some gentlemen, to whose judgment the
Author pays the greatest deference, that the irregular verbs, being
arranged in alphabetical order, in the body of the book, would be a
considerable improvement to the work, and facilitate the progress of
the scholar, this is done in the present edition* The primitives of
the irregular verbs are conjugated at length, and at the end of each
are given their several compounds, with large exercises, both upoct
the primitives and compounds.
Alfrtd'Houit Academy^ CamberwelU
CONTENTS.
AN Alphabetical Arrangement of Irregalar Verbs • . xti
An Explanation of the Abbreviations . . • • 11
French Alphabet 12
SECT. I.
OfOrammar • 13
Of the French Alphabet ib.
Of Vowels — Diphthongs — Accents — Kinds of £ • • • 14
Of Diseresis — Cedilla — Apostrophe .••••• 16
Alphabetical list of French words haTiDg their initial k mate • ib»
Variations in the pronunciation of Consonants • • .17
Kinds of words 18
General Explanation of their nse 19
SECT. II.
Of Nouns 20
Of Articles . . .21
Of the Definite, Partitire and Indefinite Articles ... 22
Of Genders and Numbers • 23
Creneral Rules for the formation of the Plural Number . 24
OfCases 2«
Of the Declension of Nouns 27
Declension of the Article Definite Le^ (the) before Nouns mas-
culine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated • • 28
Declension of the Article Definite La^ (the) before nouns fem-
inine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated . . Hf,
Declension of the Article Definite L* (the) for both Genders,
before nouns beginning with a Vowel, or an h not aspirated 29
Recapitulation of the Article Definite t6.
Rules for the proper use of the Definite Article with Exercises 30
Declension of the Article Partitive ' ..... 38
Rules and Exercises upon this Partitive • . • . 39
Declension of the Article Indefinite 41
Rules and Exercises on this Indefinite . • • . ib.
Declension of (/n, m. Une^ f. a or an 48
Rules and Exercises on this Article • . • • . t6.
Of Noun^ Adjective ........ 50
Of the Gender and Number of Adjectives . . • . t&.
Declension of Nouns Adjective 53
Rules and Exercises upon Adjectives ib»
The Place of an Adjective in a Sentence .... 56
Of Adjectives which precede their Substantives . . . tfr.
Of Adjectives which come after their Substantives . . 57
Roles and Exercises upon these Adjectives • .68
Vm CONTENTS*
or the Degrees of Comparison 60
Rules with Exercises upon the Degrees of Comparison . 61
Of Numbers 67
Rules and Exercises upon these Cardinal Numbers . • 68
Of the Ordinal Numbers 71
Rules and Exercises upon the Ordinal Numbers . . 72
Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the Preced-
ing Rules 74
SECT. III.
Of Pronouns 81
Of Pronouns Personal 82
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .... 83
Observations on the Pronouns Jt and Jtfot\ Tu and Toi^ II
and Luiy tU and Eux .85
Exercises upon the Preceding Observations ... 86
■ 87
8»
92
ih.
99
100
104
106
110
111
Of Conjunctive Pronouns and their Declensions
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .
Of Particles Relative or Supplying Pronouns en, y, and It
Rules and Exercises upon these Supplying Pronouns •
Of Pronouns Possessive, and their Declensions
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns .
Of Pronouns Demonstrative ,••••.
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . •
Of Pronouns Relative
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns
Of Pronouns Interrogative .116
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . . . • ih.
Of Pronouns Indefinite .119*
Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns . . • . 120
Reca]^itulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the Pronouns 13S
SECT. IV.
Of Verbs and their different Sorts 142
Conjugation of Verbs and Moods ...... 144
Tenses 147
Tenses of the Indicative Mood 148
Simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood .... ih.
Compound Tenses of the Indicative Mood .... 153>-
Tenses of the Subjunctive or Conjunctive Mood, and their
Compounds 157
Numbers and Persons . 159
Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb .^votr, to have . . . 161
Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etrt^ to be • • • 163*
Rules and Exercises on the two preceding Auxiliary Verbs . 166
Promiscuous Exercises upon the Compound Tenses of these
Auxiliary Verbs 169
CONTENTS. IZ
Rales and Examples for using these Verbs Interrogatively, kc, 170
Pronaiscuous Exercises on Rules of Interrogation, &c. . . 172
Remark on the Verb £fre, to be 174
First Conjugation in «r, as in Parl-er 175
Important Observation upon the repetition of Verbs, &ۥ
see N. B 179
Exercises on this Conjugation . • . . • .181
Exercises on the Compound Tenses 183
Second Conjugation, in tr, as in Pun-tr . . . .184
Exercises on this Codjugation 187
Third Conjugation, in croir, as in rec-crofV . . . .190
Exercises on this Conjugation • . . • p . 193
Fourth Conjugation, in re, as in Vend-r« . . . .197
Exercises on this Conjugation 200
Recapitulatory Exercises on the Regular Verbs of the Four Con-
jugations . • 203
Promiscuous Exercises on the Compound Tenses, of the pre-
ceding Conjugations 206
Conjugations of the Passive Verbs 208
Of Neuter Verbs generally • ib.
Of Reflective Verbs . 214
Model of Conjugations for the reflected Verbs of the Four Con-
jugations 219
Exercises on the Reflective Verbs 222
Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation 227
Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation .... 230
Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the First and Second Conju-
gations 235
Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of tb e Second Conjugation 238
Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs . . . . 243
Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation 245
Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds 251
Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation .... 264
Observation upon Jlfaj^, and Mighty when used as a Verb pr
Auxiliary 259
Observation upon the words Willy and Wouldy when used as a
Verb or an Auxiliary . 265
Exercises upon Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation . 266
Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation . . . .271
Exercises upon the preceding Irregular Verbs, and their Com-
pounds 281
Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation 284
Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds 296
Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Coniugation 302
Exercises on the preceding Verbs, and their Compounds • 313
Of the Impersonal Verbs 319
Conjugation of the Impersonal Verbs ib»
Exercises on the Impersonal Verbs • • • . • 321
Upon the Impersonal Verb y avoiVy • • • • 322
Exercises on the preceding Verb • 323
Remarks on the general Pronoun On • • • • 324
Szercises on the preceding Pronoun, &c ib»
CONTENTS.
Remarks on ttie Impersonal Verb Falloir^ to be needful, rc^
qnisite, necessary ..... 332
Exercises on the preceding Impersonal Verb • • 334
Additional Remarks on the general Pronoun On . • 337
Exercises on the preceding Pronoun .... 338
Recapitulatory Exercises on the Impersonal Verbs • 339
SECT. V.
Of Participles ...... 342
Rules and Exercises on the Participles Active and Passive 342 to 352
SECT. VI.
Of Indeclinable Parts of Speech .... 353
Of Adverbs ....... t6.
Table of Adverbs . 354, 357, 359, 361, 363, 365, 368, 369
Observation on the Adverb Ou . . . .370
Table of Adverbs continued . . 373, 376, 378, 379, 382
SECT. VII.
Of Prepositions . . . . . .383
Prepositions governing the Genitive or Ablative Cases . 383, 384
Exercises on these Prepositions .... 385
Prepositions governing the Dative Case . . • 387
Exercises on these Prepositions .... ib.
Prepositions requiring the Accusative Case . . 388
Exercises upon these Prepositions .... 389
Observations on some Prepositions, and Exercises upon them,
Move^ 392 ; Jit^ 393, 394 ; By^ 395, 396, 397 ; For^ 398 ;
From^ 399 ; /n, 400, 401 ; On^ or Upon^ 402 ; Oter, 403 ;
^^i/^, 404, 405, 407, 408 ; Without, . . .409
SECT. VIII.
Of Conjunctions . . . . . .411
Conjunctions requiring^ the Infinitive Mood, and Exercises
upon them ...... ib.
Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Indicative Mood, and
Exercises upon them in continuation • . .412
Conjunctions requiring the Future Tense . . 417
Remark on the Conjunction Que, preceding an Infinitive or
Subjunctive Mood ...... 418
CONTENTS. XL
Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Subjunctive Mood,«nd
fixercises upou them . , . . . . 420, 421
Remarks on the Conjunctions Si and Que . • 424
Ezeicises on the preceding Conjunctions . • . 425
Verbs requiring the Conjunction Que, with the following Verb
in the Subjunctive Mood . • • . 427
Exercises on this and the preceding Rules • . . 428
Observation on the Verb Votdoir^ to wil], to wish, • 431
Conjunctions Qin, Que or Dont^ requiring the following Verb
in the Subjunctive Mood, and Exercises upon them . 433
SECT. IX.
Of Intenections ...... 435
Table of Interjections . • • . • ib*
Exercises on the preceding Interjections • . . 436
Remarks on the Particles Z>e, a, Pour^ when not expressed,
and Exercises upon them .... 437
Remarks on the Particle De, when it is to be expressed, and
"Exercises upon it • • « . . . 439
Remarks on the Particle d, when it is to be expressed, and
Exercises upon it . . . • . 441, 442
Important remarks on the Particles i)e, ^ and Pow^ with
Exercises .•••.•• 444
SECT. X.
Idiomatical Expressions . • . • • 445
Of the Verb Jtvoify to bare, and Exercises npon it . 445, 446
Of Etrtf to be, and Exercises upon it • . • 448
Of Faire^ to make, or to do, and Exercises upon it • 449, 450
Of different Verbs, and Exercises upon them . 451, 452, 453, 454
Genera] and Promiscuous Exercises • . . 455
Of the Understanding of Languages • • . . ib.
Of Study ....... 456
Indolence Characterised ..... 458
SECT. XI.
Scheme for parsing a French Sentence . • . 458
Treatise upon French Versification • . '* 461
ALPHABBTICAL ARRANGEMENT
IBBEGULAB VERBS,
WITH REFERENCES TO THE PLACES IN WHICH THEY, OR SlMIUm
VERBS, ARE CONJUGATED IN THIS GRAMMAR ;
WITH REMARKS.
English*
To Acquire • • • •
Avoid,^ or Shua
Abstain •
Attain to •
Anticipate
Assault • »
be Able .
Absolve .
Abate • •
Rabattre • •
Acknowle<lge,or? R.^^nnoitre ,
know again .3
Accrue. Accroitre • •
Appear Paroitre • •
A.
French. Conjugated like
Paye.
Acqu^rir • • • ••••••• 330
Fuir» 238
S'Absteoir • • ^
Parvenir 4 . . > Tenir • • • 246
Pr^venir • . . 3
Assaillir • • • Tressaillir 247 2^P
Pouvoir^ ... . • 259
Absoudre ... 271
. Battre • . . 272
>Connoitre 278
1 Eviter^ to avoid, and assultr^ to assist, are regular verbs of tbe
First Conjugation.
a See Pret. p. 305, and Imperfect of Sabjanct. p. 306.
3 See p. 259 and 260.
ttg^tkf French.
Admit • .^ <
Anoint • « .
Sorl^ire
Admettre
Ctyt^u%attA like
Faire •
Mettre .
Craindre
290
294
284
*r™S'.".°":^o«prendr.
Abstract
Assist^ . • •
Agree • # •
be Acquaintcki
with . ^ •
be Afraid » •
faU Asleep .^ •
fall Asleep again
Prendre
Traire •
Courit •
Mentir •
605
se9
232
239
Abstraire
Secourir
Consentir
' > Connoitre 278
Craiodre •».••» 284
S'Endormir . j
Se Rendorniirj
Dormir. 234
D6mentir .
Appartenir
Deve»Jr* .
Convenh* «
Sarvcnir •
Baltre . ,
ReliBtire •
Rabattre •
Braire'
[ I BouiHir^
» Mentir •
^Tenix .
.>Battre •
231
239
246
279
274
l^d^Boil . • « . • BooHJif
Boil again •» • • RebouilliF
Belie • * • .
BeloAg • • • •
Become of • • •
Become, fit, &c.
Befall ft •> • *
Beat • .« • •
Beat again' • •
Beat dowA (abate)
Bray ^ f * •
Believe • < . •
Bake, or Boil, of«l
feu Engliahed to > Cuire • •
1 See Remark, p. 303. 2 See Note 1 in preceding p&re.
3 See p. 232. 4 See Note *, p. 249. 5 See p. 274 and t75.
6 Bdtir^ td btnld, and Betnnir^ to baniflh, are regnlars cf the
8e«oad Cooj ligation.
2
Croire •••••» 285
• >Cofidisire 276
AN ALPHABETICAL ARRAHOEMENT Of
EngKsh.
ToBanish*
be Born ^ . ,
be Born again
To Conquer
Concur
Frenck.
Proscrire •
Naitre ^ ..
Renattre •
C.
Conqu^rir
Concourir
Consent • •
Cover • M .
Co?er again •
Contain * •
Conte • • •
Come back
Clothe • • •
Come to, Befall
Clear a table •
Conclude
pa . . .
nir . . . >
• • • I
inir . . .J-
Conjugated Wee
• Ecrire • SS9
1 1 Naitre • 302
. Aeqwf rir 330
. Courir « 333
•VMcntir- 339
•}0ffrip
341
Tenir • 346
Servir
345
375
Conduire 376
Consentir ..
Couvrir •
Recouvrir •
Contenir •
Venir*
Revenir
VStir
Survenir
DeAservir
Conclure »
Construct, Build . Construire
Circumcise • • Circoncire^
Chance, or Fall out echoir* • •
Contradict • • Contredir^
Curse • • • • Maudire •
a^petr: : :lc»"'W"-ic«.».an.
Complain • • • Se Plaindre • )
Come tolife a8>^j^^^ 2gg
from an egg, &c» 3
Counterfeit • • Contrefaire • Faire . 3S0
Compromise . . Compromettre> j^^^^^^ ^ 23^
Commit • • • CAnmeUre •>
Chido .... Reprendrp . Prendre 305
1 See Note 6 it 'preceding page. 2 See Remark, p. 249.
Q Sea ParUciple Pass. p« 275. 4 See Participle Act. fc Pass. p. 257.
5 See Note, p. 287. ' 6 See p. 288. »
Confire •
D^cboir
; J Dire
377
357
386
384
THE IRREOULAA VCiUlS*
English*
French.
Conjugated
likt
Sll
To Conquer
Convince ,
, • • Vaincrc* . .
. • Convaincre .
D.
> • • Discourir • .
Yaincre
To Discourse *
Courir •
238
Die . .
be Dying .
, . . Mourir . ,
. • Se Mourir «
Mourir •
240
Detain . ,
Disagree <
. . D^tenir . ,
• . Disconvenir .
^Tenir .
246
Discover *
• . • Decouvrir
Offrir .
241
Distribute .
. . • D^partir . .
» Mentir •
239
Dissolve ,
• . . Dissoodre* •
Absoudre
271
Drink . ,
» . . Boire* • •
» • > •
273
Debate . <
► . . Debattre
> Battre •
272
Decay • .
. . . D^choir .
» • • •
257
Do an ill 06
Ice • Desservir •
. Servir .
345
Deduct .
» . . Deduire .
, ^
Destroy
Do aver, wil
tar, &c.
. • • Detruire • «
^'°;^^; J Enduire .
• VCondoire
276
Decrease
Disappear
, • . Decroitre . ,
» • « Disparottre .
' ' Connohre 376
Describe
, . • D^crire
. Ecrire .
289
Do . .
► , . Faire . . .
>
Do again <
. • . Refaire • ,
.S- Faire .
290
Defeat . <
. ... Defaire . .
s
Dissemble
. • • Feindre • <
>
Dye . . .
» • • Teindre • 1
. > Craindre
384
Draw, Desij
;n • Peindre • ,
s
Defer, Put
Deliver up
^^' ^''{Remettre .
. Mettre .
294
Displease
• . . Deplaire .
. Plaire ..
304
Distract
. • • Distraire • 1
E.
• • . Entretenir
. Traire .
309
To Entertain
Tenir .
246
Exclude
» • . Ezclure^ • ,
Condure
276
1 See Note, p. S
11. S See p. 87&
3 See N. B. p. S74.
' 4 8«e p. S90.
To Exact . .
Enjoin .• I
Enclose • <
Encompass
Elect . .
fxtract • .
To Fetch ,
Flee, or Fly
• £uf&lre •
• Enjoindre •
' > Ei^ceindr^
• Elire • •
• Extraite •
. Querh*
. Fuii^ . .
Feel ..'... Sentir . .
Foresee, or havea7 p^™^^*:-
forcsightof . .^i'^essentir-
Foresee . . . Pr^voit^ • «.
Fic* or fit weH * Scoir* . .
Fight • • • - Combattre
Fear . « • • Craindre •
Fori;;e • • ' • • Contraindre
Feign • • « • f*jeindre •
Forbid • • • • Interdjre «
Fo^f^^U • . . PrMir^ .
JFall out, pr Hap.]^^^j^ ^
pen • • • ' • » _
Feed, os'Qr^ze
Follow . » •
Follpw ficom
Fine-fhraw .
To Go . . . .*
Go away . .
Gather • • •
Gather together
Go out t* • •
Frir^ . .
Paltry . .
S.uivTp • 4
'SP^sjaivre
Rentr^ire *
G.
Allfitr • •
S'en Aller
Cueinir
Retueillir •
JSontir • •
1 See p. 231. 2 See p. £38, S39«
4, -Bee the ^ri) To Beccope^ A^,
0 See Note, p. 287. 7 See p. 2§7.
Co79JmgBieS> like
Faire • ^90
284
• Craindre
Lire «
Traipe •
Acqu^riF
9d3
309
230
238
Meirtir • 239
Voir .
Asseoir •
Battre .
I
2e3
254
272
Craindre 284
286
257
... 292
CoDfiO)tre 278
Tr^ire.
308
309
||Cucillir
• MeMir *
3 See p. 264.
227
233
299
fta^ IftRBMLAE TAHaS*
EngHsh*
ToGrow . .
Grow less •
Grow again
Graze • •
Glitter « .
Glimpse, or
have a giimpa
Grind • • • •
Grind again • •
Give other clothes
to>
pse of 3
Canjugatid like
^Connotlre 278
Conduire 276
Voir . 263
Gird Ceindre
H.
FrtMh*
Croitre .
Decroitre •
Recroitre .
Paitre . .
Reiuire^ ,
Entrevoir
Moudre
Remoudre
Revetir 250
• Craindrc 284
-.1
Moudre 295
To Hold . .
Happen unex-
pectedly
Hear •
Hatch .
Hurt .
Humour
► Tenir « ,
> Survenir .
. Ouir« . •
, Eclorr^ •
Nuire* • •
Complaire
Hold on(&^s tobgue Se Taire
Tenir
Conduire
Plaire •
Hear of
To Incur .
Impart •
Infringe
Intervene
« Invest •
Interdict
Inscribe ,
Induce •
Instruct
Introduce
Include •
1 See p. 293.
4500 p. 30a
5^PPi!rf,^!.^^*? Prendre
5
246
242
288
276
304
305
i nouvelles
I.
Encourir
D^partir
Contrevenir k
Intervenir
Revetir 250
Dire . 286
Ecrire • 289
w
Coorip
Mentir
Tenir
232
239
246
Interdire^ .
Inscrire
Induire
Instruire^ •
Introduire •
Comprendre
2 See p. 24S.
& See Note, p. 287.
Conduire 276
. Prendre 305
3 See p. 288.
▲K ALPJMNKflQM'
or
English.
French.
1*9 Jut,iei oiity a (crm ^
in Arcbiteotnre VSoillii^
only ... .3
Join • • • • • Toindre
CanjugaUd like
Page
Tres9aHIir.^47
Crainchre S84
. . , f4S
"Know somehpd y cOoBBdlkre ••? r'^^^r.^*--* o-rft
r«again
Knofv 6«iiiAthing fiuxoif® • .•
L.
To Lie " Meati-r
seo
f;ive one ^e Lie • Dementir •
^ead • • •
I^ead again
licarn • . •
Ijeap for x. •
Laugh • • •
Live . .• •
I Men tip • ^9
Prendre
.Afiprendre
TiTibs^lir •
Rijce . .
Viiifre . •
P05
347
307
312
|"Sr. :ST»ir
246
• • I Mouvoip 258
'i^'o Maintain .
Move • • • • Mouvoir
Move, OP Stir up ^tnouvoir
Mi8t^e,or be de-> M^coonoitre, Connottre ^78
ceired . . . $ op Sc Meppendre, Prendre 305
Make . . . . Paire . . .^
Make up again • Refaipe . .vFaire . ^00
9Iiinic • . • • Contrefaipe O
. . •• Tpatpe • • • ... '308
N.
91i>k
To make a greapt
Naise • •
.i
1 Seea>.'^48,.MB^N. B. p. 24»*
a See p» 275.
Bpurrc? 276
a. See Notes, -^.Sai,
I
Q*
EnfiUih.
/"nnA, Canjl^g^i^JUu^
TovOveft«k9 ..
»•
. Alt^sAre ,. ..
CruMNice B$t
Oflfer , ,.
Open • «
Pbtam . .
••
••
. 08rir i
.. C^ivjr !
Offrir . ^41
-•
.. Qbtm^W .. ..
Tenir .^ (246
do an ill offi
Qe
. Jie^n»rir.. .•
.Sewr ., &A5
Open as an
pystef M^fi^^ • •
. ^ . 988
Outlaw . .
*9
.. Pro«»rye *• .
Eprirf ^f $89
Omit . «
»•
.• iimAVi^ •• .•
Mettne . i394
Outlive ^ .
«a
«• "PHUVH^IP .• .•
Vivff ^ SIS
Pblige . .
•
' * Astreindce*
P.
► . Pn^venir • .;
• Provenir .. . i
Ck^M^ &S4
To Prevent
Proceed
Tenvr • ;346
Frescribe
Proscribe
► . Preocrire .. . i
.• Proicrira • • <
Ecrire . ^89
Prevail . .
. Pr^vadoir*
Valoir . S61
Pwnide
. . Pourvoir* . .
Voir . 263
J^ulldown .
• Abattr^ . •
Battre • 272
"Preserve .
• Confire • •
. . . 277
Put out . .
• ^teiiid«e • . ]
)
Tretend
Paint •
. • Feindre .J
. . Peindre • • |
^Craipdre 284
Pity . .
. .4 Plaindre . .^
)
Part with
. • SeD^(are /
Fsrire . 290
Put . .
, . Mettr^ . /
Permit •
. • Perfoettre
Promise
. . ProoMttre.^ ,
>*Melftse « 1294
Put off .
ain
•|| Rcmetlre
Prejudice
Prepossess
• '] Pr^enir . •
Tenir • 246
Produce
. • Produire • •
Conduire 276
Pursue .
. • FouFsuivre .
Suivre • M8
Please •
• • Plaire » » •
» . » 304
1 ^e4>.j288.
2i
Grows obiolcte, p. 272.
S See p. 262.
4 See p. 264.
.5
See Note, p. 294.
1
^See:!fote, p. SpS.
AN ALPHAmmOAL AMUmEllSftT W
English.
To Require
fet Rid of
Lan
Ran to
Run o?er
have Recoarse to
R«n awaj
Retain •
Return •
Remember, or
Remind
Recollect
Relieve
Resent
Replj •
Repent
Roar
Resolve
Retract
Recant
Read .
Read ag^n
Remove
Resign
Rise . ) as
Revive \ flowers
Rebuke
Reduce
Restrain
Reach •
Revive •
Recover
To Succour
Sleep
make Sleep
1 See p. 238^230, Pret. and Imp.
3 See p. 275. ' 4 See p. 272.
R.
French*
Requ^rir.
Se Defaire
Courir
Accourir ••
Parcourir
•Recoorir •
Puir» . •
Retenir •
Revenir •
I Se Souvenir*
SeRessouvenir
Subveoir •
Ressentir •
. Repartir •
Se Repentir
Bruirc^
Resoudre*
j Se D^dire»
Lire • •
Retire • •
D^mettre •
Se Demettre
( Naitre
i Renaitre •
Reprcndre
R^dttire •
Restraindre
Atleindre •
I Revivre .
S.
Secourir •
Dormir
Endormir
Conjugated like
Pagft
Acqu^rir
Faire .
330
290
» Courir • S33
S38
>^Tenir • 246
Mentir . S39
Absondre
Dire .
Lire
Mettre •
275
271
293
294
Naftrc . 302
Prendre
Conduire
Craindre
Vivre .
Courir
Dormir
305
276
284
312
232
234
2 See Note t, p. 249.
5 See Note ^ p. ftVL
9
Suffer .
Serve .
Spfiport
Suit . .
Start, Startle
Stir up •
See • •
See again
Solve «
Sew ^ .
Stitch .
Sew ^gti\u
Sharpen
Sct^ut .
Set cut again
be Sensible of
Smell «
Strug|le
Sit dpw^i
Sit down 9gain
Supersede ^
Say . . ,
Say again ^
Sls^nder
Speak ill of
Shut, or close
Shilt, or •
Sgrrpuiul w.ith
walls, &c
Subscribe
Satisfy •
Shine
Sabnit •
Surpij«^
Smile
Fuir .
Soaffrjr
Servir .
$Q.tttet|ir
iPopvefiir
Traasaillir
^mouvoir
Voir .
Revoir
Souijre*
? Goyijre
Recoudre
EinoHdre
Partjr .
Repartir
R^S^entir
Seotir .
S<eP4bat(re
^sseok'
jS.eHasseoir
JMre .
I M^diie*
Clorre .
Souscrire
•Satisfaire
Luire^ .
Soumettre
Sorprendre
HSotti^ive
Ckmi^^i like
Page
Qffrjr , 241
^ - . 245
I Tenir • 24«
... 247
Mouvoir 258
I Voir ' . 263
Absoudre 271
V Coudre 280
Moudro 295
Mentir . 239
Battre . 1272
Asaoair 254
. . . 256
^Difie
286
^Clclorre 298
Ecrire . 289
Faire • sio
Cooddire 276
MelU>e . 294
Prendre 305
RlPe . 307
1 See pw 2701. •>
4S«eNot«,ii,}m,
3 ^i^.«a6.
10
AN ALfHABBTlCAL ARRAlfGElOBNTy icC.
EngKth.
To Seduce . .
Suffice, or •
beSofficieiit
Seem • »
Subtract
To Tell . . .
Tell again .
Transcribe
Turn out •
Transmit .
Take . .
Take again
Translate «
Throw down
To Unsew . • ' . •
Use^orRiakeiiseof
Uncover ^ . ..
Unsay ....
Undo ....
Undo again • .
Understand • *
Unlearn . . .
Undertake . •
French.
' S^duire ♦ ^
I Suffire\ .
Paroitre ,
Soustraire
T.
Dire ♦ .
Redire
Transcrirp
Demet(re •
Transmetire
Prendre
Reprendre
Traduire .
Abattre
U.
D^coudre .
Se Servir .
D^couvrir
Se D^dire*
D^faire
Red^faire ^
Comprendre
To Vanquish . . .
To Welcome . . .
be Worth . . •
Wisb,orbe Willing
Write • . . -
Write again . .
Whet ....
1 See p. 908.
3 See Note*, p. 311.
Conjugated like
Pas*
Conduire 276
Confire^ 277
Connoitre 273
Traire , 309
Dire . 286
Ecrire < S89
Mettre . 294
Prendre 605
Conduire 276
Battre . 272
:l
Cou^re
Servir .
Offrir .
Dire
Faire
280
245
241
286
290
305
Desapprendre > Prendre
Entreprendre )
V.
V^ncre 311
W.
Accueillir
Valoir .
Vouloir*
ecrire .
R^crire .
Emoudre
Cueillir
Ecrire .
Moudre
S See Note •, p. 287. ••
4Seep,S65,S66.
233
261
264
289
296
▲B XXFLAVATION OF THS j|BBR£YlAT101IS MMR PSB OF IH
THB FOLLOWING WOBK.
m. Nouo mascaline*
f* NoaD feminine.
pi. Plural.
adj. NouD adjective.
pro. Pronoun.
V. Verb. ^
p. act. Participle active.
p. p. Participle passive.
p. Preposition.
adv. Adverb.
c. Conjunction.
int. Interjection.
*<^ The English word tftat-ltas ibis mark
underneath, is not to be expressed
in French.
The figures, % % % &c. direct to the at'rangement of the
words it) the French sentence.
Two words having the same figure are expressed bj
the French word placed under one of them.
Two or three words between parentheses { ), are ex-
pressed by the French under them, or have been
previously expressed.
FRENCH ALPHABET.
Roman Letteif.
rtdj«
ArtUtft
OtdPro. JVew Pro.
A
a
A
a
ah ah
B
b
B
h'
ta^ 64
C
c
C
6
ttay he and cc
D
d
D
d
day de
E
c
E
€ ■
ee a
F
f
F
f
^i fi
6
g
G
S
jay* ghe^nd gt
H
h
H
h
ash lit
I
i
I
i
te ee
J
i
J
J
jet* je*
K
K
k
kah ktth
L
1
L
I
sU h
M
m
M
n^
ttHtn ffvt
n
It
IT
n
cHtl fit
c
6
O
0
0 0
p
P
P
P
pay pe
Q
q
%
9
&ut . k€
R
r
r
uirr fc
S
8
s
8
iS9 se and sft
T
t
T
t
tay U
•if uf
U
a
U
U
V
V
V
t>
vay ve
X
X
X
X
eeks ke-se^ndze
Y
y
Y
y
ee graik ee graik
Z
z
Z
2
zaid ze
* The two consonants g and j are sounded in the Alphabet like s
iOi pUarure or 8 in asure*
f U has no similar sound in English, and must be learned from a
master.
X In the new pronunciation e after each consonant is sounded as
in the English word barbet^ faintly sounding the r.
A PRACTICAL
FRENCH GRAMMAR.
SECTION I.
GRAMMAR is the art of speaking at)d writing m any
language with propriety; or, it is the art of rightly ex-
pressing our thoughts by words.
Grammar is of two kinds, general and particular.
Universal grammar considers language in itself, explains
the principles which are alike common to every tongue,
and distinguishes, with precision, between those par-
ticulars which are essential and those which are only
accidental. Particular grammar applies these common
principles to a particular language, and furnishes cer-
tain rules and observations which are, either mediately
or immediately, deducible from its common principles.
A grammar of the French tongue must be formed
agreeably to the established usage, and those particu-
lar modes of expression, to which custom has given its
sanction. It has therefore for its object, in common
with all other grammars, the consideration of letters,
syllables, words, sentences, &c.
ALPHABET; — is composed of twenty^five letters,
of which words are formed ; five of them, a, e, t, o, ti,
are distinguished by the name of vowels, which form a
perfect sound of themselves. The twenty other letters
*» c, d,/, g, ft, j, A, /, m, n,p, 7, r, 5, <, r, ar, y, z, are call-
ed consonants, and cannot be pronounced but when
joined with vowels, except y, which has often the soiiind
of double I, and of which some make a sixth vowel.
14
VOWELS, three sorts ; — Simple, a, e, t, o, u, which
are subdivided into short and l^tig, the sound of which
is more prolonged and deeper.
Compound, of two or three simple vowels, as at, e«, ot,
ttt, au, eu, ou^ cb, <bu : ai has the sound of e mute in/ais'
ant^* and the sound of e close in je /tVat, as well as in
all the verbs in the first person singular of the fature.
Nasal, when they are joined to m or n, and when
they form only one sound, afs an, am^ en, em, m, tm, atn,
ein.
DIPHTHONG j— Is the union of several vowels, the
pronunciation of which causes two sounds to be beard by
a single impulse of the voice. JKeti, yeuxj niais^ pion^
tftit'e, mien^ are diphthongs : yet, Caen, tau^ paon^ craie,
.are not so, because they are pronounced Can^d^pan, erL
ACCENTS, three sorts;— The acute', the grave \
and the circumflex % 'sesve to modify the sound of the
vowels; the office of the latter is to render long the
vowels which are affected by it ; thus pronounce d^ ^, f,
£, tl, by a greater opening of the mouth, almost as if it
were aa^ ee, n, oo, u?4. It is thus we write 6gt. instead
of aagt; this is also the reason why it is placed over
the vowels that were formerly followed by an ^, which
has been dropped, since it is no longer pronounced ; as
in asne, beste^ in which the suppression of the «, requires
that we should write dne^ biU^ in order to shew that d
and 6 are long. ,
KINDS of E, five ; — two kinds, MuU : isU — One
whAse dull sound is almost null in hrave^ encore^ which
are pronounced no otherwise than brav, encor.
2d.— -The other, the sound of which, although ob-
scure, can be prolonged, nearly as the sound of et<, in^e,
me, fe, revetitV^ redemander*
3d. — Close, by the txecenf Acute^ in bortU ; also ez is
equivalent to 6^ as in voyez^ lisez^ ttnichezj &c.
♦ 3«e JPfltrc, page 290.
15
4 A. — Open, by the acunl Grave, in Mces, sucoii, niJU^
which accent is suppressed id greffe, sans cesse, abbesse*
Bih* — ^Vert open, by the accent Circumflex, in itre, iitt,
tempite, which were formerly pronounced and written*
estre, teste, &c.
Middling, followed by a double consonant, and the
sound of which is between that of 6 close and e open, in
maisonnette, musette, pcukttem
The DIJIRESIS, (••)— Which is placed over the
vowels e, t, 0, and causes them to be pronounced separ-
ately from the preceding vowel as in poete, ateul, Sail,
and may be ranked among the accents.
The CEDILLA, (,)— A little dash, which is put un-
der the c, is also a sort of accent, since it serves to
modify the hard pronunciation which it would other-
wise have before the vowels a, o, u, and to change it
into that of 5; it is thus we pronounce it in fran^ois,
fagon, regu.
The APOSTROPHE, O ;— Is only a comma put over
theplace which the vowel e or a ought to occupy, which
is suppressed when the word following begins with a
vowel or an h not aspirate f thus, instead of le esprit,
» AN ALPHABETICAL LIST
of such French Words as have their initial h mute.
HABILE,
habilement,
habilet^,
habiller,
babillement,
habit,
kabiter,
habitable,
habitant,
habitude,
habitnel^
habituer,
haleine, «
]iame9on.
CLEVER
cleverly
cleverness
to clothe
dress
a coai
to inhabit
inhabitable
inhabitant
ctutom
habitual
to iue
hreath
n fishing hook
harmonie,
harmony
hebdomadaire,
weekly
H^bra'iqae,
Hebraick
H^breu,
Hebrew
h^catombe.
an Wecaton^
b6gire
h^lat !
hegif
alas J
Helicon,
Helicon
heliotrope,
turn-sol
hemisphere,
hemisphere
bemisticbej
hemistich
hemorrhagie.
bloody-fluac
hemorrhoides,
piles
hepatique,
hepatic^
16
la amUtian^ and U homnu^ we must pronounce and
write Pesprit^ Pambition^ Phomme. But when the h is
heibage,
furbage^ pasture
hdpital,
hospital
herbe,
herb or grass
horizon,
horizon
herboriste.
herbalist
horloge.
a town clock
h6r6ditairc,
hereditary
borloger,
watch-maker
b^r^sie,
heresy
bormis,
except
h6retique, '
heretic
horoscope.
horoscope
heritage,
inheritance
horreur,
horror
hunter,
to inherit
horrible,
horrid
fa^ritier,
an heir
horriblement,
horriblif
heritidre,
mn heiress
bospitalier.
hospitable
bermine.
ermine
hospitality,
hospitality
hermite,
mn hermit
hostie.
host or victim
hermitage,
hermitage
hostility,
hos{ility
b^roioe,*
«n heroine
bdte.
landlord
h^roique,
heroical
hdtesse,
landlady
h^roisme, <*
heroism,
hotel, ..ml
\ottl or great house
h6sjter,
to hesitate
h6telier.
inn'keeper
hesitation,
hes^iiation
h^tellerie.
an inn
heur^
luck
buile,
oil
heure,
hour
huilier,
oil-cruet
beureux,
happy
huissier.
usher ©r tip staff
heureusement,
happily
huitre.
oyster
b^xagone,
mn hexagon
humain,
humane
b^xamltre,
hexameter
bumainement.
humanely
hiatus,
hiatus^ a gap
humaniser.
to civilise
bier,
yesterday
humanity,
hwmnity
hi^roglypbe,
hirondelle,
hieroglyphic
humble.
humbU
a swalloic
humblement,
hum>6ty
bistoire,
history
humectation,
^ moistening
historien,
historian
bumecter,
to moisten
historique,
- . historical
humeur.
humour
histrion,
a buffoon
bumide,
damp^ moist
biver,
winter
humidity.
humidity
biverner,
to winter
humiliant.
mortifying
holocauste,
burnt saciijice
humiliation, ^
humiliation
hombre, (jeu)
ombre
humilier,
to humble
bomelie,
an homily
humility
humility^
homicide,
an homicide
hyacinthe.
hyacinth
hommage,
homage
bjrdre,
hydra
bom me.
mMn
hydromel.
mead
bonn^te.
horust
hydropique,
hydropic
bonnetemeni,
honestly
bydropisie.
dropsy
honnStete,
honesty
hymen,
hynun
bonncur,
honour
hymne
hymn
honorable,
honorable
hyperbole,
hyperbole
honoraire,
honorary
bypocondre.
hypocondriac
boBorer,
to honour
bypocrisie,
hypocrisy
* The /i in all this familj is pnl^ aspirated in hiro9.
17
aspirate, the article rematng entire ; . we must: not saj
Ph4roSf but pronounce k b6ros^ du hiroi^ au hirot.
VARUTIQN IN THE PRONUNCIATION OF
CONSONANTS ;— C is pronounced hard like k before
the vowels a, o, ti, in cficardt^ cube ; like s before e, t, in
eiciti. There are even some words in which it is pro-
nounced like g, as in second^ &c. 6 is pronounced hard
before a, o, u; likej*, before e, t; when we wish to
modify its pronunciation before a, o, w, an e is placed
after it, as in, il gagea, nageoire; when on the contrary
we wish to have it pronounced hard before e, t. an u
is placed after it, as in guirir, guide* H is of two sorts,
aspirated as in hair^ envahir ; then the consonants bj
which it is preceded are not sounded ; it is called mute^
when it is not pronounced at all, as in homme^ hcrc^nti
The h of h6ro8 is aspirate, that of its derivatives is not
so. Q when not the last letter of a word, as in ctn^, is
never used without being followed by ,ti, which gives it
the pronunciation of A; as in qui^ qutlconque; yet in
several words u has retained its ancient sound of ou^
and then qu is pronounced like A:ou, as in aqualiquiy (qua-
iion* S is pronounced hard in salut^ sinai ; but between
two vowels, it takes the pronunciation of z, as in vUtr,.
raison^ &c. 7* followed by t and another vowel, is pro-
nounced like c, as in partial, parlitU portion ; but if ti is
preceded by s or a:, or if it is at the beginning of a word,
it is pronounced hard, as in tirer, que^tion^ mixtion* X\s
pronounced like cs \n fixer, iaxer ; likegz in examen, ex-
hypocrite, hypocrite
hjpoth^que, mortgage
bjpoth^quer, to mortgage
hypothese, hyj/otketis
hysope, hysop
hyst^nqne, hysierie
In a familiar discourse, the letter h is not aspiraled in the follow-
ing worcle, Tiz. Hanovrt^ Hollande, and Hbngrte, when either of them
is preceded by the particle de ; for though we always say U Hanovre,
la Hollande and la Hongrie, yet it is usual to say and write VEleetorat
d^Hanotrt, la Reine d*Hongrie^ la ioUe d* Hollande, and the like. As
to other national and proper names, the initial k is aspirated in most
of them ; as in Hainaut^ Hamhourgh, Havanne, Menri^ &c. but in
Hamilton^ Har courts Hector, Helene, Hereule, Hirodi, H&mk^i, Hor-
ate, and Hyppolite, it is mute.
2« '
18
ample ; and like 8 in fiXfi dix^ soixanie. Ch is generally
pronounced like sh, as in chat / yet it is pronounced of-
ten like k : Christy orchestre^ bacchante^ are examples*
/J/», (hjph^ are pronounced like r, <,/, in rAuwe, theme^
philosopher which are pronounced rttme, teme^ Jilosofe.
A SYLLABLE, whether connposed of one or more let*
ters, requires, in the pronunciation, no more than a sin-
gle impulse of the voice : ex* 6a, ms, moi^ &c.
A WORD may consist of one syllable, or of many com-
pacted into one meaning ; for, a word is the smallest
part of speech which is in itself signi6cant : ex. mon,
my ; Uvre, book, &c.
A SENTENCE, or FBRASE, Is an assemblage of words
arranged in their proper order, forming a sense either
more or less complete : ex.
Je suis votre ami, I am your friend.
JHcrivis hier a voire tantey 1 yesterday wrote to your
aunt.
A PERIOD ma3^ consist of two or three sentences join-
ad together, so that they depend on one another to
form a'complete sense. Each of the sentences forming
part of a period is called a member of the period : ex.
Lea grands hommes soni rarest .Great men are scarce ; we
on doit lea respecteVy et Pon ought to respect them,
devroit ioujours 'iravailUr a and constantly endeav-
se rendrejemblable a eux. our to resemble them.
A DISCOURSE, or SPEECH, IS an assemblage of sentences
(or phrases) and periods, joined together, and arranged
according to the rules of the language.
KINDS OF WORDS.
There afe, in the French tongue, nine different sorts
of words, which are generally called the nine parts of
speech, viz.
1. L^Article, Article.
2. Le Nom et Adjectif, Noun and Adjective.
3* Le Pkonom, Pronoun.
4. Lfi Verbe, Verb.
19
5. Le Participe, Participle.
6. L'Apverbe, Adverb.
7. La Preposition, Preposition.
8. La Conjonction, CoNJUNCTioif.
9. 1^'Interjection, Interjection.
Five of them are declinable ; that is to say, the radi-
cal part of the word remaining the same, the other
parts, but especiailj the termination, will admit of sev*
eral variations. These declinable words are, the arti-
cle, noun and adjective, pronoun^ verb, and participle.
The four last, as thej never vary their terminations,,
are therefore called indeclinable.
GENERAL EXPLANATION.
The articles are certain minute words, which, joined
to nouns, determine the extent of their signification,
and whicli, in French, denote their gender, number,
and case, corresponding to the English words, <Ae, of
the^from ihe^ and to the. These in French, are
ie, /a, hs, The
Dc, dw, de la^ des, Of or from the.
j3, ate, a ia, awx, To the.
The NOUN, in^general, is a word which is used to
name or qualify every thing which is the object of dis-
course: ex.
•jBon, Good.
Petit, Little.
. Mauvais^ Bad, &c.
Papier^ Paper.
Plume J Pen.
Pairij Bread.
The PRONOUN is a word commonly substituted in the
place of the noun, to avoid its too freqiaent repetition :
ex.
J^ai vu M. voire pcre^ it 1 saw your father," and
lui ai parli^ spoke to ihtm.
In this instance the word /m, to him, is put to avoid
the repetition of the word ptri^ father.
The VERB is a word which either expresses^ the state
of the subject, or an action done by the subject, or the
action received or suficred by the subject : ex.
3§
JHon frtft est molade^ My brottier t^ ilh
Ma scsur ecrit tin« /eMre, Mj sister writer a- letter.
Voire cousint^ e»i pwne^ Your •cousin is punished.
The verb is varied by modes, tenses^ -persons, and
numbers.
The PARTICIPLE partakes both of the nature of the
verb and the noun adjective : ex.
Ayant^ Haying j Aim6^ Loved.
Dormant^ Giving. | Pttm, Punished, &c.
The ADVERB is sometimes joined to the noun, but
more frequently to the verb, whence it derives its name.
The use of the adverb is, to determine the signification
of the noun or verb, or express some particular modifi-
cation or circumstance of the action or quality : ex.
Jt vous aime sincerement, I love you sincerely.
Venez demain, Come to-morrow.
In these instances the words sincerely and* to-^norrom
are adverbs.
The PREPOSITION is a word which is put before the
noun or pronoun, and it always governs the word before
which it is placed : ex.
Chez mqn amt. At my friend's house.
^ Devant moi, Before me, &c.
The CONJUNCTION serves to connect the several parts,
of a discourse: ex. e2, and ; car, for; mai^, but,.&c.
* The INTERJECTION is a word which expresses the dif-
ferent afiections or passions of the soul : ex.
Helas ! mon Dieu ! Oh ! my God ! &<:.
A more particular delineation of these nine parts of
speech, and their use in the composition of a sentence,
or period,, will be the subject of the following sections.
SECTION \h
OFJ^OUJ^S.
NOUNS are divided into substantives and adjectives.
A NOUN SUBSTANTIVE cxpressea a thing subsisting by
21
itseir, and can make a complete sense independent of
an V other word : ex. Dteu, God i rot, king ; maison^
hoase, &c.
A NOON SUBSTANTIVE Is eithcr common, collective, or
proper.
A coHAioN Noumf is applicable to all beings or things of
the same kind : ex. homme^ man; m, king ; vilU^ town ;
table^ table, &c.
A COLLECTIVE NOUN is expressivc of many particulars ;
yet, as these particulars are all united in the mind, and
comprehended under one general idea, they -may there-
fore be conceived as one individual, and, without any
impropriety, expressed in the singular number: ex*
peuple^ people ; foril^ forest ; armie^ army, &c.
A PROPER NOUN is applicable to one person or thing
only : ex. Pierre^ Peter ; Landres^ London, &c.
jV. B. A noun is always a substantive when we can-
not, with propriety, add to it the word personne^ person,
or the word chose^ thing.
A NOUN ADJECTIVE is usedto e^cpress the quality, colour,
form or quantity, of the substance to which it belongs ;
and is so called because its meaning cannot be ascer-
tained without being joined to its proper substantive,
with which it must also agree in gender, number, and
case : ex. bon, good ; aimable^ lovely ; rougf, red ; jaunty
yellow ; rond^ round ; carre^ square ; t4n, one i deuxj
two ; irois, three, &c.
N. jB. The noun is always adjective when we can
add to it the word personne or chose^ person or thing.
In NOUNS, four things must be considered, viz.
Les Arlichs, The Articles.
Les Genres^ The Genders.
Les Nomhresy The Numbers.
Lts Casy The Cases.
ARTICLES.
• There are three sorts of Articles, viz.
L* Article difini, The Article definite.
IJAriich pariitiff The Article partitive.
L* Article indefinij The A rticle indefinite.
2^
The Article iniisl always agree witb the noun is gen-
der aod number.
The DEFINITE ARTICLE is 80 Called, because it means
the whole of the object to which it is applied.
Singular.
Le, for the taasculine, before nouns 4>eginni7)g with a
consonant or h aspirated ; eic. k roii the king ; le hiros^
the hero, &c.
Ld, for the feminine : ex. la reine, the queen, &c.
L\ with an elision, for both genders, before nouns sin-
gular beginning with a vowel or h not aspirated : ex.
Tefi/hnf, the child; j'ftomme, the man, &c.
Plural.
Les^ for both genders^ whether the noun begin with a
consonant or a vowel : ex. ks roi^, the kings ; les rein!Mj
the queens^ Jes er^fans^ the children, &c.
The pARTi<Fiy£ article means only a part of the ob-
ject, the English word some being alwajs expressed or
implied.
Singular.
!Thes6 two articles arc used
before nouns beginning with a
consonant or h aspirated: ex. du
pain, some bread ; de la viande,
some meat.
De l\ for both genders, beginning with a vowel or an h
not aspirated : ex. dt Pencre, some ink.
Plural.
Des^ for both genders : ex. des amis, some friends.
The indxfinitb akticls is de or d\ of, from, and a,
to.
This article i&used, without distinction, before nquns^
masculine and feminine 'in both numbers. Proper
names, and the greater part of. the pronouns, are de*
clined with it.
Some granmariansiadmit of a fourth article, viz. tin
for the mascuUne, and un$ for the feminine, in English
# or an ; but it may be observed, that it is alwajs der
S8
clined with the indefinite article,* and therefore taket
the nature of a noan adjective.
GENDERS AND NUMBERS.
There are two gendsrs, viz. the masculine and femi-
nine. A nouli is masculine when there is before it U
or un^ as le or tin livre^ the or a book. A noun is femi*
nine when it is preceded by la or tine, as to or untplume^
the or a pen.
There a're two numbers, the singular and plural.
The singular number speaks of one thing only, as une
to6/e, a table : the plural speaks of more than one, as,
des tables^ tables. There are some nouns that are never
used but in the singular number : as,
1. The names of metals: ex. or, gold; arjfm/, silver j
cutrre, brass ; plomb^ lead, &c.
S. The names of virtues and vices : ex. avan'oe, avarice ;
cftart^^, charity ; /oi, faith ; hainty hatred;, orgicci/,
pride ; prodigaliti^ prodigality, &c.
3. The names by which the five senses are denoted :
ex. la vue, the sight ; k gout^ the taste ; Podorat, the
smell ; le toucher^ feeling ; Tout'e^ hearing.
. 4. Proper names, except when they era used meta-
phorically.
5. To the foregoing may be added the following, which
are not reducible to any general rules :
ArlilUr%€j
Attirail^
Bonheurj
Co/cre,
Courroux^
Enfance^
Lait^
MitU
Nobltsse^
Pauvret6j
Sang,
There are others which are never used but in the
plural number only i such as,
artillery.
Faim^
hunger.
smoKe.
implements.
Fumie^*
happiness.
FuiU,
flight.
anger.
Gloire^
glory.
wrath.
Hante,
shame.
infancy.
JeunessBj
youth.
milk.
Salut,
safety.
honey.
Soif,
thirst.
nobility.
SotnfnBtl,
sleep.
poverty..
P'ieilUsse^
old age.
blood.
others which
are never
used but
24
ancesbrs.
. Atours^
apparel.
forefathers.
Ciseaua^
scisfiars.
a funeral.
Hordes^
clotlies.
expense.
LimiUs^
limits.
de ight.
Maurs^
manners.
cost. '
MouchelUs
, snufibrs.
entrails.
Tinibres^
darkness.
espousals.
Vivres^
victuals.
font.
Jincetrtsj
' Ayeux^
' Funtrailhs^
Frais^
Dclices^
D6pens^
Enlrailles,
lEptmsailks^
Fonts,
And, in general, those which, in English, admit of no
singular.
In general the plural number is formed by adding
an s to the singular : ex«
Le pirty the father ; Us peres, the fathers,
La mere^ the mother j les mires, the mothers, &;c.
All nouns, having their singular ending in s, x, or z,
admit of no variation in the plural : ex.
Lefils, the son ; Its fils, the sons. *'
Unt noix, a walnut ; des noix^ walnuts.
Le nez, the nose ; les nez,the noses.
EXCEPTIONS.
Nouns ending in an, eau, eu, an, teu, or ou, form their
plural by x, instead of s : ex.
Un chapeau^ a bat ; des chapeaux, hats.
Unmanteau,^ cloak ; des manteaux, cloaks.
Un lieu, a place ; des lievx, places.
Un chou, a cabbage ; des choux, cabbages.
^ The following difler from this rule, and their plural
terminates in 5 : ex.
Un matou, a great cat ;
Un sou, a cent ;
Un trou^ a hole 5
Un licou, a halter ;
des matous, great cats.
des sous, cents.
des irotis, boles.
des licous, hatters.
ex.
Nouns ending in al and ail have their plural in aux
Un animal, a living creature; desanimauxXi^if^g creatures.
Un cheval, a horse ; . des chevaux, horses.
Un travail, a work j des travavx^ works.
35
These only are excepted :
Un Bal, a ball,
Ditaily account, retail,
Evmlail^ a fan,
Un (3ouv£rnailj a heln,
Un Sirailr a seraglio,
Un PortfL^l^ a gateway.
Which form their plural id *.
Noutis of more than one syllable (polysyllables) end-
ing in n(, most generally form their plural by changing
the ^into^ ; as,
Enfant^ a child ; enfansy children.
CommanJemen/, command ; commandemens, commands.
But nouns of one syllable only (monosyllables) pre-
serve the /, and form their plural by adding 8 : as,
Dent^ tooth; dentsy teeth.
Pont^ bridge; '^ pants^ bridges.
Toui^ adj. all, makes ious^ in its plural masculine ; iouU
in the feminine gender sing, and toutes in the plural.
The following are not conformable to any established
rule.
Jlyeul^ grandfather ; ayeux^ grandfathers.
Bttail^ cattle ; hesiiaux^ cattle.
Cie/, heaven ; cteux, heavens.
QStV, eye ; ytux^ eyes.
■p . ^ dts ckls de lit^* testers of a bed.
P ( des odh dt hauf^ ovals.
There are in French several compound words like the
last two, which require some attention from the learner,
in the formation of their plural, the difficulty of which
may soon be removed by means of reflection ; for ex-
ample :
A noun being composed of a substantive and an ad-
jective, united by a hyphen, both admit of the plural
formation : as,
Un geniil'hommej a noble- des genUh-kommes, noble-
man ; men*
A noun compounded of two substantives and a pre-
position, united by hyphens, the first only in French,
* Thi« tetm it growist^ obsolete : H is better Uymj^imffmd i€ Ut»
3
26
which is generally the last in English, admits of the plu-
ral formation : as,
Un arC'en-ciel^ a^ rainbow ; des arjjf-«n-cte/, rainbows*
Un che/'d*(zuvre\tiin2isicr' des chefs-d^auvre, master*
piece. "* ^'f pieces.
J^. B. Some of these French compound words are
sometimes rendered in English by one word, in which
case the formation of the plural in the French is still
the same : as,
Vn cul'de-sae^ an alley (with- des culs'de-sacj alleys.
out egress) ;
Nouns composed of a verb or a preposition and a
substantive, the substantive only admits of the plural
formation: as,
Un avani'ioit, eaves, des avant-toils^ eaves,
Un cas^e'iioisetUy a nut- des casse-noisettes^ nut-crack-
cracker ; ers.
Vngardt-foUj a rail ; jdes garde-foux^ rails, &c.
Mmseignmr^ my lord } js C Messeignetirs, my lords.
Monsieur^ Mr. or gent, f «^ \ Jlfewicwr*, gentlemen.
Madame^ Mrs. or madam L|i i Jlfe^clame;, ladies.
Mademoiselle^ miss 3 x. MesdemoiselUs^ misses.
CASES.
There are six cases, vizi^
!. Le Jfominatif, Nominative.
.2. Le Giniiify Genitive.
3. UDalif, Dative.
4. VAccusaiify Accusative.
5. Le Vocatiff Vocative.
6. VAhlatif, Ablative.
The NOMINATIVE and accusative cases have exactly
the same form, and are always declined with the same
article ; the only difierence between them arises from
their different positions in the sentence.
In the natural construction, the nominative always
precedes the verb, and the accusative follows it. The
27
nomiaative is the subject of Ihe sentence, and the accu-
sative is the objecl to which it refers: ex.
Lit rot aime Upeuphj The king toves the people.
In ordef to know the nominative from the accusative,
I ask. Who loves the people ? The King (which is the
answer) is the subject, and consequently the nomioa-
^tive. Whom or what does the King love ? The answer
is The People, which is the object, and therefore the
accusative.
The GENITIVE and ablative are declined with the
same article, but the first \s always preceded by another
word on which it depends: as,
Laporte de la chamhrt^ The chamber door, that is,
the door of the chamber.'
La maison de monpere, My father's house, &;c.
Or it is governed by a preposition, as,
Pres dufeuj Near the fire, &c.
The last is always put after nouns or verbs expressing
division, partition, or separation; and after some prepo*
sitions. The genitive is known by the articles de, du^dt
br, des, of or of the. Sometimes the article is not ex-
pressed in English, as may. be seen in the sentences
before mentioned. The ablative is known by the arti-
cles dc, duy de la^ dej, from or from the.
The DATIVE shows to whom the thing spoken of, is
given,or to what it is attributed : as, «
Donnez cette ponimt a mon Give that apple to my bro-
frere^ ther.
This case is known by the articles a, citi, a la^ aux^ to
or to the.
The VOCATIVE is used only tor calling or naming the
person to whom the speech is addressed ; as,
Ami^ qui ites-vous ? Friend, who are you ?
DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS,
AH changes in nouns are formed by numbers and
casee« T9 decline a noun, therefore, is to express its
28
sereral variations ; and, under these variations, to point
out its different significations.
Some short examples are added to the nouns, that
learners may more easily uoderstanid what has been said
respectii^ the cases.
Declension of the Article Definite Le {the)^ before Jfouns
masculine beginning toith aJCor^onant^ or an h aspirated. .
Singular*
Norn. LePrincsj
Le prince est ginireuXy
Gen. Du prince^
Lis vertus du prince j
Dat. Au prince^
Parler au prince^
Ace. Le prince J
Aimer leprince^
Voc. O prince^
Abl. Duprince^
Recivoir da Utires du
princi^
The prince.
The prince is generous.
Of the princQ.
The virtues of the prince ;
or, the prince's virtues.
To the. prince.
To speak to the prince.
The prince.
To love the prince.
O prince.
From the prince.
To receive letters from the
prince.
Declension of the Article Definite La (ihe)^ before J^ouns
feminine beginning with a Consonant, or an n aspirated.
Singular.
Norn. Laprinceste^
Laprincesse est aimable,
Gen. De laprincesse,
Les regards de laprincesse,
Dat. A laprincesse,
Donner a la princesse,
Ace. Laprincesse,
Imitez laprincesse,
Voc. Oprincesse,
Abl. De la princesst,
Eire s^ar6 de la prin-^
cesse.
The princess.
The princess is amiable.
Of the princess.
The looks of (he princess ;
or, the princess's looks.
To the princess.
To give to the princess.
The princess.
Imit^t^^he princess.
O princess.
From the princess.
To be separated from the
princess^
l^cUnBton of the Article Definite U (the)jfor both Genders^
before J^ouns beginning with a Vozoelj or an u not aepi"
rated.
Singular.
Norn. V enfant^
U enfant est timide^
Gen. jDe Venfant^
Le temperament de Pen*
fant,
Dat. Jl Penfant,
Attribiur a Penfani^
Ace. Uenfant,
Admirer Penfantj
Voc. O enfant^
Abl. De Penfaat,
S^cloigner de Penfantj
The child.
The child is fearful.
Of ihe child.
The child's temper; or, the
temper of the child.
To the child.
To attribute to the child.
The child.
To admire the child.
O child.
From the child.
To go awaj from the child.
The plural of these nouns, whether they begin with
a consonant or a vowel, '^'h aspirated or not aspirated, is
decJin^Si both genders, byjhe article les {ihe)»
Norn, im rots^
Les rois commandent.
Gen. Jf^roisj
Vorare des rois,
Dat. Aux rois,
Envoyer aux rois,
Ace. Les rois,
Respectez Us rois,
Voc. Orois,
AbU Des rois,
Eire loin des rois.
The kings.
The kings comm.and.
Of the kings.
The order of the kings : or,
the kings' order.
To the kings.
To send to the kings.
The kings.
Honour the kings.
O kings.
From the kings.
To be far from the kings.
RECAPITULATION OF THE ARTICLE
DEFINITE.
Singular. * Plural.
Mas. Fern. Mas. & Fern. Mas. & Fern.
Nom.&Ac. Zi«, la, P; Les, ihe.
Gen. te Ab. Du, de la, dt P ; Des, of or from the.
Dat. Am, ale, aP; Aux, io the.
* See the list of words beginiiiDg with on h not aspirated, page 15.
3*
The definite article must be placed, in French, bcffore
all nouns used in a general sense^ or denoting a ii^hole
species of objects, and before names of countries and
provinces, though the English admit of ho article in this
case : ex.
Dhomme est mortel^ Man is mortal.
Le DanemarCj la Suede et Denmark, Sweden, and
PAngleterre^ sont les trots England, are the three
rojfaumes du riord^ northern kingdoms.
-V EXBRCISE UPONTHIS RULE.
I hate idleness. • -Virtue is esthnable. - -
Je, pro.haw,v. paresse^ f. Vertu^L est^ V. e»/tma6/«,adj.
Gold is preferable ' to silver Do you*
Or,m. priferabte^^dy areent^m* *o* votju^pro.
prefer^ England ' to France ? Corn grows
prifirez^y. An^leterre^U France^f. BU^m* croU^ v*
for men, arid grass for cattle. -^-- Love
|)our,p. fcomme,m. e<,c. hei^be^f. bitail^n^tfimez^v,
wisdom. — Do »not' neglect' iTudy. - -
sagesse^f. »o» nepas^^dv, nigligez^v. itude^ f.
Avoid leisure. - - - She comes from church. - -
Evitez^y. /oMtr,m. £//e,pro. vient^v. eglise^f.
We speak of America, and not
^ou5,pro. parlons^y* Amirique^f. nonpas^zAv.
of Poland. Grant us peace. - • -
PologneS* Accordez^y. nous^pro. paixf.
Honour is due to kings. -'• - They
Hpnneur^m* i{d,p.p. rot,m. //*,pro.
come from Africa. - - - - Prid6 disgraces man. - -
v%ennent^\. Afrique^t Orgueil^m. digrade^y.
Charity patiently' bears* injuries^
ChariUS* patiemmentyaiy. souffre^y. injure^f.
\ This article is ^Iso placed before nouns ^used in a
' specific str^e, or denoting a particular object, in which
case the article is likewise expressed in English : ex.
-Uhomme que vmia m^avez The man whom you re*
recommmdi ul fort ha* commended to me is
bihj very skilful.
31
Lu poirts de v^rt jardin The f>eara of your garden
soni excelUnltSj are excellent.
. * \
EXERCISE UPON TIIIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE.
Where > is the master of the house f - - The
OM,adv. est mailre^m. ^ tn«won,f.
prioce spoke to the king. - - To the third*
prince^nt. parla^Y. /rot9teme,adj.
page of the book. - - The* lazy'* do ^jjot*
pagtf. livre^m* paresstux^ij.^A* *o«
love^ work*. - <^ - - Justice is the mistress and
aimmi^Vm ou^ragefOt. Jttsiict,L mattrt9Bt^L
queen of virtue. - - Send the child to school. - •
ttine^U Envoyez^y. enfant^m* ecok,f.
Walk in the garden. * - Tranquillity
Promenez'vous^v. Jan«,p. jardin^. TranquilUU^ f.
ofsou4 is the height of felicity. -- Give the tooth
4me,f. conJfk^m^ felidli^L Di»nnez,v. cure-
picks to the gentlemen Education is to the
deniytn* Mtasiturs^m. EduccHion^f.
mind, what cheanliness is to the body. • - The
esprit^m. ce gue,pro. propreie^U eorps^m.
life of man is short. - - The enemies were on
vie/. couf/e,adj. ennemt,m. itoient^v. sur^p.
the mountain. - You admire the beauty of
montagne^f. Fbtt«,pro. admirtz^v. heauUS*
the ladies. '> - To the thickness of the walls. - - We
dame^U ipaisseurj* mwrailU^U
go to the park. • - - It is the will of the em-
allons^Y, parcyux. Cm;,v. volonti^U em-
peror. The faie' , of nations is governed
^erettr,m. sort^m. nation^, goti'oem^^p.p.
by Providence. -- You play with the boys.
|Hir,p. Providence^f* jouez^v. avec^p. gar^on^m.
- - Revenge is the pleasure of a weak* mind^ - -
Feiigeance,f. plai$ir^tn. tin/ot6/e^adj.
Italy is the garden of Europe. - - Tlie most noble
UaHe^L ' Europe,f. />/t<9,adv.no6fe,adj. '
* Adjeotires take no article unlese used substantire^.
3d
of virtues is charity. - - Carry the grammar to the
Portez^w. grammairt^L
bays, aod the dictionary to the.giris. He
dieiionnaire^m* filUjlm ii,pro«
comes from the Indies. - • Give me the loaf.
^ vten/,v. Indt^U nioi,pro. pain^m*
y . This article being declinable in French, and conse-
quently admitting of different variations, ought to be
repeated before all the substdnlivts of a sentence, as
well as before adjectives used as substantives, and agree
with them in gender and number : ex.
Le sel^ la moutarde^ et The salt, mustard, and oil,
Vhuile^ sont sur Us tables^ are on the tables.
Le blanc^le rouge etlenoir^ yfb'iie^ red and black,
sont irois diffirentes anur are three different col*
Uurs^ ours.
^ EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES.
Prefer virtue to riches, friendship to
Pr6f6rez,y. /> riche8se8^i.\A, am%t%6J[.
money and utility to pleasure. - - The father, mother,
argentyVa. utilite^f. plaisir^m. pere^m. mere^L
and children are dead. - - The men, women, and chil*
^»/,v.moW^,p.p. femme^f.
dren of the village were all at the burial.
village^mMoient^tous^2Ldj» a,p. enterrement^m*
Children generally''*' like' apples and pears,
ofdtnazremen^adv.joimen^v. pomme^L poire f.
I like yellow and grey. - • Peace and plenty
atme,y. jaiine,m. gn>,m. ahondance^f*
make men happy Wheat and barley
renient.v. Aeur€tix,adj. Froment^m. orge^L
are dear. I hate milk, buttee, and cheese. - -
cher£,adj. /at/,m. ietirre^m. fromage^m*
Bring the knives and forks. •- - Patience
Appvrttz^v. couttau^m* fourcheUe^UPaiience^t*
and pecseverance are necessary The desire
• persivirancef* nioessaire^^'y disir^m*
• Place simple adverbs after verbs, and in compound tenses before
Uie participles.
33 •
of glory, rich^, power, and pleasure, is a
g/oire, f.rtc&e95e,f. pi. /xmvoir, in. wne
disease of the mind Have ^ou passed
maladie^f* dmeJ. jivez^r. passS.p.f^^
through Spain, Portugal, or Holland ? - ^APrc-
;>ar,p* *Espagne^L Portugal^m. ou Hollande^f. :/
fer always virtue, prudence, and goo4 seise
toujours^^dv» prudence jt 6on, adj. ims^m*
to beauty. - - Put the wine, beer, and cider on
Mettez^y, vin^m* Siere^f. ctWre, m. sur, p.
the table. • - - (It is said) that America, France, and
tabk^f* On dit que
Spain have made peace with England.
• o«/,v. /a27,p.p. ;
On the contrary, this article, though expressed in
English, must be omitted in French, before a noun
employed as an apposition, or definition of the noun
which precedes ; and when it precedes a noun in the
nominative or accusative case, denoting dignity^ fffictj
or bu8in€$$ : ex.
Mexandre, fiis de Philipp$j ' Alexander <&e son of Phi*
Man ami dimeure a Lan- My friend lives jn Lon-
dres^ ville eapitale d^An- don, the capital city ^f
gleterrty England.
EXERCISE UPoiw THIS RULE.
Jupiter, a god of the heathens, was the son of
«oi dieu,m. pai*my,m.' itoit^v. /Ife,m.
Saturn, and the father of the other gods. - * ftobert,.
Saturnt flMfrM,adj.
duke of Normandy, the "brother 6f 'Henry, kitig
<2uc,m. •ATormanrfte, /rere,m. Htnri^
of England^ was the son of William the con-
Ouillaume^ con-
queror. — My lister lives at York, the cap-
quirant^ m. JIf a, pro. stzur^ f. demeure^ v. a, p.
ital city of the county of the same name. ^
cwnUjmt* f»j$tne,adj. nofR,m.
X
34
Mr. C***^ the rector of the pnrish of St. James, and
cure,m. paroisse^L Jdques
his brother, the dean of the cathedral, were
«on,pro» doyen^xn. cathidrale^f. iloient^
the sons of Mr. L***, the first lord of
/»remier,adj. stigneur
the admiralty.
amiraui6,f*
'In several instances, the definite article is neither
expressed in English nor in French, as in narrations,
wl^n the style is animated ; and after the conjunction
ni, when it implies a complete negation, otherwise it
has an article, requiring in both cases the negation n<
before the verb : ex.
Consmnccy honneur^ intiril. Conscience, honour, inter-
iout est sacrifie ; il rCa est, every thing is sacri^
mjuHict ni humaniiij ficed ; he has neither
' justice nor humanity,
^t VoT nf la grandeur nt Neither gold nor greatness
nou8 rendent heureux^ can make us happy.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The town was taken by storm : men,
v'tlle^t. fatyV. prise^p^p. d'^assaut^m.
women, children, old people, (every body) was
vieillard^m. foi4/,adj.
put to death. - - Palaces, temples, pubjic^ build-
mtV,p.p. a morL Palais^Wp 6di-
ingsS private^ houses (every thing) was
jSce,m. />flr/jcu/terc,adj. maison^f. lout
destroyed. - - His father wilF spare^ 'neither'
de^rut/,p.p. .,, So»,pro. ipargnera^v. ne ni
pains r|f r^^ioney. • - • (He is) a fatherless child,
J3emc,f.sing. C'm/,v. orphelin^ adj. «o»
he haa neither parents . nor friends. - - Neither the
a parent^m. ami,m.
house nor bed are made for )|ID(k
/if,ra. sontfaUsj
When, in English, two or more substantives, signi-
fying different things, come together in a sentence.
35
baviDg a dep^n^nce on each ether, and having no '
stop between them, the last (in English) musi be plaiced'
at the beginning of the sentence (in French), and the
others having the sign of the English possessive case,
thus ('s) or (') only, come after it, with the genitive of
this article before them, according to their gender and
number ; ex. *
Ltfils du roi^ The king^s son.
La couronne de la retne. The queen's crown.
That is, the son of the fctng, the crozon of the queen.
SXEaCISE UPON THIS RULE.
I have seen the king^s apartments and the
m,Y. vtifp.p. appartementjXn.
qoeen^s picture. - - - - The chancellor's son's wife is
portrait^mm chancelier^m.
the prime minister's eldest' sister^ - - - The man's
premier^ ' ofn^€,adj. *<3eMr,f.
strength is very great Lend me the
foTcef. grande^zdj. Pritez^v. mot,pro.
maid's cloak. - - - - My cousin's brother is
stroante^f* mon(e2</,m. Jtfon^pro. coti5in,m.
my uncle's best friend The title of
oncle^tQ. niet7Ieur,adj. afn?,m. /f7re,m.
Dauphin belongs to the king of France'^ eldest'
appartient^y. aine^
'son. - - Modesty is a woman's greatest orna-
Modes tie^L une fenmu^f. kpl%isgrand,2Ldj. ome-
mcnt.
men^m. ^
The genitive of this article is often made in English
by /o, especially before nouns expressing alliance, con-
sanguinity^ or kindred^ witness, or inheritance ; and in
short whenever to may be rendered by the above geni- ,
ttve definite : ex.
Monseigmur le due de ***, My lord duke of ***, bro-
frire du roi^ ther to the king, or the
king's brother.
56
SXBRCISX I7F0» THIS ARTtCIi^.
Mr. Richard, brother to the Prince's steward,
Mons* intendanti^m*
has married Miss Prescot, niece to the Constable
a,v. 6pous6^f.f. Mile. nfecc,f. connitahle^m.
of the Tower. - - - 1 have spoken to the Marchioness
- Tour,U />ar/e,p.p. Marquise^f.
Qf ***^ sister to the queen's first Lady of honour. - -
DameS*
Mr. Henry, perfumer to the princess, has made
Henn,m. parfumeur^m, fait^^.p*
a "considerable ^fortune. - - - The heir to the
considirable^^dj. forfune^U ' h6rifier^m»
crown of Portugal is the Prince of Brasil. - - My
couronne^f. du BrcsiLm*
father was witness to that quarrel.
a e^^,p.p. iimoin^m^ ce/(e,pro. querelle^f*
I am a friend to "diligent ^scholars, and an
suis^x. ^ diligent^zAy icolitr^m. ^^on
enemy to idleness.
ennemt,m. paresse^f*
.4 After the adverb Uen^ when placed before a substan-
tive and signifying muchn a great deal, many^ the geni-
tive of this same article must always be useid : ex.
fiten du nUrite, Much merit.
Bien des amis. Many friends.
Bien de Pargenf, A great deal of money*
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The children make much noise. — • This man
f&nl^v. * hruit^m. Ce/,pro.
has (a great deal) of money, but he has also many
aus5t\adv.
enemies They "give ^you much trouble
donnent^Y. peine^f*
now ; but they will" give" you* afterward
a pr6sent^2Liv* mais^c. donntront^v*' enstiittyZdv*
much pleasure (There were) many ladles in
// y avoit^y, dames en
- • ,37
^cofflpaDy (last night). -•>->- Mr. R. has read
compagnie hier au 50tr,aclv. ^Mons. iii,p«p*
many books, and he haa acquired much^ know-
ledge. To teach . youth (we must
sances^mf.fU Pour,p. en^etgjaer,v« jeunesse^t* {il/aut^v*
have) (a great deal) of patience. - ^
arotVjV.) '.
If the second substantive in French (which is the first
in EngKsh) serve to denote some particular commodity^
use^ quality^ or liquor^ then it must be put in the dative :
ex. ^ . .
L« pot au lait^ 'The* milk^-pot^.
Xa femfmt aux pommesj The* . apple^- woman^
Une cruche a I'caw, - A water-jug.
It
EXERCISE UPOir THIS RULE.
Tell the servant to bring*
Dites^y. au or d /a c2ome5h*9ue,tn. & f. de apporUr^y*
me* the tea-cannister, sugar - dish, and cream-
me,pro. thi^tn^ hoite^L sucre^m* pot^m crimtf.
basin. - - - Go . to the wine - cellar and brings us* the
bamn,m. Alkz^y. rm,m. cave^L apporlez
vinegar • bottle. (There is) the oyster-woman. - - -
vinaigre,m. bou(eille^(* Voila huUre^.p].
I iive in* the hay - market, s my ' * cousin in the
ybin,m. marche^m. ni07t,pro.
fish*market, and my s^ister in the poultry* market. - -
pots son jtn.sing^ fna,pro. volaiUef.
Give me the oil-bottle, pepper - box, and mustard-
moi,pro. huile^L poivre^m. boiU^f. moutardeS*
pot. - - - ^The butter-boy, the greens-girl, ' the
beurre^m* /^gwme,m,pl.
hot^ - rolls^ man,* and the gingerbread-woman,
chauds^^dy j)am,m.pl. pain d^epkes.m.
called here. • - - We had cabbage^oup,
ont passi^f.f. {c?,adv. eumes^v. cAou,m.pl. de la soupi^
* In is generally en, when inamediatrly followed by a noun, and
dans when followed by an article or prohofin.
4
a rice • pudding, a (leg of mutton) with caper
unriz^m/pouding^m.^ gigoi,m. ciipr€,f.pl.
sauce, and ice - cream* - • We shall have pease
de la saucers. glactf. aurons^v. pois^m.
porridge, a salt' cod,' with egg^sauce, and a.
delasoupe, ttne f(i/^«,adj. tnome,f. iet^,m.pK
turbot with lobster-sauce. - • 1 bought a plocn
Aomarc2,m«pi« at achiU raisins secs^mm
cake, an apple - tart, and two gooseberry and
gduau^» pommejf.pL tarttyf. groseiUe^f.pU
cherry pies.
cerise^f.pL iourte,
DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE PARTITIVE.
SiNouLAR* — Masculine.
Nom. Ace. du pain^ some bread.
Gen. Abl. depain^ of or from some bread*
Dat. a dupain^ to some bread.
Feminine.
Nom. Ace. de la viand$j some meat.
Gen. Abl. de viande, of or from some oieat.
Dat. ade la vtande, to some meat.
Masculine or Feminine.
Nora. Ace. de Paigeni^ some money.
Gen. Abl. d*argent^ of or from some money.
Dat. a de Pargent^ to some money.
The plural is the same for both genders.
N A ^5 ^^ livresy some books,
JNom. AC ^ j^^ auUursy some authors.
r AK M^ iferw, of or from some books,
uen. AD. ^ ff^^^^rsy of or from some authors.
Y^ . ia des livres^ to some books.
^ lades auieurs, to some authors.
N. B. In asking a queation, the English generally
make use ofany^ which, in French, must be rendered
by the same article, as some : ex. *
Y a-t-il du pain iti f Is there any bread here ?
Avex-vous de la viande t Have yoa any meat f
39
This, article most be used wherever the English word
some, or any^ is either expressed or understood, and
ought to be repeated before every substantive in a sen-
tcnce : ex.
Da pain et de Veau luisuffi- Bread and water are sum-.
sentj cient for him.
Apporitz du vinaigre, de la Bring some vinegar, mus-
moutarde, de Vhuile el des tard, oil and forks.
fourcbettes,
AveZ'Vous de Vargent a Have jou any money to
noiu priter f lend us ?
EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE.
Bread, meat, and water, are things necessary
sont^y. chose^* hicesiaireSj^idj*
to man. - - I drink wine and water. - - She eats
bois^w ^ mange^y*
cheese. - • - Bring me some Inustard. - - - Have you
frmagejtii.
bought some paper, pens, add ink ? - • Send
acke(^,p.p. paptevytn* plumef. encrt^f*
him some bread, meat, and potatoes Doyou^
lui pomme de itrre^U «o»
selU fruit^ ? • * Buy some tea and sugar. - -
vendez^y. fruitytn. Achetez^y. /Ae,m.
Will you eat some beef with turnips and
Voukz^y. manger^y* . 6cBM/,m. navet^m.
carrots? - - Do you drink beer? - - (Is there) any
carotle^f. u>t • huvez^y. 6ier«,f. Y a-t-it
wine in the cellar ? ^ - - (Was there) any oil in the
Y avoii'il
bottle ? - - 1^ have^ given* him* bread, money,
rfonn^,p.p. /}«i,pro.
and clothes. - • She has modesty and prudence. - -
Kabif,m. modesiie^t, prudence jf*
He has bought some dishes and plates. - - ^ Will
plaKm* assiette^f. .
you have some milk or cream ? • • I eat fish, eggs,
v<?^ .iBii^m«
. 40 . •
greens, artichokes, and asparagus. - >- • Bread, meat,
Ugume^ ariichaut^tn* asperge^f.pL
fish and vt getables, often' make* a good
v6g6(aux^fn.p]. smivent^zdv* font^w hon
dinner,
dtner,m. . '^
If the substantive be preceded bj an adjective, instead
of c2u, de Id, des^ we must use de or d* : as,
Mas^ , Fem. Masc. or Fem.
N. Ac. ) De mauvait rin, De bonne eaw, ' D'*exceUen( pain^
G.Abl. ) Bad wine, Oood water, Kxceiyent bread,,
Dat. a de nuxv.rau rm, a de bonne eau^ a d'exceUtnl pain^
To bad wine. To good water. To excellent bread.
Plural. ^
N. Ac. ) De Ions livres^ d^habiUs gens^
G* Ab. 5 Good books. Learned men.
Dat. a de bons livres, ci d'habiUs gens^
To good books. .To learned men.
N. B. This last rule i^ without exception. But some
persons find it difficult to distinguish between the geni*
live of the definite and this article ; now let them but
parse, and they will perceive that in this phrase : Lort"
res est U centre dci bon gout, du is no more than the geni*
live of the definite article denoting what kind of taste.
EXERCISE UPON THIS ANO THE PRECEDING RULES.
You always* read* * good books. - - "Bad wine*
<au;ottr5,adv. listz^v.
is* ^not^ worth* good water. - - - He speaks tu learned
vaut^w. parkiV.
men. I have heard good nev?)^. - • . .
en5,f.* appm,p.p. 6onne,adj. notn?fWc,f.pl.
ou have fine fruit She has worthy
avez^v. 6faw,adj. digne^txdj.
friends. - - Bring rac good pens. - - Onions, celery,
Oignan5,m. c^/eri,m#
* Gens J preceded by an adjective, is of the feminine gender ; but
when the adjective fellows^ it is put ia the masculine..
f
leeks, cherril, and (a great deal) of meat make
poireaUjm* cei/eut7,iD« beaucotip^adv. /on/,v.
what the French call good
ce qiUjfvo. Fran(ot5,rn.pL appelhnt^T*
broth 4 prefer good water to bad cider. - - - •
houillon,mm cidre^m*
I have discoursed ' with learned people. - - My father
conrer«^,p.p. gensS*
has in his garden good plams, fine peaches,
5(m,pro. prune f, ie//f ,adj. piche^L
and yery ' large apricots Miss Sharp
/fe5,adT. gros.^Aj. ahricot^tH. MlluU
has fine eyes. - - Paris is the centre of wit.
6eaif, cet7,m. hel tsprii^m.
DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE INDEFINITE,
used before proper jiames of persons and places^ and in the
Gen. and AhU the t is cut off before a Towel pv an h
mute, as usual.
^ — ^ Singular. — Masculine.
Nom. Ace. Pierre^ Peter.
Gen* Abl. dt Pierre^ of Peter.
Dat. d Pierri^ to Peter.
Feminine.
Nom. Ace. Marie^ Maria.
Gen. Abl. dt Marie, of Maria*
Dat. d Marie, to Maria.
Nonu Ace. Anioine^ Antony.
Gen. Abl. d^Antoine, of Antony.
Da^t. a ArUoine^ to Antony.
Nom. Ace. Landres, London.
Gen. Abl. de Londres, of London.
Dat. 0 Londres, to London. -^
^■^ *•
K. B. It is necessary to observe, (hat the particle
To, used after a word signifying coming, going, returning,
or sending to, placed before the name of a kingdom, reptUn
lie, country, province, or county, must be rendered in
French by the preposition en, without any article : ei.
4*
■ , A2
Monfrire est aJJi en Italu^ My brother h gone to Itaff *
// doil bientdt retoumeren He is soon to go back lo
Amerique^ America.
On the icontrary, to must be rendered by de, when
immediately preceded by the words ro(/Sy or path-way :
ex.
Le chemtn de Lohdres, The road to London.
Le chemin de Pari*, The way to Paris.
It must be observed that the proper names of most of
the islands and other countries both in* the East and
West-Indies, and a few places in Europe, do not follow
the above rule, but take the definite article, such as
PMyssinie^ Abyssinia ; le Bristly Bi*asil ; h Caire^ Cairo ;.
le Canada^ Canada^ la Guadeloupe^ Guadaloupe ; la
Jamaiquej Jamaica ; le Jnpoh^ Japan ; La Martinique^
Martinico ; le Perou^ Peru ; la Virginie^ Virginia ; h
Mtxique^ Mexico ^ and a few others : ex.
, C de VAbyssinie^ ^ C from Abyssinia^
Venir < da Bresil, , / to come < from Brasil,
{ du Cairej J ( from Cairo.
Cd la Cfttne, > C to China,
Aller <au Canada^ > tc^^o < to Canada,.
( au Japonj y (to Japan»
EXERCISE UPON THESE RULES*
(Here is) John^s brother* - - Speak to Martha. - -
Foici,adv. Jean Parlez^v. Martke. ^
It is Peier'^s hat. She goe% to Richmond. - - -
• Ce5;,v. chapeaujtn. va^y*
He comes from Paris.- - - • You have Mrr
vieat^v. Mons^
Richaid^s sword. - - - When' wilP you' go^ to»
ipie^L 9^''anc2,adv. irez^v,^
France 2 - - 1 know not, for my father saj»
iatf,v. fut pas'^zAv* €ar^t. clrt,v^
that be (will^ send) me* sooa to Canada er
^uetC- »/,pro* enverra^v^ Wenfd^adv.
Jamaica* - • Giyie me Laura^s- cap* 1 (am going)^
Laaxt: honnet,^ vuityVm-
43. >
to Roxbury. I have found Andrew's waistcoat.
She (shall tome back) to England (next year)
rtoiendra^v. Vannit prochaine
fo see her brother who is arrived from
pourvoiryV. son^ qui^ipro* est^v. arrive,p^p»
Japan and China. - - Carry that to Stephen. - -
Portez^y. ce/a,pro. Etimne.
(Here is) the road to Medford. My mother
Jtfa,pro.
intends •to send my sister to Portugal
se propose A,v. envoyer^v* tna,pro.
or Spain, and thence to Rome, and my cousin (is to)
de la rfci/,v.^
go to Mexico or Cairo.
alltr^fn ou^<?i
The genitive of this article de is used after nouns and
adverbs of quantity^ whetber expressed in English op,
not ; after the negation pas or poiht^ no or not ; the
word ^ue, what, standing for, how much, or how many,
and, quelque chose^ something, ricn, nothing ; before names
of countries, kingdoms dnd provinces, when. preceded
by a noun expressing a personal title, &c. or by a verb
signifying comings arriviiigj or returning from :. ex.
Tant de pommesy So many apples.
Tant d^argent, So much money.
'Point de repos^ No rest.
Que de peines et detains I What care and trouble i
Quelque chose* de feon, Something good.
11 arrive de France^ He arrives /row France.
Rien de mauvais. Nothing bad.
Le roi d\4ngleterre, The king o/* England.
Elle vient d'^Amirique, She comes /rom America*
EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE.
I have bought six yards of cloth. Bring
achete^p.f^ six aune drapytn,
me three pounds of veal, and two pounds of
(rots livre veau^m^ deux
* It must be observed, tluit the word chBtCj, standing bj itserf, »
of the feminine gender ; bat, being joined to the nvord qutlque^ il ^
of the fflascBline.
# 44
muttoD. • - She has a great number of cbildreo. - -
mouton^m* un grand fidj.nombre^m.
He has (too much) vanity. — You have less merits
<rop,adv. vanite^L fnotn^,adv.
but more wisdom. - - What a noise jou make. - •
mais^c* pZti; ,ady» sagesse. *o* hruil^tn. faiUs^v.
(How many) fools in the world ! • - Do 'not^ give^
f(AA tmmdz^m. u&» ntpas^zAv.
her* (too roanj) pears. - - P have' *no* . daugh*
/tfi,pro. /ro/>^dv. ai ntpoint^iv.
ters.*'- - (So much) pride does *not* become^ him*. - -
Tiin/,adv. orguet7,m. «o« md^v. ^ui, pro*
(There is) something noble in his physiognomy. • •
// y a,v. «(i,pro. pkysionoftiie.
* We have (so many) grapes. — They have a little
raisin^m. un peuy adv.
money.'- - 1 know the king of Prussia. - - Did you
connoiSyV^ Prusse^L Avez^y.
see the duke of Bavaria with the archbishop
vti,p.p. Jt(c,m. Baviere^f* archeveque^m.
of York ? • - He commanded an army of forty
eommandoit^Y. une armie^f. quarante
thousand men. She* says'* ^nothing* true*. - - -
mille di/,v. ne nen,adv. vrat,adj.
You speak of Alexander, king of Macedonia. - -
parltz^v. AkxandrtyVa* Macidoint^U
Do you* come" from Italy ? - - • No, 1 come
-o' vtntz^y. Non^zdy, vienSyV*
from Africa.
Afriquem
De is likewise placed before nouns governed by
another substantive, of which they express the character,
cause^ country^ matter^ nature^ and quality / and after the
adjectives of number, when they are followed by a parti-
ciple passive : ex.
Unt Timt^m de hriqife, A^ brick^ bouse*.
Un bonnet de nuit, A night cap.
Une cuHler if argent^ A silver spoon.
Du poissofi de riviere, River fish.
Du vin de Bourgogne, Burgundy* wineF.
Oud/re de rtnvoyis, Four (sent away.)
45
EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE.
Your* sister* has^ a* silk^ gown* and a gold*
Votre^ pro. saury f. «, v. une soie^ f. ro6e, un or^ m.
thimble. •- We drink Champagne wine.- — It is a
de, m. '^' buvons^y* C'e^*, v.
marble pillar. — - - They have a country
marbrt pUliir^m* , une ca,npagnt
hpuse built with oak wood.--
mai^on conslruile^p,p. rfe,p. chine bois.
Edinburgh is ihe capital city of the kingdom
Edinbourg^m capitate^ixdj.ville^f. royaume^ xup
of Scotland. -- Shut the fore - door. -- A lady
Ecosst* ^ Fermez, v. , devant porte^ f. Une
of wij^ is a jewel of worth (He is) a man
esprit unjoyau^xn. prise. G'ea/, v.
of honour. • - - She has bought silver buckles
hanneur.. argent boucle^L
and diamond ear - rings Have you
diamant pendans-dhreille^ m. ^vez^ v»
spoken - to the silk-merchant? -•- Give nie the
|Mir/e, p. p« marchand^f m.
upper - crust. — Bring -roe my straw - hat and
dessus^ crou/f, f. monpaille cfciipecrti, m»
my night - cap. - - - - Miss Brown's chamber - maid and
nuit bonnet^m. Mile. chambre fille^f*
Mrs. Rose's house-keeper are two sis-
Mme. femme de charge^ f. deu^
ters. - • The rich make use of silver plate,
richej m* fU se servent^ v. vaisselle
and the poor ^ make us» of iron forks
pduvre^ m. pi. font^ v. usage, m. fer, m.
and pewter spoons. ----- The enemies had a
ilain, m. cuilUr. eurent, v. «^>»
hundred men killed, seventy wau^ded, and
cent /ue9, p.p. soixante-dix IJem?, p. p»
forty lost.
quarante perdus^ P* P*
46
*De is placed after the adjectives signifying dimension,
as 6pais, thick ; gtosy big, large ; haut^ high, tall ; large^
wide, broad ; /<mg, long ; and profondj deep j though
there is no article expressed in English : ex.
Vnetabklonguededixpieds A table ten feet long and
et large de huU^ eight broad.
But there is a more elegant way, which is, to turn
the adjective of dimension into the substantive; then
the words of measure and those of dimension are pre-
ceded by de ; ex.
Une table de dixpieds de Ion- A table ten feet long and
gueur etde huit de largeur^ eight broad.
In this last example it may be seen, that the French
and English are parallel with each other; therefore, in
the following exercise, the adjective and substantive ape
put down, that the learner may translate it both ways.
EXERCISK UPON THIS RULE.
I saw a tree eighteen feet large.
J^ai^y* t)tr, p.p. un arbre,m. dix-huit pied^m. grot*
I have a box four inches thick,
feur*. uaeMu^U qualre pauce^m. ip^untur^
ten feet long, and six broad. - - I know
dix pied, m. long-uiurf - large-ur. cannotf , T#
a man seven feet high (It is) a ditch
un sept 'haut'eur. CUsl^v* un fossi^tn*
nine feet six inches deep and five feet broad.
neuf profond-eur ' cinq
(There is) a room fifty paces long and
Foila une chambrej f. cinquante pas^ m.
twenty broad. • • - The walls of our garden
vingt muraille^ f. noire^ pro.
are or (have) tUrty feet three inches high, and two
sont, T. or ton/,v. trenU trois deux
feet broad. • - 1 have a tree eighteen feet round
un ar6re,m. dM-kuit gro$-seur^ f.
and sixty high.
* Read groj, siijeotiYe, grosstur, subttftntire, irithout separation,
•^nd 80 of the others. See the rules to form the femiDine gender, p. 60«
** JSet the rule upon avoir and iin next page.
.47'
)f the learner translate this last sentence by the ad-
jective of dimensipn, he must use the word sontj which
is the proper word of the English are^ and follows the
preceding rule : bat if he turn the adjective of dimen*
sion into its substantive, the word sont^ are, is to be
rendered into French by the verb on/, have, and de be-
fore the word of measure is suppressed*
Literal example by the adjective :
Jfotre chamhre est longue Our room is long by twen-
de vingt pieds et large de ty feet and wide hy
douze^ twelve.
By the substantive :
J/oire chanibre a vingt pieds Our room has twenty feet
de longueur et douze de in length and twelve in
largeur, width.
When two substantives are joined together, both
making a compound word in English, the first of which
denotes theybmr or u^eof the second, the latter must be
placed before the former in French, and followed by the
particle a, in the sense of for ; ex.
Un moulin kpapiery % A paper' mill^
Une bottc kpoudre, A powder' box*.
~ EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Gun - powder was invented by a monk.
Canon^m.poudre.,Lfut, v. inveniee^ p.p. par, p. moine, m.
The servant has lost the steel, and cannot
perdujf*p» hriquet^m^ nepeutpas
light the candle If you go to London
allumer^ v. chandelle^ f. Si, c. " allez^ v.
to-morrow, bring me a toupee - iron. - Have you
Remain, adv. apporteZyV* toupet^m.fer^va.
seen the water-mill which mj father has bought ?
vUj p.p. fue, pro. acheti^ p.p.
No, but I have aeen the wind-mill whiQh your
Non^ adv. tient, m* y
48
brother has built at Greenwich. — I ha%;e
faitbdUr^v. a '
found your sister's work - bag. --- Wilh'am has for-
ouvrage sac^ m. Guillaume a de-
bidden his children to go to the dancing room.
fendu a see dialler danser salle^ f. ,
^, DECLENSION of UN, OI. UNE, f. A Of AN.
Singular. — Masculine.
Nom. Ace. un livft^ a book.
Gen. Abl. d*un livre^ of or from a book.
Dat. a un livre^ to a book.
Feminine.
Noro. Ace. tine plume^ a pen.
Geo. Abl. d^uneplume^ of or from a pen.
Dat. d itneplume^ to a pen. ^
EXERCISE upon THIS RULE.
I have a hat and a sword. — ' She speaks
chapeau^ m. 6p6e^ f. parity v.
of an oflScer. --- He* has' given* it* to* a
offider^m. donn^, p.p. 2e, prp.
sailor. - - (There are) a bird and a cage
ma/e/o/, m. Voila oistau^m* cage^L
An ungrateful man is a monster (in the) eyes of a
ingratfAXi. *<^ ; monsirt^ m. aux ail^ m.
sensible* man^ -- Alexander was a great warrior,
stnst^ adj. AUxandrti m. e/ot%v. gi4<rr»cr,m.
and a very . learned philosopher. - - A fine
im, adv. savant^ adj. phUos^phe, m. belUjZij*
flower in a garden is an ornament.
fltur^U ornfmtnt^m.
It must be observed, that the English article a or an^
before nouns of measure, weight, and number, must be
rendered in French by the definite articles, /c, te, hs ;
and by the preposition par^ used for txmt and spact in
the sense of tach^ tvtry^ or ptr : ex. '
49
Deux (Aelins le ceni^ Two Bbilltngs a hundred.
Un 6cu ]e boissedUy ' A crown a bushel.
Citiq chelins par semaine^ Five shillings a week*
Une guinee par mois, One guinea a month.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Barley sells for three shillings a busmi. • • -
Org€,L se vend^r^ «o*
That ale (is worth) six pence a pint. - - •
Ce/<e,pro« af7e,f. vaut^Y. sou^m. pinie^f.
B^ef costs eight pence a pound. - - - •
Bauf^m. couie^v. Aiii/,adj. livre^f.
This lace cost a crown an ell. — He
C€//e,pro. dtnitllt^f. coAta^v. icu^m. aune,f.
sells his best cloth a guinea a yard. - *
vmd^Wm son,pro. fmilhar drapfia* uru ' verge/*
Burgundy wine (is sold) nine shillings a bottle. - *
le vin ae vend^v* muffldj.
My shoemaker sold' me^ two pair of
jlfon,pro. cor<2onnter,iii. a Ten(Zu,p.p. poire/*
shoes (at the rate) of 'half ^a guinea a pair. * - - My
Soulier a raison demi
master comes twice a week. - - My uncle goe*
vient^y, deux /ot^,adv. va^Vm
to France thrice a year. - • - She gives three
iroisfois^Bdv* an,m. donne^y*
shillings a day and ten pence a mile«
jouryW. mille^m*
According to the rule p. 33, n or an is not expressed
in French before the second noun when it qualifies
the first; the same article is likewise omitted when the
verb itre precedes the substantive ; excepting when that
verb has ce for its nominative : in the first instance the
noun is employed as an adjective, in the second as a
substantive ; thus i7 est honime signifies, he has the feel*
ings of a man, whilst c'esi un homme means^ there Is a
man.
M, Z)., membre de la cham* M. D., a member of the
bre dea camtnunes house of comwtkti^v
5
^60
Etei'Vous Anghis ? Are you an EDglisbmaa ?
•Yon, Mw^situr^ je auis Nor, sir, 1 am a French^
Franqmy man.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
I i|pr the Duke of C***, a prince of the blood,
JPai vu duc^m* sang^xn.
who (was speaking) to Mr. P., a member of
9ui,pro. parloiUv.
parliament. - - His cousin is a surgeon, and hk brother
patlttntnt^m. Son chirurgien^m*
18 a physician. - - My sister is a milliner,
midecin^m* marchande Se modtsf.
my brother is a tailor, and I am a carpenter. - - -
/at7/eMr,m. charpentier^m.
1 have read Castor and Pollux, a 'French ^opera. - - •
opira^m*
Bristol, a sea • port, passes now . ^
mer,f. |>or/,m. passe^w a priseni^stdv*
for the second city of the kingdom of Eng-
/>our,p.
land. • - - Is she a duchess, or a marchioness ?
Est^Y. duchtasej* marquise^L
• - - No, she is a countess.
comtesse^f.
OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE.
Adjectives form their plural as the substantives.
Rule (o form their Feminine Gender.
Many adjectives in al have no plural for their mas-
culine ; as conjugal^ conjugal ; fatal, fatal ; flial, filial }
natal^ natal; naval, naval ; total, total; and some few
others, with which a little practice will soon acquaint
the learner.
Adjectives ending in e mute are of both genders : ex*
Unjeune homme, A youi^ man.
Unejeunefemme^ A young woman.
51
grande^*
great, (all, large,
polie,
)olite.
aimee^
oved.
civile^
civil.
demicj
hair.
nue, .
naked.
Id,)
A hair-pound.
A pound and a half.
la tile nue*
Us pieds nu8.
Adjectives ending with one of the foilowiiig letters,
dy e, t, /, n, r, ;, t, and u, form their feminine by adding
an e mute : ex«
Masc. Grand^ Fern.
Po/i,
Civil,
Demiy
JV«,
The last two adjectives are indeclinable when they
precede a substantive, but are declinable when they
follow it : ex.
Vne demi4ivre,
Une livre et demie,
Jfu litCj bare head, ]
Jiu piedsy bare feet,
There are a few ending in an, aa, el, i7, eil, ten, in, es,
et, is, on, os, ot, and ut, that double the final letter, before
an e, mute, for the feminine : ex.
Masc. Gras, ^em.
Gentil,
Ettrnel^
Pareil,
Chrititn,
Epdis,
Bon,
* When that adjective preceden a substaniiTe sini^ular of (he
feminiDe gender, beginning with a consonnnt, we often suppress in
French, both in the pronunciation and writing tho e, which is
sapplied by an apostrophe as in the following instances.
A grand* peiney with hard labour.
Cgrand^ /aim, ^ ( '•erjr hungry.
Jt»oir igrand* toif, \ to be < very thirsty.
(granS* peur, ) ( tery mnch frightened.
Fmre grand^ ehhe, ta live well, to fare suroptiioiisly.
La grand* nUrt, the grand mother.
La grand} mene, the high mass.
La grand"* chambre, tUe high court.
Should however the word grande be preceded by trh, fori, very,
SUM, one, or la plu#, the most, then the final e must be added ; as,
Une fori grmde talU^ A very large room.
grasse,
gentille,
Iternelle,
fat.
genteel.
eternal.
pareille,
ckritienne,
alike,
christian.
- tpaiise,
honne.
thick,
good.
52
Masc. Orosj Fern- grasse, big.
Soij sotte^ foolish, simple.
The following are very irregular, and cannot be com«^
prised. under any rule, viz.
Fem.
Masc. Beau^ bel^*
Benin,
Favori,
Fraisj
Longf
Malin,
Mou, moly*
Fieua?, vieil,*
belle,
b6nigne,
favorite,
folle,
fratche,
longue,
maligne,
molle,
nouvelU,
vieilU,
handsome, fine.
benign.
favourite.
foolish, crazy.
fresh.
long.
malicious.
soft.
new, novel.
old.
Adjectives ending in c add he to the c for their femi-
nine : ex.
Uasc. Blanc, Fem. blanche, white.
Franc, franche, sincere.
See, - seche, dry, &c.
The four following are excepted.
Masc. Caduc, Fem. caduque, in decay.
Grec, Greece, Greek.
Public, publique, piiblic.
Turc, Turque, Turkish.
Those ending in / change / into ve for the femi-
nine : ex.
Masc. Bref, Fem. breve,
Ka^, naive,
J/euf, ncuve,
Veuf, veuve,
Vif, vive.
Adjectives ending in x, change x into se : ex. *
Masc. Douloureux, Fem. douloureuse, painful, dolorous.
Heureux, heureuse, happy, &c.
Jaloux, jalouse, jealous.
short.
plain, ingenuous,
new, not old.
widowed.
quick.
* These adjectiires are used before substantives beginning with a
'vovel or h not aspirated.
The following arc excepted ;
Masc* D&uxy Fern, douce, sweet. -^
Faux, fausse, false.
Perplex, perplexe, perplexed.
Pfifix, prifixe, prefixed.
Rouxj rousse, reddish.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE.
ju French adjectives must agree with their substantives
in gender, number, and case : ex.
Singular. — Masculine.
Norn. Ace. Le hon livre, the good book.
Gen. Abl. Du hon livre, of or from the good book*
Dat. Au bon livre, to the good book.
PlORAIm *
Nom. Ace. Les bans livres, the good books.
Gen. Abl. des bons livres, of or from tire good books*
Dat. aux bons livres, to the good books.
Singular. — Feminine.
Nom. Ace. La bonne plume, the good pen.
Gen. Abl. de la bonne plume, of or from the good pen.
Dat. a la bonne plume, to the good pen.
.. Plural.
Nom. Ace. Lis bonnes plumes, the good pens.
Gen. Abl. des bonnes plumes, of or from the good pens.*
Dat. aux bonnes plumes, to the good pens.
EXERCISS ON THIS RULE.
The tall man,lbe little woman, and the
pfitit,zd],
pretty children, whom I tAet jesterdaj
joh',adj. que^pro. at renconfre«,p.p. Ater,adv.
with their grandmother (wore going) to London :
alloien1,ym
they were all very hungry and thirsty. - • - The polite*
avotent^y.
5*
54
inhabitants^ of that fine city treat all the
habiiant^m, eette^fro, iraitent^v.
strangers in a civil^ and frank^ manner.^ - - •
£trang^r^m* de ti»ie maniere^t.
Lean' sbeep^ grow fat in good
Maigrt^^dj. les hrtbisjLpLdevitnnent^y. dam,p.
pastures. — Constant' study^ joined to a great
j>a/ur(xg€,m. 6tiidt^f» ^otyt<,p.p.
application makes men learned. • - - The new'
applicationjf* rend^v. ^avan(,adj. neuf
coat,^ which you 'gave *me, ia
habit^m. 9ue,pro. avez donn^,p.p.
better than the old great-coat which mjr
fiiet7/eur,adj. que^c. redingote^f. •
father bad bought at bis tailor^s. - - We went
avoit acket6e chez^p. alldmes^v.
yesterday to the high court where we found all
trtnivdmesjr*
the judges already met.
(f^ja,ad. cs8embl6s;p*p»
As two or more substantives in the singular are
equivalent to a plural, the verb and adjective, or par-
ticiple past, not immediately following them, must be
put in the plural, when they refer to two or more sub-
stantives in the singular, and that ac^ectivc or participle
is to be put in the masculine, if these substantives be of
different genders : ex.
Le frere^ fa saur^ It ncrcii. The brother, sister, ne-
tt la niece, sont taus phew, and niece are all
moris^ dead.
SXKRCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The book, paper, pencil, and penknife, wJnch
papieryin* crayon,m. canif^m, que
you lent' me*, are excellent. - - - The
avez prit6yp*p. me,pro. txcellent^^dU
^n, ruler, ink horn and grammar which my bro*
righif. icritoire^t
55
tkerhas bought, arc very good. - - - Tbe king,
queen, prince, and princesses were gone. • • • The
itoient^y. 9or<t,p.p.
corn, wheat, rye, pease and beans, in a word, aH
seighitn. fht^U en mo/,m.
the grains which were on the ground,
grain^m. ftit,pro. itoitnt^v. 5tir,p. <erre,f.
were frozen. - • • My father's bouse, and my uncle'f
fur^ni^v* geli^p^pm
(country-seat) are (very noiuch) alike.
ehdUau jin. 6wi,ad?. umblahl^dj.
0
When two or more substantives of different genders
are immediately foilowed by an adjective or participle
past, these may agree in gender aad number with the last
substantive, particularly when tbe substantives are sy-
nonymous or nearly so ; any other case met with in
authors is either a poetical licence or aQ oversight : ex.
// gouvtmt avec un pott- He governs with an abso-
votr el tine auloriU aft- lute power and autbo*
solutj rity.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RUI^E.
He studies with an incredible^ application^ and
6tudie^v, incroyabU^H dj.
courage". - - - He who has for his guides
courage^m* Ce/uf,pro. ^ui^pro. «^ guide^m*
<:onsummatc' zeal* and prudence* deserves
con5omm^,adj* un 2:c/c,m. uneprudtnct^U mirite^w.
the general^ esteem* and applause* of bis
estime^fn applcujidissementyin. ses^pro.
feTlow-cilizens. - - - I found . the doors, the
conctlo2/en,m. ai /rout;e,p.p. porte^L
windows, and the shutters shut.
fimirt^L volets^m. fermt^p^f.
56
THE PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE IN A SEN.
TENCE.
Some adjectives are always placed before their
substantives, and others after then); but there is a
kind of Adjectives, which may either precede or follow
their substanUves, as the euphony of the sentence
requires*
The following are commonly placed before.*
./ '
JBeau, handsome, fine.
Bon^ good,
ifirare, brave.
Cher, dear.
Ckitif, vile, poor, mean.
Galant^ well-bred.
Grandj great, tall.
Gros^ big^ large.
Honnitej honest, civil.
Jtune^ young.
Jolt, pretty.
JiSichanl^ wicked.
Mauvais^ bad.
Meilleur^ better.
Mvindre^ less.
Pe/t<, little, small.
Saint, holy,
Tou/, all.
Vieux, old.
Frot, true.
EXERCISE ON THE rOREGOING ADJECTIVES.
I have seen a handsome lady, who (was
vu,p.p. <{ame,f. 9ut,pro.
speaking) to an old gentleman. — He had
parloit^Y. monsieur^tn. /^ro. avatV,v.
a fine hat and a pretty sword* - - Your little
chapeau^m. ^f^tf. Fb<re,pro.
sister deserved a better fate. - - I Jcnow a young
. m jri/otl, V. Aniin, m. connoxi, v.
man who has a good horse, but a bad stable. - ••
chtcalj m. icurie^ f.
* No general role pan be given on this subject however, for of
those adjectives enumerated here above, many may be placed alter
and receive a new fignification, thus un galant homme means a well-
bred man, tin homme galant^ a gallant, &c. Practice and observa-
tion onlj will give that knowledge. — See next rule.
67
He> has^ lent^ it' to an honest main - « The
a prifiyp.p. 76, pro.
apostle . Paul waft a holy man. • - • My brother has
apSlre^ m.
bought a good watch. — Your father was a
ctcAe/e, p. p. montre^L itoit^r.
brave general, and a well-bred man. - • - You have
avez^ V.
lost all your money Vile creature, .1 have
perduy p.p. xriature, f.
heard your wicked conversation. - - • Mr. A. is a
en/endti, p.p. ^ conversation^ f.
great man, and the best of all fathers.
hommt
Some adjectives have different meanings according as
they are placed before or after their substantive, as,
tins ftmmt sage^ a wise woman : tins sage ftmmt^ a
midwife ; and ime grosse femnuy a big woman ; unt
femmt grosse, a pregnant womaci ; tin kfrnimt honnete,
a civil man^; un honnete homme^ an honest man ; a lit*
ile practice will soon remove any of these apparent dif-
ficulties.
The following adjectives must be placed after their
substantives.
1. All participles used as adjectives ; as,
Unepersonnertconnoissantey A grateful person*
Du baufrdti^ Roast beef.
9. All adjectives expressing the «Aa/>e or /orm; as,
Une table ronde^ A round table.
Une chambre carrit^ A square room, .
3. All adjectives expressing the colour or taste ; as,
tJn chapeau noir^ A black hat.
Un habit rouge, A red coat.
Unepomme douce^ A sweet apple.
{7ne fi^eur amirej A bitter liquor*
58
4. All adjectives expressing the matter of which a
thing is composed ; as,
Dei parties sulfureusesy Sulphurous parts.
Un corps uirien^ An aerial body.
5. All adjectives expressing the qualitj of hearing and
iouching ; as,
Un instrument sonore^ A sonorous instrument.
Une voix harmonieusej An harmonious voice.
Un bois dur^ A hard wood.
Un corps moUf A soft body.
6. All adjectives expiessing the name of nations; as,
Uempire Romain^ The Roman empire.
La potsitAngloise^ The jBnglish poetry.
7. All adjectives, wfiich, when used by themselves,
convey the meaning of a substantive, as ricK blind^ &c.
Un homme riche, A rich man.
Unefemmt aveugle^ A blind woman.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
An ignorant young man 19 despised by (every
miprisi^ p.p. de^f* tout le
body.) - - - You have an English hat, and she has a
monde^ m. Anglois^ adj.
French gown. - He reads an Italian , proverb. - -
Frangoisj, adj.ro6c, f. lit^ v. //a/tcn,adj.proT)crt?,m.
I like (very much) the German tongue and
awne,v. &eaucou/», adv. Allemand^zAj. langue^U
the Spanish dress. - - » - (It is) a square place.
Espagnol^^dyhabillementyinfOest^y. carr^,adj. place^ f.
She likes sweet wine. - - Your si^er has an har-
atme,v. <Ioua?,adj. le vin^ m.
monious voice. -.--I have bought a white gown
voix^L b/anc, adj.
and a black ^ cloak. ---You have a faithful
;noir,adj. mantelet^ m. ^ife/e, adj.
59
servant. I cat green peai^e, with
domestique^m. €//• mangejV. vtrt^ adj.
boiled mutton. - Bring me a pound and a half
houilli^ p.p. mouion, m. demi^ adj.
of cherries, and half a pound of currants. - We had a
cerise^ L grosetlUjL ei2me^, y.
kind reception, and we played at a di«
favorable^ ^iy aecueil^mm joudmts^ ▼.a,p.c(ir
verting game. - He lives in a cold cbuntry.
vertissant^ adj. j^,m. demmre^ v. froid^hij. pays^ m.
- - You have left the windows and the door
/amtf,p.p. fenSlre^f* ^ , porttj f.
open. - * Will you have a bit of roast
v(» morceau^ m. rdft, p.p.
chicken ? - - .Do you* read* the Punic war t - -
pouht^ m. *^ lisiz^ v. Puntqut^ adj. gu«rre,f.
He has made a rash vow. - - Your sister
fait^ p.p. i^m^raire,adj. vaw, m*
is an agreeable lady. - - 1 like a grey stuflT. • -
agreab/^ adj. ^m^adj. iiofft^U
(It was) really a tragical history. .
C'e(ot/, V. rielknwnt^ adv. tragique^ adj. hUtoire^ f.
When two or more adjectives belong to one substan-
tive, the surest way is to place them "after it, with the
conjunction e/, and, before the last ; and if an adjec*
tive be used in a sentence without a substantive, this
adjective must always be rendered in French by the
masculine gender.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
We have a just, wise, and bountiful king. --
jii#f«, adj. sage^ndy bienfaisant^ ^dj*
Mr. Brown's daughter is with a sincere and
Monneur^m* sincere, adj.
generous lady. •• I have a scholar of a solid,
g^n^ reus, adj. icolier^m* solide^adj*
bright, and lively genius. -- The wicked
brillant^ adj. vif^ adj. tsprit^ ip. michant^ adj. pi.
(shall be) punished. - - Miss Preston is a
seront^ V. /mnt\ p.p. Mademoiselky f.
60
young, handsome, and well-shaped lady. - - She has
. bien-fait, adj.
married a sober, Tirtubus, and amiable
6pou86f p.p« sobre^ adj. vertueux^ adj. aimabU^ adj*
man.— 'The good (shall be) praised. — The diligent
, serontyfh /ou£, p.p. <ii%en<,adj.ph
(shall be) rewarded.
recompensi^ p.p.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
Adjectives and adverbs are the only kind of words
that will admit of different degrees of more or less in the
several qualities of persons or things*
There are two degrees of comparison :
"i, Lt comparatift the comparative.
S. Le superlatiff the superlative.
Some grammarians admit of another degree, which
they call positive : but this is. merely an adjective used io
its simple signification, without expressing any increase
or diminution : ex. joK, pretty ; atma&/e, lovely.
The comparative refers to some other person or things
and shows its equalitt/^ excess or defect : it is therefore
of three sorts :
1. L<s comparatif d*4galiti^ The comparative by equal-
ity,
2. Le comparatif d*excis^ The comparative by ex-
cess.
3. Le comparatifde defaut^ The comparative by defect.
The comparative, by equality is formed by placing the
adverbs autanlj as much, as many; aussi^ so^ or as, before
an adjective ; and ^ue, as^ after it : ex.
Voire ancle a autant d^ar* Your uncle has as much
gen/, e/ autant c2^ami« que money, and as many
man percj friends as my father.
Ma saur- est aussi ambi' My sister is as ambitious a$
tieuse que voiiSj you.
Monfrtre est aussi $W9(aU tiy brother is as learned as
que h vSlre^ yours.
61
'N. B. — From the preceding examples and the fallow-
ing, it will be easily seen that when the adverbs, tant^ so
much, so many ; autant^ as much, as many ; plus^ more,
and 77101715, less, are immediately followed by a substan-
tive, that substantive must be preceded by de. The
learner will also observe that si and aussi^ so, as ; gene-
rally precede adjectives, when a comparison is made by
either; whereas tant and autant are always followed by
a noun or verb, the French conjunction que, Englished
by either as, ihan^ or that, being the term of the com-
parison ; plus or moins may precede either an adjective,
a noun, or verb.
Than, after Tnore or less, plus ou moins, followed by a
noun of number, is rendered in French by Je, and not by
que : ex*
/e perds plus d^un Louis et I lose more than ahouis and
vous gagnez moins de cinq you gain less than five
francs, francs.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Alexander was as ambitious as Caesar. - -
6toit,y* ambitieux,2Ldy que,c. Cesar, ro.
I am as tall as you. — Miss D. has as much live-
5tit5,y. Aau^adj. Mile a,v. vivO"
liness, and she is as amiable as her cousin. — If my fa-
cif ^,f. esl,y, sa,pTO.cousitie,f» Si, c.
t her were as r ic h as my uncle, he (would make) a better
etoit, V. oncle, m. feroit, v.
use of his riches. - We have as many books as your
%isage,m. ^e^, pro. autant,2Ldy. vos,f ro.
brothers, and they are as learned as we. - 1 am as honest
sont, v. not/^.pro.
and civil as my companions. - - You ^owe *me more
compagnon,n). devez, v.
than two dollars, anil you pa}' me' less than fifty cents.
gourde payez soUyW.
The comparative by excess is formed by placing the ad-
verb jo/u*, more, before an adjective : ex.
Sa cousine est plus diligente Her cousin is more diligent
que moi, et est plus savante than 1, and is more learn-
que vous, ed than you.
62
EXERCISK UPON THIS RULE.
Miss A. 18 handsomer and more learned than
Mile que^ c.
her sisters. - - Lucia is taller and more proud
Ijucie^i. orgueilleux^ adj.*
than ber little cousin. - - • His sister is more
^a,pro. f. So, pro.
covetous than he. - - - Nothing is pleasanter to
iit)are,adj. lui^pro. Rim 7ie,adv. agr^a6/6,adj.
the mind than the light of truth
esprit^xn. ^ lumitref» viriU^i.
Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and
atm(iUe,adj.
nothing is more desirable than wisdom. —
dwira6Ze,adj. eagesse^f.
My daughter is taller than your son bj'*' two inches. —
de pouce^m*
Your brother is taller than you by the^ whole* bead^. - -
taut tSte^L
In winter the roads are always worse than
En hiver^m* chemin^m, plus mauvdis.jaLdj*
in summer. -- He gave' me* a more beautiful eagle.
it£» ' donna oig/e, f.
The comparative by defect is formed by placing the ad-
verbmotVis, less, before an adjective ; or tant^ so much,
eo many ; or «f , so ; with the negation ne pa$^ or point,
not ; or ne,nt, neither, nor, before them : ex.
Voire cousine est moins noble Your cousin is less noble
q%i€ vous, than you.
Iln'estpas si orgueilleux que He is not so proud as bis -
sa saur, sister.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Mrs. P*** is less polite than her daughter,
Mme poli^ adj.
but ber daughter (is not) so revengeful as she.
n'^est pas,?iiy. mndtco/t/iadj.
You are* *not^ so dutiful as your brother.
e/e5,v. nepas^ndv, ob^manf, adj.
My father is not so rich as yours, • but he has
le votre, pro.
* J5y, after a comparison is rendered into French by de.
63
not so much selMove Miss Goodwill has less wit
amour-propre^m^Mlle
than her mother. Paris (is not) so populous as
peuplSs^djm
London. — Your companion is neither so prudent nor
n*e$t ni ni
so circumspect as you.
It must be observed, that in sentences in which the
above adverbs more or less are repeated to express a
comparison, the definite article ihe^ preceding either, is
totally suppressed in. French : as,
Plus on esipauvre^ moins on The poorer* people are, the
a d^emharras^ less care they have.
Plus je la vois^ plus je la The more I see her, the
hats, more 1 hate her.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The mere » thing i$ difficult, the more honour-
chose^ f. di^ct7e,adj. Aono-
able^ it* is^. ^^The less you give to your chil-
ra&/e,adj. e//e,pro. donnez^v. vos
dren, the less they spend. The 'richer* they^
t7^,pro. dSpenseni^v.
are^, the more covetous they are. • - The more a
iii7are,adj.
young man studies, the more learned he grows.
etudie^v^ savant, adj. devient^y.
The more a drunkard drinks, the more thirstj' he is.--
ivrogne^m. 6oi7,v. a/<erfi,adj.
The more odious laziness is, the more we should
odt«wa?,adj. paresse,f» devrions^v.
avoid'* it*. -- The less you applyi the less you
eviter^v. Za,pro. vous vous appliquez^v.
learn. -- The more they know^ yo«% the less
apprenez^v. connoitront^vJiM.
they will esteem^ you*.
esiimeront,v.(\it.
The above comparative adverbs, 51, aussi, tant^auiant,
phis and moins^ must be repeated, in French, before
* Poorer^ richer^ and all similar forms are rendered into French hj
more poor, mott rich ; observe well the construction of the above sen-
tence.
64
each adjective, noun, verb, or adverb, in the sentence i
ex.
Voire frere est aussi savant Your brother is as learned
et aussi iclair6 que mon and enlightened as my
cousin^ cousin.
M. Robert rCa nl tant de Mr. Robert has neither 50
hien ni tant d*esprit que much wealih nor wit as
Jl/. Dubois^ Mr. Dubois.
EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES.
My father has as many (apple - trees)
e<ti/an/,adv. pommier^tn.
and (pear - trees) in his orchard as (there are)
poirier^m* verger^m^ il y en a,v.
in yours. His eldest brother (will be) more
le v6tre4 ain6^ adj. sera^ v.
attentive, industrious, and rich than he. — -
flffenfi/',adj. industrieux^diA]. lui^ pro.
Miss A*** has less wit, less liirelines9, and becom*
vivacild agr6'
ingness than her sister. - - She has as much virtue
mens
and good sense as beauty and modesty. - - My
sens Mon^ pro.
cousin is as merry, lively, and amiable as his
gm,adj. er>;oiie,adj. ses^pvo,
school-fellows.
compagnon^m.
The same rule is to be observed with respect to the
adverbs used in forming the superlative degree.
The three following adjectives are comparative by
themselves, meiWeur, better ; ;?irf, worse; and moindre^
less; which signify plus bon^ plus mauvats, plus petit ; and
atnif elder, or eldest, is used for plus age, or leplus dg6*
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The watch which my grand-father has bought
mon<re,f. fiie,pro. grand-pere^m. achet6e^p*p»
is better than the clock which be gave to
pendule^ f. a donnie^ p.p.
my mother My friend's buckles are better than
mere,f. boucle^U
86
(hose of his uncle, but mine are worse
celUs^fvo. onc/e^m* le8 miennes^pro*
than his. The life of a slave is
les 5fenn€5,pro« vie^f» esclave^m»
ten tinaes worse than death itself. The
dix /ow,adv. mort^U meme,adv*
pain which I endure is less than that which
peine^f que souffre^v. ce//e,pro« fut^pro.
is inflicted on galley-slaves.
tn^ig^6,p.p. aux gaUrien^io.
The superlative expresses the highest degree of any
quality. There are two kinds of superlatives : 1. The
relative which expresses the quality of a person or thing
ahove all others of the same kind. In this case, one of
the following articles, /e, /a, les^ de^ du, de la^ des^ a, au^ a
la, aux, precede the adverhsp/u5, standing then for most,
mieux, best, moins, least, before an adjective ; or the ad-
jectives mei//etir, best, moindre, least, j7iVe, worst : ex.
Votre saur est la plus belle Your sister is the hand-
et la meilleure femme de somest and best woman
la ville, in the town.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RUtE.
The vine is one of the ^most useful* and ♦agree-
vigne^L un Us plus u/t7€f, adj.pl.
able gifts* of Providence*. - - Virtue is *the^ most* pre-
<fon,m. Providence^fm pre-
cious^ things 1 in the world. - - * The lion is the
cieua7,adj« chose,(. du monde^m*
strongest and most courageous of all animals
ybr<,adj. . courageM*,adj. animaljVn*
(There is) the handsomest lady in London. • --She is
Fot7a,adv. de
so touchy, that she will not bear the least
&ourru,adj. veut^x* souffrir^v.
joke Miss P. is the mildest, politest, and most
raillerie^L ' J(ma?,adj. jpo/i, adj.
afiable of all her sisters. - • Ingratitude is
affable^zAy ses^pvo.
* See the gender of adjectives, p. 50. t See the note in the
page that follows this.
6*
G6
the greatest of all vices. - - - If France were as rich
as England, (it would be) the best country in the world.*
ce seroit,y» pays^m*
The absolute simply expresses the quality of a person
or thing in its highest degree. This happens when one
of the adverbs tris^ forty 6im, very, injinimentj inBnitely,
precedes an adjective ; and when any of the compara-
tives by excess or defect are preceded by one of the
possessive pronouns mon, ton, son, notre, voire, kur, ^c*
they become superlatives : ex.
Votre oiseau est ires-joli, Your bird is very pretty.
Vous ites mon meilleur ami. You are my best friend.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
God is a being infinitely great and perfect.
e/rc,m. parfait, adj.
I am your most humble and obedient
tris,^dvm o6e man /,adj.
servant. The front of your house is very
serviteur^m. fa^ade^f.
beautiful. You are very good, but your brother
beau,
is very wicked. - — - My uncle has a very fine coun-
m^c/ia»/,adj. cam*
try - house, and very spacious^ gardens'
pagne spacieux,tidj.
My best friend is dead. Our common
^o/re,pro. commun,a<ij,
enemy has Hhe^ most* inveterate* hatred^ against
inref^re,adj. haine,f. con/re,p.
this country. Their least embarrassments
cc,pro. pays^m. Leur5,pro. embarras^m.
* It may be observed in some of these examples, that the preposi*
tion in, following an adjective in the saperlative degree, must be
rendered in French by one of these- articles de, du^de to, dts^ accord-
ing to the gender and number of the substantive to which it belong.
Tht preposition hy^ when it follows an adj«ctive in the comparative
»gree, Is rendered by rfe only.
67
make their greatest delight* Pride and
fonijV* de/icwjf.pl. Orgueilym*
passion are his least defects*
colere^f. ses^pro. defaut^m*
. OF NUMBERS.
There are two kinds of numbers : Ist, The absolute^
which simply relates the number of fhe things spoken
oi^ viz.
Un^ (femin. wnc,)
Deuxy
Trois,
Quatre,
^Ginq^ {q is sounded,)
Stac, (pron. sm,)
Sepi, (pron. s^i^)
Huit^ (/ is sounded,)
A'cti/, (/is sounded,)
Dia?, (pron. dm,)
Onze^
Douze^
Treize^
Quatorze^
Quinze^
Seize^{8ei is broad,)
Dix-sept^ (pron. diss-set^)
Dix'huit, (pron. diz-uit^)
Dix-neufi (pron. diz-nmf^
Vingt^ (gt are dropped,)
Vingt et wn,
One.
Two.
Three.
Four.
Five.
Six.
Seven.
Eight.
Nine*
Ten.
Eleven.
Twelve.
Thirteen.
Fourteen.
Fifteen.
Sixteen.
Sevehteen.
Eighteen.
Nineteen.
Twenty.
C Twenty-one,
ISj &.C. 3
Fingt-trois,
TrentCj
Trente et wn,
Trenie-deuxy «J^c.
Quaran/e,
Cinquante^
Soixantej (pron. soissanie^)
Soixante et tin,
Soixante tt dtux^ <$/'C«
^Twenty-three, &c.
Thirty.
Thirty-one.
Thirty-two, &c.
Forty.
Fifty.
Sixty.
Sixty-one.
Sixty-two, &c.
Soixanie et dix^ Seventy.
Soixante et onzeyS/c* Seventy-one, &c.
Quatrt'^vingts, {gts are dropped, ) pj^l.^
andgl in the following too,) 5 ^*&"v*
Quairp'vingt'un^ Eighty-one.
Quatrt'vinghdeux^ <^c. * . Eighty-two, &c.-
Quatre-vingt'dixj ^c. Ninety, &c.
Cen/, 0 in cent is dropped, and > ^ ^^ * ^^^^^^^^
in the following too,) 3
CmUun^ A or one* hundred
' and one, &c.
Deux'CeniSj {x is dropped, and ^
the two final consonants in #
the following also, and be- > Two hundred,
fore any other word, begin- \
ning with a consonant,) ^
Trois Cenis^ Three hundred.
J^euf cents, (/ dropped,) Nine hundred.
JtfiWc, mi/,t A or one* thousand.
Deux milk, Two thousand.
Trois mille^ii'C* Three thousand, &c.
Cent mille, <$^c. A or one* hundred
thousand, &c.
Neuf cent mille, (/ dropped,) Nine hundred thou-
sand.
Un million, A million.
These absolute numbers are declined with the article
indefinite de, a, and are always placed before the sub-
stantive to which they are joined without any article
intervening ; and they are invariable in their form, ex-
cept quatre-vingt, eighty ; cent, a hundred ; and million^
a million; which take an 5 in their plural, when im*
mediately followed by a substantive : ex.
Quatre-vingts femmesj Eighty women.
Deux cents hommes^ Two hundred, men.
* It will be seen by the following^, that the Knglish particle a or
one is not expressed 'm French : ex.
Je Vai vuet lui ai parU cent I have seen, him and spoken to him a
foit, miliefois, hundred times, a thousand times.
I Mentioning the date of the year, we must write, mi/, and not
nulle : ex. Dan mil huit-ctnt quinze, the year 1815.
69
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
I was in the company of seven gentlemen and
compagnie^f. MM.
nine ladies. -- He has spoken to three officers and
dame parU.p.p.
two generals. - - If I had a hundred guineas I would'
avois^v. guinee en
lend^ you* eighty. - - The army of our
priterois^v. amUt^L no»,pro.
allies was composed of a hundred thousand
allie^m, etoit com/)o«^e,p.p.
men of foot, and twenty thousand of horse. —
in/anierie ea:oalerie»
They took fifteen hundred men prisoners,
prtr««#jv. prisonnier^
kUled four thousand, wounded a thousand,
tn tuereni^y. en bUssereniyV.
and (carried away) above two millions in specie. - -
emporierent^y • plus de especes.
The battle (was fought) in one thousand eight hun-
hataille^f. se livra^y, en
dred and fourteen, at three o'clock (in the) morning.
«>* /ieure,f. du malin*
These numbers are employed as substantives, in some
cases, as in the game of cards, and in dates : ex.
Le huU de caur^ The eight of hearts.
Jfous parttmes de Boston We left Boston on the fif-
le quinze^ teenth.
Je reviendrai le douze^ I shall return on the twelfth.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Will you but telP me*, if you have the seven of
seulement dire
clubs ? - Yes, I have^ it*, and the ten of spades too. - The
trifle F ai le pique aussi.
70
nine of diamonds (Is missing) in this pftck. -- 1 (shall be)
carreau manque ce jeu. serai
absent for a week or two, but you may be certain, that
«o^ pouvez
I shall be here on the twenty-fifth. - - Tell my sister
•o' Diies a
that I expect' her* on*the seventeenth. You may
attends la *o^ ^
date your Jelter the twenty-sixth. - The
daier^v. du
sixteenth (will be) her birth-day. - - - - - The ten of
sera son jour de nayssance^m*
diamonds is not good. - - I have the ace of spades. *-
carreau ^ as piquu
We (shall have) a holiday on the twenty-£fth instant. —
aurons du courantm
Congress met ~ on thie third of December. - - -
s^est assemble
We received the President's Message on Friday, the
recumes *<^
^fth of this month, it is most excellent,
ce tres
In every instance therefore the cardinal numbers
must be used in French when speaking of the days of
month, though the ordinal be U£ed in English ; ex-
cepting for le premier^ the first, speaking of the first day
of every month: as,
Lt premier de Mai^ The first of May.
Le deux de Xovtmhre^ The second of November.
Chst aujourd^hui le quatre To day is the fourth of
d^Amit. August.
EXERCISE UPON TJIIS RULE.
My friend will come (to see^) us* on the fifth of
viendra^w* voir^y. ^cn
next^ month'. • - Lady^ - day* falls
proc/iain,adj. mois^xn* Noire Dame jour^m. totnhe^w
on the twenty-fifth of March. -- In the leap^
L<^ Mars^m* hisstxtile^'^A'y
71
year* the month of February has one day more,
annte^U Fivrkr^ m. de plm^^dv.
which is the twenty-ninth. - - The first of November
jtti,pro. Jfooembre^m*
is (all-saints - day,) and the fifth of the same month
la toussaint mifne^zdj. mot>,m*
is the day of the ^Gun powder 'plot
des poudres^pl. canspiraiionyf.
Come on the first day of July,
Venez^y* JuilUijm.
Q. The ordinal numbers.
ijide the simple notation,
things, viz.
Lg premier ou unteme,
Le second ou deuxieme^
Le Iroisieme,
Le quatrieme,
Le dnquieme^
Le sixieme^
Le septieme,
Le huitieme^*
Le neuviime^
Le dixieme,
Le onzieme/^
Le douzieme^
Le treizieme^
Le qitatorzieme^
Le quinzieme^
Le seiziemcj
Le dix'septiime^
Le dix'huitieme,
Le dix-neuvieme^
Le vingtieme^
Le vingt-et'-unieme^
Le vingt'deuxieme^ ^c.
Le trentieme^
Le trente'deuxieme^ ^c.
Le quarantieme^
This class of numerals, be-
signifies the order or rank of
The first.
The second.
The third.
The fourth.
The fifth.
The sixth.
The seventh.
The eighth.
The ninth.
The tenth. *
The eleventh.
The twelfth.
The thirteenth.
The fourteenth.
The fifteenth.
The sixteenth.
The seventeenth.
The eighteenth.
The nineteenth.
The twentieth.
The twenty-first.
The twenty-second, &c.
The thirtieth.
The thirty-second, &c.
The fortieth.
* No elision is to be made in the article before onze^ onzietne ; huit^
huiiilmt ; for we say, ie, dw, au^ la^ dt la, a Za, &c. oumCj onxriemc, See.
72
Le cinquantieme^ The fiftieth.
Le soixantieme^ The sixtieth.
Le soixante-^t'dixieme^ The seventieth.
Le quatre-vingtieme^ The eightieth.
Le cen/teme, The hundredth.
Le cent unieme^ The hundred and first.
Le cent deuxienuj ire. The hundred and second,
&c.
Le deux centieme^ The two hundredth.
Le milUeme^ The thousandth.
These ordinal numbers are declined with the article
definite /e, /a, &c. and are placed before their substan«'l&
tives: ex.
Le premier jour du moisj The first day of the month.
EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE RULE PAGE 70.
On the eleventh of June I received twelve letters,
j^ Juin ai refWjV.
but the eleventh 'has afforded^^ * me* more
/>rocwre,p.p. ine,pro. jpiw5,adv.
pleasure than the others. Mrs. B. is the fifth
au/re,pro. Mme
lady whom I saw to day. — - The spring
que^pro. ai i>tie,p.p.aiyouf d'Awt, adv. priniemps^m.
begins on the twenty-first or twenty-second of
ctjmmencejV* *c>»
March He cannot spend the sixth
Mars. nepeuipas^y* dipenser^v.
part of his fortune The eleventh of No-
partie,{» >a,pro. fortune^L
vember, which is the eleventh month of the year,
annee,f.
was Uhe* dullest* day' of the® whole^ months
fut iristey^dj. (ouf,adj.
Speaking of sovereigns, we use the absolute number in
French, though the ordinal be used in English, except the
Jirst and secottd ; and we place it after the substantive,
as in English, without expf-essing the article the : ex.
73 •
George Trois^ (jftorge the Third.
Jafmia Seht^ Lewis the Sixteenth*
Henri Qualre^ Henry the Fourth.
Henri Premier^ Henry the First,
George Second, George the Second.
and not, Henri Un, George Deux.
We say, for the following solitary names of an Em-
peror {)nd a Pope, as a distinction from other soYereigns,
CharUs Quint, Charles the Fifth.
Sixte Quint, Sixtus the Fifth.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Edward the Sixth, the son of Henry the
Eihuard,m. fils ]
Eighth, and the grand - son 'of Henry the Seventh,
/)e/t7,adj.
was^ ^but^ nine years old when he began
a9ot/,v. ne qu4 an *^ 9«afi«{,c. eommenga,y.
to reign. Henry the Fifth, King of England,
a r6gner,v. rot,in.
the son of Henry the* Fourth, and father of Henry
the Sixths married Catharine, the daughter of
epousa,y. Catherine
Charles the Sixth, king of France; conquered the
conquitjV*
greatest part of that kingdom, and died (in the)
partie,L ce,pro. royaume,in. mourut,y. au
midst of his victories. — (Long live) George
TAilitu 5e5,pro. victoire,f. Vive,v. >
the Third, grand • son to George the Second. - - - -
pelit,^dj.
Charles the Fifth, Emperor of Germany and king of
Allemagne, rot,m.
Spain ; and Sixtus the Fifth, one of the popes, were
pape,m. 6to\snt,\.
two great men.
griinii,adj.
The definite arttc]^ the is also suppressed in French
before the ordinal inmber, when it is preceded by a
nooD used to quote a chapter, article, or page of a book ;
7
• 74* ^
but, should the ordinal number precede the noun, the
constrtiction is the same in French as in English, and
the article is expressed : ex.
Livre troisieme^ Book the third.
' Le troisiime livre^ The third book.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
What you (look for) you (will find*) it*
Ce 9ue,pro. cherchez^v. trtmverez^y. /e, pro.
in the Second Book of Samuel, chapter the third,
Samuel^ chapUre
Terse the ninth, page the first, and line tenth.
verset P^g^^f* ligne
We read in Telemachus, book the
lisons^v* ' dans Tilimaque^
seventh, page the hundred and twenty-fifth, that
que
Mentor pushed Tttlemacbus into the s^a, and^
poussa^v. mer,f.
ihrew^ himself* . X*"^^ U") afterward with
jetGy V. se, pro. y, adv. ensuUe^ adv.
him. - - - Our master forgives the first time,
/ui,pro. ^o<re,pro. pardonne^v. fois^L
threatens the second, and always* punishes*
mtnace^w ^ £()u;our5,adv'. punit^w.
thfe third.
RECAPITULATORY or promiscuous EXERCISES
upon all the preceding RULES. Review them well be^
fore you writt^
Ignorance is the mother of admiration.
Ignorance^* est^v. merest admiration^ f,
error, and superstition. - - - - The covetous dc-
«rrc?ir,f. superstition^f* arare, adj.pl. tn^-
spise the poor Humility is the basis of
prisent^y. /)aiiTre,adj. pi. Humiliti^L basest.
Christian virtues. - Pride is generally the eflFect
C/ir^<ien,adj. Orgu«7,m. ^ effet^m^
of ignorance. - • Give me some bread, meat,
Do7ine?,v. niot,pro.
7S
turnips, and water. - - Merit and favour ^ ar«
nanet, Merite^m, faveur^f. sanity.
the two springs , of envy. Interest, pleasure,
murce^ii. envie^f. Interil^
and glory, are the three motives of the actions
molif^m. action^
and conduct of men. - - h^ it^ >not*
cikiduUe^f. Est^v. ce,pro. «c pa*,adv.
Peter's book ? Your father is gone to London,
alle^p.p.
where he has bought some horses and cows, which
' vache^L ^ue^pro.
he intends to send to Canada or Jamaica.
9tpropost^v. d^envoyer^y. ou
The father's house and the son's, garden
maisonj. fardin^ m.
(are adjoining.) ------ He found the windows
*«jotgnen*,v. trouva^y. " '
and the doors shut. -- Truth is the bond of
Vir%ii,i. /ien,m.
union and the basis pf human happiness:
union,f. 6a5«,f. AMffMim,adj. honhtur^m.
wUhput it (there is no) confidence in
sana^p. elUypro. il n^y a point confiancej.
friendship, and no security in promises. - -
amitii^f.^ point^y. surel6 promesse,f.
The love of liberty and independence is the
amour^m. liberte^f. ^
character of noble mindB. — Iron, .. steel
camctercm. dme.f. Fer,m. acter'm.
and brass are more useful than gold and
ettivre^m. tia7c,adj.
silver. - - The smith has (at last) repaired
«rruncr,m. enfin,ady. r4par6,p.u.
the two jacks, and the cook (is
iourne-brochi^Tn. cuisinierej. faU
roasting) the meat. -- I have seen the inside of the
'•f'^^Y.^ ^ dedan5,m.
church Bring me my powder-box, and
tglxstjU ma,pro.
my toupee^iron. .- I take a lesson three times
mon,pro* prends^ to*
7G
. a week, - - • The study of grammar ia? 'neither^ b6
dry nor so dull, as (it is thought.) - • - -
*ec,adj. trisU^^dy on se Pimagine^w
Have some prudence and patience, and you (wilt have)
Ayez.y. aurez^v.
success A good conscience is to the soul
succis^m. conscience^f, *Jme, f.
what health is to the body. M^rlt and
'ce 9ti«,pro. santi^L corps ^m*
virtue are the only source of true
Mn?5uc,adj. viritahle^zdy
nobility. - - - Religion, commerce, and arms
nobhsse^f. Keligion^t commerce^m. crrme, f.
are proper instructions for a young prince. - -
joropre^adj. instruction^f. a
Her father has been made a knight
5on,pro. ^/^,p.p. /at7,p.p. ch^alier^m*
of the order of the Bath, and her grandfather
prdre,m. £ain,m.
wag a kBight of the order of the Garter. - * • -
itoit^Y. Jarretiertyt*
He has not (so much) profit, but more honour. * •
fan/,adv. profit
Fortune's favours are' seldom the prize of
faveur^fm raremsnt^ndv* prix^tn*
virtue. — ^^ Gaming is the son of avarice, and the father
/eii,m.
of despair This cloth is equal to some
desespdr^m, Ce,pro, drap^m. campara&/e,adj.
silk. - - 1 see the coast of England. - - The example
sote,f. voisyV. . c6/6,f. extmpie^tn.
of a good life is a lesson for the rest of man-
vitS^ pour^f^ rtsie^m. gtnre
kind. - The French • fleet was destroyed
fct«main,m. Franf ow,adj. Jlotte,(. fut.v. d<<rftt/«,p.p.*
by the brave Admiral Nelson, on the first of Augiist,
Amiral^m. von MoSt^m*
one thousand seven hundred and ninety eight* ---•-•*
* For tbe agreement of participles, see p. 344 «
77
The eldest^ bod^ of the king of England
ain^,adj.
bears the title of Prioce of Wales as
porte^v, tUre,m. ^ GalUs comm«,adr.
presumptive heir to the crown. Xiewis
prisomptifi^dj* htritier couronne^f. Louis
the sixteenth was the grand-son of Lewis the fif-
, />e/t/,adj.
teenth. -William, surnamed the Con-
Cruillaumt^m. 5urno97im^,p*p. Ccn-
queror, King of England and Duke of Nor-
qutrani^m* Duc^m. -ATor-
mandy, was one of the greatest generals of tht
mandie
eleventh century. - - - - He (was born) at Falaise, and
siecle^m* ndquit^v, a
was the natural • son of Robert, Duke of Noi^
narure/,adj. ^of"
mandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. - • - He
mandie faurreur^m. Jilh
died at Hernl^ntrude, in France, on the ninth of
mourn/, V. d
September, one thousand eighty-seven Mrs. Nel-
son's servant knows the price of all the provisions.
8€rv(mteS» sait^v. prixjoa. denrief.
- - She bought yesterday some cinckens at one shilling
pmUtt^ra.a
and three pence a piece. — She came from America
9tn/,v. Afniriqut
in three weeks. Thomas was formerly a mu-
m,p. ^'oi/ ouirefQ's^fkAv. nwr
sician, now *" he is a dancing - master,
stcten, d;>r^s«n/,adv. dansB^ maltrt
to-morrow he (will be) a painter. - - This
deniain,adv. sera^v. peintre* Ce/^e,pro.
water is very agreeable to the smell - We
odor(i/,m.
(are going) to Coxheatb, to see the camp. - - I
allons^v. «<» voir^v* camp^mm
have in my ward-robe five coats, sixteen waistcoats,
7*
78
twentj-two pair of stocktogs, and forty-siz hftod-
kerchiefs. - - - The road to Roxbury ia very bad
ehoir chemin,m.
in winter. • - • Bring us good wine, good beer,
€ii,p. hiver.
and the oil-^ttle. - • The front of the - king's
faqadt^f.
palace (is not) so beautiful as I thought. - • • GeDc*
n^tst pas croyois^y. Gtni"
rosily^ excites admiratioa. * - - Charles the second,
rasitS^U exdU^v. aJlmiration^f.
the son of Philip the fourth, the grandson of Philip
Philippe
the third, and the great grand-child of Philip the^
orrtcre petit -fils
second, lei]t his kingdom to £hilip the fifth* « *-
laissa^y. &on,pro.
On the eighteenth of February one thousand four
^o^ Ftvfier
hundred and seventy-eight, the^Duke of Clarence,
Due
brother to King Edward the fourth, was drowned in
frire^m. Edauard /u/,v. ncy^,p,p.
a butt of inaliMey*wine. - The inhabitants of the
tonn<au,oi. mal'Meie hfAitant^m.
city of Dublin have presented a petition to
•fUB,f. o»/,v. jirmn/e,p.p. adrtsst^U
the king Good cider is preferable to bad
cidre
wine. • - T^at man always wears a green hat, a wbit9
a,v.
shirt, red shoes, and black stocking^. He has
chtmistf* 6a^,ni«
nany children and plenty of money. - - Tb^
Men^adv. - beaucoup^SLdvm argmUm.
longer the day is, the shorter is the night. • - You have
jour^xn. nut/,r«
a fine hat. ^ - Shame is a mixture of the grief
HfmU^t fnilang€fm* ^qgrm,Q|.
and filar which infiaimy ctuses. • - Keli^ott^
crainUjf. que^pvo. mf<fmie^(. cause^v^
morality, governoient, fine arts, in a woid,
tnorale^f. gaufBtmemmt^m. beau en,p,
(every tbii^) is overturned. - - Hooier was the
(oul rmveric^p.p. Homere fut^v.
first poet who persooified the divine at*
po€tt,m. per$onnifia,y. Awn^adj. at-
Irihutes, human passions, and physical
tribui^m* &umam,adj. physiqut^ij,
causes. — Pride and vanity are often the source
vanite^L souvent^^du
of the misfortunes of mankind We sell
malkeur^m. vendons^r.
good bread, excellent meat, and very large
, ^ro9,adj.
fishes; but* we* have* 3^^^^,^ g^l^j ^^^
paisson ; mau,c. avons^v*
silver. • - (Is there) any beer in the cellar ? --
Ya-t'il ^ cave,(.
Mrs. B. is a good, virtuous, prudent, and
ver/tieua^^adj.
generous lady : she has a daughter as beautiful as an
angel, but she has neither so much docility nor af»
ange^m*
fability as her cousin. - - Pindar (was bom) at
Pindari^tD* ndquU^ y.
Thebes, a city of Greece. - - Malta is a sodaU islandf
Grice. Mallhe tk^U
but it produces some corn, cotton, honey,
e//e,pro. produit^w coton^m. miel^m*
figs, and the finest , oranges in the world. -- The
figut^U btau^zAy orange^L
inhabitants of thai fine country are all catholics,
pays
and go every Sunday to bear high mass. - The
vont^yjous ks Dimanch^ ^^
pleasure of the mind is greater than the pleasure
tspril
of (be bodj, and the dtieases of the mind are
corps^m* unaladit^i.
more pernicious than the diseases of the body. • *-
/iemta6ua;,adj«
Health, honours, and fortune united together,
Sant6^f* um,p.p.'*' emeni6/e,adv.
cannot satisfy the hearty of man* • - -
nepeuvent^v. satisfaireyY. C(sur,m.
(It is) in the sixth page of tlie second book, chapter
C'm/,v.
the third. - - Miss Ws. father^ a banker in the
Strand, is one of the richest men in town, but
Strand^m* t
she is prouder and more haughty than
orguet^ietta?,adj. ftautotn,adj.
if she were the handsomest woman in Europe. - - •
dtoi7,v. t
Their son arrived yesterday at Portsmouth from
Xieur,pro. arriva
Peru and Martinico, in the St. George, a ninety-
P6rou Martiniquejf
gun ship. Hypocrisy is a homage which
canon vaisseau^m. hommage^m* 9ue,pro. '
vice pays to virtue. • - A judicious answer
vice^m* rend^v. judideux^^dj. reponse^f*
does more hoilour than a brilliant repartee. ^ - -
/ai/,v. 6ft7/a«/,adj. rtpartie^U
Give me a knife and fork. My father has bought
one-aild-thirty fine grey horses. • - (He is) an
grf>,adj. Otst^v.
intrepid man, and a man of honour and pro-
tnfr^/>tde,adj. /pro-
bity. Mr. C***, the q^ieen's jeweller, has a
hiii. jouailUr
very prudent wife, and the most faithful, indus-
JideU^zdy indus-
trious, and honest servant in London. -•
irieux^didj. ftonn^/«,adj. dotnesiique t
* See page 344. \ See the remarks on the prepositions in and
by, in the note, in the degrees of comparison, page 66.
81 . . •
He found beautj, youth, riches, wiiddOH
trouvafV* • jeuneast^
and even virtue, United in her per*
m£me,adv. r<ttni,p.p, <o,pro.
son. - Thomas has dneretion, but he has no
discrition^i. nt point^dv^
wit. • - They have a quantity of apples and pears. - -
quantite^f.
Vienna, the capita) of the empire of Germany,
Vienne Allemagne^
is a fine city. - - The more pleasing plays
agr^ab/e,adj» i^pictaclt^m.
are, the more dangerous they are. - - The rich,
Jangereua7,adj. pi.
the poor, the youn^, the old, the learned, and the
5(ir(iii/,adj.
ignorant, are all subject to death. - - True friends are
sujtl^zAy^ mortj. Frot,adj.
almost as rare as good writers. • - The famous
« rare,adj« ^crivatn,m. fameux^^dy
mine of Poto^i, in Peru, is above two hundred
mtne^f. du j)/u5,adv.
and fifty fathoms deep. - •> Henry the first, king of Eng-
toise Henri
land, and brother to William Rufuf, died the richest
U Roux^ mounts, V.
prince in Europe. - - Paul is taller than you by an inch,
' ' '^ ' * pouce^m.
but Mrs. Nicholas brother is the tallest of all.
Mme
SECT. 111.
OF PROJ^OUJ^S.
There are seven sorts of Prorocrs ;
!• £49 Pnmoms personnels^ Pronouns persona).
2. Les Prontmis conjmutifs^ Pronouns conjunctive.
* See the Note, page 66.
82
3. Iab Pranoms possessifs^ ProaoQUs possessive;
4. Lis Pronom^ dcmon*/ra/(/i, Pronouns tlemonstj^tive.
5. Les Pronoms rekiiifs^ ProDOun« relative.
6. Les Pronomf inttrrogaiifs^ Pronouns interrogative.
7. Les Pronprns indSfinis^ ProtiouM ihdefiBtte.
OF PRONOUNS PERSONAL.
Pronouns personal are those whifch directly denote the
persons, and supply the place of them.
There are three persons ;
The first is the person who speaks : ex.
Je parle, J speak.
Nous par Ions ^ We speak.
The second is the person spoken to : ex.
Tn paries^ Thou .sjl^eakest.
Vousparlez^ You speak.
The third is the person spoken pf : ex.
II or elk parle^ H|5 or she speaks. *
lis or elles parlent^ They speak*
Both Genders.
Singular. Plural.
Je or moi, I. J^ous^ we. ^
Tm or <ot, thou. FoM*, you or ye.
Masculine.
// or /ui, he, it. ^ Us, or eux, tbey;
Feminine.
Elle, she, it. ' ElUs, they.
The above pronouns are never to be used but aff
nominatives to the verbs. The rest are declined with
the article indefinite : ex.
First Person for botii Gendersw
Singular. Plural.
G. A. de tnoi, of or frond roe. de nous, of or frcrtn us.
Dat. a mot, to roe. i nous, to us.
Ace. woi, me. nou^r, us.
83
Second Person for both Ganders.
Singular. Plural.
G. A. de toi^ of. or frona thee, de vous^ of or from you.
Dat. d toif to tbee* a vous^ to. you*
Ace. toiy thee, vous^ you.
. Third Person.
Singular.
G. A. de Inij of or from him. d'^elle^ of or from bcr.*
Dat. n lui^ to him. '" d, dk^ to her.*
Ace. Ixii^ him. c//«, her.*
Plural.
Masculine. . Feminine.
G. A. cTewo?, of or from them. d^elUs^ of or from them.
Dat. a eux^ to them. a elles^ to them.
Ace. ev7, them. elles^ them.
There are two other pronouns of the third person,
viz.
Singular and Plural. Both Genders.
UU G. A. A .», of or f„„ I -"^t^^ '"""■■
Dat. o^ soiy to oneself, himself, &c..
Ace. 50t, oneself, himself, &c.
N. B. Though it have been said, tbat.the personal
pronouns are used for the names of persons, it must not
thence be concluded, that they are never employed for
the names of animals or inanimate objects : this seldom
happens in the first and second persons ; but the per-
gonal pronouns, t7, elle, ils^ elles^ may denote every ob-
Ject in nature, either animate or inanimate : ex.
Ce chien est fort beau^ mais That dog is very handsome,
il est trop gras^ but it is too fat.
* ffer^ when a personal pronoun, is to he rendered by eWe, to, or lui ;
but, when joined to a noun, by the |>ronottn poflaessire^ *on^ la, 9t9,
B4
BXCaClSX CPOX THIS RULR.
This picture is very old, but it is
Ce,pro. portrait^m. ancten,aclj.
well painted. --The house trhich I bought
frun,adv. peini^p.p. que^pro. ai acte/^,p.p.
18 well situated, but I assure^ jou* that it
Mltie,adj« assure^y. fii«,adv*
costs' me* much The books which
co&te^y* fne,pro. 6eaucotip,adv.
'you saw id my : library are good
vttes^y. ma,prQ. biblioihequeS.
books, but they are. badly bound Your
tnal, adv, re/iV, p.p. Vos^ pro.
buckles (would be) much more in the fadhion, if
bouc/e, f. seroient^v, a mode^L
they were smaller^ - - - My hat is quite
e/oi6n/,v. .Afon, pro. tout^tidy* ^
new, but it is.' too big^ Their
neii/adj. /rop, adv. grand^ ^ij. £«ur,prd.
coach ^s old, but it is as good as if .
carrosse^ m. vieux, adj. W, c*
it were new. ^'
6toU^ V. new/.
2d. The general and indefinite pronoun, on, one, is al-
ways considered as a nominative of the masculine gen-
der, and can never be used (in^ French) but in the singu-
lar, though the meaning be plural; ex. When we say,
On chante, on mange^ we sing, th^ sing ; one eats, or peb-
ple eat \ we mean, some men or women sing, eat.
SXKRCISE UPON THIS RULE.
People iniii|;ine that when they are
On^ pro. sHmogine^ v. qu$ ^uond, adv. on €st^ v.
rich, they are happy *, but they (are mistaken)
on heureuxy adj. on se irompe^ v.
very often ; for, ih.e more one has, the
tres^ adv. souvent^ adv. car^ c.\
more one wishes to have. When we are
i^eu/, V. ^ aipoir,v. on
* S^ Hoses the i htkre t7, he ; t/r, they.
8$
(raised up) to honours, or we are invested
with some dignity, we (are to) expect
de quelque^2idj. digniti^f. dot/, v. s^aliendrt^y.
to be criticised* (Some persons) reported
a etre critiqu6^p*ip» On,pro, rapporta^y.
last week, that in France they
demter,adj, femmne,f. en
talk of peace.
parte;?.
The word wieme, self, is very often joined to the per-
sonal pronouns, to denote, in a more special manner,
the person spoken of:* as,
Moi'menie^ myself. Soi-mSme^ oneself/
Toi-mime^ thyself. , Nous^mtmts^ ourselves.
Lui-meme^ himself. Vous'tnimes^ yourselves.
Elle-mime^ herself. Eux-mimes^ or eUes-mSmes
themselves.
Observations on the Pronouns Je and Moi, Tu and
Toi, II and Lui, lis and Eux.
Je and moi are used in two different senses, though
both in the nominative case; Je is always followed or
preceded immediately by a verb to which it is the nomi-
native case, and has no need to be joined to another
pronoun : hut moi always requires to be followed by one
pronoun or more, either expressed or understood : ex.
Qui a pris mon livre ? Who took ipy book ?
Oest moi. It is /. That is,
Oesi moi qui Paipris^ It is / who took it.
Moi must be used instead of Je before an infinitive
mood, or at the end of a sentence, when it is intended
to express something si^dden, as grief, &c. ; when /, in
English, is followed by the pronoun relative who or
whom^ or is preceded by the verb c/rc, to be, used im-
personally, as cVa/, it is ; and lastly, whenever any diffe-
rence or distinction is intended between persons ; in
which case it must be immediately followed by Je; ex.
Moi lui parler ! I speak to him or her !
Moi qui vous /iime, / who love yout
8
II itoii a pied tt moi films He wss on foot, and / was
d (hvoal^ on horseback.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE*
Wfao (was calling^) me' ? - r It was not
apptloit^y. fne,pro. Ce iioit nepasyadv*
L - — The boy wants to speak^ (to you*.) - • • I
desire^y* *o* parkr^y* vous^
who am older than he, I, go and speak^
5g^,adj. /m,pro. allergy. xy»
(to himH) No, I will not go, (let hixn come)
/m,pro.^on,aclv. ret(x,v. yaller^ quHl vienncyy,
himself. - - - It is I who (am to)* he rewarded
dois^y. ricompensi^p.p.
instead of him. - - - My father commanded the
au lieu .. /ti2*,pro. tommandoityy*
horse, and I commanded the foot He
cavalerie^L commandois infanteriej*
could not do^ it* in one day, and I
put^y* faire^y. /e,pro. en,p.
did it in the space of three hours
mjait^y. dans^p, espace^m* heure*
When the enemy appeared, my companions
parut^y. rnes^pvo.
(ran away) and I remained alone.
prirent lafuite^y. restai^y* 5eu/,aclj.
The same rule is to be attended to with respect to
toi^ liiij eux, &c. : as,
Toi qui me paries^ Thou who speakest to me. •
Lui qutje mdprise^ He whom I despise.
£ux fue je respecie, They whom I respect.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
How darest thou answer thy
Commen^adv. oses^y* repondre a, v. /on,pro.
master in so^ insolent* a* manner*? thou
de 5i,adv.uwo/en/,adj. • maniere^f.
whom he lores, thou for whom he takes
que^pro. ai'mcjV. ;)our,p. 9tu,pro. prend^y.
so much pains. He and they, not (being able)
peine,sing. p&uvant^y.
87
(to agree,) were obliged to part -
B^accordtr^"^. furmt^w. o6%c,p.p. rfe 8e siparer^y*
It is I who wrote the letter but it is he
at ^cn7,p.p. Uttre^L
who ^carried ' it*. It is» 'neither* I, nor
a por/ee,p«p. /a,pro. Ct ne m,c. m,c.
thou, nor he, who have broken the windows,
avons^v^ cass6,p.p* ftniire^f.
but it is they who have^ done^ it*.
oni^Y. fait.p,p. /e,pro.
After these remarks, it is also necessary to observe
here, that j'c, I, and nous^ we, never admit of an adjec-
tive or participle immediately after it, except in ac^j,
or deeds^ notes^ or bills^ receipts^ and the like : ex.
Je, soussignS^ demeurant a /, the undersigned, living in
Londres, declare^ ire. Lo'ndon, declare, &c.
Nous, $oussig7i£s, rtconnois* fFe, the undersigned, ac-
tons avoir regu de Mons. knowledge to have re-
D**, la somme de — ceived from Mr. D**, the
sum of —
OF' CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
These pronouns are called conjunctive^ because they
are always joined to some verb by which they are gov-
erned, and are generally used for the dative or accusa-
tive case of the personal pronouns. There are three
persons in the conjunctive as in the personal, which are,
For the First Person, both Gender?.
Singular. Plural.
Dat. or Ac. Me^ Moi^* me, or to me, J^ous, us, or to us,
for a moi, or moi. for a nous, or nous.
For the Second., both Genders.
Dat. or Ac. Te, Toi,* thee, or to thee, Fbtw, you, or to you,
for a toi^ or /oi. for a vous^ or vous..
• Moi and toi wmi be used instead of me or te, after the second
person singular or plural of the imperative mood, conjugated without
a negative : ex«
ctouieg'fnoi^ hear me,
W«w?-fnpt\ fpUow me.
88
For the Third.
Singular. — Masculine.
Dat. Luij ( to him, to it, ) for a /m\
Ace. Lcj \ him, it, I for lui.
Feminine.
Dat. Luj, ( to her, to it, ) for a elle.
Ace. La, I her, it, 5 ^^^ ^^^^'
Plural. — Bot^ Genders.
Dat. Leur, ^ to them^ ) for a eux^m. a tilts f.
Ace. Lt$, \ them, 5 ^^ eua;,m. ellts^L
r\^i ^ A^^ c ( oneself, himself, )r - •
Dat. or Ace. Se, J herself; themselves, } ^^^ «*'"' *""*'"•
'^ Five of these pronouns are used for the dative or ac-
cusative case, and are of both Genders, viz.
^ JIfe or mot, it or for, nous^ votis, se : ex.
Vaus toe parlez^ You speak to me.
// vous cm/, He believes you,
Vaus me priez dt^ ^c» You desire me <o, &c.
In the first example, me is the dative case, because it
may be turned by d mot, to me*, in the second, vous is
the accusative, &c.
Lui, and /etir*are used in the dative only,* and are pf
both genders :
Je lui parity I speak to him or to her.
Vaus leur icrivez. You write tq them.
The three others are used for the accusative, and
may be applied to things animate or inanimate, viz.
Le, mas. bim, it; to, fern, ber, it; and its, masc.
and fern, ibem : ex.
Je le T^ois tous itsjtmrs, I see him every day.
Je le sais, I know it. ^
Nous la connoissons. We know htr.
11 les envtrra ce ^otr. He will send ihem to-night'*
89
Th6 pronoan pertooal may be placed before or aAcar
the ¥eA}, agreeably to the Eoglish constraction; but
the coDJunctive pronouns are to be placed (in French)
before the verbs bj which they are governed, though
tbej come after them in English : ex.
Jt parity I speak.
Jivons-nmis parle^ Have we spoken I
II me parU^ He speaks to me.
JsTous les connoissons, We know them^
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULfe:.
Your brother bought yesterday a very good book,
acheia^v.
and after having^ read^ if, he gave* il*
apres^p. avoir^x* /ti^p.p. /e^pro. donna^y.
to my sister. — You speak of my cousin,
ma,pro. tnon,pro.
do you know him f — I see her and speak
too connoissez^v. i3ow,v. parU^v.
to her (every day). - - - Do you^ know* your
toas les jours. *oo savez^v* vos^pro.
lessons ? - - - We know them all. I (wiH carry)
Zefon,f. savonSyV. /oM/,adj. niinerai^y.
them to my brothers, but I (will write)
c/iez,p. med',pro. ccrirai,v.
to them before. ----- I find him more reason-
auparavant^didv* trouve^y* raifori'
able than his sister. - - Your dog (is*
nabU^^dj. sa^pro. cAien,m* a
thirsty,) shall' P give'' him' water ? - - They are
soif, donnerai^v. lui
tired, and I give them some rest.
fatigud^p.p^ donne^y* rtpos^m*
In the second person singular and the first and second
persons plural of a verb in the imperative mood conju-
gated o^rmaftre/^, the conjunctive pronouns come after
the verb : but if the ver)|> be conjugated negatively^ the
pronouns follow the above rule : ex.
* Sec page 174.
8*
90
DonnezAni de Pargenl^ • Give him money.
JVe lui donnez pas de pain, Do not give him any bread.
EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDINO RULES*
Send them some apples, ' but do not sen^^
Envoyez^Y. *o%
them any plums. - - I give you these books,
pruntf. donne^v. ce«,pro.
but do not lend them to your brother. - - - •
loi pritez^y. votreMO.
You may tell it to my father, but do not
pouvez^Y. dire^Y* mon,pro. io«
tell it to my mother. - - Believe me, go
dites^Y* m(i,pro. Croyez^y. alltz^Y.
and speak to them, but do not insult , them. - -
<^» parler^Y. to, insulitz^Y.
Have you returned (to her) the handkerchief
renJUfp.p. moMchoir^m.
which she has lent you ? - - Send it to-morrow,
que jore/e,p.p, /c2emam,adv.
do not forget it. - - Bring me some cho-
«x^ cuhliez^Y. Apportez^Y. cho-
colate, but bring' me^ 'no* sugar.
colatym.
When ti^o imperatives are joined by either of the con-
junctions, el, and ; oti, or ; the conjunctive pronoun or
pronouns may precede the last imperative by which it is
governed ; but fhat construction is not now much used : ex.
ChtrchtzAe, el lui diies de Look for Um, and tell him
venir ici, or diies lui de,&c* to come hither.
After the verbs sejitr d, to trust to, penser d, songer d,
to think of, viser d, to aim at, courir d, accourir d, to run
to, venir d, to come to, and some of the reflective verbs
followed by a preposition governing a dative case, the
pronouns must be placed after the verb, especially if
used in opposition or contradiction to each other ; or
denote the order in which %thing ought to be done :
and if there be more than one dative pronoun, the first
only may be placed before the verb, and the others
after : ex.
91
Fiez-^om a moi^ Trust to me*
Nous ptnsons a vous, We think of you.
Cela s^adresse a toi, That is addressed to thee*
Jt cours a iui, , 1 run to him.
U me park aussi bien qu^k He speaks to me as well as
vous et a eux* to you and them.
EXERCISE OK THESE ANB THE PRECEDING RULES*
"Bring me my hat, or send it to me by
the carrier. - - - - Trust to him, but do not
voiturier^m. Fiez-vous^v.
trust to them, and do not believe them. - - Think
croyez^y. ^ Pensez^y.
of usy and write to us as soon as you can. - - -
icrivez^w /6f,adv. pourrez^y.
Go and see her, and carry her these
AlUz^y. »o^ voir^y. portez^y. cc5,pro.
flowers. - - - Send me my clock, or bring it
fieursf. penduUyf.
to me yourself. - - - Do not give it to
vous'tnime^fTOm donntz^y*
my sister, give it to me. Why do you prefer her to
•o' priferez^y.
me, and give her all your affection ?
When two or more of the conjunctive pronouns come
together in the same sentence, they must be arranged
in the following order.
Singular. Plural.
Me\ m. & f. me.or to me, Kous^ m. & f. us or to us,
Te, m. & f. thee or to thee, Vous^ m. & f. you or to you,
Se, m. & f. oneself, him- Se^ m. & f. themselves,
self, herself,
art to he placed before all others ; — next,
Le, m. him, it, Les^ m. & f. them,
L% U .her, it.
And then,
Lui, m. & f. to him, to her, Leur, m. & f. to them.
// me le promit^ He promised it to me.
Je vous les donneraij I will give them to you.
92
EXBRCISE UPON TAlS RULfU
My brother (will send) them to you, or he
ent?erra,v.
(will bring) them to you himself. - - * He likes
apportera^y* aimCjV.
your* hou&e" (very much') ; for tee showed
votre^TO. fort^^dv, cflr,c. ftmei -ooir^y^
it to him. Carry it to them. — He will« "not*
Portez^y, TeW,v, ne par
sell^ it* to them*, but he will give it to
veiidre^y* veut donner^y.
you. - • - If they ask a favour, will yoa
Si,c. demandent^ym grdce^L *<»
refuse it to them ?---Why do yoa
refuserez^y* Pourquou^dy* «o»
give it to him ? Had you not promised
donnez^v. Aviez^y. promis^p^p^
it to her ? - - - He speaks tc* me,and not to you. --
parlt^y. nmi pas
If they behave themselves well, I will
comporUnt^w
reward them. -.- He had promised it to
recoTnpenserai^v. avoit^y.
him, but he gave it to me.
a c{onn^,p.p.
N. B. There arc three other conjunctive pronouns,
commonly called particles relative, or supplying pro-
nouns ; they are en, y, and /e, and follow the foregoing
rules for placing them, y taking the precedence of en,
when they meet together in a sentence.
En always denotes a genitive or ablative, and relates
to some object mentioned before : it rs rendered in
English by of or from him, her, i/, them ; about him, her,
it, &c. ; TDtlh or zoithout him, her, it, &c. ; at it, &c ; for
it, &c. ; upon it, &c. ; any^ one, ones, none, some, some of,
&c. ; thence, thereof and sometimes it is elegantly under-
stood in English, especially when immediately followed
by a numeral adjective or a noun of quantity, though
it-must be absolutely expressed in French : ex.
93
Jfous et^ parlons^
J^en suisfachi^
DonntzAm en,
Lui en avez-vmis port6 ?
. ^e lui eo mvtnjez pas^
Xous en venons^
Combien avez-vous de do-
mtstiquts ? Nous enavons
Avez-vous un jardin a la
.campagne ? Oui, nous en
uvons un tres^olij
We speak ofhim^ of her ^ of
if, of them ; about him, ,
about her, about it^ about
them.
I am sorry /or tV.
Give him some^ (of it.)
Did you carry him or her
any? (of them,)
Send him or her none.
We come from it or thence*
Hofir many servants have
yon? We have six, {of
them.)
Have you a garden in the
country f Yes, we have
a very pretty one, {of
them.)
In the third, fourth, fifth sentences, it should be ob-
served, that the pronouns ofit^ or of them, &lc. are ele-
gantly understood in English, according to tlie object
or objects mentioned before.
EXERCISE UPON THIS BVIX*
I have heard that your uncle is arrived,
out' dire,Y. arriv6^p.p»
and P am' very* glad* of it^ - - She spoke* to
at>e,adj* parla^v^
him* of it«. Talk=» .no» more* of it^ for I»
Parlez,v^ ne plus, car,c.
wilP not^ hear* of it' (any more*). • -
veux,y. ne entendre parler,y. plus^^dv.
P thank* you" for it'. - - Do you* 'not* see'
remercie,v. *^o* voyez,v*
the« beauty'' of it' ? - - They are sorry for
sont,y. fStch6,^ij.
it - • Since you have no pears in your garden,
Puisque,c. poire
I (will send) you some. « - • They* have* stolen'
enverraijV* oni^y* voU^p^jf*
94
from us* the* greatest part' of them'. - - My
brathof has-wHtten a letter to your sister, and
ccn/, p.p.
sbown^ me^ the* two* first* lioes'^ of 4t^ - - -
a motttr6,p,p* ligne^f.
Will you lend roe spme i^ooks ? With ail
VouUz^v. preter^y* De^p.
roy heart, 1 (will lend) you some . very pretty
ccsiir,m* prelerai^y*
ones. - - Do you^ think* that^ she* has' spoken
^cn *o» croytz^y* at/,v«subj. parli^p^p*
to him* of it® ? - - Jf I had money, 1 (would give)
avois^y* donnerois^y*
you some, but you know, as well as I do,
. nia^,c« savez^y. *o*
how ' scarce* it* is'* now. - - - - Send*
combien^zdy. rarc,adj. .a pr£seni^^y.EnvqyeZyy»
me* *none^*. - - - Have* you^ any* ? - - - Do *you*
nempas Avez^y, uc» '
remember^ it* ?
souvenez^y* en.
Y is used for the dative only : it is Englished by to it,
to them, ofit^ in t/, upon i(^ thither, there, 4^c. and very often
not expressed in English, though it must be in French,
it seldom supplies the place of animate objects, except
when connected with the verbs ^cr, to trust ; penser, to
think ; and the like in a reply : ex.
J'y consens, I agree to iU
Nous y penserons, We shall think of it*
Ke vous y fiez plus, Trust them no mor^.
EXERCI6E UPON THIS RULE.
I* *never5 (wifl* consent) (to' it,) and*^
n«j«mflw,adv. conseniirai,y.
I* 'neither* wilP . apeak® nor' write*^ to
neni veux,y. parler,y* nt,c. itrire,y.
^him^» - -* Believe me, go and see them, do
Croyez^y. allez^y, -o^ «o^
95
»not* V^onfide'' (itf it.) - - Wc» have* forced^
jiezvouSjYm ' anons^y* forc6^p.p»
them^ to it^. - - - -I (will carry") my' brother^ thitheH
menerat\y«
myselP. - - He* (will carry*) them' to you" thither* him-
portera^v. y
self. — - Did you think of what you bad
Avtz^Y. pens6^p*p^ a ceque^pro^ aviet^v.
promised me ? - - - No, but* P will think*
j9romu,p,p« ^on,adv* penserai^w
(of it^.) - - (It is) a good book, wc» read' excellent*
y C'«5/,v. OTi,pro« /i/,v.
things^ in it.^ - - Our orchards are very fruit-
ckoge^f. J^os^pro. verger^m. fer-
fol, we see all sorts of fruits in
ft/e,adj. on,pro» voit^v. sortt^U fruit
them. - • Since those people have deceived
Puisque^c. ces^pro. gens^pL /rom/>^,p.p.
you, do not trust, them (any* more.) - - Often when a
»o» Jiez^y. plxis^hiv. Souvent^Jidv,
friend is dead we* think* of him' "no
mor(,adj« o7i,pro. ptnu^y^
(longer*.)
p2ii9,adv.
Lt which in English is either not expressed, or most
commonly rendered by 50, likewise prevents the repe-
tition of one or more words, and supplies ih€ place of
the same. It is indeclinable when it relates to, and
holds the place of, one adjective or more, a verb, or a
whole member of a sentence : ex.
Voui rn^avez cru hellt^ mais^ You have thought me hand-
le ne le suis pas^ some, but I am not {so.)
N0U8 6iions embarrassis^ et We were embarrassed, and
nous le sommes encore^ are so yet.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
My * brothers were ill yesterday
Jlfe5,pro« etoient ma/a Je,adj. i^ter,adv.
96
and ar6 so still to-day I am
encore,adv* aupurdPhui^^idv*
satisfied with my fate, but my sister. is not.
content^zdj. de sort^nt* ma,pro*
I had heard that your sister was married,
avois^Y. out dire^p^p. que eloit^v. mane,p.p.
but my cousin tells me that she is not. - - -
mon,pro« dil^v.
' Our master rewards us when we deserve
JVo/re,pro. recompense^v* miritons^y*
it. - - - Children (ought to) apply to their i
doivent^w. s^appliqutr^y* Iturs^pvo^
studies as much as they can. • • • - I thought
au/an/,adv« peuvent^v* croyois^Vm
your brother was diligent, but 1 mistook,
itoit^Vi me suis <ram/)^,p*p.
for he is not, and 'never* (will be^) so^.
ne jamais ^^dv, sera^Y*
On the contrary, le is declinable when it relates to,
and holds the place of^ one substantive or more ; then
le is used for the masculine, la for the feminine, and
hs for the plural : ex.
Etes-vous le jils de mon Are you my friend Mr. D's
ami JIf. 15**? Out, je son? Yes, , I am, (ftim.)
le suis^
Eles-vous la mere de ce Are yon the mother of
bel enfant ? Oui^ je la that fine child ? Yes,
5WW, I am, (fter.)
Etes'vous les tantes de M* Are you Mr. BrownV
Brown ? Oui^ nous les aunts ? Yes, we are,
sommes^ (themJ)
Esi'Ce Id voire livre ? Oui^ Is this your book ? Yes,
ce I'es/, ' it is, {it.)
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
(It is said) that you are the son of my neighbour
On dt7,v. . que voisin^m*
Mr. Peter, are you so ? Yes, Sir, I
Picrre,m. Monsieur^
97
kmm - - - Are you the sister of Mrs. Adams ? Yes,
Mme
1 am. - - She is very amiable, 'and so* are* you' also*. - -
aima6/e,adj. aussi.
Are you the ladies whom my mother expects ?
damef* que aiUnd^Y.
Yes, we are. - - *Are 'these ^young ^people the
{Sont'%U)ceSy\iTQ. jeun6,adj. gen^, pl«
scholars whom you have taught ? Yes, madam,
icolier^mm enseignis^jp.p*
they are. - - (Is that) the horse which you bought
Est'Ce la cheval^m. que avtz acheti
from my brother ? Yes, it is. - - - - (Are these) the
S<mt'Ce Id
houses which you built ? Yes, they are.
itoezfait hAlir^y. sanL
N. 6. It must be observed, that the following pro-
nouns, nte, f£, se^ /e, /a, and, les^ can never be used after
a preposition ; as we cannot say ^fitois avec /e, avtc to, I
was with him^ with her ; but we must use the personal
pronouns, mot, /en, soi, lui^ elle^ and eux^ or ellea^ and say,
fitois avtc lui, axeG eile, &c.
£X£RGISE UPON THIS RULE.
The nosegay which I gathered in our
houquet^m. que ax ct£et7/t,p.p.
garden is for her, and not for him* - - He
|jowr,p. non pas ^aiy»
was with ine when we received a letter from
Stoii^v. re^ttmes^v.
them. - - If he do not come soon we (will set
«o^ vientjW &2en/o/,adv. parii-
out) without him. - - - Your Asters have dis*
rons^v* sans^ji. Fb5,pro. micoti"
pleased me, I am very angry with them.
<en/e,p.p. ' suis fdche^ady con/r6,p.
- - Your brothers have broken these windows, I
ont cct5se,p.p, ce^,pro.
9 ^'
98
am sure of it, for I was behind them, and
surfid]* car,c. etois derriirejp.
John was with me.
Jean, etoit
Y and en always go last in a sentence, except the
pronoun of the first person mot, which, in the impera-
tive mood of a verb conjugated affirmatively, is placed
after y and en : ex.
// vous y en enverra^ He will send some to you
thither.
Apportez'j en moi, Bring me some hither. '
N. B. The above pronouns, when governed by two
or more verbs, must be repeated, in French, before
every governing verb ; though most generally expressed
hut once in English, and after the last verb : ex.
Voire fils vous aime et vous Your son loves and fears
craint^ * yoii*
Je le plains et Vencourage^ I pity and encourage him.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
You have very fine roses in your garden : when
avez^y.
I am in the country, pray send me some hither:
seraijV. a de grace envoyez^y.
- - May God bless and reward her ! said
Que Dieu benisse^y. recompense^v. dit^v,
the prince. - - 1 'neither* wilP sell* nor'' give*®
ne ni veuoc^y. vendre donner^v.
Hhem® (to *you^). - - Our master rewards and punishes
punil^y.
us when we desewe it. - * - Often beauty seduces
scduit^y.
and deceives us. - - * That child has good parents, he
trompe^y. ^ Cet^
cherishes, honours and respects thero*
chirU^y. honorc^y. respecte^y^
99
N. B. Bear constantly in mind the place of these
wordft \u a seDtence, first the preposition, next the nega-
tion ne^ then the pronouns in the order above mention-
«4: ex,
Faiies-moi souvenir de ue Remind me not to give him
\w\ en point donner^ any*
OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.
These pronouns are called possessive^ because they
aWajs denote property or possession.
There are two sorts of possessive pronouns, viz. ab-
solute and relative.
The absolute are so called, because they must always
precede the substantive to which they are joined, and
agree.with it (and not with the possessor as in English)
in gender , number^ and case :— They are,
Singular. Plural.
Masc. Fem. Both Genders.
Mm^ Ma^ or Mon^ ) *1 « Qmon'dme^ Mes^ my.
Tm^ Ta, or Ton, > |^- [1 < ton dme, Tes, thy.
Son, iSa, or Son, ) -^ II ( *on am6, Scj,hi8,her,orits.
Both Genders.
J^otre, Kos^ our.
Votre, Vos, your#
Lewr, Leurs^ theic
They are declined with the article Indefinite Je, a : ex.
Singular. <
Masculine.
Nom. Ace. mon pere, my father.
Gen. Abl. de monpere, of or from my father.
Dal. a monpere^ to my father.
. Feminine. ^
Nom. AcC. ma mire^ my mother.
Gen. Abl. de ma mere, of or from ray mother.
Dat, a ma mere, to my mother.
100 ^
Masculine.
Nom* Ace. mesfreres^ my brothers.
Gen. Abl. de mesfreres^ of or from my brothers.
Dat. a mesfreres^ to my brothers.
Feminine.
Norn. Ace. mes saifrsy my sisters.^
Gen. Abl. de mes saurs^ of or from my sisters.
Dat. a mes saurs^ to my sisters.
The others are declined as the prccediBg.-
These pronouns ought to be" repeated before every
substantive in a sentence, though but once expressed in
English; they must agree in. gender and number with
the noun before which they arc placed, that is, with the
thing possessed and not the possessor ; they must also be
used in French, when speaking to any of our relations
or friends, though they be suppressed in English : ex.
J^ai perdu mon chapeau et I lost my hat and* gloves*
mes gants^
Bonjour^ mon pire^ Good day, father.
Eles^ous W, ma saur ? Are you there, sister"?
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Give me my dictionary and grammar. • - She
dictiimnaire^m^ grammaire^U
had lost her gloves and fan. - - - - Have
moit^y. perdujf.p. iventail^m. Avez,y.
you found your pen ? - His daughter is
irouv6,p»p* plume^f. fille^f.
older than my son, but her son (is not)
plus dgte fils^m. n^est pas^v.
so tall as my nephew. - - - Her brother says
grand^^dj* neveu^m. dit^v*
that he wilP 'not* refuse^ you^ what you ask
refusera^v. ce que demnndez.v^
of him. - - Dear father, pray forgive me. - - My
co» de grdce
ambition is the only cause of my iropru-
ambition^f. ^tx/,adj. caust<if* imprU'
dence. - - - I have seen ypur father, mother, bro-
*Zence,f. ^ a»,v. i?M,p.pf
101
thers, and sisters* * - - Her affection for me is
affection^f. pour^p.
false. — - Good night, cousio, I hope that you
^aux^adj* £oir,iD. espere^y* que
(will come) soon to see my coantry-
viendreZjV. bten<d/,adv* »o^ voiryV*
house and gardens. - - - Your horses and carriage
chevaljinm carrosse^m
are very beautiful, but the queen's horses and carriages
6eaii,adj.
are much more so.
beaucoup^adv.
When, in English, these pronouns are used in a sen-
tence, speaking of any part of the body, they are not to
be expressed in French, but the preposition in and the
pronoun are rendered by the article definite ; the per-
sonal pronoun being sufficient to determine in French
the possession : ex.
J^ai mal aux ytux^ I have a pain in my eyes,
and not dans mes yeux,
II se cassa le hras. He broke his arm*
and not son bras.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
My mother has (a pain) in her head. • - - I have
a,v. mal a,p. tiu^f.
(a pain) in my ear, and she has (a pain) in her
oreilUyf.
teeth. - - - When 1 eat meat, I have always
dentS. mange^y. lmi;<Hir5,adv.
a pain in my stomach. - - The man who fell from
estomac^m. tomba^y.
the roof of our house, disjointed his wrist,
/oi7,m. se demt7,v. poignet^m.
broke his right leg, sprained
cIroi/,adj. jambe^f. se donna une entorse
his left foot, dislocated his shoulders,
au gauche^Qidj* .j9te<l,m. se disloqua^y* 6paule,L
and hurt bis head. - - • When I run fast,
s€ bUssa^y* coursyy. vtu^^dy^
9*
1052
1 (am afraid) of falling and breaking my
crainSyV* tomhtr^w. dt me casser^v*
arm or neck. ^
Ils^^ their^ having a reference to inanimate or irra-
tional objects, and placed in another member of the
sentence frrtm that wherein the object referred to is
itself expressed, are not made into French by son^ $a^ ses^
&c. but by the pronoun en placed before the verb, and
the articles le, la^ Its : ex. *
Paris est une grande ville^ Paris is a large city, but its
mais les rues en sont trop streets are too narrow,
etrdtesj (that is, the streets of it.)
EXBRCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Windsor is a fine town, I admire ita^
vt7/c,f. admire^v,
situation, walks, and streets. - - This
siiuation^f. promenadef* rue,f. Cc/^e, pro.
house is well situate, but its architecture
5i^Me,adj. architecture ^L
docs not please me much. - - - - His coach is
«<?i plait^v, beaucoupy^d\% carrosse.m.
beautiful, (every body) admires its painting
tout lemonde^m. admire;^* peintiire^^.
and ornaments. - - - The shops of London are
(very fine,) foreigners especially see their
5uper&e,adj. 6l r anger ^m, £ur-tout,i\d\\
riches and cleanliness with pleasure and astonish-
ment. - - - The walks of your (country-seat) #re well
allie^f. chdteaUyXn.
kept, I like their regularity.
/enu,p.p. reeularitej.
The relatives are never joined to any substantive ; far
the substantive to which they refer is always implieU In
the pronoun. They are.
Masculine.
Stwh Plur.
Ft^minine.
Sing. " Pi*or.
Le mten, les miens,
Le iien^ Us Htns,
'.cwn, les siens^
la miennf^ les miennes, mine.
la tienne^ 'Us tierines^ thiac.
la sienne^ les aitmies, his or bers.
103
Masculine. Feminine.
Sing. Plural. Sing. Plural.
Le noire, les n6(res^ la ndlre, Us ndtres^ ours*
Le voire, les xoires, la vSlre, Us v6tres, yours.
Le leur. Us Uurs, la leur. Us leurs, theirs.
They are de.ql^ned with the article definite; ex.
Singular.
Masculine. Feminine*
Norn. Ace. Le mien, la mienne, mine.
Gen. Abl. Dii mien, de Id mienne,o( or from mine.
Dat. .^ti mien, a la mieiine, to mine.
Plural.
Masculine. Feminine.
Norn. Ace. Les miens, Us miennes, min^e.
Gen. Abl. Des miens, des miennes, of or from mine.^
Dat. ^tix tniens, aux miennes, to mine.
The rest arc decllDed as the preceding.
When any one of these relative prono^lns is used after
the verb etre^ to be, signifying to belong to, it must be
expressed in French by one of the pronouns personal in
the dative; and when joined to a noun substantive, it
ought to be rendered by a pronoun possessive absolute,
and the substantive must be put in the genitive plural :
ex.
Ce livre est a moi, This book is mine, (that it,
belongs to me.)
C\st un de mes amis, He is a friend of mine, (that
is, one of my friends*)
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Your daughter is handsomer than mine, but
6€aii,adj.
mine has more wit than yours. • - - Her house is
esprit
more convenient than ours, but yours is not so
commode,adj.
well situate as theirs* This hat is mine and
Ce,pro.
104
not yours, but this sword is yours and
non pas cette^pvo.
not his. ^ I lost a book of mine, and a friend
ai perdu,p.p*
of yours found it* - <- - - He soldlne a knife,
a trouve^p.p. couteau,m*
but this knife was not bis, it wy a friend of his
etoit c*6toit
who had lent it to him.
avoit prite^v.
OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE.
These pronouns are called demonstraiivej because
they distinguish, in a precise manner, the persons or
things to which they are applied. They are,
Singular.
Feminine.
cel/e, this, that.
celU, she, that. .
celle-ci^ this.
celk'ldy that.
Plural.
Feminine.
Masculine.
Cc, at*
Celui^ he, that,
,Celui'ld^
ce*, these, those.
ce//ef, they, these, those.
ulltS'Ci^ these.
celks-ldy those.
Masculine.
CeuXj
Ceux-ci^
Ceux'ld^
Ce qui^ ce que^ what.
Cecij this ,- cela^ that.t
The last two are always of the musculine gender,
and of the singular number.
* Cet is used before a noun masculine beginning with a vowel, or
H miite : ex. cet otseau, this bird ; cet honneur^ this honoar.
t The word ihaty coming between two verbs, and followed by a
noun or pronoun, is then a conjunction, and must be rendered into
French by que^ even when' implied in English : ex.
/« sais que totrefrlu tit'marii^ I know thai your brother i* mar-
ried, or, I know your brother is
married.
105
These pronouns are decliDed wiifa the article indefi-
nite, de^ a : ex.
Singular.
Masculine.
Noiii. Ace. ce livre^ this or that book.
Gen. Abl. de ce livre^ of or from thi3 book.
Dat« d ce livre, to this book.
Plural.
Nom. Ace. ces livres^ these books.
Gen. Abl. de ces livres^ of or from these books.
Dat. a ces livresj to these books.
Singular.
Feminine.
Nom. Ace. cetle plume, this or that pen.
Gen. Abl. de cette plume, of or from this pen.
Dat. a cette plume, to this pen.
Plural.
Nom. Ace. CIS plumes, these pens*
Gen. Abl. de ces plumes, of or from these petls.
Dat. d cefi plumes, to these pens.
* Singular.
Masculine.
Nom. Ace. celui, he, him, that.
Gen. Abl. de celui, of or from him.
Dat. d celui, to him.
Feminine.
Nom. Ace. ceile, she, her, that.
Gen. Abl. de celle, of or from her.
Dat. a celle, to her.
Plural.
Masc. Fem.
N. Ace. ceux^ celles, they, them, those, such a)!.
G. Abl. de ceux, de celles, of or from those.
Dat. d ceux, . d celles, lo those.
The othep are declined as the preceding.
I
106
N. B. He^ she, they, him, her, them, being immediately
followed in a sentence by who, whom, or that, used in
an indeterminate sense, not relating to any individual
mentioned before, and only implying any person, one or
any body, must not be rendered in French by the per-
sonal pronouns, il, elle, &c. but by the above pronouns,
celui, celk, &c.
The same rule must be observed with respecf to such
as, such that, used in English in the same sense as he
who, they who : ex.
Celui ou celle qui pratique He or she who practices
la vertu vit heureux, virtue lives happy.
Ceux qui meprisent la sci- Such as despise learning
ence n^en connoissent pas do not know its value,
leprix, (the value of it.)
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
He who supports idleness makes himself
enc<mrage,v. se rend,v.
despicable She whom you saw at my
m6prisahle,adj. que,pro. vttes,Y. chez,^*
brother's is not yet married. - ~. - . - You
*o» encore,adv. mari6^p.p,
punish him who is not guilty. - - - Men com-
punissez,v. coupable,^dj. ordp-
monly^ hate* him whom they fear
nairemmt,2idy. hai'ssent,\* 9«c,pro. craignent,v»
-She whom you ha*e is my best friend. - - - You
ha%ssez,y. amie,fm
have punrsbed him who did not deserve it,
punt,p.p. iO» m6ritoit,y.
and rewarded her who was guilty. We
r6oompens6,p.p,
(ought to) pray for them who persecute
devons,y» jm,pro. p€rsicutent,rm
us. — Of all virtues, that which most^ dis-
5ui,pro. leplus,2Ldy* dis*
tinguishes* a Christian is charity. — This book and
tingue,y.
107
that which I lent you are the two best
9tce,pro. at prite^p.p.
Such as seem (to be) happj, are not
9ut,pro. paroisstni^v. 6lrt{7.
always so.
toii;oMr5,adv.*
Ce, cttie^ ces^ this, that, these, those, most always
precede the substantive to which they are joined, and
agree with it in gender, number, and case. On the
contrary, ce/ui, ceWe, celui-ci, celle-ci^ celui-ld^ celle-ld^ (his,
that, &c. either in the singular or plural, are never
joined to any noun ; for the noun to which they refer
is always implied in the pronoun : ex.
T'oi vu It portrait du pere I have seen the father's
et celui dufils^ picture, and that of the
son.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
She who dines with us, is my brother's wife. - - -
dint^Y. avec,p. femmef*
She brought her picture, . and that of her
a apporte^p.p. portrait^m.
husband. I have seen the king's palace, and
man,m. palais^m*
that of the queen. That gold watch, which
montreyf* que^fvo.
you showed me, is not yours, it is that of
avez monrree,p.p. c^est^y.
your brother. 1 have lost my buckles and
perdu,p*p.
those of your cousin. - — Your books and those of
cousin^m.
your little sister are torn. - — I know this
joc^i7,adj. d£chirh,p,p* connds^v.
cap, it is that of yodr mother.
bonnet yO), c'est^v*
N. B. The pronoun that, either in the singular or
plural^ is often suppressed in English, and supplied by
• See the Rule, page 96.
108
an apostrophe and an^, thus (^f), at the end of the noun
substantive as above, but it must be expressed in French
bjr the above pronouns eelui, celU^ and according to the
gender and number of the object to which it refers : ex.
// a pris mon chapeau tt He has taken my hat and
celui dt monpcrej my father's, (that tV, and
that of my father.)
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
You have torn my gown, and my sister's.
dec/wVe,p.p. ro4c,f.
1 have found my hat and my brother's in the
trouvi^p.p.
room The thieves came by night
cAam6re,f. voltur^ni* entrerent^v. dt nut/,adv.
into my father's house, they (broke open) my room
dans forcirmtjV*
jsind my mother's, and stole my watch and
volcreni^v»
my sister's. — You may, if you please, take
pouvez^v, vouUz^v. prendre^w
your grammar and your brother's, but leave
laissez^v.
mine and my friend's. — • Our oranges and Mr.
orange^(.
Savage's are the best that you can
Saiuvage^ on,pro. puisse^y.
find.
troHver^y.
Sometimes the particles ci, /a, here, there, are also
joined to the substantive following the pronouns, ce,
cette^ ces^ to distinguish with more precision the objects
to which they are applie<l ; ex.
Ce chapeau-ci^ this hat ; cette ville-la, that town, &;c.
N. B. The two following expressions, the former^
ctlui'la^m. celU-la^f. ciux4a^ta. celles-ld^U / the latter^
ce/ui^»,m. celle-ci^t ceiia?-cf,m. celks-ci^f. referring to
substantives mentioned in a preceding sentence, are
100
elegantij us«<] in French, and agree with the nouns,
ftistead oP kpranitr^ le second, the repetition of which
tbey avoid .- ex.
Un Francois el un Ecos- A Frenchman and a Scotch-
sois St haiiirtni hier a man fought yesterday with
* Vepiey ce!ui-la, fni blesse swords, the former was
d r6paule^ et celul-ci a%i wounded in the shoulder
bras^ and the latter in the arm.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RVLE.
Learn this lesson, it is not so difficult
Apprenez^w diffkile^zA'y
as that. I prefer this way to that road,
priflre^w. chemin^m. ' route^f.
This room is much larger than that parlour. - -
gran(2,adj« salon^m*
These candies are better than those. - - *-
chandelle^t.
(There was) a great battle between George
// y eu/,v. com6a/,m. en/re,p.
and Stephen ; the former had a broken^ nose',
Etienne^ eu/,v. le cassi^p.p. nez,m.
and the latter lost a tooth. - - - In the engagements
perdil^y. hntaille^t
which took place between tt)e Austrians
gfUt,pro. eurent^r» lieu^nu Autrichien^m*
and the French, the former lost two
Fran(}o%s^m* perdirent^v.
thousand men, and the latter fifteen hundred. - - -
homme.
Among the peaches which you sent^ me* at two
Parmi^p» picheS. que^pvo. ait ez envoy tes a
different times, 1 observed that the former
J*j^ercn/,adj. fois^U ai remarque^v. .
were better than the latter.
e/o?cnf,v.
Ce qui^ in the nominative case, ce que, in the accusa-
tive, \* h'Jt.|^This pronoun is never joined to any noun;
it always may b^ turned into thai which^ or the thing
10
110
zohich ; and eect,. cela^ this, that, are only- used when
speaking of things, the word thing being always under*
stood : ex.
Jt sais ce qui est arriv6^ I know what has happen-
ed.
Savez-^ous ce que je pense ? Do jou know what I think ?
Ceci mtplaity. This pleases me; i. t. this
things &;c.
Cela mefaitpeurj That frightens me ; i. e.
that things &c.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
May I know what causes your grief
Puisjir. savoir^Y* cause^y* chagrin^m*
and sadness ? - - - Your father has (a good deal)
tristesse4* beaucoup^didv.
of friendship for you ; for, he *never*
air,c. nejamatV,adv.
refuses' you^ what you ask of him. - - . .
refuse^y. demandtz^v. «<» lux*
You seem much dejected, teH me what
paroissez^y. &ten,adv» a6a//u,adj. dites-mm
vexes you. - - - Go and tell my father what
fdche^y. _ Alltz^y* «o- dirt a, v.
has passed here and do not forget what you
s^est pass6^y. ict,adv. *o» ou6/ter,v.
have seen, and what you have heard Give
entendu,p*p0
me this, and take that. - - - I prefer this to
pr«nez,v.. prifirt;^.
that.
OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE.
'These pronouns are called rtlativt^ because they have
always a reference lo some other noun or pronoun in .
the discourse, either expressed or implied.^ They are
declined as follows :
Ill
Singular and Plural.
Both Genders. -
Nom.
qui,
who, which, that.
Gen.
de qui^ or dont^
of whom, whose,* of which.
Dat.
a qui,
to whom, to which.
Ace.
que, qui^
whom, which, that.
Abl.
de quiy dont,
from whom, from which.
Ace. quoi, que, what. .
Gen. Abl. de qtioi, or do7it, of or from what.
Dat. a quoiy to what.
Singular.
Masculine. Feminine.
Nom. Ace. lequel, laquelle^ which.
Gen. Abl. duquel, or dont, de laqutlle, of or from, &c.
Bat. auquel, a laquelle, to which.
Plural.
Nom. Ace. lesquels, lesqutlles, which.
Gen. Abl. desqueh, or dont, desquelles, of or front, &c.
Dat. auxquels, at4X9ue//e5, to which.
The noun, or pronoun, to which the pronoun relative
has a reference, is called the antecedent^ with which it
must agree in gender and number : ex.
Je connois tin homme qui doit I know a man toho is to go
aller voir le camp, and see the camp. .
In this sentence qui has a reference to homme, man,
because I can say, lequel homme, which man, &c.
J'ai lu la letlre que vous 1 have read the letter {(hat)
m^avez tnvoyie, you sent me.
In this last sentence que has a reference to lettre, letter,
because it may be said, /a^ue/Ze leilre, which letter, &c.
♦ Whost, being used interrogatively, must be rendered in French
by o qui ,* ex. *
A qui est ce litre ? Whose book is this ?
t Qui, -wbo;n, is never used in the accusative but when it is gov-
erned by some of the prepositions : ex.
•^vec yut^'^With whom. Pcur qui, For whom*
or when it signifies what person : ex,
^menes qui vous voudre:, Bring whom jou please,
that is, tphai person yon please.
H2
The relative que^ whom, which, or that, is sometimes
understood in English, but it must always be expressed
in French : ex*
La dame que vonsconnoissez The lady (that) you know
est arrivitj is arrived.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The man who sold me these pens is very
a.vendu^w
cunning. - - - The lady of whom j^ou speak
ru5e,adj. damej. parkz^v.
is not handsome. • - - Miss D***, whom j'ou love .
Mile aimez^y*
so much, is very ill. - - - The person to
tant^zdv, . malade^^6j* personne^(,
whom I wrote last year has answered
ai icrii^y. passi^p^p. annee,f. re/)onrfM,p.p.
me this morning. - - He who was with you, related
ma/tn,m. tioil^v* a raconie^x.
to me (every thing) that had passed. - - •
tout ce qui s^iloit^v. passt^p.p,
\ She will not hear of the lady whom
r€u/,v. entendre par ler^v.
he (is going to) marry. - - - Shun vice, and
ra,v. ipouser^y. Evitez^v* vice^xh.
love what is good, ^ - - Who was with
aimez^v. lon,adj. etoit^v* avec,p,
you ? - - - It was a gentleman, whose* name^ P
Ce monsieur^m* nom^va* ^"
know* ^not^ - - Men generally^ love* hina
5aw,v. genSralement^^d v.-
who flatters them. - - The man i sent you was
fiatte^\. ai cni?ove,p.p.
honest. • - Whose* sword* is^ this* ? - "- You speak
parlezj\\
of the lady whose husband has been so ill.
.mari,m. 4ie,p.p.
These pronouns, like the personal and conjunctive,
when governed by two or more verbs, must be repeated
(in French) before each governing verb, though most
113
commonly expressed but once in English, and before
the first verb r ex.
Le Dieu que nous aimms The God whom we love
et que nous adorons^ and worship.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The man who caresses and flatters yon is^ the^
cares8e^y»
most* dangeroas^ beings I know. A man
jp/u5,adv. ^/re,m. connoisse^v.
whose manners are innocent, and behaviour
mceurs^Lpl. tnnocen^,adj. conduite^f*
is blameless, is the manwhom we (ought to) che-
trre/>rocAab/e,adj. devons^y. cM"
rish and honour The letters which you have
rir^Ym respecter^Y^
written, and showed me, were tole-
ecnfe5,p.p. mon/r^e«,p.p. ^/(nen/,V. passa*
rably well. - - - The woman to whom I have
6/emenf, adv. ' femmt^L
lent so much money, and spoken so often,
jprg|^,p.p. parle^p.f.
is dead. - - - Servants are men or *wp--
fnorf,adj. Domeslique^m»et {* (m,c.
men whpm we keep and reward -
naurrissoHs^y. ricompensonSyY,
for the services which they do us.
^oiir,p. rendent^y.
When the words to lohich^ to what^ at zohich^ at what,
in rohkhi in what, have a reference to inanimate things,
and when they can be expressed by zohertj whereto,
whereat, or wherein, they are to be rendered in French
by the adverb of place, 6u : ex.
Je V0U8 montreirai la mat- I will show yon the house
son ou it demeure, in which he lives ; (that
is, where he lives.)
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The. state. of misery to which he. was reduced
6toit r^dh<i^,p.p.
10*
114
has tmiched me to the quick. * - The town to
touche^p.f. viffta. villej.
which he is gone is precisely the same
^lace through which we went in (coming up)
placef* 7>ar,p. ou passdmes^v. en,p. venan^p.act.
to London. - - (This is) the door through which
Fbici,adv.
the thieves %vent into the house. - - The pri-
vokur^m. entrerent^y.
son in which they used to shut up ^
ron,pro. avoit coutume^v* de renfermer^v.^
the priaipners, has been demolished.
prisonnier^m* ^ d6iruiu\f.p»
Quoij what, and sometimes thai or which^ is never
used in the nominative case : in (he other cases it is
generally used in an indeterminate signification, and
is never expressed except in speaking of inanimate
things, and especially when it has for its antecedent^
ee or rien : ex.
C^ist a quoi j$ voiss conseille It is what I advise you to
d^pmsevj think of.
// n^y a rien a quoi il ne soit There is nothing for zojiich
dupose^ he is not disposed.
]SX£RCI«£. UPON THIS RULE.
Of what does your sister complain ? - - • What !
<» se plaint-elUyV.
you dare answer me thus ! - - For what do
osez^v. repondre^. ain5«\adv. Potir,p. ^
you^ call* me*? - - Why » did you
appellez;v* . Pourquoi^^dv. avez^r.
bring ^hat man before lae ? what is he
amene,p.p. devant^p*
guHty of T • - What is your, brother sorry
coup(rWe,adj. * yScfc^,adj.
for? - - At what' vere* you* pTaying*, 'when I came
eft a jdtltcZjV. stjcis
11^
in ? - - To wbat shalP we* applj?* ourselves - -
miri^Vm appliquer<mSjV» nou5,pro.
fThere? is*) ^nothing* for which he is^ not*
II t/«a,v« neriei^adv.a sait^v. ne
fit. - * - - In what do you intend to spend
prG»pre,adj* a «oi proposez-vous^r* de passer ^v.
jour holidays ?
racance,f.pL ,
When i¥e speak of irratiemal beings or inanimate
things in the genitive, dative, or ablative cases, we
make use of hquel^ hquclU^ which, &c* instead of qui ;
also after a preposition, and when who, whom, or which,
T^fer to one or more objects on which the choice is to
be formed : ex.
Lt chcrai auquel vous don- The horse to which you
nez d hoire^ give some drink.
La /en e /re 5wr la quelle toM* The window upon which
vous appuyez, you lean.
Apportez lequel vous vou' Bring zvhich you please.
drez^
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The trade to which you apply,
commerce^m* vous vous appliquez^v*
and the profession to which you are devoted,
profession^' devoui^f.^n
are^very honourable. — (Is that) the horse for
Est-ce la^r.
which you gave a hundred guineas ? - - Lying
avez donn6^p,p* Mensonge^m.
is a vice for which young people (ought, to)
gens^^h doiventjV.
have the greatest horror. - - - The tatbie upon
horreur^f* table^f. ,sur,p*
wbicb y#ii wrttd, ia broken* • - - Tb% r^sons
ecrivez^v, ^ cass ee^p.p. • .
upon which yqu ground your system arc
appuyeZyW. systime^m.^
116
satisfactory. - • - (There are) four drawings, . which
saiiBfaisani^^^y Fbi7d,a(Iv« dtsstxn^va.
do you choose? - - - (Here are) two pears, which
•<» choisissez^v* Foic2,adv. poire^f*
will you have ? - - They are two sisters, which
VOUUZ^V* too 50W/,V.
do you like the best f
*<^ • aimez^y» le mtetcx,adv«
OF PRONOUNS^INTERROGATIVE.
They are called interrogative^ because they tire used
only in asking questions, and have no antecedent : they
are declined with the article indefinite. ..
Singular and Plural.
Both Genders.
Norn. Ace. gut, who, whom.
Gen. Abl. de qui^ of or from whom.
Dat. a qui J to whom, whose. *•
Norn. Ace. grtiot, or que^ what ;*
Or, qu^est'Ce qui^ qu^esUce que*
Gen. Abl. de quoi^ of or from what.
Dat. a quoi^ to what.
Singular.
Masculine. . Feminine.
N.A. quel^ or lequel^ quelle, or laqtulle^ what^ which.
G. A. de quel^ duquel, dt. quelle^ de laquelle^ of or from, &c.
Dat. a quel, auquel, a quelle, a laquelle, to what, which.
Pi-URAL.
Masculine. Feminine.
N.A« quels, or ksquels^ quelles^ or lesquelles, what, which^
G.A. c(^ qu^ls, desqxuls, dequtUes,de8quelUs. of or from,&c.
Dat.^ quels, auxquels, dqueUes,auxquelles,ioyib9it,vihich*
* ^hen tohat^ in English, signifies HotB muck, it must be esfftt^^
ed in ]||encb by combien.
117
Qui^ who, whom, as, rfn interrogative pronoun, al-
ways refers to persons, and never to things; and it may
be expressed by quelle personnt ? what person ? Quoi
aod ^u^, what, have always a reference to things and
never to persons, and may be e^ipressed by quelle chose?
what thing? According to the French idiom, quoi^ can
never be put before a verb as its accusative, it is always
qae : ex.
Qui esl-ld ? Who is there ?
De quoi paflez-vous ?. What are you speaking of?
Que -voulez'vous ? or, qu'est- What do you want ? {thai w,
ce que vous voukz ? What is it that you wish ?)
EXERCISE UPON THI^ RULE.
Who was the first king of France ? — Who can
fut^w. peut,y»
give credit to a young roan who does not speak
ajouter^v* foi *o* dit^y.
the truth ? — Of whom were* you^ speaking*, when
viriti^L parliez^y*
1 ^auTe ? — To whom did you lend my
vins^y, ar«z,v. j9rc/^,p.p.
slate ? — Whom do you seek ? Who . told
ardoiseS* «o^ cherchez^y^ a rfi(,v.
it to you ? - - - From whom do you know it? What*
»o» savez^y.
are* you^ doin^» ? — What do you say ? - - - What
faites^y. - diles^y.
do you ask of me ? - - Who is the man
demandezjy. • «oi
who can boast of being without defect ? - -
/?cii/,v. se vanter^y. de cire^y^ *an5,p. difaut ?
What is the name of your father? What is his
nom,m.
occupation ? - - What are his' amusements ? What
occupation^. sont^y* plaisir^m.
is his business? - - In what city does he' live* ?
sont^y* affaires ff,f\» xvilkyf. *o^ demeure^v^
118
What is the country in which he was born !
paysyin. a pris naissance*
In the last instances it may easily be seen, ihat quel,
or quelle^ what, is aiway,* joined to some substantive with
which it imist agree in gender and number*
In order to avoid repetition, hquel^ laqudle^ which are
elegantly used as substantives for qud^ or. quelk^ and the
substantive to which it is joined ; and then lequel must
always be followed by a genitive, either expressed or
understood : ex*
Vne de mes saurs est ma- Oae of my sisters is mar-
Wee, ridd.
Laquelle e«/-ciB ? that is, Which is it ? ihat is^
laquelle de vos soturs which of your sisters
est-ce ? is it ?
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE*
One of your cousins is arrived from the
cousin^m. arn've,p*p*
continent; which is it? — An aunt of yours was
continent^m. eloit^v*
iir last week ; which was
ma/aJe,adj* dermere,adj. semaine^L
it? I have heard that two horses of yours
out dire^v. »
were lost : tell me which. - - My brother
eloient^y. perdu^p.p. dites^v*
wrote to me, that two of your sisters (are going)
ecrivit^v. ^ vont^v.
to learn French : wfiich are they? - -
apprendre^Y. Trangois^m. sont^v.
They (were speaking) of a relation of bis, and
parloient^y. parent^vn.
of one of my friends ; which were they ?
amie,f*
119
OF PRONOUNS INDEFINITE.
These pronouns are called indefiniie or indtUrminaity
because they generally are substituted for the name of
a ^ague and indeterminate object. Among them some
are used as nouns adjective, being always joined to a
noun substantive ; others are sometimes used as pro-
nouns without a substantive, and sometimes as adjec-
tives with a substantive..
Aucun^m. aucune,f.
Aulre^
Auiruiy
Chacun^m* chacune^f.
Chaque^
Uun rati/re,sing.m.
Ias uns les aulres^
Vun et rau/re,sing.m.
L^un ou /^au^re,8ing.m.
J^i Pun ni Pautre^sing,tn*
JSru/,m« nuUe^t.
Pas t(n,m. pas ti7ie,f.
Personne,
La plupart Je, des^
Plusieurs,
Quelconqu&i
Quelquey
Quelque chose^
Quelque — que^
Quel — 9ue,sing.m.
Quelle — ^MCjSing. f.
Quelque chose qui or que,
Quoi que^
Quoi que ce soil que^
Tout ce qui^ or qiie^ ^
Quelqu^un^m. quelquhine^t*
None, not any, any one.
Other, any other.
Others, other people.
Each, every one, everj
body. ^
Every, each.
One another, each other.
Some others.
Some some.
Both.
Either.
Neither.
No one.
Not one.
Nobody, none, no one, any
one, anj body.
Most.
Many, several.
Whatever, whatsoever.
Some, any.
Something, any thing.
Whosoever, whatsoever,
whatever, however,
howsoever, though, &c.
Whatever, whatsoever.
Some, some one,
body, any body.
some-
120
Qu^onque^ Whoever, whosoever.
Qiii que ce soit^ or/u/, Whoever, nobofly in the
world, nobody at all,-
any body whatever, no
man 'living, let bim be
who be will, or be who
he may, &c.
Quoi que ce soit^ or /u/, Whatever, nothing in the
world, nothing what*
ever.
Rien^ Nothing, any thing.
Tel^ telle^ tels^ telles^ Such a one, such.
Td qui^ teh qui^ ) Such as he, she, they, who,
Telle qui, ielles qui, ^ that, &c.
Tout, ♦ " Every, every thing.
Taut le monde. Every body, any body.
Tout que. As — as, for all, although,
however, &c.
Observations on some of the above Pronouns.
Aucun, aucune^ is never used but in the singular, ancf
always requires ne before the verb ; it relates to a per-
son or thing mentioned before ; but in interrogative
sentences, and when it expresses a doubt, it is used
without a negation : ex.
Aucun ne s^est encore avisi None has jet thought of
de tous contredire, contradicting you.
Y a-t'il aucun (ou aucune) Is there uny of you who
de vous qui le souffrit ? would suffer it ?
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
None of ttfe books which you saw me
avez vu.p.p.
luyiog, pleases me. - - - Of all the apples
acheter,y. plait,y. pomrne,f.
which you gave. me, none is yet
avez donn6es,p.p. encof<,adv.
fit to e;at. - - . - Is there any of you who
^on,adj. a manger,\\ Y ci-f-t7,
121
applies fo study as much as he can ? - - - Among
s^applique^v. itude^f. le ptut^y.
all the ladies you know, is there any one who
connoissez^v.
married him ? - - Philip is cer-
ipouser^y. Philippe cev
a very wicked man, for none
mecAan/,adj* car,c*
well of him. - - - - Do you
dume^i*
(would have)*
tut T(m/if,p.p*
tainly
taineinent^^iw
of his friends speak
/>ar/«,v.
kno^ any news ?
savez^v. nouvelle,
none. - - I was in
etois^v. dans^f.
my friends have relieved
, a,v. ^ccotirt/jp.p
No, sir, I know
monsieur^ sais^ v.
trouble, and none of
tmharras^xn.
me. *
Ntil^ pas un^ are always accompanied by a negation,
and can orJy be used as a nominative to the verb : Ptr*
Sonne is likewise attended with a negation, except in
sentences of doubt, admiration, or interrogation : ex.
Nul ne peut se fiaiier d'^etre
agreable a Dieu^
Pas ui\ ue le croU^
Personne s^esUil jamais ex-
prime avec plus de grace
que Sheridan ?
^0 one can flatter himself
to be agreeable to God.
Not one believes it.
Did ever any body express
himself with more grace
than Sheridan f
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
. No one in, this world is free from
en,p. monde^m. exempt^zA]^
fault. - • - No one can pretend to be per-
dc/auf,m. priiendre^v. itre^v. pQr-
fectly happy in this land of mi*
faitement^^iv* dans^jp. ierreS*
f^^vy. • - All the sailors perished at sea,
nuxielot^m. onl piri^v. 5ur,p. mer^
11 ^
uot one escaped. - - - • The soldiers are all re-
a ichapp£^p.f. soldat^tn. re*
turned, not one has remained behind. • - -
vemf%p.p. €5/,y. reste^p.p. dcmcrc,adv.
Kobody can boast of being ^ ^vitbout im-
se vanter^v. ilre^v* sans^f.
perfections, p - As nobodj speaks to you,
Comme,adv. parle^v.
you ought not to speak to any body. - - - Did
<?CT?er,v. *^parUr,y. Jl-t-il
ever any Body know in what happiness
jamais connti,p.p. e7i,p. honlUur^m*
consists ?
consisle^y*
Autre refers to persons and things, and is an adjective
that precedes its substantive, unless used as a noun;
but autrui refers to persons only, and is invariable, and
c^n only be us^d in the genitive or dative case : ex.
Cette plume rCest pus tonne, This pen is not good^ give
donnez'lui en une autre> him another*
Ne prenez pas le Wen d'au- Dp not take other peopk^s
trui, # goods.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Yoar brother has lost bis books, shall I
/)erJu,p.p. *o^
give him others ? - - - As you broke my
donnerai^v. avez caw^,.pp.
penknife, you will give me another. - - Other peo-
canif^m* donnerez^v.
pie's opinions are not the rule of mine. - - - -
«en/tmen(,m. regle,(*
Do not speak ill of other people, if you
M»». parlez^v. rwa/,adv.
ivill have nobody speak ill of you. - - -
voulez^v* 9ue,c. park^v.
Always" remember' n that principle of na-
souvenez-vous de ce principe^m. ncf-
133
iaral law, do not to' others what you
would not wish that (they should do) to you. - -
«.«sy» voudriez,v, onfit^v»
What arc other people's troubles, if (they be cora-
peine^f. .si,c. on les com"
pared) with ours.
partyV. aux
Chaque and chacun are not used indifierently ; ch(ique
always requires a substantive after if, and chacun repre-
sents a noun not expressed in the sentence, both relating
to persons or things : ex.
Chaque langue a ses idiorms Each language has its pe-
pariiculiers^ culiar idioms^
Chacun a son lour, Every one in his turn.
EXEUCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Every thing in its time. - - Every virtue has
chose dans^p* terns ^m*
its reward, and each vice has its punishment. • *
recompense^L chdiimtnt^m*
lutt every scldi«r keep his post to
Que sc tienne^Yb a poslt^m. pour^f.
avoid any surprise fronn the enemy. - -
evUer^v* /ot«/,adj. surprise J* de la part de Penntmi.
Every one thinks and acts for himself. - - Do not
pense^Y* ^git^y* *ot. *<»
speak all at once, hut each in your turn. - - -
a lafois^zAy. a
England expects (<Aaf) every roan (will do) his duty
♦ attend^. ftra^^. devoir^m.
in case of danger. - - Trees bear their fruits
en Arhre^xn* porfent^v*
each in its season. - - - (Let us give) to every
dans^p» rendons^y.
one what beIor>gs to him. - - - Let every one
appartUnly* Que
meddle with bis own business.
semele^v, c2e proprejadj. affaires^p]*
124
Lktn Pautre are susceptible of gender and number,
and express a reciprocity in the action, and may be
applied to persons or things ; and if there be a preposi*
tioQ in English, it must be placed between them : ex.
lis se haissent Pun I'autre, Tliey hate each other.
Its parknt mal Tun de They speak ill of one
Fautre, another.
Les vohwrs se tltfient les Thieves mistrust one an-
uns rfes autres, other.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Fire and water destroy one another. - - My
se delruisent^v.
sisters can not bear each other. - -
peuvent^v. se souffrir^v.
Love one another, said our Lord
Aimez'vous^y. dit^v. Seigneur^m*
to his disciples. - - - The seasons follow each
disciple^m. saisonf. se siiivent^v*
other without interruption. - - - - Honest men
sans^p. gens
(ought to) esteem one anothef. - - - They
devroient s^estimer.
do justice to one another. - - - If is rare
se rendent^y. rare,adj.
to hear two authors speak well of one
de eniendre^y. auteur^m, dire, v. du &ten,m.
another. - - Multiplication teaches to multiply
Multiplication^^, enseigne^y. a multiplier ^y.
two numbers by each other. - - The columns
nomhre^m.' par^p. colofinej.
were close against one another.
etoient^y. *crre,adj. cotitre^p.
Dun et Vautre always require the verb in the plural,
and may likewise be applied to persons or things : m
Vun ni Vautre require the verb to be put in the singular,
if that pronoun be placed before the verb, and in the
plural, if it come after it ; but in both cases the verb
must be preceded by the negation ne : ex.
1*5
l^^iiD e£ Fautre ont raismrt^ Boih are in the right.
Ni I\in ni Pacitre ne ripond^ ^'either of them answer*
or ih ne ripondent ni i'uD
ni Pautre,
When the preposition relates to both, it must be
placed before Vun and Pautre^ and repeated ; and both
is not expressed in French when it precedes two nouns
or pronouns united bj the conjunction and : ex*
II revolt de Pargent de Pun He receives ntoney from
et de Pautre, both.
Son frere et sa 9imr. sont Both bis brother and sister
morts, are dead.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Both serve to the same purpose. - - - I
servent^v. twcmc,adj. usage^m*
called on jfour cousins, and I heard
at passe^ p.p.chez cou5me,f. ai appris^f.p*
that both had been married a week be-
que avoient^y. n2ane,p.p* stmaine^i* au'
fore. • - - - Honour your father and mother
paravant^^Aw. Respectez^v*
and endeavour to please both. - - Do you speak
tdchez^y, de plaire^v. a *<^ parlez^Y*
of my brother or sister ? I speak of both. - - Apples
parkiy* Pomnu^f.
^nd pears are good fruits, but peaches are pre-
poirt^i. peche^* pr^'
ferable to both. - - 1 wrote to both, but neither of
/era6/c,adj. ai 6crity. u»
them answered my letters, - Yesterday I expected
*<>> a ripondu^p.p.a attendoisyVm
my two best friends, but neither of them came. - - I
«o» L©^ vinty*
will give it to neither of them. - - - Both religion
donnerai^v. k>» ^^
and virtue are the bonds of civil society.
/ten,m.
11^
126
Quelque-^que. Quelque immediately joined to a noua
followed by que^ expresses an indeterminate quality or
quantity ; it is declinable before a substantive and inde-
clinable before an adjective, and requires the verb to
be put in the subjunctive mood : ex.
Quelques /au/e5 que vous Whatever faults you may
ayez faites, on vous par- have committed, they
donnera, will forgive you.
Quelque grandes que soient However great your faults
vos f antes ^ on vous par- be, they will forgive
donnera^ you.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Whatever efforts people make to hide
tffort^m. on,pro« fasse^v. pour^p, voiler^y*
truth, it (is discovered) sooner or later. - - What-
se decouvre^v. /d/,adv. /ar£2,adv.
ever services you (may have) done to your
service^m* ayez^y. rcwdti5,p.p.
country, it will reward you for them. - - What-
patrie^U rtcompensera^v. *
ever capacity a man may have, he ought not to
pume,v. doU^v. 86
boast. - - However equitable jour^ offers^ be*,
vanter^v. offre^U soient^y*
I do not believe they will be accepted. - - ^Though'
«o^ crois^y* soient^y* accep/ee,p.p.
kings' be* (ever so) powerful^ they die
soient^y* »«^ pui5ian/,adj. meurent^y^
as well as the meanest of their subjects. - - However
6af,adj. sujet^m^
learned those ladies may be, they sometimes*
5ava»/,adj. - quelquefoii^didv*
roistake^
se trompent^y»
Quel que^ quelle que must be thus divided, when it is
immediately followed by a verb or a personal pronoun,
and agree in gender and number with the noun to which
it relates ; it likewise requires the verb to be put in the
subjunctive mood : ex. '
« See the Rule, p^ge 92i
127
Qaelle que swt voire faute^ Whatever your fault may
(m vous pardonnera, be, they will forgive you.
EX£RCISB UPON THIS RULE.
Whatever the enemy be, whose malice^ you*
ennenii^va. maliceS.
dread,* you ought to rely on your
apprihendez^y. devez^v, vous reposer^y. sur^f*
innocence. - - Laws condemn all criminals,
condamnent^y* criminel^m*
whoever they may be. - - Whatever your inten-
puissent^y. inUn*
tioDS (may be) 1 4hink that you (are in the wrong).
iion^L soient ^ avez tort.
Whatever the reasons be which you (may allege,)
raison.L alleguiez^y.
they are not sufficient. - - - Whatever these oooks
suffisantj^dj. /ivre,m.
be, send them to ^ne. - - Whatever her fortune be,
fortunef.
he says he *never* (will marry^) hei^.
di/,v. epousera^y.
Qiielque chose qui or que^ quoi que^ quoi que ce soil que^
lout ce qui or que^ always relate to things, and never
to persons; with this difference, that, in French, we
generally begin the sentence with cither quelque chose
que or qui^ quoi qne^ or quoi que ce soil que^ with the fol-
lowing verb in the subjunctive mood : ex.
Quelque chose qu'on vous Whatever may be said to
dise^ ne le croyez pas^ you, do not believe it.
Quoi que ce soit qu'on vous Whatever they may say to
dise^ ne le croyezpas^ you, do not believe it.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Whatever may happen to you in this world,
puisse^y* arriver^y. ' monde^tn*
'never* murmur* against divine providence, for
murmureZyy. con/re,p. car,c.
128
whatever wc may suffer, wc deserve it* - - What*
simffrions^y* mMtons^v*
ever I (miy do,) you always blame me. - - Who is
fasst^y* bldmez^y,
the man who has stolen his money ? I know not ;
but whoever he (may be,) and whatever he may say,
8oit, ' ciwe,v.
if my father catch him, he shall be punished. - -
altrapptjV. puni^p^p.
In whatever your master employs you, do it
d emploie^Y. faittSiV.
heartily. - » • - Whatever you may say, your
de bon C(6ur,adv. disiez^v.
brothers shall be punished, if they deserve it.
seront^w * miritenl^y^
On the contrary, we always make use of tout ce qui
or que^ when whatever can be turned into all that which,
or every thing which / and may be placed either at (he
beginning or in the middle of a sentence, according to
its situatibn in English, with the following verb in the
indicative mood : ex.
Ilfera toujours tout ce q\xHl He will always do what"
VQUs plairaj ever^ or every thing, yoii
please.
EXDRCISE UPON THIS RULE.
In whatever you do, be guided by bo-
faites^v. ^ guidi^p.p. hoti"
nesty* and probity ; and in whatever you say,
niteti.f. diteSyV.
never deviate from the path of truth. - -
vous eeartez^v* sentier^m,
Whateiyer is pleasing is not always useful. - - -
agreable^^dj. ti.'i/e,adj.
Tell roe whatever you think of me, and 1 will
DiteSyV* pensez^v. V»-
tell you whatever I think of you. - - Never speak
rat^v.
• Si always loses the i before it, he ; Us, they.
139
of whatever has passed ~ between us both. -^ - She is
s^tst passi^y. «n/re,p« dtux.
BO curious, that she will l^now whatever I
curieua;,adlj. rcw/,v. savoir^v.
do. - . Whatever glitters is not gold, - - I will pay
fais^Vm luii^w or. paieraiyV*
you to-morrow whatever I owe you.
doi>,v.
Quelque alwajs expresses an indeterminate significa-
tion, and is generally joined to a substantive with which
it agrees in number; and qudqu^un^ quelqu^untj make
quelques-uns^ queiques-unes^ in the plural : ex.
Quelque homme^ Some man.
Quelque femme^ Some woman.
Quelqu'un m^a dii^ Some one has told me, &ۥ
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
When he comes to see us, he has
Qtianc2,adv« vientyV. ^o* voir^v,
always some tale to tell us. - - He prc^mised
con/e,in. a fairCjV. a/)i'omi>,p. p.
to bring me some filberts and chesnuts. - - - Have
de aveline chdtaigne*
you heard any news ? - - Somebody knocks
apvris^p.p. noiivelle ? frappe^y.
at the door, go and open it. • - Is there
alUz^y, »o» ouvrir^y* ya-/-t7,v.
any of these ladies who has found my colour-box ?
dame^f. at/, v. troiivi cauleur^
- - Have you any (raspberry trees) in your garden ? I
framboisier^m.
have some. - - Has he any vines ? Yes, he has some.
A4»il^ vigne^L OMi,adv.
Qui que ce soit^ speaking of persons only, may be
Englished different ways ; but when by zvhoeter^ what
person soever^ it must always be followed by the pro-
nouns iK elle or quij and sometimes by both, unless it be
governed by a verb o? preposition : ex.
Qui que ce soil qui me Whoever deceives me, shall
trompe^ il serapuni^ be punished.
130
EX£RC1SK UPON THIS RULE,
Whoever despises the poor, i3 himself des-
m6prise^w» lui-merne me-
picabte. - - Whoever speaks lo you, do not answer. - -
prisuble^zdj, park «o» repondez^v*
Whoever (may presume lo) ask you any question
osera^v* question
concerning that affair, pretend not^ to* know* (any*
Lonchant.p* feignez^v. de savoir^v*
thing) (about it^), - - Of whomsoever you speak,
parliez^VB
always speak the truth. - - «- To whomsoever you
dites^v. vous
apply every body (will tell) you the
vans adressiez^v. tout It monde^va* dira^y.
same thing. - - - W^ith whomsoever you be, •
chost^U Avtc^'f* soyeZyV.
always* behave* welP.
' comporteZ'Vous^y*
When the above pronoun is Englished by nobody in
the worlds no man livings &c. ; it must be attended with
the negation ne before the verb; and when speaking 111
the past tense, qui qut ce fut must be used : ex.
Je n'en park a qui que ce I meption it to no man
Bokj living, to no one*
Cesar ne vouloit se fier a Caesar would trust to no*
qui que ce fut, body whatever*
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Charity bids us to (speak ill) of nobody what-
ordonne^y. de m6dire^y.
ever, and to do harm to no man living. - - I
defaire^y. du mal^w.
spoke to nobody whatever ; for 1 saw neither
ai parti^p^p. . ai t?M,v.
father, mother, nor children* - - Never speak to any
parlez^y.
131
bod J whatever of what I told you. - - He acquainted
at dit Jit pari a,r.
nobody in the world with his projects. - - My brother
de projtt^m.
iKras so honest, that he mistrusted nobody at alK - •
itoil^v. $e difioit de,y»
Cromwell would ' trust his life to nobody whatever.
voulut^y* confier^y* w,f.
The above observation is to be made with respect to
91101 que ce soit, quoi que cefut^ only used in speaking of
inanimate objects. Qukonque is indeclinable, always
used in the singular, and said only of persons : ex.
Jt ne me plains de quoi que I do not complain of any
ce soil, thing zoha lever »
Quiconque vow a dil cela^ Whoever told you that, &c.
<J^c.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
My brother enjoys so" good^ a* health*, that
jouit de,y. si
(for these) three years he never complained of
depuis^p. s^est /»/am/,p.p.
9ny thing whatever. - - - • He is so lazy, that
be . applies to nothing whatever Yon
s^applique^Ym
may go and^take a walk in the garden,
pouves^y* allergy. «o» vous promener^y.
btft do not touch any thing whatever. - - Who-
iouchez a,v.
ever believes every thing which (he is told,) is
croit^y. on lui dt/,v.
often deceived. - - - He (is ordered) to stop
trompe^p.p. a ordre^v. de arreter^y*
every one that shall go that way.
passera^y* par-Id.
It roust be observed, that the numeral adjective one^
used in English as a pronoun indefinite, and admitting
of a plural termination, is not to be expressed in French,
when it immediately follows an adjective of colour, or
any other expressing the shape or size of the object
132
which it implies ; but the adjective must be put in the
same number and gender as the substantive which is
understood in English : ex.
Quel habit acheterez^vous ? What coat shall you buy ?
un bleu o\t un vert ? a blue one or a green one ?
J^ai irouvi deux nids d^oi- I have found two birds'
seaux ; dans Pun il y nests ; there were eggs
avoitdes (£uf s J etdes petite in one, and young ones
dans Pautre^ in the other,
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE,
What kind of, a hat will you have ? a black
C5pcce,f. ^ «^>^ wnnoir,adj.
one, or a white one? a round one, or a
6/anc,adj. rond,adj.
cocked one ? - - - My father has sold
retrouss6,zdj. x?enAi,p.p.
one of his horses ; which is it ? the black one or
un ^
the grey one ? - - W^ere there many flowers in
grw,adj. - Y avoii-il
his garden ? Yes, (there were) very fine ones,
t7 y tn avail tres^adv. beau,adj«
^hich my father had sent him from Hol-
envoye,p.p*
land. - - (Here are) several pair of shoes, WhicH
Foid,adv. jou/ter,m.
will you have ? the red ones, or the white
voi rouge,adj.
ones? I prefer the black ones.
prtfere^v*
Tout — que. Tout, precerling a noua immediately
followed by ^we, is indeclinable in the masculine and
declinable in the feminine, befbre nouns beginning with
a consonant, and must be repeated before every noun in
the sentence : ex.
Toui savant qu^iZ est^ Use As learned, as he is, he
irompe quelquefois^ sometimes mistakes.
Toote savante qnW/e «ff, For all she is learned, fb*
tilt se trompe qutiquefois^ sometimes mistakes.
Obstrve taell the above construction*
• EXKJiCISB UPON THIS RULE.
For all my sister is ugly she gets friends
/atJ,aclj« sefaitjV.
every-where^ - - - As amiable as she is, she
par-lout,adv. afmfl6/c,adj,
does not please me at « all. - - - For all they are
voi platt^y* du /ouf, adv.
rich, they give^ ^ ^nothing^ to the poor. - - - -
dpnnent^y. « /)auvre,adj.pl.
Your mother^ although, (or for all) she is young, appears
parott^y.
old. — - As generous as he is, he has not given
age,adj. ' a, v. Jonn^,p.p.
me one farthing. - - His aunt, for all she is angry
liarditu* tante^L fdchi^^ij.
¥rith him, will forgive him his faults, as great
conlr£,p. pardonnera^y. lui faute^f,
. as they are. « • « As young, amiable, handsome,
6€aii,adj.
'^and rieb, as my friend's sisters are, they were
itoient^Yi
^ not yet married the last time I saw
encore,adv. marie,p.p. foisyf* vis^y.
Ihem.
N. B. This will be seen again among the conjunc-
tions.
To the above pronouns may be added the three foI«
lowing expressions, which are generally used in an in-
definite or indeterminate manner :
Je ne sais qui^ I know not who, whom.
Je ne sau quoi, I know not what.
Je ne sais qtiel, quelle^ &c. I know not which or what.
Je ne sais qui is only said of persons, and signifies a
person we do not know. Je ne sais quoi is only said of
12
134
tbingfl, and signifies an object which cannot precisely
be named or defined : Jt ne sais quel is placed before
substantives, both of persons and things ; lastly, we
sometimes put un before Jt ne sais qui^ and indifferently,
un or le before Je ne sais quoi : ex.
Je ne sais qui meparle^ I know not who speaks to
me. ^
it parte de je ne sais quoi, He speaks of / know not
what.
Je visje ne sais quel homme^ I saw I know not what man*
II parte d*UTije ne sais qui, He speaks of I know not
whom.
J^ai lu une ccmidie intitu* I haVe read a play which
/^e, te je ne sais quoi, has for itd title, / know
not what,
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
When I paid a visit to mj friend, I addressed
rendisyY* «o» m'adressai^v*
myself to I know n9t whom. • - He (keeps company
«o» friquefite^y.
with) I know not whom, and that displeases her. • -
deplait^y, tui*
Whilst she (was speaking) to him, she was
Pendant que^c* parloit^v. ' fut
accosted by 1 know not whom. - - There is
a6orci^,p.p. />ar,p. // y a,v.
I know not what mean in that behaviour. - - -'
de 6a5,adj. conduite^f.
He complains of 1 know not what. - - - When I
se plaint^y,
went in, I saw I know not what man, what wo-
-entrai^v.
man, what pictures, what figures. - - She speaks
porlrait^m* Jigure^L
to I know not whom. - - - There is in that I
{d-dedfan^,adv.
know not what that pleases me.
plait,v.
135
RECAPITULATORY w prwniscuaui EXERCISES
upon all the PRONOUNS.
Review, well your rules and examples before you zoriUn
I speak French. - - You speak English. - -
parle^v^ parlez^v.
We do not understand . what they say to us. • -
«o^ comprenons^w disent^v.
She speaks to you, and robs you (at the same)
parle^Wm vole^v. en mime
time. - - We have not seen them. - - Your
temps ^nim avons^v. vu5,p.p.
mother came to see me yesterday, and I
vint^v* U50 i?oiV,v. Ater,adv.
(will go to) see her to-morrow. - - Is there any body
tra»,v. demain^stdv. Esi-il^
that esteems her more than I do ? - • Attention ,
tslime^v* «o»
cares, credit, money, I have put' (every' thing)
Boiny *mt>,p.pt t<mi
in use. - - They are happy, but we are
en,p. usage, heureuxj^dj,
not so. - • Every body thinks I am the mother of
* croit^Y*
that child ; I assure you 1 am not. - - - - Ladies,
* Mmes^
are you the companions of Miss le Noir t Yes,
iteSyV, compagne^f.
we are. - -^ - My uncle gave me a sword and
* a donii^fp.p.
1 owe. my life to it. - - • Whatever (may be)
dots la soientyV,
your troubles, you (ought to) write to me more
peine^U devriez^v. icrire^v,
frequently ^ - - I iirill lend you the book which she
souveni^^dv. preterai^v*
has sent me. - - Believe ine, he is very
envoy 6^p.p, Croyez^y,
ill, - - . . 1 shall be very glad ' to fro
ma/a<Zc,adj. serai^v. at56,adj. de aller^ v.
* Look at page 96. ^ .
1»&
there with you ; for I have something to tell
arec,p. carfi. acfire,v*
him. - - I love your sister, and I owe her re-
aime^v* reS"
spect. • - Give me <inj hat and cloak. - ^ -
pect^m. chapeau^jn. manteh^tn.
I have dined with your father and mother. - -
dtn^,p.p.
They* often* procure' me* that plea-
souvent^2iiy* procurtnl^v.
sure. • • If it be not an indiscretion on my part,
ct tsi^y. f. dt parlS*
pray tell me what passed between you
dt grdce^ dites s^est pa8s6,f.p» en/r«,p.
and them. • - They have sent you good apples-^
« pomtne^ f.
Yes, there were some gdod ones and some bad
// y avoit^v. m(ittT>at5,adj[.
ones. - - Write to me, do not write to her. • - -
EcTvotz^y. * t<>.
Carry gome to your sister. - - I will do whatever
Porttz^v. ferai^y*
you please. - - - The Thames is a very fine
voudrtZyV* Tamxsef* &e(iu,adj.
river ; it divides London into two parts. - - -
micre,f. divise^w. en,p. parlit.
London is the capital of England, as Paris is that
capitale^f.
of France ; it is a fine city, but some of its streets
*" rM€,f.
are very inconvenient and narrow. - - - Brest
tncoynmo£{e,adj. ^/rot/,adJ.
is a fine sea - port,t in France, but its entrance
mcr, /?or/,m. * tniritf.
is difScult and dangerous. - - Brother, these
<it^ct/e,adj.
books are mine, and not yours. - - - Youlr
no?»;9a5,adv.
exercise is better than mine, but it is not 80
ihttnt^va*
* See page IDS. t Sqg the rule page 44«
137
well written as your sister's. - - Do you think of
ecn/,p.p« •<>» ptnsez^y.d
me ? Yes, 1 do.* - - You do not know what vexeft
pmse^y. *c» fdchtyV.
me. - - I will not accept of any of the
veux^y. accepter^v.
terms which they offer me. - - Whom ought
mondition^f* offrent^v* , cIeTon9,v.
we to worship ? *God, who is the father of
»o^ adortr^y* Dieu^
them that love him, and the protector of those
aimenUy*
that fear him. - - Of all those who contend
craignenlyy, dispuitnt^y.
against religion, some do it because it per-
can/re,p. f. Its uns font^ym parceque^c* em*
plexes them -, others, because they wish to
barrassEyy. lea autres vtulenf^y* mp^
have the glory of perplexing its defenders. - -
embarrasser^y. diftMmr^m.
Those trees are well exposed to the sun,
ar&re,in. tocposi^.f. soUil^tn*
nevertheless their fruits are not good. - - I believe
cependant yZdy. crms^y*
your uncle is arrived. - - His ability is not so
(mc/e,m. arriv6^p.p. habileU^L
great as yours. - - Two rivals are generally
gra7iJ,adj. rival^m*
enemies of one another. - - Sister, who gave you
a cIonn^,p.p.
that letter ? Our uncle's servant. - - - What does
leitre,U domes tique^m* u9>
he write to you ? That his library is at our
icrit^y. bibliothequt^f. a
service ; and I assure you that he has a very good
/rw,adv.
one. - - His letters please me so much, that I
t plaisent^y.
wish to increase their number. Both my
'PttiopjV. «^ augmtnitr^y.
^ * Look at page 94. f See the ex : p. 93^
12*
138
father and aunt are now at Rome \ the former
apristnt -
writes once a week, the latter" writes
icrit^v. unefois^t.
to me twice a yean - - - He that wants
dmxfoi^ manque de^Vm
virtue, wants (all things). - - • That lady pleases
tout. damcjf. pMt^vi
you, for you* are^ always* ppcaking' of her*. - - *
car,c. parkz^v.
The beauty of the mind creates admira-
beaut6^(* tsprit^m. donne^w.
tion ; that of the soul gains ' esteem, and that
Ame,f. donne^v. estime^f.
of the body love. - - - - Most friends are more
corps^vdM amour^m.
attajched to our fortune, Uhan' nhey are
<illacAe,p.p. que ne,c«
to our person. - - - Whoever is withoot virtue,
sans^p.
seldom^ values* mct» ; and whoever is
raremen/jadv. estime^v.
too good, values them (too much). - - - It
/rop,adv. \ irop,adv. Ce
is she who t^ld me that this bduse is not
a dt/,p'p. fwawon,f.
yours. - - You believe that Mrs. D. is in your interests,
* eroyez^v^ inierit^m.
and I believe nothing of it. - - - Ambition
crois^y* ne rien,adv.
(tramples upon) wisdom, honour, probity, and on
foule aux pieds «*r,p.
their ruins, it lays the foundation of its great-
riirne,f. 6live,v. fondement.m. gran-
ness. - - Whatever her intention (may be,) I* do
<ieur,f. soit.v. ^
»not« love» hei-^ the less'' for it*. - - I assure you that
aime^Yt ^
1 have answered both her letter and her brother^s.
Nobody in the world has coniptained of your con*
*V«/,v. j>/atni,p.p.
* Look at page 85 and 86.
I ■
duct. - - VtheD you read the history of the Roman
Quand^c. lireZjV. hisioire^L ' JRomam, adj,
emperors, you will find one (of them) wtfose name
crwpcreiir,m. irouvtrtz^s*
was Nero. - - - The study of geography is absolute-
J^iron. geograpkie^f. ahsohi^
\y necessary to him who has a taste for bts-
meni,adv» du gou^,m«
tory. - « He that sold us this cffock did not
^ a V6n(2u,p«p. pendule,f. a^y.
cheat us. - - What do you think of it ? - - -
irompes\p.f. . to^ • ptnszz^Y.
Whoever cheats me shall repent (of it). - - •
trompt^y. st reptniira^x. en
Every body thinks* we shall have peace. - - When I
croit^v. auronSyV^ paix^U
went in, the members of the assembly were
tntrai^y. itoient^Vm
seated every one in his place. •-,-!, who did not
assis^p»p. a ^d^
know that they were reconciled, was much
mavois^v, que^c. r6conciliesyp,p. fas^v. ybr/,adv»
Surprised to see them together. England owes /
ttonni de voir^v* cwwm6/c,adv. doit^v*
her riches to her naval strength and the encourage-
ybrc w,f. pi.
ment she gives to her commerce. - - We speak
donne^v. parhnSyV*
of what has happerred to him. - - Well ! if he*
esi^v. arrirc,p.p. Eh 6ten,int.
spend ^ other people's money, be does not spend
dipense^y.
yours. • - This illnass is much hid ; nevertheless
maladie^f. fori cachie^p.p. cependant^Bdym
I know Its origin and effects She who
connois^y. t
(was speaking) to you is «not yet mar-
parloiljY. encore,adv.
ried. - • Her father, mother, brothers, sisters, uncles,
onc^,m.
* See the note at the bottom of page 104. t Sec p. 102.
140
and aunts, in short, all her relations, arc dead,
tant€j(. enfiriyC. parent,xn.
and bave^ left her a considerable fortune. - - -
Those gentlemen have fine horses, but mine are
messieurs chevaljtn.
finer than theirs. - - Do you know ^ any of
connoisseZyV,
those ladies ? Yts, I know some of them. - - - -
connois^y*
For all they are young and handsome, they have- (a
great deal) of modesty and virtue. - - - That German
Jlllemand
nobleman is both poor and proud Desire
genlilhome orgu€t7/eu:c,adj. Priez^v^
him to bring them here. - - - Is that the gown
de amener^y. Est<e rohe^U
for which you gave five guineas ? - - If I
/>our,p. avez £{onni,p.p.
had been in yotfr place, I (would have)
eusse^Y, ^/^,p.p. a aurois^v. ^
preferred the white one to the black one
pr^cr^,p.p.
How many books are there in that library ? -There
y a-t-il hibliotheque^L
are three thousand seven hundred and twenty-seven
in the library, fifty-two upon the table, and nineteen
in my room. • - Whose house is this t It belongs
appartientyV.
to I know not whom. • - There is I know not what
// y a,v.
in the colour, which pleases «Diuch. - - To what
danf,p. plaiUv*
(does he apply himself)? - - - This apple, and that he
s^apptique-tM^v, * *
Save you, arc very^good. - - Give me either
onna^v. Donnez^v.
of them. - - I will send you some thither. - - -
M&i enverrai^Y.
• See the rule page 112.
141
I cannot . seU . it to you for so^ smalP a*
,nepeux pas^y.vendrt^y* pour^p*
sum.* - - I pilfer the t>eaut jr of the mind to that
somme^f. prSfere^v.
of the body. - - Some like music and some dancinf^,
Lesunsaiment^Y, danstf*
- - She says she hates that man ; many think she
di/,v. haU^v, croient
loves him. • - He whom nobody pleases, is more
aime^y, * a pldit^y. *
unhappy '^ than he who pleases nobody* • - I
malhturtux^ziy - a
was near your sister when * that happened
ilois^y. aupres rfe,p. quand^c* arriva^y*
to her. - - Both his father and mother died
tnoururent^y.
on the same day. - - - - . - As covetous as he^is, he
tc« ai;a're,adj.
gave me a guinea. - • - There are many people
a donne.p.p. Hy ci
whom we esteem, because we do not know them. • -
parctque^c. connoiisons
Whatever has happened to yoo, I am very sorry
5ot7,v. arriv^,p.p. yacAe,adj.
for it. - - He would do it in spite of any
voulut^y. fairt^y. ew,p. dipit^m*
body whatever. - « Learning is preferable to riches
iSctence,f.
and virtue to both. - - - Some philosophers have
philosophe^m. ont^y.
thought that the fixed stars were so many
cru,p.p. ^a76,adj. 6loile^(» itoient^y. auiant
suns. - - See with what care, attention, and per-
FoycZjV.
severance,^ every animal (rears up) its (young ones.)
c7cx?e,v. j(?c/i/,adj. •
- - (Here are) two grammars, which do you pre-
Foici,adv. «o»
fcr ? I prefer this to that Both are very
good. - • - He believes nothing of what you
croit^y. ne rien,adv.
142
told him* - - - You blame him ivho does
avez (2i/,p.p. " hlamez^v.
not deserve it. - - * Friend, to 4¥boin did jou
merite^y. avez^v.
speak ? I spoke to nobody ; for 1 saw
parli^p.p. aiparU^w car^c. ai vu^p.p.
neither of them. - - Each country has its peculiar
particulier.didj.
customs ; in France, they* eat with the fork, in England,
eoutume^f. 07i,pro.
we eat with the knife ; in France, they eat the meat
o»,pro.
well done ; in England, we eat it half raw.
cuiU,p.p» a moitii crue,adj.
SECT. IV.
OF VERBS AND THEIR DIFFERENT SORTS.
Verbs are usually divided into seven sorts, viz.
1. Les vethes -auxiliaires, auxiliary.
2. Les verbes actifs^ . active.
3. Les verbes passifs^ passive.
4. Les verbes neutres^ neuter.
5. Les verbes riJUchis^ reflective.
6. Les verbes personnels^ personal.
7. Les verbes impersonnels, impersonal.
Some of them are regular^ that is to say, they follow
the general rule of the conjugation to which they be-
long ; others do not, and are called irregular.
The auxiliary verbs are, avoir, to have, and itre^ to be.
These two auxiliaries are used to conjugate all the com-
pound trnses of the other verbs.
The active verbs, — In this class, the action is transitive,
that is, it passes from the subject to the object : ex. ,
Le mattre punit les ecoliers The master punishes the
paresseuz, lazy scholars*
'Fhe active verb sometimes governs two cases : one
* See pfkge $4.
, 14»
to which the action directly refers, or which is the di-
rect object of the action, and is therefore called the
direct or absolute case; the other, to which the action
refers but indirectly, and it is called the indirect or re-
lative case : ei.
Votre s<Bur a ecrit une Your sister wrote a long
longue lettre a mon frere, letter to my brother*
A long letter is the direct orabsolute case, and to my
brother^ the indirect or relative case, of the verb wrote*
The direct case can be no other but the accusative of a
noun or pronoun, but the indirect is either thegemave,«
dative^ or ablative*
In the passive verbs^ the action is received or suffered
by the subject : ex.
Les ecoliers paresseux Lazy scholars shall be
serontpunisy punished.
In the neuter verbs^ the action is intransitive, that Is,
it remains in the agent : ex.
Je dors^ I sleep. I Vous voyagez, You travel*
Jfous 6tudions, We study. | Elle soupire^ She sighs.
In the reflected verbs^ the action returns upon the
agent that produces it : ex.
// se repent^ He repeats himself*
Elle se /<me. She praises herself.
These verbs have always se before their infinitivCi
and are conjugated with a double pronoun.
The personal verbs are those which are conjugated
with three persons, in the singular and plural, through-
out all their tenses.
The imperso* al verbs have only the third person of the
singular number.
.AT. B. There is a kind of verbs which may be distin-
guished by the name of reduplicative^ always expressing
a repetition of the action : ex.
Rccommencer^ To begin again.
Rofaire^ To do again^ &c.
Ijn these verbs, the English word again is to be
To cal>;
Voir,
To see ;
To build ;
Prendre,
To take;
To lie;
Vivre,
To live ;
144
rendered in FreDch by the syllable re prefixed to the
radix of the verb, and not by encore. •
All the above verbs may be simple or compound.
A verb is simple which cannot be divided without
losing its meaning : asj
Jppeler,
Bdtir,
Mentir^
which would mean nothing, ;f they were divided.
A verb is compound when it is preceded by one or
more syllables : as,
Rappeler, To recall, j PrerotV, To foresee.
' RcMtir, To rebuild. Entreprencfre,Toiinrfertake.
Demen/ir, To 6elie. ] Survtpre, To oudive,&c.
' These last verbs are generally formed by prefixing to
ihem part or the whole of a preposition.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
To conjugate verbs .is to give them different inflec-
tions or terminations, according to their moods, tenses,
persons and nunAers.
MOODS.
Mood or mode, in the sense it is taken here, is a gram-
matical term, which means the manner of affirming, or
denoting, in the verbs, by different inflections.
There are, in the French language, four moods, abso-
lutely distinct from each other, by the several inflec*
tions, or by some other difierence. They are :
LHnJtnitiy^ The infinitive.
LHndicatif, The indicative.
Vimpiratif, The imperative.
JLe su^onctif,OM The subjunctive, or con-
conjonclif, junctive.
Of the Infinitive Mood.
This mood is so called, because it only expresses
the action or signification of the vorb in an indefinite
and indeterminate manner, that is, without affirmation,
145
and without any relation as to tinie, number, or person •:
ex. * .
Parhfj To speak.
Chanter, To .sing.
Danser, To dance.
Of iht ^Indicative Mood.
• *
This mood, is thus called, because it not orAj indi-
cates the affirmation in the different tenses of the verbs,
but likewise the time, number, and person ; without
being preceded or governed by either a conjunction or
verb:
JHcris une kttre^ I write a letter.
// chante une chanson, He sings a song.
, Ecris and chante are two verbs in the indicative
mood, because they do not require to be preceded by a
conjunction* or another verb to make a complete sense.
The definition of this mood will be better understood,
^ by comparing the little that has been said with what is
going to be said with respect to the subjunctive mood.
Of the Imperative Mood.
The name which has been given to this mood, is de-
rived from a Latin word which signifies to command ^
and the imperative is in fact but a manner of denoting
in the verbs the action of commanding^ entreating, pray-
ings exhorting, ?ind sotheimes forbidding : ex.
Ke meprisez pas les avis Do not despise the advice
queje vous donne, which I gi^e 3rou.
It is easy to perceive that this manner of speaking is
but an exhortation, as if I had said,
Je vous exhorte, je vous prie, I exhort, I entreat you, not
de ne pas mipriser mes to despise my advice.
avis,
• This mood has no first person in the singular, because
♦ Among tfie conjunctions, soin^rovern the indicative, others the
subjunctive : this will be explained hereafter,
13
i
146
it is impogsible for a man to command himself; and if
it have the first person plural, it is because we speak as
much to others as to ourselves; as when we say,
Evitons tout ce quipourroit Let us avoid every thing
offenstr Us autres^ that might ofiend others*
Xbe second person singular and the first and second
plural admit of no pronouus before them; as to the
third, in both numbers, it is always preceded by the
pronoun il or e//e, &c. and the conjunction que.
(y rte Subjunctive, or Conjunctive*
The name' of subjunctfve, or conjunctive, sufficiently
conveys what its use is in a sentence* It may be de-
fined thus ; a manner of expressing the different tenses
of the verbs without any affirmation* In fact, the sub-
junctive never affirms ; it is always preceded by, or
gubject to some conjunction ; and if it should be met
with in a sentence containing an affirmation, that af-
firmation can only be expressed by the verb that pre-
cedes tb^ subjunctive, which is used only to modify that
affirmation* In the subsequent sentence,
Je travdilk afin que vous I work that you may rest
V0U8 rqjiosiez, yourself.
the affirmation is only expressed by je travaille^ I work,
and what follows only expresses the end which I propose
by working, viz. to procure you some rest* Again,
Je desire que vous fassiez I wish that you may do
voire devoir^ your duty ;
I affirm that I wish ; but it is clear there is no affirma-
tion in these vfordsfithat you may do your duty^ since I
do not say that you 'io, tnat you have done, that yotr
will do your duty ; but only that 1 wish you may do it*
My wish is not doubtful ; but it is very doubtful whether
you will or may do your duty*
147
TENSES.
There are, strictly speakkig, but three natural and
proper tenses in the verbs : viz.
Lepassi^ The past.
Le present^ The present.
Lefutur^ The future.
In the French language, the tenses are divided in the
following manner, viz. Jive in the infinitive mood; three
of them are simple^ the two others compound.
In the simple tenses, the verb is expressed in one
word: ex.
Parler, To speak.
Chantant, Singing.
DansCj Danced.
The compound tenses are conjugated with some one
of the auxiliary verbs, oroir, to have, or itre^ to be,
joined to a participle passive : ex.
Jvoir parli^ To have spoken.
Ayant chaniij Having sung.
Etre aimSy To be lovrid.
Etani aimiy Being loved.
Simple Tenses.
Le prisent^ The present.
Le participe aciif^ The participle active.
Le partidpe passify The participle passive.
Compound.
Lepritirity The preterite.
Le participe passe ou The participle past or com-
compQs6f pound.
There are ten tenses in the indicative mood, viz. Jive
simpk and Jive compound : they are,
SlMPI^E.
Le prisenty The present.
Vimparfaii^ The imperfect.
Lt pfiiirit^ The preterite.
[
148
Lefutur^ The future.
Le condiiiahnelj The conditional.
COMPOUNP OP
Le present^ The present. •
LHmparfaUj The imperfect.
Lepreiirii, The preterite.
Lefutur, The future*
Leconditionnel, • The conditional.
.V. jB. The iliperative admits of no tense but the
present.
The subjunctive mood has four tenses; two simple
and two eompoumh
Sim PLC.
Le pristni^ The present.
Lepriiirii^ The preterite.
Compound of '
Leprisent^ The present.
Lcpr6t6ritj The preterite.
Before we proceed any further on the comugations,
it has been thought proper to explain the difierent uses
of the above tenses, as one of the most important arti-
cles in. a language, the precision ^f which partly de-
pends on the difference which custom eets between one
tense and another with regard to the sense of the sen-
tence. We shall endeavour to be short and concise,
and say nothing but what is useful, in hopes that the
following explanation will be sufficient to remove a
difficulty which constantly puzzles the learner.
TENSES of the INDICATIVE MOOD.
Simple.
Present.
This tense is used when the state, action, or im-
149
pression, mentioned by the verb, u existing^ doings or
kappehingy at the very time we are speakiog : ex.
Je me porte 6ien, I am well.
Voire scBur est maladt^ Your sister is ill.
Nnus nous promenoDS, We are walking.
Vous ecrivez, You are writing.
Z&jouent, They are playxngj Slc.
The present is also used,
1. When speaking of actions or things which we
hahittially do, are accustomed to do, or can do : ex.
Xous dinons toujours a deux We always dine at two
heure9y o^clock.
Elk etudie Phistoirt^ She studies history.
Vous pariez Frangois, You speak French.
Lit-t7 PMglois ? Does he read English ?
2. When speaking of actions which are to be done
in a very short time, we generally use this tense instead
of the future: ex.
Je pars ce soir pour la I set out this evening foj
campagne^ the country.
Que faite8-vati5 demain? What do you do to-morrow?
Instead of
Je partirai ce soir pour la I shall set out this evening
campagne^ for the country.
Que {ereZ'Vous demain ? What will you do to-mor-
row?
S. This tense is also constantly used in French in-
stead of the preterite and compound of the preterite^
especially in orations or set discourses^ and inpoetry^ in
order to represent a past action or event as present to
the mind of the hearers or readers.
Imperfect.
This tense has two uses ; in the firsts which probably
is the origin of its name, it expresses an action present
or doing at the time of an action that is past : as when
I say,
13*
I6d
Man frirt apprenoit sa My brother was leaHiing
legon quand vous arri- his lessoD whdn you ar-^
vates, rived*
In the above sentence, the act of learning, though
past with respect to ray narration, was present at the
moment your arrival took place ; therefore this tense is
but imperfectly preterite and imperfectly present.
In /Ac second^ the imperfect is employed every time
we speak of actions of habit, or actions reiterated at a time
which is not defined: ex.
Qaand /etois ci Londres, When I was in London, I
/allois souvent voir mes often went to see my
amis, friends;
that is, I often used to go, or I frequently went, &c.
The imperfect is likewise used when we sp^ak of the.
character, or some inherent ^nd distinctive quality, of per-
sons or things no longer existing; and after the English
conjunction if, though the verb be preceded by should,
could, would: ex.
Philippe, pere d^Alexan- Philip, the father of Alex-
dre le Grand, etoit le ander the Great, zoa5 the
plu» Jin politique de son deepest politician of his
temps, time.
Cesar avoit je ne sais quoi Cassarftad I know not what
de grand dans la phy- of great in his physiog-
sibnomie, nomy.
Carthage faisoit* un pro- Carthage carried on a pro-
digieux commerce par le digious trade bylhe means
may en de ses vaisseaux, of her ships, which went
qui alloient jusqu^aux as far as the Indies.
Indes,
Palmire et Persipolls etoient ' Palmyra and Per^epolis
de grandes et belles villes, > were large and fine cities.
S'^il venoit, je le paie^ If he woxdd come, or came,
rois, I would pay him.
* See Fa*»e, page 290.
151
Gedrge //• etoit d^une
tailU plutoi petite que
moyenne; il avoit les
ytux tris'Saillans^ le nez
grand^ ti une belle com'
jpkxion ; il etoit doua?,
moderi ei humain; sobre et
rSgulier dans sa maniere
de vivre: il se plaisoit
dans la pompe et dans
Vappareil militaire^et etoit
naturellemeni brave ; il
airooit la guerre comme
. soldat^ retudioil comme
une science^ tt avoit, sur ce
sujet^ une correspondance
ilablie avec quelques'Uns
dts plus grands gineraux
^ue VAlUmagne ait pro-
duits.
George IL wasy in his per-
son, rather lower than
the middle size ; he had
remarkable prominent
«ye8, a high nose, and a
fair complexion ; he was
mild, moderate and hu-
mane ; in hia way of liv-
ing, sober and regular:
he delighted in military
pomp and parade^ and
teas naturally brave :
"he loved war as a sol-
dier, studied it as . a
science, and had, on this
account, a settled cor-
respondence with some
of the greatest generals
that Germany has pro-
duced.
From the above instances it might confidently be
believed, that every difficulty attending the use of this
tense will be entirely removed ; I shall however add, as
a farther illustration, that whenever the verb, which iq
English is in the preterite, can be rendered by the past
tense of the verb to be, and that preterite changed into
the participle active, or when that preterite c^n be
turned into the verb in the infinitive mood preceded by
/, thou, he, ^c. used to, that past tense must be made in
French by the imperfect : ex.
Je lisoisj 1 used to read ; or I was reading.
Preterite.
This tense is so called because it always expresses an
action done .at a time determined or specified by an adverb,
or some circumstance in the speech, and so entirely
elapsed, that nothing more remains of the time whea
that action was doing : ex.
Je fus malade hier pendant 1 was ill yesterday for two
deux he^res, hours.
154
jLadernierefoifi^tnoii^al- The last tine we wmi to
lames U voir, nous eumes see him, we had a kind
till acctuil favorable^ - reception.
Vous ecrivites a votre frirt You laroit to your bro-
il y a hull jours, ther eig/t( doys ago.
lis essuyerent de grandes Thej underwent great
pertes I'annee passee, losses last year.
FUTORE.
This tense simply expre68e3 that an action will be
done at a time that is not yet come : ex.
Je vous vcrrai demaii^ a I shall see you to-morrom in
Londresy London.
Mon frire vous ecrira la My brother will write to
semaine prochaine, you next week.
In French, as well as in English, we sometimes ex*
press an action that is to be done instantlj, by the verb
aller^ or s^en aller^ to go, immediately followed by an
infinitive: ex.
Je vais, or je m'en vais I am going to write to my
ecrire a ma tante, aunt.
Je rais or je m'en vais I am going to set out.
partir,
Which signify,
Je lui ecrirai tout presen- I will write to her immedi^
teraent, ately.
Je partirai dans Pinstant, I will set out instantly.
To express an uncertainty in a future tense, that is,
to express that it is not decided that such a thing will
be done, we make use of the verb devoir immediately
followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, and that is
the only instance wherein devoir does not imply obliga^
a'on, necessity,^ ^c. : ex.
Le roi doit partir pour The king is to set out for
Cheltenham vers le mi- Cheltenham about the
lieu du mois de Juillety . middle of July, and is
tt ne doit revenir qxCu not to return till the lat-
lajin dfA mois £Aout^ ter end of August.
163
That is,
On suppose gue k rot par- It is supposed that the king
tira, &c. ti quHl ne re- zoill set out^ ^c» and will
Viendra qu'a, &c* - not return till^ ^c^
Conditional.
The name of this tense is a true definition of it: in
fact, it is always used to express some condition or sup-
position^ and has always a reference to the present^ be-
cause, by supposing the condition effected, the actfon,
mentioned by the conditional, becomes present : ex*
Je lirois, si favois des IsAou/JreaJ, if Ihadbooks.
' livres^
Vous auriez la Jlivre^ si You zcould have a fever if
vous mangiez de ce you ate of that fruit*
fruity
Je serois mortifii^ sHl per- I should he mortified, if he
doit sonprocesj should lose his law-suit.
It is sometimes used, instead of the future, after the
conjunction que : ex#
II a promis qxxHl vien- He has promised to come^
^ droit, or that he would come.
This tense is often called the uncertain tense^ because
it expresses an action made uncertain by the conditional
that follows it ; and some grammarians place it among
the tenses of the subjunctive mood, though it is very
certain that it never is governed by any of the conjunc-
tions which require a subjunctive mood after them*
COMPOUND TENSES.
COHPOUND OF THE PRESENT.
The compound of the present is employed in two
different fpanners, «
1. It expresses an action past in an indeterminate
154
time but not very far distant from the time we speak :
thus we must saj,
J'ai vu mademoisdle voire I have seen your sister, and
scRur tt lui ai parle, spoken to her.
Le roi de Prusse a conquis The king of Prussia has
la Stlisie^ conquered Silesia.
Ctla s'est passe avanta- That has passed advanta-
geusement pour voire geouslj for your cousin*
cousiuj
In the abo?e sentence, the action is certainly past,
but the time when it passed is neither determined nor
specified.
2. It expresses a time definite and .determinate, but
of which there yet remains some part to elapse : ex.
Lea fruits ont tres^hien Fruits have very well #«c-
reussi cette ann6% ceeded this year.
J^ous n^avons pas eu beau^ We have not had much
coup de neige cet hiver^ snow this winter.
// a plu ioute cette semaine^ It has rained all this week,
tout cemois^ all this month.
J^ous avons vu d^ilranges We have seen strange
choses dans ce sieck^ things in this century.
In the above sentences, this year^ this »€e£, this
mnier, &c. are times which still last, and are not yet
elapsed.
To express an action recently past, we sometimes
make use of the verb venir immediately followed by d«,
and the verb in the infinitive mood : ex.
Je viens de le voir passer, I have just seen him go by.
Le roi vient d'arriver, Th^ king w but just arrived*
Elle vient d'expirer, She is but just dead.
The same tense may be expressed by the verb faire^
preceded by the negation n^ and foHowed by the con-
junction que^ with an infinitive preceded by de : ex.
// ne fait que d'arrfoer. He is hUjust arrived.
Je ne fais que de sortir, I have but just gone ou^
f
\ U5
If. EL This partitte de is here indispensable, because,
without it, the expression would liave ^uite another
sense, and would express a continoation or a frequent
reiteration in the action : ex.
Vous ne faites que sortir. You do nothing but go out.
Elle ne fait que jouer et She does nothing but play
denser J and dance.
COHPODND OF THE IkPERFECT.
This tense expresses an action past before another
which is past also; but with this difference, that the
action expressed by this tense is the principal object of
the person who speaks, and the following sentence is
subordinate to that expressed by the compound of the
imperfect. So that, though the time of that subordinate
sentence be defined, that of the principal sentence is not
the less indeterminate, because the former has no influ-
ence on the latter. As when we say,
Ifous avions dine lorsqu^U We had dined when he
arriva^ arrived,
our principal object is to express the action of dining
as past, without determining at what time, but onlj be-
fore an action which is past also, without, however,
the latter being a consequence of the former; for, we
do not mean to say, that be stayed, or waited, till we
bad dined, to arrive.
Compound op the Preterite.
Tbis tense also expresses an action past or done
before another which is likewise past ; and it is deter-
mined by the following sentence, which is the principal
object of the attention. Thus when we say,
• Quand ils eurent acheve When they had done play-
de' jouer, Us se mirent A ing they began singing.
chantetf
♦ 156 0
We mean at first to convity that they began tinging^
and that it was not till they hid dont playing: in which
case, the action of having done playing is subordinate to
this, thi}j began singings and consequently the latter de«
tern}ines the time of the other.
The following observation is very plain, and will in
some manner fix the use of the above tense, viz. that
it is hardly ever used except after the conjunctions
Aussiiot que^^ CApres que^ After;
D^abord ou«, > As soon as ; < Lorsque^ } i«^.
Desqut, ) (Quand, 5 ^^^""'^
which never precede a compound of the imperfect, un-
less the verb express a custom or habit.
Lastly, we must use the compound of the preterite
when the adverb bientot soon, precedes or follows the
verb was or. had^ to express an action or thing as done
' and accomplished : ex.
Vaffaire fut bientot /mVe, The business zoer^^oon over.
J'eus bientot Jim de man' I AaJ^oon done eating.
Compound of the Future.
t The name of this tense seems at first to convey a con-
tradictibn: what is meant by it is, not that an action
can be future and past ^t thie same time, but only that
the action, which is to come, will be past when another
action, shall happen, or even before it happens : ex. .
Je serai parti quand vous I shall be gone when you
reviendrez^ (shall) come back.
Quand vous aurez fini vos When you (shall) have done
affaires^ vous viendrez me your business, you shall
trouver^ come to find me.
. In the first sentence, / shall be gone which is a
^uture time with respect to the present we speak
167 '
in, will be a past time by the time you will or purpost
to arrive, &c.
Compound of the Conditional.
This tense generally supposes a condition, as the con-
ditional present, with this difference, that the condition
taking place, the action expressed by the verb in the
conditional is accomplished and consequently in a past
time : ex.
Je vous aurois ecrit il y a I would have written to you
tin mofV, si /eusse su a mohth ago, if I had
votre adresse^ known your direction.
The indicative mood has another tense, formed by
the compound of the pr^senf of the verb avoir^ joined
to a participle passive, which has not been inserted
in the preceding tenses, on account of its being seldom
used : ex.
Quand jpai eu dine, je suis When I (have) had dined,
pariij I set out.
Bat it is more elegant and natural to say,
Apres avoir dtne^ je suis After I had dined, I set
partij out.
TENSES of the SUBJUNCTIVE or CONJUNCTIVE
MOOD.
The subjunctive or conjunctive has no future dis-
tinguished frcfin the present^ because the present of the
subjunctive likewise expresses a future tense : ex.
Je ne croispas quHl vienne, I do not think he will come.
Add the following observations to the latter :
1. When the verb which precedes the conjunction
is in t(ie present or future of the indicative, and nvhen
we do not mean to express an action passed in the
second verb, we must put this last verb in the present
of the subjunctive mood : ex.
Jesouhaite que vous reus- I wish you may succeed in
sissiez dans voire entreprise, your undertaking.
J^attendrai quHl vienne, I will wait till he come.
14
ld»
2. When the verb which is before the conjunction is
in 6ome of ihe past tenses, or conditional, and we wish
not to designate by the second verb a past time more
distant than that of the first verb, we mast pnt this
second verb in the preterite of the subjunctive :
Alexandre ordonna qtie tous Alexander ordered^ that all
ses sujets Tadorassent
comme un dieu^
Je voulois que vous ecrivis-
siez a voire scBur^
11 souhaiteroit que vous
prissiez des rusures plus
tonvenahlesj
his subjects should roor^
ship him like a god.
I wished you to write to
your sister*
He would wish you to take
more becoming meas-
ures.
3. The compound of the present of the subjunctive
mood is used when we speak of an action past and ac«
complished, with regard to the tense of the verb which
preceiies the conjunction ; and this tense is generally
the present, compound of the present, or future of the
indicative : ex.
Je doute qu'^aucun philo-
sophe ait jamais bien
connu Punion de Pdme
avec le corpsj
II a fallu que j'aie consul-
te tous les medtcins,
Je n'aurai garde d't/ atler,
que je n'aie re<;u quel-
que assurance d^itre bien
accueilliy
I doubt whether any philo-
sopher have ever well
understood the union of
the soul with the body.
I was obliged to consult all
the physicians.
I shall bff no means go thi-
ther, tilr I have received
some. assurance of being
welcome.
4. After the imperfect, preterite, compound of the
imperfect, of the indicative, or one of the two condi-
tionals, we use the compound of the preterite of the
subjunctive mood ; likewise after the conjunction if,
when preceding a compound tense: ex.
J'ignorois que vous eussiez I did not know you had
emi)ras8e cette profes* embraced that profes-
sioii'la, sion.
159
«
Vbus n^avez pas era que je You rftd not believe I
fusse arrivee a»a»< rou^, should have arrived be-
fore you. '
Nous auTions 6ie fdchis que MVe sh<mld have been sorry
vous vons fussiez aclresse if you had applied to any
a d^autres qu^d nou^i^ others but us*
NUMBERS AND PERSONS.
A tense is composed of numbers ; that is, the singu-
lar and the plural.
That there are three persons, has already been ob*
served under the personal pronouns ;, we have only to
remark, that some of these three persons are always
joined to the verb as its nominative case, therefore the
verb must agree with that nominative in number and
person : ex.
Jefais^ i do.
Tufais^ Thou dost.
Ilfait^ He does.
Nous faisoyis^ We do*
Vous Jaites^ You or ye do.
lis font, They do.
The pronoun T?ow*,.you, denotes the second person
singular and plural, with this difference, that when we
speak to a person only, the attribute, or qualifying
noun, must be put in the singular : ex.
Vous ites roarie, and not You are married.
mariis,
Vous 4tiez general de Par- You were general of the
mee, and not giniraux, army.
But we must say mariis and g6n6raux, if we speak to
many.
When the verb has two or three nouns or pronouns
as its nominatives, it must be put in the plural, though
all these nominatives be' in the singular ; because two
or more nouns in the singular are equivalent to a plu-
ral, with regard to verbs as well as to adjectives and
participles passive : ex.
Man frire et ma saur sont My brother and sister are
partis, gone.
This has already been mentioned in the adjectives.
160
If, among these nominatives^ one is of the^rst per-
son and the other of the second, or one is of the second
and the other of (he third, the verb must agree with the
first in preference to the second, and viith the second
in preference to the third; observing that, in French,
the person spoken to, must be namec) first ; and the per-
son speaking is to be mentioned the last : we must
therefore say, '
C^est vous et moi ^n avons
dicowoeri tout ce comploi^
Ce n^est ni vous ni ma
saur qui avez ouvert la
porte,
Vous^ mon pere^ et moi^
parti rons demain^
It is you and I who havt
discovered all that plot.
It is neither you nor my
sister who have opened
the door.
You, my father, and I, wilt
set out to-morrow.
The pronoun relative qui^ in these and the like sen-
tences, always takes place of the first or second person,
and only agrees with the others in number; it is for this
reason we must say,
C\st moi (pii suis cause de
ce malheur^
Oest vous qui avez revile
ce secret^
Ce n^est ni lui ni moi qui
Tavons/ai/,
There arc four conjugations in the French language.
Each is distinguished by the termination of the verb in
the infinitive mood.
It is / who am the cause
of that misfortune.
It is you who have reveal-
ed that secret.
It is neither he nor / who
have done it.
The first makes er,
The second ,tr,
The third tvoir,
The fourth re,
as donner, to give,
as puntr, to punish,
as vecevoifj to receive,
as rendre, to render.
N. B. It is necessary that the learner should be
well acquainted with the manner of. conjugating the
two following verbs, because of the frequency of their
occurrence in sentences, and in forming the compound
tenses of all other verbs.
161
CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB
iNPINITlVfirMc
lOOD*
Present. '
Jlvoir^ to have.
Participle active.
Ayant^ having.
Participle passive.
♦JSw, had.
Indicative Mood.
Present. Singular.
J^ai^ I have.
Tu as^ thou hast.
// a, he has.
Elk a, she has.
Imperfect. Sing.
J^avois^ I had.
Tu avoisj thou hadst.
II avoit, he had.
Compound of the present.
^voir ete, to have had.
Compound of the past.
Ayant et4, haying had.
Preterite. Sing<
J'eti*, I had.
Tu «U5, thou hadst.
II euty be had.
Plural.
Ifous avon&^ wc have.
Vous avez, you or ye have.
Plural.
Ifous avionsj we had.
Vous aviiz^ you had.
Ih avoientj they had.
PIdral.
Xous eumes^ we had.
Vous eutes^ you had.
lis eurent^ they had.
Future. Singular.
J^aurai^ I shall or will have.
Tu auras^ thou wilt, (J^c. have.
// aura^ he will, Sire have.
Plural.
Nous aurons^ we shall, ^c. have.
Vous aurez^ you will, <^c. have.
/& auront^ they will, <$/•€. have.
Conditional. Singular.
J'^aurois^ I should, could, would, or might have.
Tu attrou, thou wouldst, <{/*c. have.
// auroit^ he would, ^c. have.
* Pr«DOQnce eu like the French letter u, throughout thif ver^.
14*
163
PluraL
Vous auriez^ you i/IIm, ^c, have.
Jls auroienty ihey would, Sfc, hafve.
Compound Tenses/
They are formed by adding the participle passive, eu,
had, to the preceding :
Compound of the Present.
J^ai eti, &c. I have had, ^e.
Compound of the Imperfect.
J^aoois eu, &c* I had had, ^c^
Compound of the Preterite.
Jhus eu, &c« I had had, ^c.
Compound of the Future.
J^aurai eu, &c. I will or shall have had, ^c.
Compound of the Conditional.
Taurois eu, &c. I would, should, could, or niighl have
had, ire.
Ikpekative Mood.
Present. Singular,
•/^te, have thou.
QuHl at/, let him have.
Qu^elle ait, let her have.
Plural.
Ayons^ let us have*
^ Aytz, have ye or you.
QmHU or e//e5 aitnt^ let them have.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. Singular. '
Que /ate, that I have, or may have.
tu aitiy thou mayest have.
il ttitf be may have.
16S
Plorah
Que nous ayons^ that we may have*
V0U3 ayeZf
you may have.
Us aientj
. they may have.
Preterite. Siagular.
Qui
1 feusse^
that I might have or had.
tu eussesy
thou mightest have.^
il eut,
he might have.
Plural.
Que nous eussionsy that we might have.
vous eussiezj you might have.
Us eussentf
they might have.
Compound Tenses.
They are formed by adding the participle passive cti,
Iiad, to the two preoeding : ex.
Compound of the Present.
Que fate eu, &c. that I may have had.
Compound of the Preterite. '
Qutfeusse tu^ &c. that I might have had.
The learner ought to conjugate the preceding verb
with a negation : ex.
Je n^ai pas, I have not ;
Kous n^avons pas, We have not ;
always placing ne before the verb, and pas after it.
CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB
ETRE, TO BE.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Compound of the Present.
Eire, to be. ^voir 6l6y to have been.
Participle active. Compound of the past.
Etant^ being. ^yant iti^ having been.
Participle passive.
£;e, been.
]64
Indicatiye Mood.
Present. Singular. Plural.
Jt suisj I am. Jfous sommesy we are.
Tu w, thou art. Vous itesj you are.
// esty he is. lis sont^ they are.
Imperfect. Sing. Plural.
Titoisy 1 was. Nous itions, we were.
Tu (toisy thou wast. Vous etiez^ you were.
II 6toU^ be wai. lis itaientj they were.
Pret. Sing. Plural.
Jifus^ 1 was. Jiousfumesj we were.
Tu/u^ thou wast. Vous fules^ you were.
// futj he was. Ilsfurmt^ they were.
Future. Singular.
Je strain I shall or will be.
Tu serasy thou wilt, ire, be.
// ^era, he will, ire. be.
Plural.
J^ous seronsy we shall, cj/-c. be.
, Vous serezy you will, ire. be.
//^ seronty thej will, <^c. be.
Conditional. Singular.
Je serois^ 1 would, could, should, or might be^
Tu seroisj thou wouldst, ({/-c. be.
// seroity he would, ire. be.
Plural.
•ATottJ ^crion^, we should, ire. be.
Fow* seriezj you would, <Jrc..l>e.
/& fferoien/, they would, <Jrc. be.
Compound Tenses.
They are formed by adding the participle passive 6f
this verb, 6t6, been, to the simple tenses of the indica-
tive mood of the verb avoir : ex.
Compound of the Present.
. J^ai 4t6f &c. I have been, ire.
Compound of the Imperfect*
J^avois (ii^ &c« 1 bad been, 4^c.
165
Compound p( the Preterite*
J^eus 6t6y &c. I had been, ($rc.
Compound of the Future.
J^aurai ele^&LC I shall or will have been, ^c.
Compound of the Conditional.
J^aurois tti^ &c. I should, could, would, or might
have been, ^c*
Imperative Mood.
Present. Singular.
Sois^ be thou.
QuHl soit^ let him be.
Plural.
Soyons^ let us be.
Soyez^ be ye.
QuHls soient^ let them be«
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. Singular.
Que je sois^ that 1 be, or may be.
tu soisy thou mayest be.
il 501/, he may be.
Plural.
Que nous soyons^ that we may be.
vous soyez, you may be.
ils soient^ they may be.
Preterite. Singular.
Que jefusse^ that I might be, or were.
tufussesy thou mightest be.
ilfut^ he might be.
Plural.
Que ntms fussions^ that we might be.
vousfussiez^ you might be.
ilsfussent^ they might be.
Compound Tenses.
They are formed by adding the participle past of this
verb, 6t6, been, to the two simple tenses of the sub-
junctive mood of t<)e verb avoir : ex.
Compound of the Present.
Que faie iU^ that I may have been, <Src.
166
Compound of the Preterite.
Quefeusse e/e, &c. that I might have been, &c.
This verb, as well as the preceding, is to be conju-
gafed with the negation : ex.
Je ne suis pas, I am not.
J^ous ne sommes pas, We are not.
•AT. B. Here it is peculiarly necessary to observe, that
(he two above verbs, avoir^ to have, and itre^ to be,
are only auxiliaries when they are joined with some par-
ticiple passive of another verb ; otherwise, itre may
properly be called a substantive verb; that is, a verb
which only expresses the affirmation, without any in-
herent <}uality ; and the verb avoir is an active one^
which signifies to possess.
EXERCISES on the two AUXILIARY VERBS.
GENERAL OBSERVATION.
Every verb must agree with its nominative case in
person and number ; but after collective nouns, such as
amas^foule, injiniii^nombre^ la plupart^ &c. followed by a
genitive, the verb must agree with that genitive in
number : ex.
Loiplupart de ses2Lm\sP out Most of his friends havt
abandonni^ forsaken him.
In order to ease the learner, the different simple
tenses are marked in the following exercises as far as the
irregular verbs, when it is hoped every difficulty will
be removed by practice and attention. The second
person singular, being seldom or never used in conver-
sation, has been omitted throughout the exercises on the
Verbs.
Indicative Mood.
Pres. I have a book. — I am happy. — He has
heureux^zij.
a hat which is too big We have no
(rc5p,adv. grancl,adj.
money. - . - - We are not ambitious You have
argent. ambitieux^zdj.
167
a sword. - - You are very proud Those girls
orgutilhuxj^dj.
have modesty ; they are virtuous*
modestie.L Der/M«iia?,adj.
Imp. I had a friend. I was grateful My
reconnoman /,adj.
sister had no work, she was lazy We had
onvrage^ paresseux^^idu
a holiday, we were very glad of it.- — You had
to* cong6^ a3je,adj.
company, but you were not ready. - Your brothers
compagnie^f»mai$^C. j>r^/,adj.
had learning, they were loved by every body.
£avoir^m* atfne,p.p. de
Pret. (As soon as) I hadf a fine horse, I was
Des 9ue,c.
noerry My cousin had a little garden, he
de bonne humeiiu c<m5tn,m.
was ingenious. • - As soon as we had bread we
6toU acfm^adj. 2>ain,m.
were satisfied. - - You had fine weather, you were
rassasi6,p.p* temps
pleased. - - - - Your friends had beautiful flowers ;
concert ^,adj.
they were very careful of them.
soigneux^^dj.
FuT. I shall have discretion ; I shall be prudent.
discrilion^f.
- - Miss White shall have a bird which will be very
ot>eau,m.
tame We shall have no books, we shall not
appriv(ns6^2Ldj.
be learned. • - You shall have pens and paper ; you
5avan/,adj.
will be busy The English will have a good
occti;>e,adj.
admiral ; they will be victorious.
amtfa/,m. 'Ptc/orteux,adj.
CoND. I could have a pietty dog. — I would
joliydidy c/iten,m.
168
not be troublesome. - - - - Mr. T^iomas would have
tmpor/itn,adj.
good wine : it would be* a delicious thing. - • We
ce dilicieux^^dj* chosef.
would have a dictionary : we would not be negligent.
.... You would have good officers; you would be
invincible. - - - - These ladies would have a better
ininnci5Ze,adj.
reception ; they would be thankful.
accuet7,m. reconnoman^,adj. .
Imperative Mood.
Have patience and be indulgent.* - - - Let her have a
gown ; let her be happy. - - Let us have at least
au moins^ adv.
- 8(Ane gratitude ; let us be diligent. — Let them
reconnoissance^f*
have partridges ) let them be merry. '
perdrixjfm joyeMa?,adj.
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. That I may have riches. • - - That I may-
be charitable That he may have scholars. - - - -
That he may be attentive. That we may have a
good house. - - - That we may be well lodged. —
6ten,adv. /og^^p.p.
That yott may have your money ; that jou may
ftrgent^m.
be paid That they may have apples : that
they may be ripe.
mi2r,adj.
Pret. That I might have generosity. That I
gtnirositiSm
might not be poor. ----- That he might have no
pauvre^^iVy
pleasure. - - • That he might be uneasy. - - - - That
plaisir, m^me^adj.
we might have our share. - - - That we might not
parLff.
♦ Remember the last obseryation, page 166, that the ncond pcr-
*on plural must be used throughout the imperative moods.
169
be deceived* - - - That you might have a couple
/rompe5,p.p, * • couple f.
of fowls. - - - That you might be pleased. - - - That
cori/en/,adj.
they might have no pension. - - - That they might
not be rewarded.
r^C(?mp«n*w,p.p.
Promiscuous EXERCISES upon iht COMPOUND
TENSES.
I have had (a great deal) of (rouble ; I have not
hitn peinB^L
been rewarded. - - - Your brother would have had
leave, _ if he had been diligent. - - -:If you bad
permission^
married him, you would have had a tyrant
c/wie5^,p.p. tyran^m.
instead of a husband ; you never could have been
au /ieu,p. man,m. ne jamais
happy If we bad fought, we could not
com^a//u,p.p.
have been conquered. - - - Thomas has had two
Tatncu5,p.p.
holidays, because he has been very active. ^ - -"
cofige, parcequ$,c. aciif^^dj.
Your friend could have had a better watch, he
fwon/rc,f.
would not have been cheated. - - - Your uncle and
<romp€,p.p.
my brother have been wet. - - - You could have
^ ^ mout7/ef,p.p.
killed a hare, if you had had a gun.
tue^.^i lievreyXn* fusil^m.
After these exercises, the learner ought to conjugate
the two foregoing verbs, throughout the several tenses
of the indicative mood only, first with an interrogation
affifiaative, and then with an interrogation negative:
ex.
15
170
Singular.
Affirmatively.
Ai-jtf have I ? I Suis-je? am M
A-i-il ? has he ? | Esl-il ? is he ?
Monfrire a^t-il ? has my brother ?
SaJilU est-elU ? is her daughter ? ^
Negatively.
yPai'je pas ? have I not ? I Ne suis-je pas 7 am I not ?
JPorUil pas ? has he not ? | J^tsi-il pas T is he not ?
^Ma sosur n^a-Utllt pas ? has not my sister?
Votrt cousin nhsUilpas ? is not your cousin ?
Plural.
Affirmatively
Jltcns-wm ? have we ?
Jv^z^vous f have you ?
Ont'ils ? have they ?
Vosfrcres ont-ils ?
Sommes'fum ? are we ?
EUs'Vous ? are you ?
SofkUils ? are they ?
have your brothers ? &c.
S^sfilks sont'tlks ? are his daughters ? &c.
Negatively.
^'ai>ons-nou5 joa^ f have vr€ not ?
Jpavez'vous pas ? have you not ?
K*ont'ihpas ? have they not ?
&.<? cn/iin5 n^ont'ils pas t have not his children ?
JV« 5ommc5-noM5 pa^ ? are we not ?
JPiteS'Vous pas ? are you not ?
Ke soni-ils pas ? are they not ?
Jlfw scstir5 ne sont-elUs pas ? are not my sisters f &;c.
N. 6. In the interrogations, it must be observecF,
that when there is a noun standing as a nominative to
the verb, the pronouns i/, elle^ nous^ vous^ ils^ tUts^
though not expressed in English, must be expressed in
French immediately after the verb, according to the
person and number ; and when the verb terminates
with a vowel, a -^ is to be added in the third person
171
e
singular between the verb and the pronoun, to avoid
the hiatus^ the noun beginning the phrase : ex.
Yotre oncle a-t-il des en- Has your uncle ' any chil-"
fans? dren ?
that is, Your uncle, has he any cfaitdren t
Moo cousin aura-t-il conge ? Will my cousin have a
holiday ?
that is, My cousin, zoill he have a holiday ?
The sanne rule, must be obaerved in the conjugation
of the other verbs : e^.
Votre frere joue-t-il du Does your brother play on
violon ? the violin ?
Sa soeur dmera-t-elle id Will her sister din? , here
aujourd^hui ? to-day ?
But If the sentence begin with qat interrogative, or
an advtrh followed by a noun, the pronoun is not to be
expressed, and that noun is to be put after the verb : ex*
Que/aif votre so^ur t What ia your sister doing ?
Comment se porte Monsieur How does your brother?
votre frere ?
When, in French, we make a general interrogation
concerning a sudden pain^ misfortune^ accident^ &c. we
say,
Qu'est'Ce que e^est ? What is the matter?
But if speaking to ordf ^ person, we must use the
verb avoir, and follow the above rule : ex*
Qu'avez-vous ? What is the matter with
you ?
Ctt'a-t-il? What is the matter with
him?
Qu^aviez-vous ? What was the matter with
you?
Qu^avoit votre smir ee What was the matter with
matin? your sister this morning?
The learner will have no trouble in going thfough
the other simple tenses of the indicative mood ; and as
172
for the compounds, it needs only to be remembered^ that
eu, had, or ite, been, is to be added to the simple tenses
of the verb aroiV, to have : ex.
Ji-je cti ? have I had ?
N'^ai-jepas eu ? have I not had ? &c.
Ai'je ete ? have I been ?
JST^ai'jepas ete ? have I not been? &c.
Promiscuous EXERCISES on the preceding RULES.
Have I my books ? - - Am I not unhappy to
malheureux^zdy de
have lost his friendship ? - - Has he no money ?
jE>erJif,p.p. . amitie^U
Js my sister arrived ? - - Has not your father a great
amr^6,p.p,
deal of friendship for you ? - - • What is the matter
with you ? - - Have not your parents sent you
ewroy^jp.p.
all the money which you wanted? Have we
dont aviez^y.besoin.
not a garden ? - - - Are we not very happy ? - - - -
Have you a good gun ? - - - Are you dexterous ? - •
, . adroitjzdj*
Have not my brother and sister a beautiful coach? - -
Are not Paul and Thomas two pretty children ? - -
joHjadj.
Are your brothers arrived ? - - - Are you not glad
to see them ? - - What is the matter with him ?
de voir^v*
Have they not spoken to him ? - - Had you not a
;7ar/^,p.p*
little dog ? - - Was not your paper very good ? - - Are not
' the English ladies generally handsomer than
gene>a/emen<,adv«
the French ? - - Shall you have occasion for your dic-
besoinyTn, de
tionary ? - • - - Shall I not have the pleasure to see
de
173
^fywi toHnorrow ! • « • Were jou net in the room? • • •
c{ematn,adv. chamhre^t.
Shall wc not have leave ? - . - ^ - Will thej not be
engry ? • • • Could yeu not have had a better watch ?
fdchc,a6j.
- - - • If France were as rich ai England, would
St,c itait
it not be the best* country in the world? • « -
ce,pro«
Will you not be ashamed ?••-•- Has not your
Aontetia:,adj«
friend had bad weather ? - - - What %as the
maupau;adj« ttmptf
matter with him this morning? - • * - Had not our
admiral better seamen than yours ? - - Has he' been
maitloi
victorious? - - Would not your hat be too big ? - - - -
«ic(ortetix,adj» grand,adj.
Is not your sister older than mine? - - Are you
ag^,adj.
not happier than if you , were married ? . - . - Shall
iiicmV,p»p«
not John have a holiday, if he be diligent ? • - Has not
Jwn est
your cousin more money than jou ? - - Was not your
wine very dear ?
The learner will soon be convinced how necessary it
is to know these two verbs perfectly well ; because, in-
dependently of beings constantly used, the compound
tenses of all the others are formed with them* When
he is well acquainted with their usage, be will only have
to add the participle passive to zjpj of their tenses .*
ex. '
J^ai aimij I have loved, or did love;
Je n^mipas ckant6^ 1 have not sung, or did not sing*
Jli'JtparU? have I spoken ? or did I speak ?
* See the Desveei of Coapariaon, p. 60^ te^
46*
1T4
N^ai^t fas iludii ? have I not studied ? or did I ntM
■ study.
Avez-vou» dans6 ? have you danced ? or did you dance ?
J^^avez'vous pas icrii t have you not written ? or did-yoU
not write ?
Je suispuni^ I am punished.
Je ne suispa9 attendu^ I am not expected.
Suis'je aitn6 ? am I loved ?
Nt suis-je pas ptrdu ? am I not undone?
Etes'vous marii? are you married?
N^liS'Vfms pas cohvaincu ? are you not convinced ?
REMARK on the Verb ETRE, to be.
In English, when this verb immediately precedes
any noun, signifying old^ hungry^ thirsiy^ cold, hot, or
afraid, it should be rendered in French by avoir, to
have, and the adjective must be changed into its sub-
stantive: ex»
Quel age avez-T?ou5 ? How old are you ?
J'ai sept ans, * I arn seven years old.
Avez-vous faim ? ^r« you hungry.
Jfon, m«w/ai soif, No, but I am thirsty, At.
EXERCISES.
How old is jyour daughter ? She is seven
Quel,ipvo. Jille^f,
years old. - - - My son will be eleven years old
0M,m. «5^ Jils,m.
(in the) month of April. I was very
au mois^m. AvrxL grand,^^y
hungry when I arrived. Were you not
quand,z. suis ornr^,p.p.
very thirsty ? - - He is not afraid. - - You will
grancl,adj. ptur*
soon be warm Are you not cold ? - - - •
fc»en(&,adv. cfcawrf. froid.
How old are these two young children? The
€nfant,T£u
175
one is three years old, and the other is not yet
encore,adT«
four. • Was not my sister more tbai^ ten years old
when she died ?
5wand,adv. mourui^y.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Parl-er, to speak.
Participle active. *ant^ speaking.
Participle passive. i^m. ee,f. spoken.
CoHP0i7ND Tenses.
Present. Avoir parity to have spoken.
PasU Ayant parity having spoken.
*
Indicative Mood.
Present. Singular.
Jt p^rl-e, I s^ak, or I do speak, or I am speaking.t
Tu e5, thou speakest.
// €, he speaks. ^
Plural.
Nous *ons^ we speak.
Vous tz^ you speak.'
Us ent, they speak.
* Verbs in thi« conjugation, the.root of which tenninates in g or <r,
immediatelj succeeded by A or o, require, for the softening of their
' sound, that an £ be added to the G, and a cedilla to the 9. Start
are placed where these alterations are required.
f When in English, a participle active is joined to any of the tenses
of the auxiliary verb to 6e, to oppress the continuation of the action,
the auxiliary must be left out in Trench, and the participle put id
tlie same tense, &c. with the auxiliary that is suppressed :
J^e parhj I am speakfng ;
Vous parlezy you art speaking ;
Abw* danstronsy we shall he. dan-
cing;
Je priois^ I was desiring ;
JVov* chantions^ we W€te singing j
//* ccriTQient^ they would he
writing;
and not Je wiis parlant^ rous ^tes parlant^ j'^tols priant^ ice. notis
serous dansani^ iUs seroieut ecrivanty &c*
176
Imperfect* Singular.
Jeparl'*oi$, I was speaking, spoke, or did speak*
Tu *oi$^ tbou wast speaking, &c.
II *aitj be was speaking, &c*
Plural.
Jfous ions^ we wer^ speaking, &c.
Vous ieZj jou were speaking, &c.
lU *oientj they were speakingy.&c*
Preterite. Singular*
Je parl-'^at, I spoke, or did speak.
Tu *as, thou spokest.
II *a, he spoke.
PluraU
Jfaus *dmes^ we spoke.
Vous Htes^ you spoke.
lis ermt^ they spoke.
Future. Singular;
Je parl-erat, I shall or will speak.
Tu eras^ thou shalt or wilt speak.- n^
// €ra^ he shall or will speak.
Plural.
' Nous trons^ we shall or will speak.
Fbutf erez, you shall or will speak.
lb erontj they shall or will speak.
Conditional. Singular.
Je parl-erotV, I should, would, or might speakV
Tu erots, thou should st, ^c* speak.
II crotl, be should, ^c speak.
PltiraL
J^ms erions^ we should, 4rc» speak*
Vous eritz^ you should, S/c. speak.
ils eroientj they should, c^c.^speak.
Compound Tenses.
Present. J^aiparie, I have spolen.
Imperfect. J^avois parU^ I had spoken.
Preterite. J^eusparlij I bad spoken*
177
Future. J^auraiparU^ I shall or will have spoken.
Conditional. J'^aurois parity I should, would, could, have
spoken.
Imperative Mood.
Present. Singular.
ParW, speak thou.
QuV/ «, let him speak.
Plural.
*o?i5, let us speak.
ez^ speak ye.
QuHls tni^ let them speak.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. Singular.
Qut jt parl-e, that I may speak, or I speak.
tu esj thou mayest speak.
il e, be maj speak.
Plural.
nous ionsj that we may speak.
vous tcz, you may speak.
Us en/, they may speak. . . k
Preterite. Singular,
^e je pav\-*asse^ that I might speak, or I spoke.
tu ^asses^ thou mightest speak.
il *di^ he might speak.
Plural.
nous *assions^ that we might speak*
vous ^assiez^ you might speak.
Us *assent, they might speak.
Compound 1'enses.
Present. Que faie pnrle^ that I may have spoken.
Preterite. Quefeusse parity that I might have spoken.
After (he same manner are conjugated about 2700
regular verbs. The following arc excepted : viz.
Alltr^ being, very irregular, will be seen among the
iirregular verbs*
178
Efvooyer is only irregular in the future and condition^
I present ; as, ins
c. feri'uoyerois^ I
jugation, we say, .
al present ; as, instead of saying fenvoyerai^ I will send,
4rc. feri'uoyerois^ I would send, ^jp'c. according to this con-
Future.
Singular. Plural.
, J^enverrai, 1 will send. J^ous enverrons*
Tu enverras^ Vous enverrez.
II enverra^ lis enverronL
Conditional.
Singular. Plural.
J^enverrois, I would send. Jious enverrions*
Tu enverroisj ' Vous enverriez*
II enverroiiy lis enverroiehU
PuER (sentir mauvais.) This verb is only used in
the infinitive mood, present tense, imperfect, future of
the indicative, and conditional. Formerly this verb
was irregular in the three persons of the present tense
of the indicative mood ^ as je pus, tu pus, ilput ; cus-
tom has, however, reformed (he abuBe, and will have it,
Jt pue, tu puts, it put.
Verbs ending in aver and oyer, as tssaytr, to try,
enroyer,to send, change the r into i wherever the letter
y is immediately followed by an e mute : ex. fesaait^
iu essaks, il tssaie, ftnvoit, tu envoits, il tnvoit. Sic*
The learner, having conjugated a verb affirmatvotltf
and ne^aftWy, ought to conjugate two others,, with an
inttrrogatwii affirmative and ntgativt, in the indicative
mood only, and eo on through the other conjugations,
before he attempts the exer^cisrs : ex.
A£5rmatively. .
MangtS'tu ? dost thou eat ?
Mangt't-il ? does he eat ?
Parlcni'tmus ? do we speak, &c*
Negatively.
JVe parli-jt pas f^ do I not speak ?
Ma sfjBur nt chantt-t'tUe pas f does not my sister smg.
^ .AT. fi. In many verbs, common usage .does not admit
an interrogation in the first person singular, present, of
179
the indicative mood.— -lostead of sajing, Mungi-ji ? Do
I eat ? Punis'je ? Do I punish ? &c. we say,
Est-ce que je mange f Est^ce que jt punis ? &c*
Some verbs, ending in e mute, in the first person
singulaf, present of the indicative mo6d, change the
t mute into i with an acute accent, and je after it ; as
parli'jt.
It has before been observed, that the compound tenses
are easily formed, by adding the participle passive of
the verb to any oif the tenses of the auxiliaries avcir^ to
have, or itrt^ to be, as they have been conjtigated, either
affirmatively, negatively, or interrogatively : ex.
AfGrmatively.
J^ai dans6^ I have danced, or I did dance.
Negatively.
Je rCmpas parU^ I have not spoken, or I did nol speak.
Interrogatively-affirmatively.
Avez'vous chanti ? Have you sung, or did you sing ?
Interrogatively-negatively.
N'^a-Ulpas m«ng6 ? Has he not eaten, or did he not eat ?
Observe; that we make use of
Mener^ To take, to carry,
Amener^ Td» bring,
Emmener^ To carry, or take away,
and all the compound verbs of mener^ whenever we
speak of rational or irrational beings to which nature
has given the faculty of walking, if they be not depriv->
ed of it through illness or accident : in alt other cases
we make use of
Porter^ To carry, to take,
ApporUr^ To bring,
Emporterj To carry, or take away,,
and all the compounds f>iporUr.
N. B. It* must be necessarily observed here, previ-
ously to the learner's translating the following exercises,
that the English tiuxiliarj/ verbs, have^ am^ do^ did, toil^
shallj can^ kf^ fnay^ would^ could^ should^ might, and often
oughi^ are most commonly used, fa that language, to
180
avoid that repetition of a preceding verb, or in answer
to a question or foregoing sentence ; to avoid the repe-
tition of that verb, and often of one or more pronouns ^
but in Frenrh, the verb, expressed in the first member,
or part of the sentence, must always be repeated, as
well as the pronouns which it maj govern : ex.
porterai avec
Je vous prie de porter de-
main ce.ite Utire a Mori'
sieur D-
Je la lui
plaisir^
Voxis ne pourrkz pas ap-
' prendre cette legon en dix
jours,
II me semhlt que je pourrois
Vapprendre,
Attendez-vous vos saurs au'
jourd*hui ?
Ouij nous les atlendonsj
Voire frere 6crU-il a M.
voire pere ?
Out, il lui 6crit a present j
Apprenez'vous le Frangois ?
Oui^je Papprends^
Avez-vous aeheli les livres
dont vous m^avez parU ?
Kon, je ne les ai pas encore
achetes,
J^e deoroienl'ils pas /aire
savoir a leur pere que
leur frere est dans la de-
tresse ?
Certainement, ils devroient
le luifaire savoir,
I beg of you to carry that
letter to-morrow to Mr.
D.
I will, with pleasure, {carry
it to hinh) understood.
You coulcl not learn that
lesson in ten days.
It seems to me as if I
could, {learn it,) under-
stood.
Do you expect your sisters
to-day ?
Yes, we do, {expect them,)
understood.
Is your brother writing to
your father?
Yes, he is now, {writing to
him^) understood*
Are you learning French ?
Yes, I am, {learning i7,) un-
derstood.
Have you bought the
books which you men-
tioned to me ?
No, I have not yet, {bought
them^) understood.
Ought they not to let their
father know that their
brother is in distress?
Certainly, they oughu{lolet
him knczD it,) understood.
181
EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATIOlJ.
Indicative Mood.
Pres. I play sometimes, but I txe-
jou-fir^Y* quelmufois^Sidv. mais^c. ntja-
vjtT win How much does your lirother
mmV^aclv. gagn-«r,v. Comhier,^zAY» to.
five for his board ? - - We do not command ;
we entreat - - You always borrow ; you
/?rt-er,v. <(nyour5,adv« tmprunt-tr^Y,
never lend. - - - You are always speaking when '
prSt-er^v. ' (jfMand,adv.
I write. --..,Vfhy do you not grant
icris^y. Pourquoi^^dv. -o» accord-er^V*
him that favour? - - - What do they ask
gr&cef. demand-er^v*
you ?
Imp. I was desiring them to sing a song. - r
/>»ver,v. de chant-er^v. chansonf.
She was not speaking to you. - - Were we not jok-
hadi-
ing ? - - Were you not scolding tbem when I came ?
,w-cr,v. gr(mJ-er,y. vtm,v.
Yes, I was. - - - They were eating fish.
mang-tr^y* poisson^m.
Pret. I spoke to them (a long while). - - - Did
not the king forgive ihefnfi^ No, he did not.
rot,m. pardonn-er^v. m\
We wept for joy when we found her. • - -
pkur-er^y. de jaie trouv-er^y^
Why. did you not play on Friday last ? - - - They
«^ ~ ' ' Vmdredi cJcrn«er,adj.
/astened (be.man to a tree, and then
^»-«/SV. ar6rc,m. cn5t«7«,adv.
robbed him of bis watch, gold ring, and all the
ro/-cr,v. lo, mon/re,f. 6aguc,f.
JQO^ey he had in his pocJ^et. - - The soldiers first
poche^f. di^abord^dt^
16
182
pillaged th^ tawD, and then slaughtered without
pilUer^Y. puis igofg-€r;v.
pity the old men, women, and children.
piii6 vieillari^m.
FuT. I will buy a watch the first time I
go to London. - » Will not your father send
trat,v. envo^'er^r*
you to school this winter ? - • • - What shall we give
^co/e,f. hiver^m* •
him ? - • - Will you not carry the children to the
play ? - - - They will empty the bottle if you
comidie^t. s vid-er^v. btrnteillej,
do not take it away.
♦ 1.^ «nipor/-er,v. «o^
CoND. I would lend them money if
prit-er^V. leur
they were not so idle. ----- Would not your
paresseux^^dy
mother despise such" a* conduct? - - Why should
mipris-er^v. fe^adj. conduite^t.
we send them thither ? - - - 1 aip sure you would
9ur,adj.
marry her, if she were rich. - - - Would they
iptms'er^v* etoit rtcfcc,adj.
not pay us, infai|^ad money?
pay-er.y.
IMPERATIVE Mood.
Bridle my horse, and bring him to
Brid'tr;v* cheval^m. o»i«n-cr,v.
me. - - - Give a chair to that lady. - - Let her not
chaise^f* dame^t*
(come up,) for 1 am engaged Let us carry those
mmUr^y* carfi. occupi^Jp.
peaches to Mrs. D*** Do not neglect your
Uchtf. Mint niglig'tr.y.
183
a£^irs. -- 1 promise thati will not. • Let them hunt*
affair e^U promt ts^\» chasser^y.
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. That 1 may help you. • - - Though* he
aid'tr^y. Quoique^c*
do not approve of my plan Provided*
approuTT-er^y* *o* planum. Pourvu que^c*
we avoid their company. - - • - That you may
ez>i/-er,v. compagnie^U
try that gun. - - - That they may not com-
eprouv'tr^y.
mand.
Pret. That I might changet my opinion. - - "
chang-er^ d' opinion.
That he might eatt an apple. -That we might not
pommej.
fall into their hands. - • - That you might
tomb-er^y. dans^p. main. ^
encourage! the industrious. • That they might
) encourag-er^y. industrieux^SLd'j.
exercise their talents. That I might pronounce*! - -
ex€rc-tfr,tv. taUnl^nt. prononc-tr^y.
That we might begin.!
convnfitnC'tr^y.
Pr(miscuou9 EXERCISES on the COMPOUND
TENSES.
I have forgotten to bring your penknife. - - • -
ouhli-er^y. de canifjm.
He has not yet spoken to us. - - Has she brought
e?icore,adv. *<» •
her work with her? Yes, she has. - - Have we not gain-
gagn-
ed our /cause ? - - Why have you not yet begun
er,v. commenC'tr^'^.
your exercise ? - - - You had taken the mustard
ihime^m. emporUtr^v* moutard^yU
% * ConjuDctiom which require the subjanctiYe mood, as wili be
seen hereafter ; See page 420.
t See the notes page 175.
184
away. — - You would have jtitJgcd more favour-
•^ j^g^r^y* fttvth
ably of bim. - Stay ' here till*
rahUmeni^Siiy* ResUr^v* tetrad v« jusqu^ a ce que^c*
we have dined* Could we not have assisted
(/m-er,v.subj. aid-erjVm
that family ? - - They have broken all the panes
famillt^U cass-er^v. carreati^m^
of glass in their windows, because they had
vitre de^p. fenilre^f. parceque^c.
not illuminated as it had been ordered. - - -
illumin-er^y* comme,adv. ordonn-'er^v*
I shall have *dined 'soon. - - - - We would have
6ienf5/,ad^.
sen(t them (o prison, if they had resisted.- «♦ »
envoy-er^y* en pfiso%U risisf^er^x.
That we may have denied the fact Had you
nt-er,v. fnit^mm
not imitated their manrners ? - - - They had not exc«*
tmi/-er,v. maniere^f. ixi*
cuted bis commands. - Had I not light-
ctt/-er,v. commandemtnUm* allu-*
ed the fire? - - • They would have carried him to
mtr^Y* yeu,m.
the concert if I had not hinderedt them
empick'tr^Vf
(from it). • r - We might have accepted of bi«
en accept'tr^y^ •<»» .
offers. - - >Vhy did you not ?
SECOND CONJUGATION.
Infinitive Mood."
Present. Puh-»V, to punish.
Participle active. issant^ punifthing.
Participle passive. t,m. ie,f. punished.
Compound Tenses.
Present. Avair punij to have punished.
Past. ^ant puniy having punished. ^
t Fer the amement of tJbcfe, see the rules oo participles^ p. 346, 3^^
185
IjfDlCATIVE MO0D.
Present. Singular*
Jt puD-4>, I punish, I do punish, or I am punishing.
Tu isy
II it,
Plural.
J^ous issons, we punish, &c.
Vous issezj
lis issent,
Imperfect. Singular.
Je pun-mot«, I did punish, or I was punishing, &e«
Tu issois^
II issoit^
Plural.
Jfaus issionsy we did punish, &c.
Voiis issiez,
lis issoUnt,
Preterite. Singular.
Je pun-u, I punished, or I did punish.
Tu is,
II it,
PluraL
J^ous tmesy we punished, &c.
Vous ttes,
lis tren/, ~
Future. Singular*
Je pun-irai, I shall or will punish. /
Tu iras,
II ira.
Plural.
Jious, irons, we shall or will punislhr
Vou0 tr«r.
Its irmit,
16^
CondiDonal. Singular.
Jt pun-trot5, 1 should, would, could, or might punish**
7\i irotV,
// troi<,
Plural.
JVW ino'M^ we should, <^c. punish.
Foti5 tWez,
CojuPOuiTD Tenses*
»•
Present. J^aipuni^ I have puaished.
imperfect. J^avtns puni, I had punished.
Preterite. J^euspunij I had punished.
Future. J^auraipuni^ I shall, &c. have punished.
Conditional. J^aurois punij I should, &c. have punished.
Imperative Mood.
Present. Singular.
PuD-i^; punish thou.
QuHl ft9«e, let him punish.
Plural.
issons^ let us punish,
mez, pttaish ye.
QiPils issent, let tbem punish.
Subjunctive Mood.
F^resent. ^iog^ikr.
Que je pun-45^e, that I maj puBi6b, or I puniftK.
Itt me5,
it isse^
Plural.
nous issionsj that we may punish.
vout %88%ez^
ih issent,
187
Preterite. Singular.
Que je puD-m^j tbat I might punish, or I puniihedj^
«^ '
PluraU
issions^ tbat we might punish.
issentf
iu
il
nous
vous
Us
Compound Tenses.
Present. Que fate puni^ that I may have punished*
Preterite.' Quefeussepuni^ that I might have punished.
After the same manner are conjugated about two i
hundred regular verbs ; the following are excepted, as
bein; irregular :
Ouvrir^ to open.
Acquirir^ to acquire.
jissailiir^ to assault.
Bouillir, to boii.
Cmrir^ to ru.n.
Cueillir^ to gather.
Dormir^ to sleep.
Faillir^ to fail.
JWr, to flee, to avoid.
Mentir^ to lie. ,
Jdtnirir^ to die.
Qfrir^ to oflFer.
Partir^ to set out.
Se rep^ntir, to repent.
Sei^tir^ to smell.
Servir<t to serve.
Sor/iV, to go out^
Sauffrir^ to suffer.
Tentr, to hold.
FemV, to come.
V£Ur^ to clothe.
And their con^poundft^
EXERCISES UPON THIS CONJUGATION.
Indicative Mood.
Pres.. I always finish my work
foti;our5,adv. Jin-ir^v. ou9rag€^v^»
before the others. — Your friend doet not succeed
avanf,p, {imt,m. ri%Lss-ir,y.
in his undertaking. - - Do we not fiirnish arms
dans^p* tntrepriseS* foum-iv^v. ontif,f.
against ouri»elves ? - - Whj' do you hate bios ? - ♦ -
W8
Tfaey cure the diseases of the body, and
guit'iryV. , maladit^L corps^m.
not those of the mind.
Imp. I was building my bouse when
you demolished jours. - - - Was he not enjoying
dimolir^Y* jou-ir de^r»
a good estate ? • - - .We hated him, because he did
' hien^m* paruqut^z.
not act kindly towards us. - • - On
'0g-ir,v. Aonn£/emenf,adv. enver«,p. Sur^p.
what were you reflecting?-- Jbe mountains were
rSflich'irjVm fnontogne,f«
resounding with their cries.
r€<enMV,v. de crt^m.
Pret. I warranted them very good. - - » Did not
garant'ir^v.
your master accomplish his promise ? - - We (leap-
accwnpl-ir^y. promesse^t. /ran-
ed over) the ditch, and seized the guilty
chirpy. fo8s6^va* sais-ir^y. coupabU^didj.
Why did you not applaud that pretty act*
applaudrir^y. a jo/i,adj. > ac-
ross ? I did, with all my might. - - - Did not the sol-
trice^f. d«,p. /orcca/. pi. «o/-
diers obey the commands of their geae-
dat^m. obi'ir^y^ aux commandenunt^m.
ral?
FuT. When shall I banish all these
6ann-tr,v« /ott/,adj.
thoughts from my mind? -- This plant will soon
pms6ty(. planttf.
blossom, if you water it often We shall
fleur-ir^y. arroser^y* «ouven<,adv.
warn your relations of it. - - - «> Shall you not
averMV,v. parent^m.
enjoy^ as we do, -the pure plea*
youir comme,adf» yo% dcs |mr,adj.
189
sures olT the coant<ry? - - Her cbiMren will blest
feen-tr,v.
hep for tf.
CoND. I ffouM choose this cloth, if I
chois'ir^v. drap^m.
were in jour place. - -'- Would he not blush, if he
a roug'ir^v*
acted so ? - * — We would not punish them, if ihey
am5t,adv.
were diligent. ^ - Would jow not act with less
OTfc,p. motn^.adv.
severitj ? They could furnish us withr arms and
severitS? *o»
troop.^, if we wanted any. {zoriu^ if we had need
tnmpe^L avoir 6e5oin,v»
(of any.)
Imperatite Moop,
Do not fill the glasses, - « - • Let biqn enjoy
rempl'ir^Vw vtrre^tja*
the fruit 6f his labours, - - Well ! let him, I do not
du travail,m. Eh &}en,int.
hinder him from it. Let us reflect on what we
emptch-er^y. a
have to do. - - - Let them define the question,
a faire^y* difin-ir^y^
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres, That I may not perish. - - - 1 wish
per-ir^y* sotLhait-tr^y.
he may succeed. ^ --- That we may not (bear hard-
r6u88'ir^y, ^ pdl-ir^v*
ships). - That you m^J not hate us. - - - Provided ihcy
do not (grow tall.)
grand'ir^y* 'm/f
Pret, That I might refresh my n^emory. - - •
rafraich-ir^y* mimoirc^U
190
That she might not roast the meat. - - That we might
(become younger). - - - That you might punish the
rajtun-ir^y*
idle. — That they might not (grow old).
vieill tr,v.
Compound Tenses.
I have filled my cellar with good wine* - - -
rempl'ir,y. cavt^L dt
Has he not (leaped over) the ditch?-- We had finished
our work. - - - - They would have seized him.
We should have perished without any assistance. - -
san»,p. aucun secours.
When shall I have built my house? - - 1 have
(very much) weakened his courag^^. - - Though
beaucoup^^dy, affoihl-ir^y . Quoiqut^c.
they have adorned their gardens to dazzle
aitniy embell-ir^y* jardin^w, pour ihlou-ir^y.
the vulgar, . they have not succeeded, because
vulgaire^m. reuss-ir^y* parceque^c.
they have disobeyed their father and mother.
disohi'ir^y* a
THIRD CONJUGATION.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Rec-eroir, to receive.
Part, active. eranf, receiving.
Part. pass. *M,ro. Me,f. received.
Compound Tenses.
'esent. Avoir rt^Uy to have received.
t. Ayant requy having received.
i^erbs of this coDJugation, the root of which terminates in c, re-
quire for the softening of their sound, that a cedilla be added to tbe
c, 80 (9) whene?er it is followed b^ 0 orv.
*^crb8
191
Indicative Mood.
Present. Singular.
Je req^ois^ I receive, I do receive, or I am receiving.
II <ntj
Plural.
I/out eoonsj we receive, <Jrc.
Vou8 evezj
HjbT oiventj
Imperfect. Singular. ^
Je rec-eoois, I did receive, or I was receiving.
Tu evois,
Plural.
J^ous ivionsj we did receive, ^c.
Vcfus eviezj
lis evoient.
Preterite. Singular.
Je re9-ti5, 1 received, or I did receive.
Tu us^
II Utj
Plural.
J^ous umes^ we received, ^c,
*Ils urentj
Future. * Singular.
Je ree-eDrat, I shall or will receive.
Tu et?ra5, '
It tvra,
Plural.
•ATou* tvrons^ we shall or will receive!
Vous ebrezy
Ih evront^
IB2
CondUional. fiingidar.
Je Tec'cvrois, I shauld, would, could, or might receive*
Tu evrois^
II evroitj
Plural. X
•A/oiw evrionf^ we should, <{rc.Teceive. >
Vofju evritz,
lU evroicnt,
Compound Tenses.
Present. J^ai r«fi4, 1 bav.e reqeived.
Imperfect. J^avois regu, I bad received.
Preterite. Teu$ rifu, I had received.
Future. J^aurai regu, I shall, ^c. have received.
CoDditional. J'aurottf refu^ I should, t!^c. have received*
' iMFERATtVE MoOP.
Present. Singular.
Re9-ot>, receive thou.
QuHl oive^ let him receive*
Plural.
evons^ let us receive.
evez, receive ye.
QuHls oivent^ let them receive.
Subjunctive Mood*
Present* -Slpgular*
Que j€ re<;-(nt>e, that I may receive or I.rciceive.
PlyraL
nous evionif that we may receive*
voui eviez^
ils oivenf^
1^3'
Preterite. Singular.
Ipue je re9-i«5<, that I might receive, or I received, k
in • xissts^ ^
il Oil,
Pluraf.
'nous ussionB^ that we nright receive. '
V0U8 nssuz^
Us ussenty
-' Compound Tenses.
Present. Que fate re^u^ that 1 may have received. .
Treier'ncQuefeusse reguj that I might, have received.
Recevoir des nouvelles de 'To hnar from somebody.
qutlqu^un^ .
After the same manner are conj^igated seven ver-bs
only: the following are excepted, being irregulars :
Asseoiry to sit down.
Dechoir^ to decay.
Falioir^ (verb impersonal,)
to be needful.
Mouvoir^ to move.
Pleuvoir^ (v. imp.) to- rain.
Pouvoir^ to be able.
Savoir^ to know,
Fia/oir, to be worth.
f^oiVy to see.
Vouloir^ to be willing.
Andlbeir compoifnds.
EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION.
Indicative Mood.
. Pres. I entertain great hopes from hU
' , con(?*«t?o?V,v. esp6ranc€y(* •
conduct. - - - I (am to) write to yotir brother to-
conduite^f*' * icrire^v. "
morrow, to let him know that your father is
. pour fairt.y ., lui savoir^v*
arrived. •-- A commander , (ought to,) be intrepid
sommmidant^m., rf-eroir.v.*
* When the verb to he to^ is used in the present or imperfect tenses
of the iodicative mood, and precedes another verb in the infinkiye
mood,. denoting a Aiturity id the action, it is to be rendered in Freacb
bjr the same tenses of the verb rf-croir, and not by Urt : ex.
Je dois alltr au pturc^ 1 am to go to the park.
Jfoiu devioos lui ccrtrt, We were to wfite to him*
17
194 . •
in the midst of dangers. - - • • He (is to) go
aji mt7teM,m. f. alUr^v*
and breakfast at wy uncle's, next , Sunday,^
to* dejeuner^v. chez^p. *<^
and he (is to) come * and sup with us, - - - We
J x?enir,v. ^«^ souper^v.
*somcytime8 entertain a hatred for persons. who
quelquefois^adv. de la hairie^L ^n
deserve our friendship Do you not per-
meriter^y. • amitii^. •de-
ceive a mountain bejond that tree? - -^Yes,
perc-evoir^y. rferWcre,p»
I do. - - We (are to) remit him the value in
remettre^v. taleur^f. eri,p.
goods dr in money. - - - Are you not to diiie
marchandises
with my father and mother to-morrow ? - - Men com-
demain^ndv.
monly owe their virtues or their vices to edu-
d-evoir^v*
cation (as much as) to nature* Are these young
autant que^c. f.
ladies to go to the ball,? - - - No, they are not. - •
«//cr,v. 6a/,m.
A young man (ought to) love the society of those who
8oci6t6^L
are the most learned and modest. ^
Imp* I owed four guineas to your aunt when ^he
guin6e
died. - * • Was not your brother to rec^ve that mo-'
moiirut^v*
ney last' Thursday* ? - -We receivtid his tiresome
Jeudi^m. ^ cmiT«/an/,adj.
visits, because we were obliged to it. - • - Were you
obliger^v,
not to let' them* know* it* sooner? - -.They were
fairty^* savoir^w
not to stay above^ •six weeks.
rtsUr^y^ plus Je,a'dv.
* See note page 32, and reAiember to pjace compound' adverbs,
fter the participles passive.
195
PreIt I received yesterday, with (a great deal)
» &ten,adT.
of pleasure, the books yon sent me. - - As soon
envoyer^v.
as we perceived the danger, we warned h\vA of it.
aperc-evoir avertir^v.
- - - They heard* yesterday from your brother.
FuT. I shall entertain a bad ' opinion of
conc-evoir mauvais^^dj* f.
you if you do not avoid .Mr. ft****'8 company. • - -
J ' eviter^v. .
We shall owe him ^nothing 'more, after this
• apretf,p.
month. I hope you wiU receive all my letters dur-
ing niy absence, and they will hear* from their
r?an/,p.
father (in a short time.)
rfan^jDew,adv.
CoND. 1 should answer your brother's
t ripondrtyy* a
letter, but 1 have not time Ought not
h tems^m* f
your sister to give your^ mother* (an account')
rendre^w. . compte a,p.
of all her actions ? - • - She woyld soon per-
62cn/6/,adv.
* See ths phrase following the verb recevoir,
•\ When the word 4^owW expresses a duty or necessity, or can with
jjropriety be turned into ought /a, it is rendered in French by the con-
ditional present of the verb devoir t ex-
Je devroi* clUr It voir, I i/i»uW, or otight to go and see him.
Fous devriez le ttcourir dam ta You should^ or ought to help him
mislrt^ &c. in his misery, &g.
The word thould^ or oug^, when joined to the verb to have^ imme- "
diately followed by a participle passive, must bfe rendered by the
condHkma! past of* the above verb, with the participle passive turned
into the present of the infinitive mopd : ex.
•/'aurois dd fobUgtr a rester ivi^ 1 should^ or ought to have obliged
. him to stay here.
/fous aunoQs dA reoenir plutift, We should^ or ought to have com^
2)ack sooner^
19S
ceire tbe daogcr, it the knew die
sacaitfr*
of it* • • - • Cbildren tboold ev^u ilay learn
uppt tnuTtjXm
fometbiog b)r heart. • - - Yoa thoald not despise
£{tur,m» mefmser^Y*
tbe ac^rice that be girea you. — - Sboold tbej,
after wbat tbey have done, expect to
aprh^p, yat/,p.p. s^atiendreyX, d
fisceive faroara ? - - - Grammar, geography, history,
music, are sciences and arts which ladies should nerer
neglect.
Ihpcratiitb Mood*
Receive this sm^ll present as a token * of my
marqneyL
friendship.
SuBJUHCTiVB Mood.
Prbs. and Pebt. Though I perceive ships
Quoique^c, vaisseau^n^
(afar off,) I cannot distinguish them. - - - He
de /^n,adv. ne eaurois^v* /
wrot^ to U3 by the first post, so that we might
6crivit^v» ordinaire^m. afin que^c. '
receive his orders (in proper time.)
d /em^,adv.
Mind these Compound Tenses well!
1 have not yet received his answer. - - -^
encore,adv. riponee^L
You shoi^d have (been making) your theme this
♦ faire^v*
morning instead of playing. ^ - He has enterlained
ma/tn,mb au /t^i,p.
the hope of living here all his life. - - • She ought
vivre^y. tci,adv. t?te,f. * •
to have thanked him for the good advice he
K revurcier^y^ ' d^,p.
* See the note page 1,95.
197
fave her. - * - When did you hear from jour sUter ?
Ve have not heard, from her since her de-'
dtpuis^p. de-
parture. - - « Your uncle should not have obliged
partem* oncZe,m. *
him to pay half the expenses. - • - We should
« a mot/te,f. des frais^m.
have owed him one hundred livres. - - I beg^ '
livre^L demander^Y*
youF' pardon, I ought not to have made you
vous * faire^Y.
wait so long. - - - - Ought not we to have
aUendre^y. long-tems^^dv. *
employed our time better than (we did.) • - - -
employ tr^y^ nous rCavons faiU
You ought to have been less presumptuous.
* prisomptutitx^^Ay
•FOURTH CONJUGATION.
Infinitive Mood*
Present. Vend-re, to sell.
Part, active. . ant^ selling.
Part, passive. «x,m. ue,f. sold.
iNDicATivfi Moop.
Present. Singular.
Je vend-5, I sell, I do sell, or am selling.
Tu vend-5,
Us vend,
Plural.
N&us ons, we sell, 4^c.
Vous ez^
lis ent^
Imperfect. Singular.
Je vend-oif, I did sell^ or was selling
Tu rtw>,
// ml,
17*
1^8
PtaraL
J^ous vcnd-ton5,
Us • oicn/,
we did sell, ^c^
Preterite. Singular.
Ji vend-w, I ao
Tu is,
II it.
Id, or did sell.
PluraU
Nous
Vous
lis
imey, we sold, «Jrc/
itei-
irent^
Future. Singular,
Jt vend-ra^ I shall, or will sell.
Tu ras,
Plural.
Nous
Vous
lis
rons, we sball^ or will sell. ' \
rez, . .
ront,
Conditional. Singular.
Jt vend-roff, 1 frfaould, could, would, tst might ^ell
Tu rots,
II roit,
' \
Plural. *
Nous rions^ we should, ^c.
Vous riez,
Its roienU
Compound Tenses.
Present. J'^ai vendu, I have sold.
Imperfect. J^avois vendu, I had sold.
Preterite. J^e%u vendu, I had sold.
Future. J^aurai vendu, I shall, ^c. have sold.
Conditional* J^aurois vtndu^ I should, 4^c. have sold*
199 - .
lupERATiTE Mood.
Present. Siugular.
Vend^^, sell thou.
QuHl e, let bim seil.
Plural. *
ons^ let us sell.
' . cr, sell je.
QuHls ' tnt^ let them sell. '
, Subjunctive Mood.
Present. Singular.
Que je vend-e, that I xnay sell, or I sell.
iu es. * '
•I ''
il e, .
Plural.
nous ionsj that we may sell.
vous ieZj
Us entj *
Preterite. Singular.
Queje vend-me, that I might sell, or I sold.
« tu isses^
il ity
Plural.
nous « issions, that we might sell.
vous issiez^
Us issentj
Compound Tenses.
Present. Quefaie vendu, that I jn^Ly have sold.
Preterite* Qnefeusse venduj that I might have sold.
After the same manner are conjugated about forty
verbs. The following are excepted as being irregular.
Msoudre, to absolve. I £ot>e, to drmk.
Buftre^to beat. j Ctrconctre, to circumcise.
^0
Conclurcj to conclode*
Conduirtj to conduct.
And all the verbs ending
iu uire^
Confire^ to preserve.
Connottre^ to know.
And all those ending in
otlrtf
Coudre^ to sew.
Craindre^ to fear.
And all those ending in
indre.
Crairey to believe*
Dire, to tell.
^Ecrire^ to write.
FatVc, to make, to do.
Frire, to fry.
Lire, to read.
Mettre^ tp put,
Moudrty to grind.
Naiire^ to be born.
Paitre^ to graze, to feed.
Plaire^ to please.
Prendre^ to take.
/7tVe,. to laugh.
Suffirty to suffice, ^to^ be
stifficrent.
Suiorty to follow.
St taircy to hold one's
tongue.
Traircj to milk.
VaincrCj to cdnquer.
Vivre^ to Kve.
And their compounds.
M. B. Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which
terminates in />, as romjhre^ corromp-re, &c. take a t in
t^e third person singular of the present tense, indica-
tive mood : ex. je rompsy tu romps, il rompt : the rest
are conjugated as vendre.
EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION.
Indicative Mood.
Pres. I do not mean to wrong
prilmd'TtyV. * m>. fij^ire tort^v^
him. - - - Is your mother coming down ? - - •• We
iui, pro. descend-re^vt
expect our friend, Mr. A***. - • - Do not you
aiUnd-re^m
forbid her to go there ? - - - They sell
d6ftnd'rt,\. de allergy.
bad fruit.
mauvais^^dy
Imp. Did I not interrupt , him, while
interromp-re^y. . pendant j^^^c.
SOI
he was answering ihcm ?^ - - • She was melting Into
ripond-^re^v. Uur fond-re^v^ en,p.
tears, whqn you arrived. - - W^re we not losing
larme^ arriver^v. perdre^v.
our time? - - You were aot spreading your nets. - -
temps^m» itend^re^v. JUttjtDi
Did they corrupt eur manners ? ^
corromp-re^v. tnaurs^f. pK
Prbt. (As soon as) I had received my money, I
Des qut^c.
returned them what they had lent me. • - - Did
rtnd-rt;v» priter^v*
he oot hear you ? - - - We (waited for) ihem a
entend-re^Vm attendrre^v*
month. - - (For how much) did you sell it to them 2 - -
m(n5,m. Oom£fien,adv. ^
They spilled all the wine^
ripand-rejV*
fuT. I shall shear my flock (in the)
iond-re^y. trouptau^m. au
month of May. - - - If you do not take care,
Mai, preneZjV. gorde^
the dog will bite you. - - Shall we not lose, if
mord-re^y.
we play ? - - You will melt it, if you put
fond-re^y* mitUz^y*
it into the fire. No, I will not. - • They* shall^ not»
. dans^\>.
hear* * oP roe'' (any* more).
entend-re parler^y. . plus^^dy.
»
CoND. Should I not do him the jus«
rend-re^y.
tice he deserves ? - - Would he not interrupt you ? - -
mirittr^y.
We would defend them if we could. • - Why
diftnd-tt^y, pouvionsyy,
would you^ not answer, if 'I were speaking to
rdpond^re^y.
202
you ? - - - Your hens wouMXlay eggs) every day, if
p<nil€j{. pond-reyV*
they were not so fat.
gra5,adj.
lupERATiYE Mood.
Give* God^ thanks'. - - - Let her not come
Rend-ri^v. IHeu, grdce a
down. - • Let ns (give in) our accounts faith-
. rend-re^w* compte^m. Jidele^
fully. - - - Do not lose my book. - - - Let them hear
fnen/,adv.
the voice of the Lord. •
T07x,f. Seigneur^m.
Sdbjukctive Mood.
Pr£s. and Pret. Speak loud, that I maj hear
/iai//,adv.
what you say. - - She plays (upon the) harpsichord,
dites^y. du clavecinltti.
though you forbid her to do it. " * <- <
ouoj^i«,c. lui deJaireyVf
He wrote to us, that we might not expect him.
6crivU^v»
Compound Tenses.
1 have lost my book ; have you found
^ perd'tefV, irouver^y*
it ? - - - She has broken her fan. • • - Have you
romp-re^v. even tot/, m.
not interrupted mc several times? - - - I had not
then answered His letterr*-- - - If they (had
a{or5,adv. a itoitnt
gone) there, would they not have lost their time?
flri/e^,p.p.
Yc8, they would. - - He says he would have sold us
dit^v. •
very good wine. - - - Had you not forbidden her to
speak ? - - That they might have (waited for) us.
903
tUcapitulaiorif EXERCISES on the regular verbs of the
four CONJUGATIONS.
(Review before you write.)
fNBicATiYE Mood.
Pres. I love attentive scholars, but " I puniah
atteniif^dj. . icolier^xn. mais^c*
severely laziness and inattention. - - Your
s£verement^2iQy. paresse^L
brother does not receive this news with.pka-
nouvelle^L
sure. - - Do we not expect your mother to-da;^ ? - - -
rnere,f.
We hope (that) you will succeed in your un-
espirer^v.
dertaking. - - - Why do you not fulfil
Pour^fuoijadv. accomplir^v.
your promise?'- - Are you to expect the least
promesse^fm
favour from your parents andfriends? - - They per-
grdce^f* " a-
ceive the danger, and they do not endeavour
percevoir^y. tdcher^y*
to shjun it.
de iviter^y*
Imp. I was speaking of your aunt when ypu
(came in), and was doing ' her the justice she
e»/r«r,v. rendre^y* hi
deserves. * - Mr. N. did not art towards your
sntriier^y* agir^y. envtrsy\>.
^on with much tenderness. - - Mr. P. and I were
fils^m. tendresss.
answering your letters when you arrived. - - You
ar river ^y.
undoubtedly ^entertained great hopes from his
sans c{ou/e,adv. concevotr,v.
last » voyage. - - They were spending their
rfer/iier,adj. . . , depenser^y.
204
money in trifles, insteadof buying*
en,p* bagatelle^ au lieu </e,adr« acheter^y.
books. ;
^ ^ '^ ^
Pret: I boilt this house' in one thousand seven
^ i maison^f*
hundred and seventy-nine, - - Your father yesterday
'o^ Arer,adv.
received agreeable news. - - She burst «f into tears
fondre^v* en
^after your cousin was gone. - - We sent him
aprls fue,c. parti^p.p*
(a great deal) of money unicnown to your mo-
a Pinsu.p. de
tjier. - - Why did you not finish your work soon-
ouvrage^m.
cr? - - (As soon as) they perceived us, they (ran
Dies 9ue,c. prirent la
away.)
fuiu. *
FuTi^ I will (give in) my accounts (at the) be«-
au
ginning of next week. - - - My friend,
prochain^ adj. semaineS^ amie^
Mrs. R. will dine with me next Wednesday. - - We
Jjime Mercredi^nu
shall seize th^ first opportunity to thank him
saisir^Vs occasion ^L pour rerAtrcier^y*
fof bis kindness. * ^ You will soon entertain
de bonti^, hientdt^Rd^^ *
a better opinion of him. - - Will not your sister
(come down stairs) to day ?
desctndre^v.
CoND. I would lay two guinea*, that your
gagetyV.
uncle is not yet ^f rived. - - If my father were rich, he
eloU
wodd rebuild bit countrj-hoo&e. - - Should we no(
rebdiir^v. Devoir^v.
express our gratitude toward those whd
txprimer^y* reconnoissance^fn envers^p.
do us good ? - - If you would, you could rejifr
font^Y. him^nu vouliez^y. ren-
der great services to your country. ^ • * I am cer-
dr«,v. f. . pays^tn.
tain (that) they would reward you, if ydu
recompensefjV.
deserved it.
meriUr^y*
Imperative Mood.
Discharge with equity (he duties of your
Remplir^y* iquiti devoir ^m*
office. - - - Let him receive the punishment due
charge^f. punitian^. d^p.p.
to his crime. - - Let us give ^God thanks^ for the
rendre^y* grdce a de
good news we received yesterday. - - Imitate the great
Uer,adv.
actions of your ancestors. • - Let them enjoy the
ancetres^m* " j(mir^y»de
fruit of their labours.
travail^m*
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. Write to me by the first post,
Ecrivez^ym ordtnatVe,ffl»
that , I mdy receive your letter before my ^e-
afin qut^c. uvant^^. di*
parture from London. - - He does not understand yoq,
partem. comprmdre^y.
though he bear what you say. - - -
quoique^Q. en/enc/re,v.subj. dites^y.
She is never pleased, though we obey her in
con/en/,adj. lux en,p.
(every thing) I witVtell . it to you, pro-
taut dtratjV^ ptmr^
18
W6
Tided you do not speak of it to your sister. - • *-
vu qut^c.
He will pay them, provided they wait a little
atimdre;if.
longer.
plus long'ttmps^Vidr.
pRET. I wrote to your father (some time ago)^
tcriviSjV. il y a quelque temp^
that be might engage Mr. W. to come and
afin fltie,c. lo^
spend the holidays with us. - - - That she might
passtr^v* vacance^U
reflect on her own conduct, and not on that of
propre^Sidj.
others* - - He would not come to see us, lest
voulut^Y* *o% depeurque^c*
we should perceive his bad desigjas. - - Your uncie
ne onc/e,m«
prdered that you should' sell bis two horses to
ordonrur^y*
Mr. B. - I should be very sorry if they fell
quefi. tomber^y,zuhjm
into bad hands.
tn '
Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND
TENSES.
I have spoken to my father of it, but he bas not
yet given me any answer. - - Have I not faith*
encore,adv^ de
fully executed your orders ? - • Has your sister sue*
ceeded in her undertaking ? «• - Yes, she bas, and I
have congratulated her (upon it.) - - We have not yet re-
filiciter^y, en
ceived any riemittance from America. - - Mr?:. N. told
remise^
me you had already sold the half of your
dijcLfZdy. moitii/*
«07
goodf. - - - Why did you not pay those poor
marchandises^
people ? - - - He would have • been punished, if
gens^m. e/,f.pl«
I l^ad not defended his right. - - - They have sold
^tt droit^m,
him four dozen of handkerchiefs at an exorbitant
mouchoir^ a
price, but they have warranted them fine and
priv^m. garanlir^w. Jin
well worked. - - - We thought you woui<| have
travailler^y. croyions^w
brought your brother with you. - - - Have we not
frirt
been obliged to (wait for) Miss A. ? - - • If you bad
dt attendre^y\
ti-usted them with your goods, they would have
confier^v. leur *o^ marchandise
stolen the greatest part of them. - - It is for
partiej. Ce,pro.
that reason that my father has not (thought fit)
juger^v* d-propos
to send them to you. • - - Mr. D. had represented to
him al) the danger of it. - - Mrs. F. has gained her
gagner.v.
cause, but she has lost all her wealth. --- Had!
perdre^y. bierijUU
not finished my work when she came in ? * »
ouvrage^tn. entrer^v.
You would have received your money (a month ago),
^ ily a un mois
if the mail had not been robbed. - > Mrs.'P. told me
ma lie ^f* To/€r,p.p.
she would have paid you (some time ago,) if fhe
* ily a quelque Umps,
b^d sold her goods.
so»
CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERB&
Verbs- passive are very easily conjugated ; itreiquires
only that the participle passive of the verb, whicb |&.to
be conjugated, be joined to the auxiliary verb eire, ^fflft^
through all its nnoods, tenses, numbers, and persons*
It is to be observed, that in French the participle pas-
sive varies according to the gender and number of the
noun or pronoun, which stands as the nominative to the
verb: ex.
Infinitive Mood.
Singular
Je suis
' Jt suis
pun*i,
ilrt aim-^, ^e, to be loved.
itrt pun-i, le, to be punished.
ilant 3L\n\-6j cc, being loved.
4tant pun-i, tV, being punished.
avoir iie aim-^, ^e, to have been loved.
avoir it6 pun-t, te, to have been punished,
a^ant iti aim-^, ^e, having been loved.
ayant 6l6 pun-t, te, having been punished;
Indicative Mood.
M. F.
^e, &c. I am loved.
u, &c. I am punished.
Plural. '
6&s^ &c. we are loved.
te*, &c. we are punished*.
Compound Tenses.
M. F.
Tai iii pardonn-c,^e, I have been forgiven.
Tai 6l6 pun-i, te, I have been punished.
JfousavonsitesLiin-isj 6esj We have been loved, &c.
*
OF NEUTER V^RBS.
The conjugations of the above verbs are, like all
others, distinguished by their termiuatfons, and cooju*
gated in the same niaonert
J^ous sommts aim-e*,
fN'ous sommts pun-t5.
S09
Learners may easily know a newber verb from an
active one; because the latter generally bas, or can
always have, a direct case after it; whereas the neuter
verb never has, nor can have, but an indirect case : for
instance,
Dormifj to sleep,
Fientr, to come,
Voyager^ to travel,
are neuter verbs ; because we cannot say,
Dormir une maisQn^ to sleep a house.
Venir un livre^ to come a book.
Voyager la chambre 9 to travel the room, &c.
In the same manner,
Jouir, to enjoy.
Profiler^ to profit by, to take advantage of,
Parvenirj to attain, \p reach,
are neuter verbs, because they can only govern an indi-
rect case : ex.
Jouir d'tt?»e grande ripata* To enjoy a great reputa-
tion, tion.
Profiler du temsj To take advantage of the
weather.
Parvenir a son but, To attain one's end.
As it is impossible for the neuter verbs to govern an
absolute case, it follows that every verb of this kind,
which governs an absolute case, can no longer be look«
ed upon as a neuter : ex.
Pleurer^ to weep, to bewail,
Soriir, ' to go out,
Monter, to go up, or come up,
Plaider, &c. to plead,
are neuter verbs, but become active when- they govera
any object in the absolute case, or accusative : ex.
EAle pleure ses pichis. She bewails her sins.
Sortez te cheval, \ , Bring out that horse.
II plaidasa cause lui-mimej He himself pleaded bi9
cause^
2l6
But^ there are some neuter verbs which can nevSr
bare an active signification, and which we are obliged
to conjugate with the verb faire^ when we wish toex-
press an action passing from the subject who acts : ex.
Ferai-je bouillir cu rotir Shall I boil or roast that
cette viande ? meat ?
FatUs4a bouillir, Boil it.
Some of the neuter verbs conjugate their compound
tenses with the auxiliary verb avoir^ to have ; others
with the verb itre^ to be.
The general rdle to know what neuter verbs conju-
gate their compound tenses with the auxiliary avoivi
and which are the others that are conjugated with the
verb ilre^ is to pay attention to the participle passive of
the neuter verb which is conjugated*
If this participle be declinable, that is, if, it can be
applied to a manor a woman, or any other animated
■object, the tompounds of its verbs are conjugated with
the verb itre : ex.
Atriotr^ to arrive,
Mourir^ to die,
J^aitre, to be born,
Tomber^ to fall,
Fisntr, to come, ^c*
take the auxiliary verb, (ire ; because we can $ay,
Vti homim arrivij a man {who is) arrived^
Ujfitfemmt morte^ a woman dead.
Un enfant n^, a child born.
Un chival tombcj &c. a horse fallen.
If, on Che contrary, the participle be indeclinable, that
IS, if it cannot be said of any animate object, the com-
pound tenses of that verb must be conjugated with the
verb «wtf : ex. .
Doffittf, to sleeps I Rigntr, to reign,
tanguitito languish, to linger. | Vivre^ to live, ^c.
lake the auxiliary verb avoirs because we cannot say,
211
ETn hmnme dorm, a man sl«pt, (pdft. pasB.)
Uneftmme languie, a womaa ld«guished,or lingered*
Un enfant regne, a child reigned.
-Uu chival v6cUi &c. a horse lived.
The varb courir is M the last class, tvben it signifies
the rapid motion of the body, moving in a certain di-
rection with all the swiftness of its legs ; as we cannot^
in this sense, say,
Un honme eouru., a man run, (part, pass*)
Unefemme courue^ « a woman run,
nor je suis courti, fitois courUi &c. but^oi couru, favoii
count, &c.
When we tay'in French, un homme couru, unefemme
courue, wc mean a man or woman mnch sought after,
a person or thing we are very eager lo see or hear : ex.
Ce predicateur est fort couru ;
• Cette danseuse est fort courue 5
that is, people are very eager to hear that preacher, to
see that daneer.
In the above general rule are not included some
neuter verbs, which sometimes take the auxiliary avoir^
and sometimes the auxiliary itre ; these are,
Monter, to go or come up.
Descendre, to go or come
down.
Sortir, to go out.
Resler, to stay, to remain.
Demeurer^ to live, to dwelk
PcVir, to perish.
Passer, to pass, to go by.
Echapper, to escape.
Monter and descendre often govern an abeolOte regi*^
men ; in which case they are considered as active verbs,
and conjugated with the auxiliary avoir: ex.
JPai monle les degrcs, I have ascended the stairs,
or gone up the stairs.
JVotitf avoca desctiidu la We have come down the
moniagne, mountain*
312
When the above verbs are employee} without regimen,
their compounds are conjugated with itre: ex.
Je suis descnnduj I am down.
Eik est dej^ montie, She is up ah*eady«
Sortir^ is conjugated with the verb 6tre^ when it signi-
fies to quit, to leave the place wherein one was dwelling,
or living; but it is conjugated with the verb avoir^ when
we wish to convey the idea that we have been from home,
and that we are come back again f ex. " ^
II est sorti de prison^ , He is out of prilson.
Td\ sorti ce matin a dix I went out this morning at
/retires, ten o'clock.
ky^Zrvaus sorti ce matin? Did you §o out this morn-
ing?
^ous n'avons pas sorti de We have not been out all
tout It jour ^ day.
Le roi n'a pas sorti dt sa The king has not been out^
chambre^ of his room.
Defneurer ^nd r ester take the auxiliary ax^oir, when
we mean that we were, but are no longer, in a place:
ex»
J'ai demeur6 deux ans a la I lived two years in the
campagruy country.
// a resti vingt ans a Rome, He resided twenty years
at Rome.
On the contrary, they take the auxiliary itre^ while
the person or persons are still in a place: ex.
// est demeure a Londres He has remained in Lon-
pour y solliciter un (v^- don to solicit a bii^hop-
chi^ ric.
JSou8^omme%restis aYork We have tarried at York
pouryfinir nos affaires^ to conclude our affairs.
Pirir indifferently takes either the auxiliary avoir or
itre: ex.
213
li ^t f(r% dmx vtiisseaHx
Trois hommes ont p6ripar
ctitt tempite,
La pMpari des 6qxiipages
sont piris dans les midts^
h reste est peri de mi-
sere.
Two ships have been lost
at sea.
Three men have perished
by this storm.
Most of the crews perished
in the waves, the rest
perished through mis*
ery.
It seemfi, however, that the auxiliary avoir is more
generally osed.
Passer sometimes governs an indirect case, or is im-
mediately followed by the preposition par^ or som^
other, attended by a noun or pronoun ; in which case
its compounds are copjugated with the aaxiltary verb
£rz7oir, whether it be used in its proper signification or
ia a figurative sense : en.
Le roi a passi par Ken*
^ingtan pour alltr a
Windsor^
Nous avons passi devant
PigHse^
Elk a pass6 pres du pare
de St, Jdq^es^
La couTonne de Naphs a
passi dans la maison de
Bourbon^
The king went through .
Kensington to go to
Windsor.
We went by the church*
She went by St. James'
Park.
The crown of Naples
passed to the house of
Bourbon.
In all other cases, passer takes the auxiliary itre :
ex.
Le roi est passe^ tons ne The king is gofee by, you
sauriez it voir, cannot see him.
Ld heau ii.ms rst passe^ The fine weather w over.
Vos vhagrins soiUpasb'6s^ Your sorrows are over.
Wp s^ur times say, ce moi est passi, when we mean
that it IS no longer m use; but when we say, ce mot a
pasfi, we nnderstand has passed into ike /ongtitfge, whicb
signifies that it ba$ been received or adapted.
214
Passer is often a reflated passive verb, tbeo jte
compouod ieoses follow the rule of the reflective
verbs.
Passer^ in several cases, becomes an active verb, and
governs an absolute case : ex.
Passez cela sur k feu^ Pass that over the fire..
Les ennemis ont passe la The enemies have crossed
* riviere, (he rivtr.
Passer Tepee au travers du To run one through the
corps ^ bodj.
Echapper has two significations : sometinies it is used
in the sense of iviter^ to avoid, when it is conjugated
with the auxiliary avoir^ and governs the dative case;
sometimes it signifies to come or go out bj force or stra^
agem from a place in which one was confined or shut up 'y
in this case it takes the verb iire for auxiliary : ex.
Vans avez ichappija a un You have escaped «. great
grand danger, danger.
// a echappi a la mort, He has escaped death. .
Us sont echappes de leur They haxe escaped from
prison, or, their prison, or, made
lis se sont ichapp€s de leur their escape.
prison,
0/1 la tenoit depuis quel- They had her for some
ques jours, mais elle est days, but she has es-
echappee, or, die s^est caped, or, made her
ichappce, escape.
N. B. Exercises on the neuler verbs will be found
among the irregular, whenever they occur.
REFLECTED VERBS.
We call reflected, or reflective, a verb whose subject
and object are the 8ame person or thing ; so that tl)e
subject that acts, acts upon itself, and is at the same tioid
the agent and U^e object of the action ; ex«
215
Je me cannois^ /know myself,
Tu t€ /oM«, jTAou praisest thyself
il se 6/e5««, He wounds himself
Nous nous chauffonsj We warm our^e/ve^,
are reflected verl)8, because it is I who know, and who
am known ; thou who praisest and who art praised : he
who wounds and who is bounded, &c«
In order to express the relation of the nominative to
the verb with its regimen or object, we always make use
of the conjunctive pronouns, me, te, se, myself, thyself,
himself, herself, itself, for the singular; nous^ vous, se,
oi^selves, yourselves, themselves, for the plural. But
it frequently happens, that in English, the second pro-
noun is implied, though it must be expressed m French :
ex.
Je me souviens, I remember.
Elle ne veut pas se marier, She witl not marry.
J^ous nous plaignons, &c. We complain, &:c.
The reflected verbs may be divided in the following
manner, viz.
Verbes reflechis par la sig' "Verbs reflective by sig-
nification, nific^tion.
Verbes reflechis par Tea?- Verbs reflective by cx-
pression, pression.
Verbes riflichis directs. Verbs reflective direct.
Vtrbes reflichis indirects, Verbs reflective indirect. "
Verbes reflechis passifs, Verbs reflective passive.
A verb reflected by signiflcation h properly a verb
wherein the person or thing that acts, is at the same
time the object of the action : ex.
Je me chauffe, I warm myself
Elle se blesse. She wounds herself &:c.
A verb is reflective by expression when we add to it
the dcuMe pronoun, without the person or thing that
acts being the object of the action : such as,
210
Je me repens, I repent^
II s'en va^ ^ He is going atoajfi.
EUe se meurt^ Bhe is dying,
J^ous DOU8 apefcevons dt We perceive our error,
notre.er'reur^
which merely signify Je suis repentantj il ua, elle nuurt^
710US apercevons noire trrtur.
When the conjunctive pronoun is the objective case
of the verb reflective by expression, we say it is a vtrh
reflective direct; when the same conjunctive pronoun is
the indirect regimen, (that is, governed in the dative
case), we call it reflective indirect : thus,
Je mejlatte^ I flatter myself^
Tu te vantts^ Thou boasteit, ♦
// se felicitey He congratulates himselfy
&c.
are verbs reflective direct. — On ;the contrary,
II se donne des louanges^ He gives himself pmse^
J^ous nous promettons un We promi^ etiLrselves good
bon succesy success,
Vous yous arrachez une You draw one of your
dent, teeth,
are verbs reflective indirect^ because it is 2t3 if we
said, // donne des lauanges a soi, J^ous promettons un
ion succis a nous, Vous arrachez une dent a vous,
&c.
Verb reflective passive. This verb is so called, be-
cause it not only expresses a passive sense, but that
sense can only be rendered by a passive verb : ex.
Cela se voit tous lesjours. That t> wen every day.
Cela ne se dit pointj That is not said.
Ce livre se vend 6ten, Tliat book sells well.
Ce bruit se repand. That rumour is spread.
Ces fruits se mangent en These fruits are eaten ift
hiver, winter.
(ki hamm i^esi troistt4lj^ That mati kofbeew fovmd
nocmt du crime donion innocent of- the crimi§ '
Paccusoiiy with which he was ac^
cused.
It is as if there were ceh est vu tout lesjours^ cela n'esp
point dit^ &c. which eractlj correspond yritb the idiom*
of the English language.
This last verb is of great use in the FfetttTk lafl-
guage, because, as it has bees observed before^ thev6
are properly no passive verbs in that langoagl, and We
are oTtien obiigcNJ to supplj the want of them by the
above verb, or by the pronoun general - <m, to avoid
ambiguity or false sense : if, for instance, instead of sav-
ing, ces fruits se mangent en hiver, 6u, on mange cesfruUs
en hiver^ I said, ces fruits sont'mangis en htver^ one
might understand that those fruits are already ealen ;
whereas, I only wish to express the proper season for
eating those fruits.
Some authors call rieiprsque^ reeii>rocal, all thQM
reflected verbs ; but this- deiiomtnation to me bas ap«
peared insuflicient to determine accurately the nature
and use of these verbs. Others limit (he reciprocal'
verb to signify what two persons or two things recipro-
cally do to each other : thus,
Pierre et Jean se baitent^ Peter and John ar6 fight-
ing, or beating each
other^
Paul et Robert s'^aiment^ Paul and Robert love eadh
otherj
Le feu et fetm se defrui- Fire and watfct destrbj^
^enr, each other^
are reciprocal verbs^ because it i^ as if we said, Pierre hi
Jean se battenl riciproquement Vun Pautre^ P-aul et> Robert
s^aiment recipro^ement Pun Pautre. '■ \
This distinction of the reciprocal verbs may be
adopted, observing '4t the' same time, that we often
19
31#
prefix the preposition enire Uf^e verb^ th^ better to
express the reciproqily : ex. "
PUrrt tt Jeian 5'entr'fli-
mtnt^
lis s^enireloueni^
Elks s^entrehausent^
Le feu et Peatk s^enitedi-
iruisent^ &c/
Peter and John love each
other.
They praise each other.
They hate each other*
Fire and water destroy
each other.
All the reflected and reciprocal verbs, without ex-
ception, are conjugated with the auxiliary verb itre ;
hence it Jhay be^ supposed how much French people
are shocked to £ear any one, who has learned that
language, sajsi,
Je tn'ai achete un cheval,
Je m'avois bless6j
II 9*^/ait mal;
Elle 5'avoit moque de mot,
&c.
I bought mysel/ a horse ;
I Aad hurt myself ;
He has hurt himself;
She had laughed at me ;
expressions too commonly made ude of by many English
people, who speak without knowledge of the princij^s
of the language ; whereas we must say,
Je me suis achete un cheval^
Je m'etois Slessi^
II s^eBtfuit mal^ . %
Elle «'etoit moqiUe dejjm^
J^^ous nous sommes informis^
lis se sont promenis^
II a'est passi d*6tranges
fihoses depuis votre de-
i part^
II s^esi pass6Men des annies
depuis que fai ouiparler
de cette affaire^
'It^ roust be owned, that
We hate inquired.
They hare walked.
Strange things have hap-
pened since your depar-'
ture.
Many years hwoe elapsed
since I heard of that af-
fair.
in the compounds of most
part of theseverbs, the verb itre is but the substitute
of the verb a^oir ; but it is impossible tu use avoir as
auxiliary to a verb which has for its. objective case a
"injunctive pronoun that relates to the principle of the
219
action of that verb, and which precedes the auxitiarj ;
for, though we say, %
II a voulu se iuer^ He would kill himself ;
jet, if we change the place of ihe pronoun, we must
say, // finest vmtlu tuery which is the idiom of the lan-
guage.
CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERBS.
The conjugation of the following verb may serve as
a model for all the reflected or reciprocal verbs, of the
four conjugations.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Se promenery to walk.
Part, act* Seprofhenan^, walking.
M. Sing. F.
Part. pass, promen-iy ^e, walked.
M. Plural. F.
Part. pass. promen'6sy iesy walked.
Compound Tknses.
'^Pres. S^itre prtflneniy to have walked.
Past. S'^6lant pronunif having walked.
Indicative Mood.
Present. Singular.
Je mepromeney Iwalk, or do walk, or am walking.
Tu le prominesy
Ilsepromenej ,
Plural.
^ou4»nous pronunonsy we walk, do walk, or are &c.
Vvas vous/)ro99€nez,
Ih se promintniy *
imperfect. Singular*
Je me prormnoisy I did walk, or walked, or, was walking.
Tu te promenoisy
II se promehoity ,
220
Plural,
J^ous nous promenions^ we did walk, walked, op were
Vou9 ?ous promeniez^ walking*
Ih se prometuneni^
Preterite. Singular*
Je meprammai^ I did walk, or walked.
Tu te prvmenas^
U se promenOj ,
Plural.
Ntmt nous promendme^, we did walk/or walked.
Vous V0U8 promendles^
lis se promenirent^
Future. Singular-
Je mt promemrai^ I shall, or will walk.
Tu tej^romineratj
II se prominera^
Plural.
JNTottf nous ji^romenjerotu, we sb^il^or will wa)k«
Fotw vous promenereZf
lis se /yromeiKfon/,
Conditioiial. Singular*
Je me promeneroisi 1 would, should, or could walk.
Tu te promenerois,
II se promtneroil^
Plural. ' -
vVou^ nous />rome/imonf , vre would, should, 4^c. walk*
F(9Ms vous ^romenericz,
i/s seprom^neroienl,
CoMF ouNJ> Tenses.
jPre&em* J^.me 5tm promen*^, ^e^ i have walked*
Imperfect. Je m^ctois promen*6^ ie^ I had walked.
Preterite. Je me fus promen-i^ ie^ I bad walked.
jTuture. Je me.f^raipfomm^^ Ur I shall or will have
walked.
don^itionaLJe me serois promen-i^ ie, I should, ^c. bav^
221
Imferativb Moop.
Present. Singular.
Fromint'ioi*^ walk thou.
Qu'iZ 86 fromcnt^ let him walk. >
Plural.
Promenon^^nous'*', let us walk*
Promen«2r-vous*, walk ye.
QuHls 86 prominent, let thetn walk. ,
Subjunctive Mood.
* Present. Singular.
Qiuje me promint, that I way walk.
tu te protncnes,
il 86 jjromcnc,
Plural.
nous hous promenions, that we may walk.
V0U9 vous promeniezy ^
Us 86 prominent^
Preterite. Singular.
Queje me promenasse^ that I might walk.
tu te promenasseSf
il 86 promendt,
Plural. ^'
fimit Bons />rom€ft(X35tonf, that we migbt walk.-
iw)t« vous />romen(i55wr,
tjt 86 promennssent^
Compound Tenses.
M. F.
Present. Que je me sois promen-i, e'e, that I may have
/ walked.
Preterite, Quejt mefusse promen'S^ ie, that I might have
. walked.
The learner may here be again reminded, that it il
* When the verb is conjugated with a negalion^ tJ^ese three f^*
noons are put before the verb ; ex. ne vous promenez pat^ de not
walk ; ud t9i is cbaaged into fe ; ne te pronUnepa*. ^
19*
neceBsarj to cenjagftte.tbia veckiwkli a negation and in^
terrogation: ex.
Jt oe me promene pas^ I do «ot walk*
Vou8 promentZ'Vaiis f Po you walk ?
.ATe se promene-t-ilpas ? Does he not walk ?
CoMPOujTD Tenses.
'. ■ j^
i/le suis'je promen6 2 H^Vis] w^k^d? or did I
w?islk?
JVe vous eteS'Vous pas Have you not warned
chauffi ? yourself? or did you
not warm yourself?
Mon cffusin sUst4l infor- Has ^; cpusin inquired ?
mi? ' ' or did rojr CQUf ^ in-
quire?
Voire frere ne s^est-il pas JIas not 3'our brother re**
repenti ? pented ? or did not your
brother repent 2
We say in French,
Se pronuner a cheval^ en To take a ride, an air-
carrossey ing on horseback, in a
coach.
Se promentr sur Peau, sur To go upon the water, on
la riviere, the river.
EXERCISES UPON T^E REFLECTED TERBS,
•/V. iBf y«rlf8 marked thus* are irregular: see the
irregular verbs alphabetically arranged under each con-
jugation.
Indicative MoOd*
Pres. 1 rise (early) every
, ^Se lever ^v, de bonne heure^zdr^ tous Us
motning. - - Dcfes not your brother remember
mahViyAri.pl. se res souvenir, v.*
td have keen me ? - - My sister is not well, she
,dS 9{^.p. j<sttr,f.t se porter,
t When wemeftn to express the state of a person's health, ia^ead
€fr the -rett) me, we inust tise the reflected one se norUr :
I ♦'. . ^^^ •
Ma s9Uf nftte ,p9J!te pa^ bis», My sister st aot «e|L
appii^ bersetf (loo Bmeb^ lUi'Stu^j* * - • - tWW
rejoice iitithe good news :(whicb) be bas bFOogfat
se rSjouir^v* dt ,t^mv^k^f. apparUyp^fi
us. - - When do you intend to go and see
stprcpourif. dt alUr^v* *^ iwir^r,
Mrs. H. ? - - Do you not irepent . tvhat yoo
«e «fpsnftr,v.* <Ic
have done to her 7 • • i ibelieve .your bfotber^
yatV,p.p* '^roire^y*^
are not .well } tot I bave not seen them tbis
4 €ar,c« ^i^^tp^p*
week.
stmaiaujt
Ij^. I w^ tidipg on Jiorseback in the paitk, t
^ St promentr;v, purc^m*
tvhen I met him. • - Was he not warm-
9uandf,c. r«icon/rer,y. ;e chavf'
ijig himself lyhen ydu (came in) ? r • We did not
jfir,v. entr^.r^v.
imagine he lyoald succeed so well. - - You were
sHmaginer^y^ riussir^v.
_ boasting (too much) of what you have done for
se vanier^y. trap fdii^p.p.
him. • - They did not expect that they should
s'aiUndre^y^ iz *o^ *<^
meet us. ^
Pret. I inquired after you yesterday. • - .
s^informer^y. dt A»cr,adv.
Did not my son behave well in the last
St comporter^y* (f€rmer,adj.
war ? - - Corn was ^soid yesterday for twelve sbil*
gtierre,f. st vendre^y* *o»
lings a bushel. • - We saw ourselves surrounded by
St i?bir,v.* en/ot<r^,p.p.
more than twenty persons in an instant. - - Did yoa
cn^p.
f See pai^e 346*
not find '^ ' joorselves obliged to go
9^tr(M'otT;9* oblig6^p.p. de allergy*
there ? - * They did no^ stop one. minute.
FuT« I will not complain o( you, if you
se plaindrt^vJ^
promise me to behave better. - - Will your
promeUre<;v.* de niuua;,adv.
bird • (grow tame)? - - Shall we submit our-'
c^eau,m. s^apprivoiser^v. je soumettre^vJ*
selves to his judgment. - • You will ruin your-'
jtegcmen/,m. st ruiner^v*
selves if you continue (g^n^ng). - - Will they not
coniinuer^v. /dejouer^v,
perceive it (as soon as) they come ^ito tl^
s^apercevoir^y* en des que^c. en/rer.v.fut.
room?
CoND. If I were in your place, I would
eiois a
not ve!^ myself. - - - - Would she not (make her
se chagfiner^y, s^ichap-
escape) ? • - We would embark (this day)
per^y. ^ s^emharquer^y, aujourd'^hui^ adv.
if the weather (would permit). - - Would you embark so
iemps^m^ U permeitoii^y^
soon ? - - Why would you expose yourselves to their
t$/,adv. sUxposer^y.
fury ? - - They would agree very well, .
fureur^(» . s^accorder^y. bie»,adv.
if they were not so proud.
orgueilleux^^ij*
iMrsnATivE Moon.
I give you leave to go out, but
donner^. permission de sortifyy* maisjC*
'do not overheat yourself. • - Let'^hiui amuse him-
sHchavffer^y* s^amuitr^y*
935
'^
self a little Jd 1117 garden. « • • Let ut remem-
unpeUfadv*- jardin^m* S€ restou^
ber what we are to do. - - • Endeavour to
v'enir de^r.* • t fairt^v. S^effbrur^v. de
please your master, and do not sq often inis-
plaire^y. a mattrtjm* se trom"
take in the tenses, numbers, and persons of the
ptr^x. temps
verb. - - Let them (fall asleep.)"^
*'endormtr,v.
Subjunctive Moon.
, Pass. I mnst apply mjMlf to. the
' flfwt fMet . s^appliqutT;^.
F^^ncU language. - - I will hide it, test
lanfiie,?. C9cher,v» i2c^ peur fiie,c«
.f)ie ^bi^uld perceive it. - • - Provi^Mi
tie s^aperuDoirjW* .en^pro. Paurvdfut^t*
.icej*ei9fffijbertoatk )Um bow kh
4e dtmand^r^y* hi commenifiiY. ,
mptfcer idpea. » - • - (In order. that) joo aaj not
boast {so mfic]))*- - I have told them who jou
t^ip^neer}?. I«n<,adv. i{t/,p.p.
are, that tbey may behave better another time.
'Prst. That I might not ruin myself. - - -
8t ruiner^Y.
"That/he might not meddle with my affairs. * * -
Me mikr^r. dt
Hiat we might excuse ourselves. • - ** That you
• s'ia?ciMer,Vt
might not go away That thej might not
#'en plhr^ v.*
repent too late.
9t ftptniir^Yi* infi iard^diiY*
^ * Remember that rerbi marked tbni are irre{;tilar,-
\ t See the note p. t93.
\ i See/otteir, imp, v. page'Saft^
236
Compound Tenses* .
(Read vjith aiUntiori the rtmarks^ p. 218.).
I have inquired after you and jroar sister. - - *
sHnformer^v* d« '
H€ says jpo have not been well while you
<{t/,v« pendant que^c,
were Id the country. - - - - Has not your cousin
a campagtit^L fou»tn,fn.
laughed at me ? - - Did we not get up at six
semoquer^y^ de ae Uver^r. a
(o'clock ?) - - They have perceived the trick, but
hexire du ditaur^m.
it was too late. - - Did you remember f me 7
ce se ressofivenir^r. de '
I had not applied myself enough. - - • H«d
s^appliquer^v, assez^adr, ^
not your sister imagined, - that they would have
*'tmagincr,y.
found themselves obliged to go to France f - - -
se trouver^r* ' ob/tgl.p.p. At
He has wpunded himself in attempting to injure
se blesser^v* essayer^y* de nutVe^v.
me.--- We had thought ourselves able
se croire^v.* capable^zdj.
to resist them, but we have (been deceived.)
di risister^r* leur mais^c^ se tfomper^v*
- - - Dicf you not hide yourselves (in order)
se cacher^y^ afin
to surprise them ? - - - - When I (shall)
de surprendre^y* Quan(2,adv. -
have walked five or six minutes in the gar^
minute • jar* •
den, I will rest myself. ^ - - - - Why did you
c2tn,m. se rtposer^y.
exhaust yourself as you h^ve done? • - -» - Oar
s^ipuiser^y* • yi(}/,p.p.
sailors would have behaved with more reso-
matelotyin*
t See the N. B. p. 41.
227
lution* - « Would you not have excused yourself. • • •
iVheb thejt have repented their faults, 1
se repeniir^Y* * de
will forgive them. - - If I had been in your place, I
avois a
would not have meddled with their affairs. - • •
9e mikr^y. dt
Your friend would not have complained of you,
se plaindre^v.*
aiid you never would have (fallen out) for so small
'• $9 brouiUeTyV* si pea
a matter. ^
dt chose*
CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS.
These are called trregti{ar5 because their conjugation
'deviates from the general rule, either by their termina-
tions, or the want of some of their moods, tenses, per*
sons, or numbers. The personal pronouns must now be
supplied in French by the student.
VERB OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
ALLERf TO 60. \
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Aller^ to go.
Part. act. * AUanU goings
Part. pass. Alli^ ee, gone.
^Indicative Mood.
Present. ,
Stng« Vais^ vas, va, . I go, do go, or am going.
Plur. Allans^ alleZy vont^^
Imperfect.
Sing* jf//ot#, ^ aliois^ alloit^ I did go, ot Was going.
Plur. Allions, allitz^ alloientj
Preterite.
Sing. Alkii^ allasy alla^ I went, or did go.
PlOr. Alfdmes, nlldtts^ alUrent^
t After when and a few other conjnnctions itill Mid thally sifns ot
the future, are implied in English.
228
Slog.
Plur.
Irons^
Fttture^
I shall, or
trfl.
rill go.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Ptar.
Sing.
Plur.
Irois^
Intmsy
Sing^
Plur.
JlllionSy
Allasitj
Allassionsy
vra9y
irtZy ironi^
ConditionaL
trow, tVojif, I should, could, would, or
iriez, ' iroientf . might go.
Imperative Mood.
Fa, go thou ;
quUl ailkj let him go.
Allon8y allez^ ^jaHU oillmL
SUBJUHCTIVE MOQD.
Present.
ailleSy aille^ that I maj ge.
alliez^ aillmt^
Preterite.
allass^f alldty that I might go.
allasiiez^ allastenty
N. B. The preterite of the verb itre,jeftx9^ tufut^ k/tm
has been used by respectabie authors a od to conver&a-
tion {or fullaiy tu alku^ but now it is thought unnecessary.
Among the compound tenses of this verb, it is to be
remarked, that those which are formed by the participle
aWe, signify that we are or were yet in the place men-
tioned at the tfme we are or were speaking. Whence
it follows, that the first person of the compound of the
present, -
Je suis alli^ ' I have gone, &c.
Tu €s alli^ &c.
can seldom be used in diecourse; for. we cannot oatur-'
ally say that we are still in a place ivhich can only be
mentioned in a past time, aifer we have left it ; there-
fore, we make use of the compound tenses of the V«rb
tlre^ ^sfai^ 6l6^ tu a* 6t£,f€u» 6U^ favois.ite^ faurois iie^
&c. for when we say,
// est alU a tiondr^Sy He is gone to L(^don.
we give to understand, that he is 6til( in London^ or 49
00, hi^ way, going to London : on the contrary.
229
II a tie a Londrts^ * ^. He has been at London,
means, that he has gone to London, but is returned.
The above verb is also conjugated as a reflected one,
with the particle en : ex.
S'en aller^ to go away.
Je m'en vais^ I go or am going away.
Tu Ven vas^ thou goest or art going away*
11 s'en va, he goes or ist gotog axcay.
Jfous nous en alldhs, we go or ^re going avxiy.
Vous vous en alltz^ you go or are going away.
lis s'en vont^ they go or are going away.
Negatively.
Je ne m'en vats pas^ I am not going away.
It ne s'en va pas^ he is not going away.
J^ous ne nous en altor^s pas^ we are not going away.
Vous ne vous en alkz pas^&Lc. you are not going awa^^Sic.
Interrogatively.
S'en va-t-il f Is he going army ?
Vous en allez-vous? <t*c. are you going away ? &x*
JsTe s'en vont-ils-pas ? 4^€. are they not going a29ay,&c.
The imperative mood is thus conjugated :
Singular*
Fa-t'en, go thou amay*
QhHI s'en aille^ let him go away.
Plural.
^//ons-nous en, let us go away.
jiltez-rou^ en, go away.
QuHls s'en aillent^ let thdn go away.
Its compound tenses are,
/(§ m'en suis alU^ I have goneMtoay.
Je fli'en etois allc^ I had gone azoay.
Je m'en fus alle^ I had gone away.
Je m'en $era% atU^ 1 shall have gone away, &c.
Je m'^n serois alUj I should have gone ^way.
20
VERBS OF THE SEQf ND CONJUGATION.
ACQVERIR, TO ACQUIRE.
Infinitive Mood.
Preaciyt. Acquirir^ to acquire.
Part. act. Acqutrant^ acquiring.
Part. pass. -^c^uM^^e, acquired.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Acqukrs^ acquiers^ acquiert^ I acquire or am ac-
Plur. Acqucrons^ acquirez^ acquierent^ quiring.'
Imperfect.
Sing. Acqu6rois^ acquirois^ acqueroit^ I did acquire or
P)ur. Acquirionsj acquiriaz, acquiroient^ was acquiring.
Preterite.
Sing. Acquis, acquis, ac^yi^, I acquired or did ac-
PluK Acqutmes, acquttes, acquirent^ quire.
Future.
Sing. Acquerrai, acquerras, acquerra, I shall, or will ac-
Plur. Acquerrons, acquerrez, acquzrront, quire.
Conditional.
Sing. Acquerrois, acquerrois, dcqmrroit, I should, would,
or CQuld acquire.
Plur. Acquerrions^acquierriez, acquerroienij
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Acquiers, acquiere, acquire tbou.
Plur. Acqu6ronsj aequerez, acquierent.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Sii^. Acquiere, acquieres, oc^utere, that I noaj acquire.
Plur. Acqucrions, acquSriez, acquierent,
Preterite.
Sing. Acquisse, acquisses, acqu(t, that I ^might ac-
Plur. Acquissions, acquissiez, acquissent, " quire.
231
QUERIR, TO FETCH.
The primitive ^f the ahpve verb is never used but in
the present of the infinitive mood : ex.
Envoyez-nnoi querir, Send /or me.
GOJ^QUERIR, TO conwEK iREQUERIR, to rkqdire;
are conjugated like ACQUERIR.
BOUILLJR, TO BOIL.
Infinitive Mood.
Present Bouillir^ fo boil.
Part. act. Bouillant^ boiling.
Part* pass. Bouilli^ie, boiled.
Indicative Mood.
, Present.
Sing. Bous^ bous^ 6ott/, I boil, or am boiling.
Plur. Bouillons^ houilUz^ houillmt^
Imperfect.
Sing. Bouilhis^ bouUUns, bouiUtntj I did boil, or was
Plur. Bouillions^ bouillieZy bouilloienty boiling.
Preterite.
Sing. Bouillisy bouilKs^ bouillit^ I boiled, or did boil.
Plur. Bouillimes, bouillitts^ bauillirent^
Future. -
Sing. Bouillirai^ bouilliras^bouillira, I shall, or will J>oiK
Plur. Bouiilirons^ bouillirez^bouilliront^
Conditional.
Sing. Bouilliroisj feoutZ/tVow, feouiWiVoi/, I should, would, or
Plur. Bouillirionsybouilliriez^bouillirotent, could boil.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Bous, bauiUe, boil thou.
Plur. Bouilhns, bouilUz^ bouilhnt^
232
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que ^ue que
Sing. Bouille^ bouilUs^ bouille^ that I may boil.
Plur. Bouillions^ houilliez^ bouillent,
Preterite.
Sing. Bauillisse^ bouiltisses^ froi/zV/z/, that I might boil.
Plur. Bouillissions^ bouilHs^iez^ bouillisstnt^
This verb, as ^vell as. its competind rebouillir^ to boil
again, is but seldom used, except in the third person
singular or plural, and in its infinitive mood, which is
commonly joined to the verb Faire to render it active
and use it in all persons : ex.
Faites bouilUr cette viande, Bbil that meat.
COURIR, TO RUN.
In^nitivb MpoD.
Present. CoiXrir^ to run.
Part. act. Ccfurant^ running.
PaiPt. pQBS. €ouru^ ue, run.
iNDifeATivE Mood.
Present.
Sing. Gours^ cours^ com% I run, or am running,
plur. Courons^ courez^ coiirent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Courois^ couroit^ couroii^ 1 did run, or was run-
Plur. Couriofis, couriez^ couroieni^ ning.
Preterite.
Sing. Courus^ conrus^ courut, I ran, or did run.
Plur. Courumes^ courtiles^coururent^
Future.
Sing. Courrai^ caurras^courra^ 1 shall or will run*
Plur. Courrons^ courrez^ courront^
233
Sing. CourraiSi
Plur. Courrionsj
Sing.
Plur. Courons,
Conditional. .
courraisi^ courroit, 1 should, would, or
courriez, courroient^ could run.
Imperative Mood.
Cours, coure^ run thou.
courez, courent,
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
que que
couresj coure^ that I may run.
couriez, courentf
Preterite.
courussesy courut^ that I toight run.
Sing. Courts
Plur. Couriont^
Sing. Courasse^
Plur* Courussions^courussitz^ courussent^
The compounds of this verb are,
AccQurir^ to run to.
Concourir^ to concur.
DisQourir^ to discourse.
Encourir^ to incur.
Parcourir^ to run over.*
jRecounV, to have Recourse
to.
Secourir,
assist.
to succour, to
COUFRIR, TO COVER.
See OUVRIR, to open.
Present.
Part. act.
Part. pass.
CUEILLIR, TO cither.
Infinitive Mood.
Quillir, to gather.
Cueillani^ gathering.
Cutilli^ te, gathered.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Cueille, cueiUesj
Flur» Cueillons^ cutillez^
20*
cueille^ I gather, or am gath-
cueillent^ ering.
234
» Imperfecta*
Sing. Cueillms^ cmillois^ ctuilloit^ I jdrd gather^ or
Flvtr. Cueiliians^ eueitlkz^ outiltaimt^ was gathering.
Preterite.
Sing. Cueillis^ cmillis^ cueillit^ I gathered, or did
Piur. Cueilltmesj cueillUes^ cueillirtnt^ gather.
Future.
Sing. Cteet/Zerat, cueiUeras^ cxitilUra^ I shall or will
Plur. Cueilkronsy cueilkrez^ cueillerontj gather.
Conditional.
Sjng. Cueillerois, cueitlerois, cueillerott^ I should, would,
or could gather.
Plur. Ciuilkrions^ cueilUriez^ ctieilteroient^
Imp££ATiv£ Mood.
Sing. CneilU^ a&eille^ gather thou.
Plur. Cudllonsj cueilhz^ cueillent^
SUKIONCTIVE MOOO.
Present.
Que que que
Sing. CueiiUj cueilles^ cueille^ that I may gather.
Plur. Cueillionsj eueilltezj eimllent^
PreteFile.^
Sing. Cueillisse^ cueilli9se»^ cueiUii^ that I might
Plur. Cueillissions^ cueilHssiez^ cucillissenly gather*
The compounds of tbisr verb- are,
Accueiiiii^ to make wel- i Recueillir^ to gather to-
come. \ gether*
DORMIR^ TO SLEEP.
Infinitive M'oo5>;
Present. Dormir. to j?Ieep.
Fart, act* Dormant, sleeping*
Part. pasiH-. Jiwf^mi^ i^ ^\^^•
2S5
Sing» Dors^
Plur. DormofiSj
Sing. Dormois^
Indicative Mood.
Present.
dors^ <{oW,1 sleep, or am sleeping.
dorvieZn dormentj
Imperfect.
dormois^ (^ottnoil, 1 did sleep, or was
Plur. DormionSf dormiez^ . dormoient^ sleeping.
Preterite.
Sing. Dormis^ dormis^ dormit^ I stept, or did sleep.
Pliir. Dormtmes^ dormites^ dormirenl,
Future.
Sing. Dormirai^ dormiras^ dormira^ I shall or will
Plur. Dormirons^ dormirez^ dormiroxity sleep.
Conditional.
Sing. Dormirois^ dormirois^ dormtroi/, I would, could, or
Plur. Dormirions^ dormiriez^ dormiroient^ should sleep.
Imperative Mood.
jDor*, dormtj sleep thou.
dormtZy' dorment^
Sing.
Pl-ur. Dormons,
Que
Sing. Domie,
Plur. Dormionsj
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
que que
dorm(*3^ dorme^ that I may sleep.
dormiez:^ dormentj
Preterite.
Sing. Dormisse, donnissts^ dormtt^ that I might sleep.
Plur. DormAssionSy dormissiez, dormisseni.
The compounds of this verb are,
Endormir^ to'make sleep. I Se rendormivy to fall asleep
S^endormirj to fall asleep. | again.
EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS
AND THEm COMPOUNDS.
Where are you going ? - - - I am going to tbe
Oujadv.
236
play. • - - 1 would go with you, if I had time. - - Why
camidie^f* U
are they going away so soon ? — Will not your father
bp angry, if you go there without him ? We were
yacAc,adj,
going to Miss D— 's, when we met you
chez^p* u3« avons rencontri^p.p,
' - These men went yesterday from house to bouse. - -
Believe me, sir, do not go to see them. - - Your father
Croire^. *o» rotr,v.
told me (that) you will go to France and Italy as soon
dm,v.
as the war (is over.) - - My sister and I, went last
serafinie. dem2cr,adj.
Wednesday to Vauxball. - - If you had gone thither
an hour sooner you would have heard fine music.
plutSt^VLdv. entendre^v.
- • Your uncle has acquired a great name in America.
nom,m.
- My father went to pa/ your* unele^ a visit*
*o* rc7idrtf,v. *o*
last week, and he did not welcome him (as a) friend.
6n,p.
- - - Did he not ? I am sorry for it. - • - Mr. Dubois,
the king's silversmith, has brought the watch : it
»- orfivre
now goes very well. - - - Go and fetch ine
maintenant^^dy. ^<^
the letter 1 left in my room. * - 1 have (sent for)
/amer,v. {envoyi quirir)
him. - - - - Boil this chicken, and roast that goose.
poukt^m* T6tir{v. oie^f.^
- - - - At last we have conquered This
JEn^n,adv.
water wiU soon boil Boil that meat
* &tenf6/,adv.
again, it is not done enouffb. - - - Do not run so
cuit^p.p.
fast, you will be tired, - - - They always run
-^/fyadv. fatigui^pfp*
237
wb0& iLey go ta §&e (heir aont* - - • Your brother
us^ iante^L
runs faster, that F. - • When he heard that his
apprit^v.
friend was in danger, he ran instantly to him. -,- -
itoit avssitot^^iv* a
Let us not discourse any more on that subject. - - - • I
would assist him with alTmy heart, if I could. - - This
pouvois^
gentleman is a great traveller: he has tun over all.
Monsieur voyageur^m.
Europe. - - Let him go away, for I do not wish to
Europe^f. car^* veux^v. "^
speak to him. - • If you do it, you will incur your
faire^y*
fatber^s displeasure. - - That 5voiild concur to the pub-
deplaisirfin: . Cela
lie good. - >When children are guilty, they getwnlly
6ten,m. coupab/e^adj.
have recourse to some falsehood. - • For Whotti stre you
queique mensonge.
gathering those charming flowers ? - - 1 gather them for
fleufyf,
my mother. - - Why do they not gather some roses ? - -
rose^L
Mrs, P. would have gathered some, but the gardeneir
Mme jardinier^m*^
told her he would gather them himself. - - Of all nations
noixc has welcomed the poor French clergy better
ckrg6^m.
than the English nation. ---Do not make any noise^
faire^w
for my sister (is asleep.) -- 1 hope she will sleep better to-
car,c. . ce
night. - She Would sleep much better, if she were in her
£otr,m«
bed. - If I do not walk a little, I shall faU asleep.
'/ii,m. se protnener^v.
* - My mother, sister, brother, and I, went yesteiday to
Medford, to see Miss Keen^ - • - Did you go thither
«oi Mile
00 foot ? - - - Noy my mother and sister went in a
a cn^p* «^>
coach, and my brother and I on horseback.
a cheval^m.
fuirj to shun, to avoid, to flee.
Infinitive, Mood.
Present. Fuir^ to fle6.
Part. act. Fuyant^ fleeing.
PHrt. pass. JF\ii, u, fled.
'. Indicative Mood.
Present;
Sing. Fuisy fuis^ fuit^ I flee.
Phjr. i\ij^on5, fumzy fuknt^ *
Imperfect.
Sing. Fuyois^ f^jfois^ f^yoity I fled, or did flee.
Plur. Fuyionsy f^yi^^j f^yoi^ntj
Preterite.
Sing. Fuisj fuis^ * fuU^
Plur. Futmesj fuUts^ fuirent^ or we may say^ Jt pin
lefuiie^ &c.
Future.
Sing. FiuVfli, fairasyfuira^ I shall or will flee.
Plur. FuironSy fuirtz, fuiront^ ^
Conditional.
Siog. FuiroUy fuirois^fairoit^ I should, would, Of coald
Plur. Fuirions^/mriez^fuiroienty flee.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. ^ Fuisy fuie^ flee thou.
I*lurt Fijyonsy fuyezj fuient^
23§
SUBJUNCtIVS MOOP. :
Present. ^
Que que qie
Sing. Fuitj Jvies^ /iiie, that I may flee.
Plur. Fuyions^ y^t/tc^, fuient^
, Preterite.
Que que que
Sing. Fuisse^ .fuisses^ fuity that I might flee.
PJur. Fuusfons^fuissiez^ fuissent^ or
Je pjisse la fuite, &c. that I might Jlee^ &c.
SUnfuir, to run away.
MENTIR, TO LIE. i
Infinitive Mood.
Present. JIfenrir, to He.
Part. act. Meniant^ lying.
Part. pass. Mentis te, lied.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Mens^ mensj ment^ I lie.
Plur. MentimSj mentez^ mentent^
Imperfect..
SiAg. Mentoisj mentm^ mentoii^ I did lie, or was lying.
Plur. Mentions^ mentiez^ mentmntj
Preterite.
Sing. Mentis^ mentis^ mentit^ I lied, or did lie.
Plur. Menltmes^ mentites^ menlirent^
Future.
Sing.' Me^Uirai^ mentiras^ mentiray I shall, or will lie.
Plur. MentironSf mentirez^ mentiront^
Conditional.
Sing. Mentiroisj men/iVot^, mcnhVotV, I would, could, or
Flu p. MentirionSy mentiruz^ mentiroient^ should lie.
Imterative Mood.
Sing. jlfen^, mente^ lie thou.
Plur. Mentonsy mentez^ menUnt,
Que
Sing. Mente^
Plur. Mentions^
S40
Subjunctive Moop.
Present.
que que
mentes^ menie^ thai I may lie.
mentiez^ ' mentent^
Preterite.
Sing. Mentisse^ mentisses^ mtntit^ that 1 might lie.
Plur. Mentissions^meniisskz^ tnentissent.
The compound of this verb is
D6menlir^ to give one the lie, to helie, to contradict.
MOURIR, TO DIE.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Mourir^ to die.
Part. act. Mouran^^ dying.
Part. past. Mort^ (e, died, or dead.
Indicative Mood*
Present.
Sing. Miurs^ mmrs^ meurt^ I die, or am dying.
Plur. MounmSj mourez^ meureni^
Imperfect.
Sing. Mourois^ mourois^ mouroitj I was dying.
Plur. Mourions, mouriez^ mouroienty
' c Preterite,
Sing. Miyurus, mourus^ mourti/, I died.
Plur. Mourumesj niourutesymoururent^
Future.
Sing. Mourraii mourras, mourra^ I shall, or will die*
Plur. Mourroris, mourrez^mourront^
Conditional.
Sing. Mourrois^ tnourrois^mourroit^ I should, could, or
Plur. MourrioHs^mourriez^fnourroient^ would <iiei£
341
Imperative Mood*
Sing. Meurs^ meure^ die ihqiOt
Plur. Mcurons, mourtz^ meunnt^ .
Subjunctive Mood.
Present*
Que que que
Siog. Meure, nuures^ meure^ that I may die.
Plun Mourionsj tnouriez^ meurent^
Preterite.
Sing. Mourusse, mourusses^ tnotirdf, that I might die.
Plur; Mimrussums^mourussiez^ tnaunusentj
Se mourirj to be djing.
OFFRIR, TO OFFER.
Infinitive Mood*
Present. Qjfrtr, to ofier.
Part. act. Offrant^ oflTering.
Part. pass. Offert^ /e, offered.
Indicative Mood.
Present «
Sing. Qffrey offres, offre^ I offer, or am offering.
Plur. Qfrons^ tffrezi offirent,
Imperfect.
Sing. Offroisj offrois^ offroit, I did offer, or was of-
Plar. Offri&nsy offriez^ ^roient^ fering.
Preterite.
Sing. Qffris, Offris^ offrit, I offered, or did offer.
Plur. Offrtmes^ offrtUs^ offrirent^
Future.
Sing. Offtdrai^ offriras^ offrirc^ I shall, or will offer.
Plur. Offrirons^ offriref^ ^riront^
Conditional.
Sing. Offrirm^ (ffrirois, offriroit^ I would, could, or
Plur* Offririons^ offrirkz^ ^riroient^ should offer.
21
242
iMPEBAlTyK MOOP.
Sing. Offre^ offr^^ offer Ihoa.
Pkir. Offrons^ offrez^ ^renl^ .
SOBJUNCTIYB MOOB.
Present.
Que que qu€
Sing. Qffre^ offrtSj offrt^ that I may offer.
Plur. CJ^rion*, offruz^ offrtnt^
Preterite.
Sing. Offriste^ offrisses^ offrit^ that I might offer.
Plur. Offrissions^ offrissiez^offrissent^
OUIR, TO REAR.
This verb is never used but in its participle passive,
joined to some of the tenses of the verb avtnr^ to have,
preceding the verb dirty to saj : ex.
•Tai ooi dire gue, I have heardj thdt, <^c.
In general we make use of apprendre^ irr, v.
OUVRIR, TO OFEN.
This verb, as well as its compounds,
CouTftr, to cover, JSecournV, to cover again.
D6c,mvrir, {{J udcov«;{ is. conjugated like OFFRlA
PARTIRi TO SET OCT, TO oo away;
And its compounds,
Dipartir^ ripurtitj to dis- | Repartir^ to set out again,
tribute, to impart, | to reply ;
243 ^
8e REPEjVTIR, to repent;
SEJ^TIR^ TO FEEL, TO SMELL,
A od its compounds ;
Conseniir^ to consent, to I jRe;j<n/ir, to be sensible of,
agree, | to resent,
Pressenlify to have a foresight or presentiment,
are conjugated like Mmtir.
EXERCISES ON THE roRiooiNo VERBS anj>
THEIR COMPOUNDS.
As soon as they saw us coming tbey ran aiv^y*
^ussilSi que voir^v. venir^v.
- - - Avoid bad company. - - He does not love your
compagnie^L
sister, because she lies. - - If you forgive me this time,
I never will fie any more. - . I cannot believe him ;
•^ 7>OMPoir,v.
/or be contradtetft himself at every instanti - - Tell
car,c. a tout momtnt. Dire.v.
me what she has done to you ; but above all do not lie.
9?ir,p.
- . If you do not behave better, your mother will
se camporter^v.
die with grief. - - Mrs. S. died at Paris on the seventh
de chagrin^m. h ^
of August, one thousand seven hundred and eightr
- - Misfortune often* seeks those who avoid it and
Malhtur^m. chercher^v. '
sometimes avoids'those who seem to seek it
gutlqutfrng^Bdv. sembler.y. ^
' ^'jS^aiMr"'"" ""'"^ ^hedoor for yoursisterf
• Se€ note, page 32.
244
* - Your brother was. do sooaer armed ia London, than
p/u/o/,adv. a
I offered him my services^* • • - Your .actions never belie
yourvwords. - - Open the window. - - I had heard you
patohs. V
were going to Holland (at the) beginning of next
au commtnceineni^in.
month. -- 1 hope joi:^ will never discover what I have
esperer^v.
told you. - - Cover my hat, and put it upon that
dire^v. mettre^v,
chair. - - 1 Will set out to-morrow morning at seven
(o^clock). - - Do not set out without me. - - Let us go and
heuresm *o»
see Mrs. D**, I have beard she is dying. — Your sUter
repents much of having sold her books. - - Gather that
d"" avoir
pink, it smells charmingly. • - Her mother says she
milkt^m. bien 6on,adv.
' nevcjr will- consent to it. - - If you do not take
prtndft^v.
care, you will repent (of) your imprudence soon or
{[flfde, /6f,adv.
ate. - - Let us die for our country, and^Otir death will
larc/,adv. ' patrie^f.
be glorious* - - Every citizen (ought 4o) bedispos^d to^
g/oneu^,adj. d«t/,v.
sacrifice himself, for the pubUe good ; it is at this
bten,m. c$^to* a,p*
price only that (a man) ac^ires a lawful right
an legitimefiij* f{rot/,m«
to the advantages of civil society. - - - 1 should die
satisfied, if* I knew (that) you were happy.
eonUntMj" »apotV,v. (bythesubj.)
You sooq felt the effect of it. - - My cousin set out
^ . • effet,m.
from here yesterday morning at nine o^clock. - - I
ici,adv.
^ ffcr yott-mji bouse, it is at your service. - - - You
inv ^y rely upon her, she will never discovev
S45
your secrets. <* - 1 will n6ftr n/Str you my* horse^ any
more'. ... He irill feel it in bis turn, when lie
is old*
(by the fut.)
REVETIR, TO INVEST.
iNflHlTITfi H00l>.
ri^sent* Rivltiry to iDTest with, to give other clothes*
Part. act. Reuttant^ investing*
Part. pass. RcvSli^ ue, invested.
. Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Revits, rwtU^ revtt, I invest.
Plnr. Reoitons^ rtBiitz^ revitmi,
Imperfect.
Sing. Revtkns^ mitois^ revitoit^ I did invest.
Plur. Revilions^ revdiez, rtvitoimt^
Preterite.
Sing. Revitis^ revitis^ reoiiit^ I invested, gr did in-
Plur. Revitinui^ revilUei^ revllirentj vest.
Future.
Sing. Rwitiraij reviHras, revttira^ I shall, or will in-
Plur. Revitinmsj revSlirez^ revttiront^ vest.
Conditional.
Sing. Revitirm, reviiiroi$^ revMrait^ I should, would,
Plur. Revitirions, revitiriez^ reviliroimtj i^c. invest.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. - Revltg^ revite^ invest thou.
Plur. Rivitms^ revitez^ nviimU
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que ^
Sing. Refotte^ revites^ revtU^ that I may invest.
Plur. JBevl(um#, reviHa^ revlUnL
21*
246
Preterite* ,
Sin^ RwStisse^ revitisses^ reveiit, that I might inresU
Plur. HiPeiiisioMirt^StissHZ^revitissint^ .
SERVIRy TO SBRyE, to help to.
Infinitive Mood*
Present* Servir^ to serve.
Part. act. Servant^ serving*
Part* pass* Servi, te, served*
Indicative Mood*
Present.
Sing* Sers^ sers^ sert, I serve, or am serving.
Plur* ServanSf serveZj servent,
Imp^fect*
Sing* Servoisy servois^ servrnt^ I did serve, or was
Pliir# StrvionSf servUz^ servoient^ servingir
Preterite*
Sing* Strvisi, £$rvis^ servU^ I served, or did serve.
Plur* Strvima^ strvites^ servinni,
Future.
Sing. Servirai^ serviras, servira^ I shall, or will senre.
Plur* Servirons^ servirez^ terviront^
Conditional* -
Sing* Serviroii^ seroirois^ serviroit^ I would, should, or
Plar* Serviriont^ serviriezj. serviroitnty could serve*
Imperative Mood* «
Sipff* Sersy . serve, serve thou.
\ PW. Serocnsy nrvtz^ aerventy
247
ScBJUNCTirv Mood.
Preseat.
Que qm fue
Sing. Serve^ serves, serve, that t may serve.
Plar. Servionsy serviez, servent,
Preterite.
Sing. Servisse, servisses, servU, that I might serve.
Plur. Servissions^servissiez, servisseni.
The compounds of this Verb ^re,
Desservir, to do an ill office, to clear a table.
Se servir, to make use^ to use.
SORTIR, TO CO OUT,
is conjugated like MENTIR.
SOUFFRIR, TO SUFFER,
is conjugated like OFFRIR.
tekir, to hold, to keep.
Infinitiv£ Mood* ^
Present. Tentr, to hold.
P^'rt. act* Tmant, holding.
Part. pass. Tenu, ue, neld.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Tiens, iiens, iientf I hold, or am holding.
Plar. Tenons, itfntz, /tennen^
Imperfect.
Sing. Tmois, Itnois, /cnot/, 1 did hold, or was holding.
Plur. Tenx(ms, teniez, tmqient^
Preterite.
Sing. Tins, tins, iint, I held^ or did hold.
Plur. Tinmes, tinies^ i\nrei^, , ,
348
Future.
SiDg. Ttendrat, tiendras^
Plun Tiindrtmt^iiendreZj
timdra, I shsftl, or will hold.
tiendroni^
ConditionaK
Sing. Timdrmi^ tUndraU, tiendroit^ I should, could, or
Plur* Tiendrumsjtiendriez^ iUndroientf would bold«
Imfkrativb Mood. .
Sing. TienSy
Plur. Tenons, ienez^
Itenne, hold thou.
timnent,
SOBJUNCTiVB MOOB.
Present.
que que
tiennesj iienne, that I may holdr
temez, tienneni,
Preterite.
Sing. Tinsst^ timnsj ttnty that I might hold. "
Plur. TinssioM, tinsiiez^ im$tini,
Qu€
Sing. Tienne,
Plur. TzmoM^
The compounds of this verb are,
S^abstenir, to abstain.
Apparitnir, to belong.
Con/enJr, to contain.
Ditmir^ to detain.
EnirtUnir, to keep, to en-
tertain.
Maintenir^ to maintain.
Obienir, to obtain.
Rttenir, to retain, to keep.
Soutenir^ to maintain, to
bold, to support.
TRESSAILLIR, to start, to leap foe.
Infinitive Moon.
Present. Tresaailliry to start
Part. act. Trtssaillani, starting.
Part. pass. Tressailli, i^ started.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Slog.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
' Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
243 '
iNDicAt^VB Mood.
Present.
TresHiille^ tressailhs^ tressaille^ I start.
Tf€ssaillotts^ tressaillez^ tressaiUent^
Imperfect.
Tressaillois^ iressaillois, tressailloit^ I did start.
TressaillionSj Iressailliez^ tressailioitntf
Preterite.
Tressaillis^ . trtssaillis^ tressaillii, I started.
Ttessailltmesy tressaillites, tressaillirentj
Future.
Tressailliraiy tressailliras, tressaillira^ I ahallj or
will start.
Tressaillironsy tressaillirez^ trtitailliront^
Conditional.
Trtssaillinns^ tressaillirois^ tressaiUiffnt^ I should,
would, <$rc. start.
Tressaillirions^ tressailliriez^ iressailliroienty
Impeeativc Mood is wanting.
SuBjuNc«piTE Mood. •
Present.
Que que que
Tressaille^ iressailles^ tressailltj that I may
Tr€3sailli(m$, iressailliez^ tressaiiUnt, start.
Preterite.
Tressaillisse, - tressaillisses^ /res^at/Zf/, that I might
TressailHssions^ tressaillissUz^ tressaillisseni^ start.
ASSAILLIRj TO ASSAULT, is conjugated a^ above.
SAILLlRy TO JUT, or jut out (term in architecture),
is conjugated like TRESSAILLIR, but is only used
in the third person of sonie tenses and its infinitive
mood*
230
N. B. SAILLIR^ TO oitsh oot, (sgeakiiig of afly
liquid,) is regular, and conjugated like PUXIR.
VENIR^ TO COME,
And its compounds,
Convtnir c2e, a, to agree, to
become, to fit, to suit,
Contrevenir d, to infringe,
Devtnir, to become,'*'
D\scot¥otn\f dt^ to disagree,
Jntervenir a, to intervene,
Parvenir a, to attain to,
Prittrdr^ to prevent, to
prejudice, to anticipate,
to prepossess,
Prcvenir J to proceed,
Revinir^ to come back, to
return,
Se souvenir de^ to remem*
ber, to remind,!
Se ressouvenir de^ to recol-
lect^
Subvenir a, to relieve, to
assist,
Surveniry to befall, to
happen unexpectedly, ta
come to,
are conjugated like TEKIR.
VETIR, TO CLOTHE.
This verb is seldom used but in the present of the
infinitive mood, and participle passive, vttu^ clothed ;
therefore the conjugation of its compound REVET JR^
TO INVEST WITH, TO GIVE OTHER CLOTHES, haS jUSt beCH
given 10 lieu of it.
* This verb in Englwh i$ mofit generally accompaniecl by t!ie pre-
position of^ governing the noun or pronoun : but it mast be observed,
that, in French, (he preposition must be suppressed, and the noun er
pronoon liecome the nooiinative to the verb devemr : ex.
JVV vous informeg point dt ce que Do not inquire about vrbat will
je devierulrai^ become of me,
Q«e deviendra voire cousin n eon What will become of your eouemy
plre Pabandonne ? if his father forsake him ?
S% ceht arrivoii^ je ne eaU ce que Should that happen, I know not
nous detiendrifme^ • what would become ofut,
t When this verb, in English, gorerns a noun or pronoon in the
accusative case, it must be put in the infinitive mood, and preceded
bj the verb ybire in the same tense, number, and person, as the verb
to reimAnd : ^,
Faitei-met soaV«iuc depaeeer chea lUmind me to call upott yonr
vo/re fon/e, aunt.
Out,/e votM ea feral soQvenir, Yes, I wiU remind yeu of it.
EXERCISES ON TM FOMMiva VERBS
AND THBIR COMPOUNDS.
Your friend Mr, H***, does not serve me well. - - *
amt,ro« «o»
Shall I help jou to a little bit of laml),
Ms>i morceau^m* ogneati, ^
or a wing of that chicken? We would
ailt^. poulet^vn.
serve him with all our heart, if we could. - • • I
de pouvoir^y*
shall go out in half an hour. -'- If we go to-day
' aujourdliuiy^dw
to Richmond, we will (make use of) your coach. -- My
se servir de ' carrosu^vsx*
sister went out'^'this morning at nine o'clock, and is not
ma/tVi,m.
yet returned. -• Nobody knows what we suffered in our
r€t?«wir,v. fODotr^v.
last voyage. - - If I were as ill as you, I would
vwfagt^m. nui{a(2e,adj.
not go out. of my room. - - Why do not you
cAombrejf. i'our9Uot,adv.
serve your friends, since you may do it ? - - -
/>u»5fue,c. pouTotV,v.
Shoaldt they forsake you, what would become of
0handonntr;<t*
you ? - I would make use of your horse, if you (were
chezal^m, avoir
«o kind as to) lend it to me The- more we are
la hont6 de
abovje others, the more it becomes us to be
au deisus <I«,p.
modest and bumble. - - My aunt and I came yester-
/an/e,f.
day to see you, but you were not at home. - - - I
hope you will keep' your word, and come
tenir^ ' parolt^.
to-tnorrow. - * - 1 assure you Mr. R**'s father holds
demain^^A v. ussurtr^y*
* Seepage 154. t Turn, If (hey shoal J, &c.
252
the firBt raciK it^ the town, but the son wilt never
rang,m. ' -
attam bis father's reputation. « • • Men acquire, by
lopg labour?, knowledge .which often becomes
travail^ m« lumiereS.
fatal to them. - - - I maintain, and will always
maintain, that jou will not be happy without
/teuretix^adj. sans^f,
virtue. - - We were coming to see you, but you have
anticipated all my designs. - - She leaped for joy when
pr6venir^\. de
she saw her. - - At last she has agreed to pay her
JBn^w,adv. * de
an annual pension of twenty pounds. - - Her mother
started up at these words, and became furious. * - -
•^ d,p. parole^* /arietia?,adj.
Come on Friday morning, at nine o'clock
»0' Vmdrtdi
This bouse will belong to me after her death. —
a/>re$,p. ^or/,f.
You will obtain leave to go out another time,
ptTViission de foisS*
if you come back soon. - - «• This box contains all
Ueniot.
ipj jewels. - - •* I a^ee Miss N. is the prettiest of the
bijoux^tn.
family ; but she is so proud, that I know not what will
become of her. -- Who knows whether they will re-
savoir^y* ^c.
member (of) it or not ? • They assaulted the town (in the)
middle of the night, and all their officers, even^
milieuym. . p - m^f?i€,ddv.
the general^ agree that they have acquired ^ > much
aequ6rir^v»
glofy- -,- Remember .that, if you infringe the law, you
* See the neater verbs for the formation of the compound tenses,
pageSlS.
263
•■ - '
wilt incur tbe puntshmenis dacreed by the law. • - r
peineyt* jpor/e,p»p«
Your illness proceeds from a great heat. « • • . The
chaleurfm
first time (that) you come to see me, I will keep you-
(by the fut.) to,
two or three days. - - • Mr. B. desired me to tell you,
prier^v* de
that he will not come back to-day. - - - When tbe
surgeon l^d opened his vein, the blood gdshed
chirurgien^mM* sang^nu
out with an extraordinary impetuosity. — That poor
roan will bless you, if you (give« him" other* clothes^)
benir^v. revitir^v.
He is so prepossessed against me, that he will not
conlre.p, vouloir^v.
agree he (is in the wrong). - - We should certainly
avoir tort. cer/m>Mmen/,adv.
have come back yesterday, had we had time. - - You will
Aur,adv. si U temps.
1>ecome a great man, if you continue to study with
continuer^y. de "
the same assiduity. - * He would have come to see us
assiduit6,f. Slre^v.
last week, if it had not rained. - - The first time
semainef. ph^p.p. fm^U
I go out, remindt.me to call on your bro-
(by the fut.) de passer.v. ehez^p.
thcr. . - - That hat would suit you very well, if you
were a little taller. Do not go out to-day, you
will suffer much if you do. -- I should not suffer
beaitcoup,SL(lv.
(so much) if it were fine weather. - - Why do not
/an^adv. faisoit^v,
you abstain from drinking? - - • The king has invested
6otre,v.
that nobleman with all bis authority. - . - You may
fc%ncMr,m. de . Pouvoir.r.
set .out this morning, but remember to come back
* See obeervation, p. 156. f See ihe last note, page 250.
22
254
at Bight* - • - Were I in your place, I would detain
him here a little longer ; Tor he always keeps
iong-/em5,adv« caf,c»
himself shut up in bis house. - - 1 do not think that
en/erme,p.p. crotVe,T.
colour suits your sister. • - When will she return
(by the subj.) Quanrf,adv.
from the country? - - She wrote she would come next
campagnt^U 0 '
Saturday, if the weather were fine.
VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
MSEOIR. TO SIT DOWN.
Infinitite Mood.
Present. Asseoir^ to sit down.
Part. act. Asstyant^ sitting down.
* Part. pass. Assis^ ise^ sat down (or seated.)
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. AsBxtds^ a$sieds^ assitdy I sit down.
Flur. Ais^mis^ asstytz^ asseient^
Imperfect.
Sing. As9eym, asseyois, asseyoit, I did sll, or was sitting
Plur. Asseyions^asseyiez^asseyoient^ down.
Preterite.
Sing. Assis^ assis, assit, I sat down.
Plur. AidmtSj asstle^^^ assirentj .
Future.
Sing. Aisiirai, assiiras^assiira^ I shall, or will sit dowti.
Plur. Asnirens^^ssiirzx^assiironti •
266
Conditional.
Sii^. Jlssiirms^ assiirois^ CLssitroity 1 should, would, or
Plur. Assiirions^ assiiruz^ assiiroimt^ could sit down.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Asaiedsj asseie^ sit down.
Ptur. Asseyons^ assej/ez^ asseient^
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. ^
< Qtu qut que
Sing. As8iiej asseiesj asseie^ that I may sit down.
Plur. Asseyiona^ asseyiezy asstientj
preterite.
Sing. Assisst^ astissts^ asstiy that I might sit down,
Plur,. Assissiotiiy assissiez^ assisstnt^
Asseoir is active, but is most generally conjugated as
a reflected verb^ which may easily be done, by the
learner adding a double pronoun to the different tenses,
and forming the compound ones by the verb d<re> as in
stpronunery ift page 319 : ex.
Je m*assiedsj tu Vasrieds^ il h'^assied ;
JV*ou9 nous assejftmsj vous vous asseyez. Us s'asseienL
Compound Tenses.
Je me suis assis^ iu Ves assis^ il s^est assis ;
Jfous nous aommts assis^ vous vous ites assis^ &.c.
The compound of this verb is^
Se rasseoiry to sit down again.
SEOIRj TO PIT WELL, TO BECOME, TO PIT, tUc
primitive of custoir, is never used in the present of %s
infinitive mood ; and in its other tenses is conjugated
only as follows : ^
Part. act. Siyantj fitting well, fitting, or becomift^.
Part. pass. Sis^ (never used but in the sense of situate,
or lying.)
.1
/
256
Inpica^ive Mood.
Present.
// sied^ ih siient^ it becomes, they become, ire.
Imperfect.
// iiyait, ils Uxjoimt^ it was becoming, ^c,
Prelcrite wanting.
Future.
II siira^ ils eiiront^ it or thej will become.
Conditional.
// siiroU^ ils sieroienl^ it or they would become.
Subj. Pres.
Qu^il siie, quHls siitnt^ that it may, ^x.
The other tenses are neyer used.
SURSEOIRj TO suPERSEBK, TO PUT opFjIa compound
of seoir^ is onlj used in law, and is thus conjugated:
Part. act. SursoyanU
Part. pass. Sursisy ise.
Indicative Mood.
Present* ,
Jt 9ur$oiij &ۥ nous tursoyans^ &c.
Imperfect. *
Jt €ursoy<ntj &c. nous Mrsotfions^ &c.
Preterite*
Je sursisy &ۥ nous surstnus^ ^c.
Future.
Je surstoirai^SiC* nous surstoirons^ ^c»
Conditional.
Je -surseoiroistf &c. nous surseoirions^ &c.
Imperative Mood.
j^ Sursois, &c. sursojfons^ &c.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
0|N je sufHoity &c. ^e nous sursoyions^ &c.
Preterite.
Queje sursisstySLC* que nous sursissions^ Scc
S67
DECHOIR^ TO DECAY, TO DECLINE.
Infinitive Mood*.
Present. Dichoirj to decay.
Part. act. wanting.
Part. pass. Dechu^ut^ decayed.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Dechois^ diehois^ dichoit^ I decay.
Plur. Dichcyons^ dichoyez^ dechoienfj
• Imperfect.
Sing. Je dichvyoisy &c. Plur. Kous dichoyionsj &;c.
Preterite.
Sing. DechxiSy dichus^ dichut^ I decayed,ordid de-
Plur. Dichumesy dichutes^ d6churentj ' cay.
Future. - J
Sing. Dichtrraiy ' dicker r as ^ d^cAerra, I shall, or will de-
Plur. Dicherrons, dicherrez^ dccherront^ cay.
Conditional.
Sing. Dicherroisy decherroisj dccherroit, i should, would,
or Goold decay.
Plur. Dicherrionsy decherrUz^ dicherroientj
Imperative Mood is wanting. ,
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Sing. Dechoie^ dtchoies^ dechoie^ that I may decay.
Plur. Ddclitnfiom^ dechoyiez^ dechoient^
Preterite. *
Sing. Dichusse^ dechusses^ rf^cAti/, that I might decay.
Plur. D6cliU8sionSydtchu9s\ez^ dichussent^
.CHOIR^ the primitive of the above verb is obsolete.
ECHOIR^ TO fall out, to chance, is conjugated
like DECHOIR. Its part. act. is icUa^, 6chu,p.p.
MOVVOIRj TO MOVE.
iNFiNiTfvfi Mood,
Present. Mouvoir^ (o move*
Part. act. Mouvant^ moving.
Part. pass. JIfii, ue, moved.
Indioiltive Mood.
Present.
Sing. Mius^ mms^ nuut^ I move.
Pliir. Mouvons^ mouvez^ meuvent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Mouvois^ tnauvois^ mouvoit^ I did move.
Plur. Mouvio^Sy mouviezy mouvoient^
Preterite.,
Sing. Mits^ musj mut^ I moved, or did move.
Plur. Munusy mut$$^ murent^
Future. ^
Sing. Mouvraiy mouvras^ mouvra^ I shall or will move*
Plur. Momron^^ mouvrez^ mouvront.
Conditional.
Sing. Mouvroisj mouvrois^ 7nouvroit; I should, could, or
Plur. Mouvrionsy mouvriez, mouvroient^ would mo\'e%
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Meus^ meuve^ move thou.
Plur. Mouvon^^ mouvezi meuvtnt^
Subjunctive Mood. '
Present.
Sing. Meuvi^ tnmves^ meutt^ that I maj^ move.
Plur. Jlfpupton^, moui^tez, mtuvent^
Preterite.
Sing. Mussty mussesj mut^ that I might move-
Pi ur. MussionSy mussitz^ mussmU
The compound of this v^rb is,
JSmoieKtr^fb stir up, to move.
959
POVVOIR^ TO BE ABLE, TO HAVE Ilf ONE's POWEE^
iNriNiTivE Mood.
Present* Pouvoir, to be able.
Part. act. P&uvant^ being able.
Part. pass. Pu, been able.
lNDi<:Afiv£ Mood.
Present.
Sing. Puis^orpeuxypttjuc^ peuty I am able, I can or ma j.-
*** '^ pouveZf peuventj
Imperfect.
pouvois^ pouvoity I was able, or I could.
pouviez^ pouvoimtj
Preterite.
pusj put, I was able, or I could.
putes^ purtnt^
Future.
pourras^pourrOj I shall, or will be able.
pourrez^ pourront,
Conditional.
pourrois^pourroU^ I should be able, I
pourrieZjpaurroient^ could, or might.
Imperative Mood wanting,
SuBJUNCTLl^Jk^OOD.
Present.
Plur. Pouvonsy
Sing. Pouvoisy,
Plur. PouvionSf
S|ng. Piif,
PJur. Pumesy
Sing. Pourrai^
Plur» Potirran^,
Sing. Pourrois^
plur. Pourrionsj
Que
Sing. Puissty
Plur. Puissionsy
Sing. Pxtsse^
Plur. Puasions^
que que
puisses, puisse^ thut I may be able, or
puissiez, pumenl^ I may.
Preterite.
pusses, put, that i might be able, or
pussieZy pussent,
1 might.
When the words can, may, could, or mighty express an
absolute or permissive power, or a possibility of doing
a thing, can and may are rendered by the present tense
of tbe indicative of this yerb : ex.
260
Je puis vouB vendre un bon I can sell yoa a good hois^j
cheval^ si vaus en avez if you want one*
hestnn d'un^
Vous pouvez aller au balj You may go to the ball,
mats reoenez a dix heures, but come back at ten
o'clock.
N. B. May^ expressing a wish, is rendered by the
present tense of the subjunctiye : e|[« ^ r
Puissiez-vouf ilre hmreux ! ^ May you be happy !
Could is rendered by one of the following tenses, viz.
the imperfect, preterite definite or indefinite, or con-
ditional pr^ent ; and might by the last tense : ex.
Je ne pouvois pas mieux I could do no better.
fairey
II ne pot pas venir avec He could not come with us
nous la semaine passee^ last week.
Fbu5 pourriez V0U5 iromper You might mistake as well
amsi bien quelui^ as he.
' Could or mighty being joined to the verb to have^ im-
mediately followed by a participle passive, must be ren-
dered by the conditional past of the above verb,*with
the participle turned into the present of the infinitive
mood : ex.
J'aurois pu vous le dire I could have told it to yoa
hier au soir^ last night.
Vous atiriez pu le /aire en You might have done it in
troisjours^ three days.
SAVOIRy TO KNOW something.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Savoir^ to know.
Part. act. 5ac/ian/, knowing.
Part. pass. Su, wc, known.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. 5015, saisy ^at/, I know.
Mur. Savons^ savez^ savent^
261
Imperfect. ^
Slog. Savois^ savois^ savoU, I did know, or knew*
PJur. SavionSj savitz^ savoieni^
Preterite. /
Smg*'.Su9^ 3u$y ffti/, I knew, or did know*
Plur. Sumts^ suUs^ surejit^
Future.
Sing. ScMraif sauras^ saura^ I shall^ or will know. '.
Pitir. Saurons^ aaurez^ sauront,
Conditional* %
Sing. Saurois^* saurois^ sauroit^ I eboold, would, or
Plur. Saurions^sauriez^ sauroient, ' could know.
lifPERATivc Mood. '
Present.
Sing. Sache^ sgche^ know tbou.
Plur. Suchons^ sachtz^ sacheni^
Subjunctive Mood*
Present.
Que fue qtie t
Sing. Sache^i saches^ sache^ that I maj know.
Plur. Sachions^ sachiezj focjuni^
Preterite.
Sing. Su$st^ . 9U9Si$y sUt^ that I might know.
Plur. SuBsionsy sussiez^ susstnt,
VJlLOIRy TO BE WORTH.
Infinitive Mood.
Presentt Fia/otr, to be worth.
Part. act. Valant, being worth.
' Part. pass. Valuy been worth.
* Thistense, conjogated negatirely, is often Englished by eaTinof /
Je ne saarois vous U dire^ I cannot tell it to you.
t We sometimes employ the present of the subjunctive of this verb
instead of the indicative; but it is never to be used without the ne-
gfttion pot, and moat commonly in answering a question : ex.
Le rat ira-t-il a la comldie ? Will the king go to the play ?
Pas ftitje saehe. Not thl^t 1 know of.
3e9
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Valois^ "
Valionsj
Vaudrai^
VaudronSj
Vaudroisj
Faudrions^
«,, vaui^ I am worth.
valentf
Sing.
Plur. Falons^
vaux,
Imperfect.
valaisj valoii^ I was worth.
valiez^ iKiloienl^
Preterite.
va/tif, valuta I was worth. ' '
valuUs^ vaturentj
Future.
vaudras^ vaudra, I shall, or will be
vatidrez^ vaudrontj worth.
Conditional.
vaudroisy vaudroit^ I should, 4^c. be
vaudriez^ vaudroieni^ , worth.
iMPERAnvE Mood.
Faiia?, vaillt^ be thou worth.
Que
Sing. VailU^
Plur. Valions,
Subjunctive Mood.
qtu
que
vaillisy iaiile^ that I may be worth.
valiez^ vaillent^ «
Preterite.
Sing. Falussty valusses^ valuta that I might be worth.
Plur. Valttssions^valussiez^ valusstnt^
The compound of this verb is,
Privaloir, to prevail, is conjugated as VALOIR:
but wc say in the present tense of the subjunctive,
Qiujt preval-f, «*, c, : ions^ hz^ mU
263
VOIR, TO SCE.
Infinitive Moo^.
Present. Voir^ to see.
Part. act. Fojfant^ seeing.
Part. pass. Fii, tie, seen.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Fois,
Vayois,
Voyionsy
V0I5, 9ot<, I see.
voytz, voknt^
Imperfect.
vojfois^ vayoU^ 4 did sec.
voyiez^ voyoient^
Preterite.
Sing.
Plur.
Vis,
visj vit, I saw, or did see.
vttes, virentj
Future.
Sing.
Plur.
Verraij
VerranSj
verrasy verra^ t shall, or will see. -
verrez^ verront^
Conditional.
Sing.
Plur.
Verrois^
Verrions
verroisjverroitj 1 should, ^c. see.
, wrrtez, verroient^
Imperative Mood.
Sing.
Plur.
VcywM^
Vois^ toie^ see thou.
voytZj voient^
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Sing.
Que
Voit,
que que
voies, vote, that 1 may see.
Plur. Vojftons, vcyitz^ voitni^
Preterite.
Sing. Visst^ visstSy vit^ that t might see.
Plur. Vissionsy vistiez^ vissent^
Entrevoir^ to have a glimpse of. Privoir^ to foresee.
Revoir^ to see again. Pourvoir^ to provide*
PREVOIR diflTers frbm VOIR in the future: ex.
Sing. Privoiraif prinmras, prcvoira, •
Plur* Privoirmis^ privoirez^ prtvoiront; And)
Conditional* Present.
Sing. Prevoirois, pr6voiro{s^ privoiroiU
Plur. Privoirions^ prevtnriez^ privairwnL
POURVOIR makes in the Preterite^
Sing. Pourvusy i pmirous^ paurvuU •
Plur. PourvumtSy pourvulesj pourvxirenU
Future.
Sing. Pourvoiraiy pourvnirasy poiirvotra. •
Plur. Pourvoirons^ pourvoinz^ pourvQironU
Conditional.
Sing. PoHrvairoisy pourvoinns^ pourvairoit,
Plur. Pmmoirvms^ paurvoirkz^ pourvoiroienU
SuBjuNcnvE Mood.
Preterite.
Sing. Pourvussiy pourvusses^ pourvut,
Plur. Pourvustionsj pourvussieZf pourvusstnL
VOULOIRy TO BE WILLING.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. VouloxYy to be willing.
Part. act. Voulanl^ being willing.
Part. pass. Foulu, ue, been willing.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Veutey veuxy veuf^ I am willing, or I will.
Plur. Vaulonsj voulez^ vtuknt^
Imperfect.
Sing. Voutoisy voulois^ vovloit, I was willing, or I would.
Plur. VoHlions^tmUitZyVouloientj
9€i
Preterite.
Sing. Voulus^ i)mlnsy voulut, I was wilimg, of I
Ptur*^ VouliiimeSf voulutes^ voulurentj would.
Future.
Sing. Fotidrat, voudras^ vmiJra, I sball be wiUiog, or
Plur. Voudronsj vondttZj voudrantj 1 will.
Conditional.
Sing. Voudrois, vtm^rds^ voudroii, I shotrld be wil«
Plur^ Vmdriens^ toudriezj voftdroten/, ting, or I would.
Imperative Mood is wanting*
However, we say,
Veuillez bien^ be willing to«
Sing. Vtuillc,
Plur. VoulionSf
Sing. Voulussij
SuBJUNCTivi; Mood.
Present. ^
que ^e ^
veuilles^ veuilh^ th^t I may be wil*
vtmliez^ vmillentj ling.
Preterite*
v&ulustts, vQulutj tbat I might be wll-
Plur* VouluseionB^voulussieZjVQuhLasenij
ling.
When the nl^ords mil or would Bigoify a will, choice^
or deliberation in the agent, and can be expressed by
' choose or chose^will is rendered in French by the present
of the indicative mood, or future of this verb : ex.
I
,Je veux y alUr^ et lui par^
ler mopmime^
II ne veut pa$ fmmger,
will^ or choose to, ge
there, and speak to him
myself:
He will not eat, pr doe»
not choose to eat:
and wovld by one of the following tenses, viz. the Im-
perfect, Preterite, Conditioiia}, ot Compound of the
Present.
266
Sije voulois, je vous dirak^ If I would^ or dkose^ 1 could
ou tilt demeurt^ tell you where she liveft.
, II voulut absohinunt partir He would^ absolutely, or
Mer, absolutely chose to, set
out yesterday,
^e voudriez-row* que je What wQuld you have me
fisse ? do ? ,
When would is joined to the v^rb to have immedi-
ately followed by a participle passive, they are to be
rendered by the compotmd of the imperfect or com-
pound of the conditional of the above verb, with the
participle passive turned into the present of the infinitive
mood : ex*
5i/aVois voulu luiparler^ If I would have spoken to
him, or had I chosen to
speak to him.
Vaus n^auriez pas voulu You would not have taken
prendre lesarmes^ W, &c. up arms, if, «J/-c.
J^ous ail^ons pu ParriUr^si We could have stopped
nous eussions voulu, him, if we had been wil^
lingy or had chosen, "
EXERCISES ON THE jrOREGOING VERBS AND
THEIR COMPOUNDS.
Why do not you sit down, sir ? - - You
Pourywojjadv.
come' to see me very seldom. - - Let us sit down upon
rarement^adv*
the grass. - * Do not make (so much) noise, I cannot
Aer6e,f. faire.v. tanl^zdv.
learn my lesson* « - Do you know what has hap-«
apppendre^y. est arri^
pened to ber ? - • No, I do not. - - As soon as he savr
ver,v. Aussitdt que^c.
he could not make. her hear reason, he went
enUndre^v, s^en
away. •* - We went there ourselves, and soon knew
mller^v. 6fen«6/,adv.
267
what she asked. • • See the letter she wrote me. - - We
6crire,y»
will not sit down till you have determined . to
queue se diterminer ^v.nuh}* a
set out. - - The first time 1 saw your sister, she pleased
ine« - ] would, six down upon the grass, if it were not so
damp. - - Mrs. P. desired me to tell you she could
humide^Sii], prier^w de dire^v*
not come to see you this week, but (that) she would cer-
semaine^f. cer-
tainly come (at the) beginning of next
tainemenl^^dv. au commencemeni^m.
month. - - Cannot you lend me three or four
mois^m. priler^v.
guineas? - - If I would, I could soon know
guince , bienlot^^dvi
whether Mrs.^D. has seen your aunt or not. - -
«»c. tante^L notim
The last time I was in the park, 1 could -not distinguish
her on account of the trees that were between
d cau9e,p*
her and me; (I had only a) glimpse of her* • - -
je n^ai fait que k>i
This cloth is not worth five shillings a yard, but the
drap^m*
colour becomes you very well. - - Do you not see the
defects of it ? - - When you know your lesson
defaui,m. (by the fut.)
come and repeat it to me. - - Did you not know that
«>» repeter^v, .
Mr. A. (was to) marry Miss B. ? - - - 1 knew it, but
6pouser,y. mais^c.
I was not willing to tell your brother of it. - - - 1 be-
parler^y.
lievc you could learn your lessons much -faet-
apprendre,v. teaucou/j,adv.
tcr, If you would. - -^ Could you lend me your horse
priter^y^
368
for two OP three days T - - If your brother come wUh
j'our,m. opec^p.
me, will he be able to follow me f - - What will yoa
lay that he will not come without bis sister ?» - This
room can contain about a hundred people. - • Could
envtron,p'* ptrsonnt.
they see so great an alteration, without bemg
changemtni^m. sans^f.
yexed (at it)? - - (It is) better to be unfortunate than
/dc/j^,p.p. en,pro. valoir^y, malhtureux^^ij.
criminal. - - He who cannot command himself^ is inca-
SB
fable of commanding others. - - His'best coat was not
aux Aa6i/,m.
worth two-pence when he arrived from Germany*^-*
souj AUemugnt*
We saw them yesterday. - • They did not foresee
Ate/',adv.
^bat would happen to them. - • We ought to
arriver^y. dewnr^v.
make a judicious choice of those friends, to
faire^y. judicieitx^dj* choix^m. u>«
whom we intend^ to give our confidence. - - Do yoa
voti/otV,v. eanfianctjL
know where Miss B. lives? - - Yes, I do (know it),
ou,adv, demeurerjy.
and I see her every day at her window. • - • Why will
fendre^L
you not tell it me ? - - She would marry him in
ipouser^y, 6fij>.
spite of all her relations. -. - It is for this reason
dipit^m* parent^m* Cs,pro«
her father says he will never see her again. ^ - I
iZire,v,
have spoken of your wine to two friends of mine :
one has money, but he will not buy; th^* other would
buy, but he has no money. - - Some told me that
your brother could not pay mci others told me tbsit
269
he would not; in shtfi; I find that, when people
• en^n,adv. ^en5,pl.
will not pay^ we have much trouble. - - We regularly —
pay all that we owe, but he says, that be will pay
nobody* - - All the finest talents united are not
riunir^y*
worth one virtue. - - Virtue is a quality which we can-
on,pro.
not (too much) praise. -- Severity and rigour may
<rqp,adv. iawcr,v. ScviriU^f. rigMctir,f.
excite fear, but not love. - - You saw with what
craintefn amotir,m.
goodness she received him. - - I would not tell her
6on7e,f. recevoir^r.
what t think about it, for fear of giving her the least
c{e,p. inf*
subject of complaint. - - If you foresee the danger,
plainte,
why do jou not endeavour to aVoid it ? - - They were
iachtr^w de ivUetyV.
willing to withdraw but your brother hindered
se retirer^y* empicher^v*
them (from it), and desired them to sit down again. ,
prier^v. dt
- - You can speak to Mr. B. whenever you
parUr^y. quand^
please, but 1 may not take tbit libertj. - - *
DcmZotV,v. prendre^y*
Why may you not ? - - - You know the esteem
tsUmeS.
and friendship that T have for him: you know
that his father is one of my oldest friends;
ancien^Ax*
you know yourself the merit of both. - - He would
not sell me these buckles under four
Ten(Ire,v. houde^L a moins c2e,p.
gcrineas. « - I will not see (any more) your brother/
j>/ti5,adv.
hut J will see you again as soon as I can. - - -
(by the ful.)
2S*
270
Everj body thinks, t%at, if #ejr would have pui'suejd
* * paursuivretr,
the eDemy briskly, tbey might have ended
vigourmitmtnUdiAvm Jinir^y,
the war on that day* - - Should we^see ourselvf 6 re-
dueed to so great difficulties ? - - If I would have be-
didr^y. *
lieved bim, he would have persuaded me to go to Italy
croirt^v* , dt
with him* - • He could have done his work in less
faire^y. en,p.
than ten minutes, if he had not amused himself in
»*amu$eryy» a
reading* - - If you want thi^ book;, jou may take
Hre^y. avoir bescin de .
it, it is at your service. - • If he sold all his horses now,
a *
theEett of them would not be worth ten guineas. - -• -
We m^t have danced tilt (twelve o'clock) if
jusqu^a^p* mmuily
that had not happened. - - Oh ! my children, may yoa
be happy, and never bewail the moment of jour
heureuse^didy pleurtr^y.
birth ! - - I spoke tp her (a long while), but could
naiesanceyi. hng'tmip§^zdy.
not persuade her to come with me. - - - May I go
de
and see him? - - - Yes, you may, but come back,
aa> soon as you can.
nuasitSt que^. (by the fot.)
• After til* A^ojiiii^tioo Mi^ «liniy» vm ibe inperfiect; nem p, IM,
and 15$.
571
VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION,
ABSOVDRE, TO absolve, to Acaunu
Infinitit£ Mood.
Present.
Part. act.
Part, pass
Absoudre^ to absolve.
Absolvunt^ absolving.
. Absotts, oute, absolved.
InI>I<^A14V£ MoO0.
Present.
Sing.
Plar.
Absohons^
abatmsj absoutj I absolve^
absohm, absolvent^
Sing.
Plur.
Ahsolvoisy
Absolvions^
Imperfect.
absolvois^ absolvoiij I did absolve*
absolviezj absohoient^
Preterite is wanting.
Future.
Sing.
Absoudrai^
absoudrasj absaudra^ I shall, or will
Plur. AbsQudronSj absoudrez, absaudronti absolve.
Conditional.
Sing. Absoudrois^ absoudrois^ absoudroii^ I should, &c.
Plur. Absaudrions^ absoudriez^ absoudraient, absolve.
iHpfiRATivE Mood.
Sing. Absous, absolve^ absolve thdtf.
Plur. AbsohonSf nbsohtz^ absolvent,
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que gui que
Sing. Mei>he^ absolves, ai«o/ve, that I m^y absolve*
Plur. Absolvion^ ahsolvieZj abs^lventj
Preterite is wanting.
SODDRE, TO solve, (the primitive of this verb), is
used only in the present tense of the infinitive <nood.
272
The other compounds are,
Dissoudre^ to dissolve. Risoudrt, to reserve.
DtBsoudre has the same tenses wanting as ahsoudre.
Risoitdrt has its participle passive, risolu : its prQ**
terite is,
Sing* R6iolu8^ risohis^ ristluU
Plur. Risolumesj risolutes^ rtsolurenL
Subjunctive Mood.
Preterite.
Sing. Risolusse^ risohustSy risolut.
Plur. Risohissionsyrholuesiez, resolussenU
ATTEIJ^DRE, to reach, to hit, to attaiij,
TO OVERTAKE, and
jISTREIjVDR^, to OBLIGE ;
AVEINDREy to reach, to fetch out,
arc conjugated like CRjiLYDRE.
The two foregoing verbs are growing obsolete^
BATTRE^ TO beat.
Infinitive Moop.
Present. Batlre, to beat.
Part. act. Baitant^ beating.
Part. pass. Baitu^ ue, beaten.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Bais^ bais^ bat, I beat^ or am beating.
Plur. Buttons, battez, baiimt,
Imperfect.
Sing. Battois, iaitois, battoit, I did beat, erwas beat-
Plur. Battionsy buttitz, battaieni^ ing.
973
Pretorlte.
Stng. BaiHs^ baltis, haiiit^ I beat, or did beat.
Piur. BiMltms^ baiiiUSj baiiirtnU
Future.
Sing. Battrai^ baitra$^ battra^ I shall, or will beat#
Plur. Balinms^ bailrez^ butirontj
Conditional.
Sing. Baitrms^ battreis, batiroU, I should, &c. beat.
Plur. Battrions^ battritz^ batiroitnL
Imperative Mood.
Sing. BalSj balte^ beat thou.
Piur. BattoM, batiezj battentj
SuBJUNCTiYE Mood.
Present.
Que aue que
Sing. Batitj battesj balte, that I may beat.
Plur. Battiom^ hattiez^ baiUntj
Preterite.
Sing. Baitisse, battisses^ batttt, that I might beat.
Plur. Battissions, fra/Zimej?, baiiisseni.
The compounds of this verb are,
Se d4ba(tTej to struggle.
Rabattre^ to abate, to beat
down.
Rebattre^ to beat again.
Jlbattre^ to pull down, to
throw down.
CombaHre^ to fight.
Dibaltre^ to debate.
BOIRE^ TO DRINK.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Boire^ to drink.
Part. act. Buvant^ drinking.
Part. pass. £ii, W, drunk*
274
Indicative Moo9.
Present.
Sing. Bfrisy (ai>, bott, I drink, or am drinking;
Plan Buvons^ buvez^ boivent^
Imperfect.
Sing. BuvoiSi huvois^ buvoit, I did drink, or ivas drink-
Plur. Buvions^ buviezy buvoient, ing.
Prelerlle.
Sing. Bus^ bus^ but, I drank, or did drink*
Plur. BUmeSf butes, burenlj
Future.
Sing. Botrai, boiras^Aoircu I shall, or will drink.
Plur. Boironsj boireZj boiront^
Conditional.
Sing. Boirois^ boiroia^ boiroit^ I should, &c. drink.
Plur. Boirions^ boiriez^ boiroient^
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Bois^ boive, drink thou.
Plur. BuvonSf buvez^ boivent^
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Sing. Solve, boives, fcotve, that I may drink*.
Plur. BuvionSi buviez^ boivent^
Preterite.
Sing. Bussty busses^ bui, that I might drink.
Plur. Bussions^ bussieZy bussent^
N. B. Sotre dans quelque chose^ is, To drink oiU of
something.
BRAIRE, TO BRATr
This verb is seldom used, except in the present
tense of the infinitive mood, and the third person
275
singular and plural of the present, future, and con-
ditional, of the indicative mood.
Infinitive. Braire^ to bray. — Present, indicative.
// braiU Us braienU — Future. // braira^ Us brairont* —
Conditional. . // bvairoit^ Us brairoienU — This verb ex*
presses the discordant cry of an ass.
BRUIRE^ TO ROAR, TO MAKE A GRBLAt I^OIS^.
This verb is used only in the present of the infinitive
inood, and in the third person of the imperfect, indica-
tive: U bruyoit^ Us bruyoient. Its participle activ^
bruyani, is often but a mere adjective.
CEIKDRE, TO GIRD,
And its compounds Enctindrt^ to inclose, to encom-
pass, are conjugated like CRAIKDRE.
CIRCONCIRE, TO CIRCUMCISE,
is conjugated like CONFIRE^
but has its participle passive ending in t>, we, instead oft/.
COXCLVRE^ TO eoNCLUDE.
Infinitive Mood*
Present. Conclure^ to c,oncIude.
Part. act. Concluant^ concluding.
Part. pass. Conchy tie, concluded.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Ctmclus^ conclus, conclut^ I conclude.
Plur. Concluons^ conctuez, concluent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Concluoisj concluois^ concluait^ I did conclude.
Pltr. Conclmonsj cmcltuez^ concluoimtf
are
Pretevitc.
Sing. Conclu9i conclus^ cono/u/, I coBcItided, or did
^lar« CondilufMati condutes^ conclurmtf conclude*
Future.
Sing. Concluraif concluras^ canchra^ I shall, or will
Plar. Conclurons^ conclurez^ conclurontj conclude.
Conditional.
Sing. Ccnelurois^ cancbwois^ amcluraii, I sliould, &c«
Plur. Cgnclurions^ concluriez^ concluroknij conclude*
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Omclus^ conclue^ conclude thou.
Plur. Cancluonsj concluezj concluentj
Sdbjuiiotivb Mooo.'
Present.
^ Qut . que ^ ' que
Sing. Cmclue^ conclues, conclut^ that I maj con-
PlHr. Cenciui'oiu, cenc/tim, conclumt^ dude.
Preterite.
Sing. Conltl'asst^ . conclusses^ conclut^ that I might con-
Plur. Conclussions^ conclussUz^ conclwsmt^ elude.
conduire^ to conduct, to lead, to carrt.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Conduin^ to conduct.
Part. act. Conduisant^ conducting.
Part. pass. Conduii^ te, conducted. ^
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. CondfutV, conduis, conduit^ I lead) &c*
Plur. Coiiduisons, conduisezj conduisent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Conditisoit^ cotiduisois^ conduisait^ I did lead.
Plur. Ctmduisiohs^ c^nduisiez^conduisoientf
' 277
Preterite.
Sing. Conduisis^ conduisisy conduisU^ I Jed.
Plur. Conduisimes^ conduisites^ conduisirent^
Future. ^ ^
Sing. Conduirai^ conduiras, conduira^ I shali, or
Plur. Conduiroriff conduirez^ conduiront^ will lead.
Conditional.
Sing. Conduirois^ conduirois^ conduiroU^I shonMySic*
Plur. Canduirionsy conduiriez^ cbnduiroienii lead.
iMPERArivE Mood.
Sing. Conduisj conduise, lead thoa.
Plur. Conduisons^ conduisez, conduisintj
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Qut que que *
Sing. Conduisiy conduises^ condutse, that I may
Plur. ConduisiofiSy conduisicz^ conduisent^ lead.
Preterite.
Sing. Conduisisse^ conduisisses, conduisU^ that I might
Plur. Conduisi8fion$y conduisissiez^ cbnduisissenty lead.
Its compound is
Rtconduirej to lead again.
CONFlREy TO PRESERVje.
Intinitive Mood.
Present. Confire^ to preserve.
Part. act. Confisant, preserving.
Part. pass. Cdnfit, /e, preserved.
kiTDicATivE Mood. •
Present.
Sing. Confisy con/is^ confit^ I preserve.
Plur. Confisonsy confisez, confinnt^
Imperfect. »
Sing. Confism^ confisois^ cori/^^otV J did preserve?
Plur. Confisiansj confisiez, conjisoient^
U
27a
Preterite.
Sing. Conjh, confis, conjil, I preserved.
Plur. Confimes^ confites, confirm^
Future.
Sing. Confirm, confiras, confirOy I shall, or will prc-
Plur. Confirons^ conjirtz^ confironl^ serve.
Conditional.
Sing. Omfirois^ confirois, confiroit, I should, &c. pre-
Plur. Cor^rionsj confiritz^ conjiroienty serve.
Imperative Mood*
Sing. Confis^ confise, preserve thou.
Plur. Confisons, confistz^ confisent.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Sing. Confise, eonfisesy confisey that I may preserve.
Plur. Confisions^ confisiez, confisent^
Preterite,
Sing. Confisst, conjisses, con/z^ that I might preserve.
Plur. Confissions^cor^ssuzy confissenl^
CONKOITRE^ to know, to be acquainted
WITH, somebodtf.
Infinitive Mo<aib.
Present. Connoilre^ to know.
Part. act. Co/momfln/, knowing.^
Part. pass. Connu^ we, known. -^
Indicative Moodj
Present. .
Sing. Connois, " connois, connoll^ I know.
Plur. ConnoissonSj Connoissez^ cormoissent^
Imperfect.
Sin^. Cnnnni snis, crnnnhsdis^connoissoit^ 1 did know*
pin'-. C->"-" '•,*.''•''• V- r-ir.ftO'''^\<'rz^rfnnH)lssnitf:f^
279
Preterite.
Sing. Qninug^ eonnti^^ conrmL 1 knew.
Plur. Connumesj C(mnules, qotinurmt^
Future.
Sing. Conncdtrai^ connoiiras^ connotlra^ I shall, cjrc.
PJur. Connoilrons^ connoitrez^ connoilrmt^ know.
Conditional.
Sing. ConnoUrois^ connoltrois, connoitroit^ I should, &c.
Plur. Connottrions, connoitriez, connoltroient^ know.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Conndis^ connoisse^ know thou.
Plur. Connoissans^ ctmnoissez^ connoissent,
SuBj(jiy:Tivs Mood.
Present.
. Que que que
Sing. Connoisse^ connoisses^ connoisse^ that #1 maj
Plur. Connoissions^ connoissiezy connoissent^ know.
Preterite.
Sing. Connusse^ conmisses^ conn4^,that I might know.
Plur. Connussions^ connussiez^ connussenty
The'compounds of this verb arc,
Miconnottre^ to take for I Reconnoitre^ to acknow-
another. | ledge, to know again.
COKSTRUIRE] to construct, to builp,
is conjugated like COJ^DUIRE.
• COXTRAINDREy to constrain, to compel,
TO FORCE,
is conjugated like CRAINDRE.
2B0
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
coudrej to sew, to stitch.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Coudre^ to sew.
Part. act. Cousanty sewing.
Part. pass. Cousu^ t<e, sewed.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
coudsy coudy I sew, or am sewing.
couseZy cousenty
Imperfect.
consols y cousoity I did sew, or was sew-
coiisiez, cousoienty ing.
Preterite.
eousisy cousity I sewed.
coustUsj coiisirent^
Future.
ooudras^ coudra, 1 shall, or will sew.
coudrezy coudront^
Conditional.
, coudroisy coudroUj I should, &c. sew.
Coudriousj coudriez, coudroient,,
Imperative Mood.
Couds^ cousiy sew thou. *
Cousfinsy cousezy cousenly
Subjunctive Mood. ^
Present.
Coudsy
CousoriSy
Coils oisf
CousionSy
Cousisy
Coustmesy
Coudraiy
Coudronsy
Sing. Coudroisy
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
que •
cousiy that I may sew^
cousenL
Que que
Sing. Cousey couseFy
Plur. Cousion^y eousiez.
Preterite.
Sing. Cousissiy musissesy cousUy that I might sew««
Plur. CousissionSyCousissieZy cousissenty
Its compounds are,
picQudny to unsew. Recoudrey to sew again.
3B1
EXERCISES ON THE poREGOiNa VERBS AND
THEIR COMPOUNDSi
I know several persons in this country ivbo
speak as good French, as if they had been (brought up)
frten,adv. > ^{^ve,p.p.
in France Do you know Mr. A.? - - -
Yes, we know him very well ; and, though he is
Oui,adv. soit
rich, I assure you he is not the more charitable for
it. - - - He has been beaten (soundly). - - If you
comme il faut^
knew^ the question, you would resolve it in two
qutsiionf. ^ en
words. - • I will soon conclude, if you think as -
fnot^m. comm«,adv.
your brother does. - -' We should beat them, if they
did not fight in their own .. country. - - Do not
beat him any more, he acknowledges his fault. - • -
^ ^ fauU,U
We ran for above two hours, but at last
pendant,^, plus de,adv. ' en^n,adv.
your brother overtook him, and brought him back. - -
ramener^Y. »o»
You would never see him again, if you knew him. - - -
He struggled a long while, but he was soon obliged
•o» iemps^m*
to (cry for) mercy, • - This mortification has pulled
d« demandm'yV. grdce*
down his pride, I assure you : however, the judge
eependant^2idv»
has acquitted him of the accusation falsely
- /fluwcni«nf,adv.
brought against him. - - Mr. R. told me some time
tnientiyf.p» contfe^p.
24*
ago, that he wotild build a ship on a iiew plan. - - *'
What wMl you drink ? - - I will drink (nothing bat)
ne que
water. - • Do not drink so much. - - If your father
tan/,adv.
were here, yon would not drink (at all.) - - -
• du twiU .
Let .us fill 9ur glasses, and drink our friend's health.'- -
verrf,in. santijl.
We beat them because our troops were better dis-
parctqut^c. dis-
ciplined than theirs. - - Come with us, we shall
ct)>/in^,p.p.
see whether she will know you again or not. - - If you
«t,c. non.
knew her, I am certain she would please you. - - -
plaire^y.
The English drink as much tea as the Venetians
auton/,adv. Ih6, VinUun^m*
drink coffee. • - - After tea we condocted the ladies
cafe. J
to the concert. - - - Wnen they had explained to us
all that bad passed, we acknowledged we (were in the
Si passerby. avoir
wrong). - - • Vour brother's coat was torn, '
torU dichirer^y.
but our tailor sewed it up again so skilfully,
lailUur^m. *^ adroitement^zdy.
that- his father did not perceive it. • - - Uosew
that gown. - • I will sew it to-morrow. - * - The
Jews and the Mahometans circumcise their
JuifyRn .Maham6lan^vn»
children, a few days after their birth. * - -Why
«^ peu,adv. naissaneeyf.
do not you preserve some fruits this^ year ? - - - He
ann^e,f.
woold not know you, if he saw you r.ow. - . - Did
a prisentydidy*
2t3
you ask him whether he (was acquainted with) any of*
these ladies? - * I know Mr. Y. but I do not trust
, to him. - - You wHl force your father to punish you
a
if you do not behave better. • - • The last
se comporter^v.
time we went to Yauj^hall, we drank three bottles of
Cbampalgne-wine. - - The enemy beat us on the
eighteenth, bat we beat thcni again two days after. '
h
--What will you drink, ladies? - - We shall willing*
mesdames^L volon-
]y drink some wine; for we have not drunk
/ier^^adv. '
any since our departure from France. - • - •
depuis^p* dipart^m*
Drink, said she to me, (out of) that cup, the *
dans covpt^U
only token which your father has left
stul^Ay n^rqut^* ait laisser^v.
us of his love. - - - Virtue in indigence is like
afftction^fn dans^p. commt
a traveller whom the wind and rain compel to
pluie^U de
wrap Kimself up in his cloak. - - I would have
envelopper^v. ^o* dc, mantea^^.
preserved some fruits this year, but sugar is too
/rop,adr.
dear. - - Thence we -concluded you could not come
De /a,adv.
to-day.-- - I know nobody in this neighbourhood. - - I
routnage,m.
knew your sister again as soon ds I saw her. - - Though
Quand^c.
you should take three dozen of them, I could
douzainty
384
BOt abate a farthing. - - The wind was so great that*
liard^m. vent^m^ fort.
It has thrown down one or two trees id our garden.
CRAIJiDREj TO fear, to be afraid. 4
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Craindre, to fear.
Part. act. Craignant, fearing.
Part. pass. Craint, ainte^ feared.
Indicative Mood. ^
Present.
Sing. Cramsj craint^ craint, I fear, or am afraid.
Pkir. CraignonSf craignez^ craignent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Craignois, craigr%oi8^ craignait^ 1 did* fear, or
Plur. Craip^ionSj craigniez, craignoimt, 4ffzs afraid.
Preterite.
Sing. Craignis^ craignisy craignil^l feared.
Plur. Craigntmes, craignttes, craignirentj
^ Future.
Sing. Craindrai, craindras, craindra, I sbail, or will
Plur. Craindronsj craindrez, craindront^ fear.
Conditional.
Sing. Craindrois, craindrois, craindroit^ I should, 4^c.'
Plur. Cmindrians^craindritz^ craindroient^ fear.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Crainsy craigne, fear thou.
Plur. Craignona^ craignez, craignmtf ■
285
Subjunctive Mood.
Picsent.
Que que que
Sing. Craigne^ craignes^ craigne^ thai I may fear.
Plur. Craignions^' craignitz) \craignenl^
Preterite.
Sing. Craignisse^ cruigmssts^ craignit^ that I might
Plur. Craignissions^ craignissiez^ craignissentj fean
CROIREy TO BELIEVE.
* , • Infinitive Mood.
Present. Croire. to believe.
Part. act. Croyant^ believing.
Part. pass. Crxi^ ue, believed.
•• •**
Indicative Mood*
Present.
Sing. Croisj crois^ croit^ I believe.
Plur. Crayons^ croytz^ croientj
Imperfect.
Sing. Croyois^ croyois^ croyoit^ T did believe.
Plur. Croyions^ croyiezj croyolentj
Preterite.
Sing. Crus^ crus^ crut^ \ believed.
Plur. CrCLtnes^ crates, crurenty
Future.
Sing. Croirai, croirasy croira, I shall, or will believe.
Plur. Crairons, croirez, croiront,
Conditional.
Sing. Croirois, • croirois, croiroUy I should, ^c. believe.
Plur. Croirions^ croiriez^ croiroient,
286
IimPERATlVE MOOB.
Sing. Crois, croie, believe ihou.
Plur. Croyons, croytZj croient^
SoBjuifcTivE Mood. \
PresenU
Q^e que qn€ ,
Sing. CroUn^ croies, croie, that I may believe.
Plur. Croyions^ croyieZy croient^
Preterite.
' Sing. Crusse, erusses, crAt, that I might believe-,
Plur. Crussions, crussiez^ mrussent^
CROITRE, TO GROW,
And its compounds,
Accraitrt, to accrue, Rtcroiirt, to grow again,
Dicrdilrty to decrease, to
grow less,
are conjugated like COXKOITRE.
CUIREy TO BAKE, TO BOIL, o//cn Etiglinhed htf
TO DO,
And its compound jRecuire, to bake again;
DEDUIREy TO DEDUCT, TO ABATE,
and DETRUfRE, to destroy ;
are conjugated like COKDUIRE.
DIRE^ TO SAY, TO tell.
Infinitive Mood.
•
Present. Dire^ to say.
Part. act. Disant^ saying.
Part; pass. Z)iV, te^ said.
287
Iin>icATiys Mooo*
Present.
. SiDg. Dis^ dis^ dit, I say, or am saying.
Plur. DisonSf diits^ diseni^
f Imperfect.
Sing. Disois, ditoisy disoit^ I did say, or was saying.
Piur. Disionsj dUiiz^ disoient^
Preterite.
Sing. Disy dis, dit^ I did say, or said.
Plur. Dtm^j dites^ dirent^
Future.
Sing. Diraij diras, dira^ I shall, or will say*
Plur. DtVom, dirtz, dirontj
Conditional.
Sing. Dirois, dirois^ diroit^ I should, <$^c. say.
Plur. DirionSj diriez, diroient.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. JDt5, dise, say thou*
Plur. Disons^ dites^* dUent^
Subjunctive Moon.
Present.
• '^ Que que gut
Sing. Disej dises, dise^ that I may say.
Plur. Disions^ disitz^ disent, ^
Preterite.
Sing. Disse^ dis^es^ dk^ that I roighl: say.
Piur. Dissions^dissiez^ dissent^
The compounds of this verb are,
Contrtdire^ to contradict.
Se dedire, to unsay, to rc-
itract, to recant.
Inierdire^Ao interdict, to
forbid.
Pridire^ to foretell. •
* All the ahore compounds {Redire excepted, which is conjugated
like its primitive) make uez instead of ties ; lind Maudire doubles its
4 through the whole verb ; ex. Ji^out maudUsoiUy vout maudissezy its
miudisstnt^ Sec.
S88
Midin dty to slander, to*
speak ill.
Jifaudire^ to curse.
R^dire^ to £aj, or tell
agaio.
ECLORE^ TO HATCH, TO OPEN, TO COME^
TO LIFE.
This verb is seldom used but in the infinitive nnood, '
present tense, and the third persons of the following
tenses.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Eclort^ to open, to batch, to come to life.
Part. pass. Eclos^ ose^ ' »
Indicative Mood.
Sing. Jl iclot.,
Plur. lU iclostnt.
Future.
Sing. // ictora.
Plur. lU icloronU
Conditional.
Sing. // 6cl6roiU
Plur. Us icloroknU
SCTBJONCTIVE MoOD.
Present.
• Sing. Qa'il iclo^e.
Plur. QuHls iclostnU ^
It is only used when speaking of oviparous animals
*or of flowers.
The primitive of the above verb is Chrt^ to shot,
to surround ; and another compound, Enclore^ to shot
in, to surround, with walls, hedges, or ditches.
2S9
ECBIRE^ TO WRITE.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. JEcrire, to write.
Part. act.
Part. pass.
Ecrivant, writiog.
Ecrit^ iu, written.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Ecris^
Ecrivons^
Ecrivm^
Ecrivitmsy
. Ecrivis,
Ecrivtmesj
Ecrirai^
Ecrirotis,
Ecriroxs^
Ecririon$^
Sing. ,
Plur. Ecrivons^
QHe_
Sing, ^crive^
Plur. Ecrivions^
Indicative Mood.
Present. ^
6crisy eerily I write, or am writing.
6crivez^ 6crivent,
Imperfect.
ecrivois^ 6crivoit^ I did write, or was
ecriviez^ 6crivoient, writing.
Preterite.
ccrivis^ icrivit^ I wrote, or did write.
icrivUes^ icrivirent^
Future.
icriras^ icrira^ I shall, or will write.
icrirez^ (criront.
Conditional.
icriroisy (crirott, I should, &c. write*
(crirUzj ecriroient^
Imperative Mood.
Ecrisy £crive^ write thou.
icrhez, 6criven(j .
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
que que
icrives^ ccriue, that I may write*
ecrivkz^ ecrivenL
Prelent*^
Sing. Ecriviise^ icrivisses^ icrivtt, that I might write.
Plur. Ecrivissiom^icrivusiez, ecrivissefitj
25
2do
The compounds of this verb areif.
Dicrirti to describe.
Inscrire^ to inscribe.
Prescrire^ to prescribe.
Rccriu^ to write ag^ln.
Proscrire^ to proscribe, to
oatlaw, to banish.
Souscrire^ to subscribe.
Transcrire^ to transcribe.
EXDUIRE, TO DO OVER,
is conjugated like CONDUIRE.
ETEIXDRE^ to extinguish,
is conjugated like CRAINDRE.
EXCLURE^ to excolde,
is conjugated like CONCLtJRE.
Its participle passive is exclus.
* PAIRE^ to mak«, to do.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. FotVe, to make.
• Part. act. Faisani* making.
Part. pass. Faii^ te^ made.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Fais^ fms, fait^ 1 make, or am making. -
Piur. Faisons*^faUeSj font^
Imperfect.
Sing. Faisms^ /fli5fe,/(iw(rt/, I did make, or was nnaking.
Plur. Faisions^famn^faisoHitt^
Preterite.
Sing. Fi«, fisy fit^ I made, ot did make.
Plur. Fimes^ fttes, firent^
* In the whole of the itnperfecl and in the other cases marked with
a *, cri is.sHent. ^
291
t'uture*
Sing. Ferai^ feras^ fera^ I shall, or will make.
Plur. FeronSy fereZy feront^
Conditional.
Sing. Feroisy ^troisj feroii^ I should, <^c. make. .
Plur. Ferionsy firkz^ feroient^
Imperative Mood.
Sing. FiiiSy fasse^ make tho«.
Plur. Faisonsy failes, fassenly
Subjunctive Mood.
Prese«!1.
Que gut que
Sing. Fassey fassts^ fasse^ that 1 may makf.
Plur. FasiioHiyfassieZyfassenty
Preterite.
Sing. FUsiy JisitSy f% that I might make.
Plur. FwionSy Jisiiez^ fisstniy
The compounds of this verb are,
Conlrefain, to counterfeit,
to mimic.
Difairey to undo, to de«
feat.
8e defaire^ to get rid of, to
part with.
Refairey to do, or make up
again.
RedifairBy to undo again.
Satis/airey to satisfy.
Surjitfre, to exact, to ^sk
too much*
FEINDXEy TO FEIGN, TO I^ISSEMBLE, TO
PRETEND,
19 conjugated like C^AINDRE.
292
FRIRB^ TO TRY.
This verb is more elegantly used in its present inlinl-
Uve with the verb /aire conjugated : ex.
Faites frire ce paisstm^ Fry thai fish.
- rts participle passive isfriL, ite^ fried.
IKDUIRE, TO INDUCE,
IKSTRUIRE, TO INSTRUCT,
and IXTRODUIRE, to introduce,
are conjugated like CONDUIRE.
* JOIKDRE, TO JOIN,
and its compound, Enjoindre^ to enjdin,
arc conjugated like CRjUJ^DRE.
^^ LIREy TO READ.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. . Lire^ to read.
Part. act. Lisant^ reading.
Part. pass. Lu^ «€, read.
Ii^ttCATivE Mood.
Present.
Sing. Lw, /w, lit, I read, or am reading.
PUir. Lisons, lisez^ iisent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Lisais, li$oi»^ foot/, I did read, or wgj reading.
^>ur. Lisio7%$y lisUz^ lisoi^nt^
293
Preterite.
' 81ng. Lus^ ' /tiff, /t4/, I read, or did read.
Plur. Ldmes^ lutes^ lurent^
Future.
Sing. Lirai, liras, lira^ I shall, or will read.
Plur. Liron9j HreZj liront^
ConditioDal.
Sing. LiroiSi lirois^ liroit, I should, would, ^c. read.
Plur. Lirions^ liriez, /tVoten/,
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Ltff, Uscj read thou.
Plur* Lxsonsj lisez^ lisent^
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Siog. Lise, Uses, Use, thai I may read.
Plur. Lisionsj lisitz^ lUent^
Preterite.
Sing. Lusse, lueses^ /u(, that I might read.
Plur. Luseionsylusnez^lussentj •
Its compounds are,
EKre^ to elect* Relire^ to read again./
' LVIRE^ TO SHINE.
and its compound I&luire^ to glitter,
are conjugated like CONDVIRE;
but take no t at the end of their participle passive:
ex. Lut, shined.
26*
294
METTRE* TOPUT^
Infinitivs Mood^
Present. Mttire^ lo put.
Part. act. MtUant, putting.
Part. pass. Mis^ se^ put.
iNDicATive Mood.
Present.
Sing. Mets, mets, met, I pat, or am putting.
Plur. Mettons^ mettez^ mettenij
Impi^rfect.
Sing. Mettois, meltois, mettoit^ I did put, or was putting.
Plur. Meltions, mtitiez^ mettoienty
Preterite.
Sing. .Ww, tnis^ mil, I did put, or put.
Plur. Mimes, mttes, mirent,
Futarc.
Sing. Metlrai^ meitras, nieitra, I shall, or will put.
Plur. Meltrons, nuHrtZy jmcUroniy
Conditional.
Sing. MeHrf>i9, meUrois^meUroU, I should, would, ^c. put.
Pltir. MeUrions^meUriez^meltroient,
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Mets^ metier put thou.
IMur. MttloH€, mUttZy meiUHty
-* Jffttire, when eonjugated as a reflectire ¥€rb, expressei the bc-
ginain^ or continuatica of an action or application ; it is then «ioii-
stantlj Tollovfed by tb« iiartick «, and an infinitifvc laood. it is ren-
defed, in Englkb, by .tb« v€rb /o begin: ex.
Toxites hafeis quHl la voit, il se Everj time he sees her, he begi^
tD«t a rire^ lavghing.
ll %*%iX mis tout tfe hon ^>i«ditr. He hmhtgun t9 tiuiy in tamest.
29d
Subjunctive Mood*
Present.
Que fue que
Sing. Mette^ metles^ metU, that I may put.
Plur. MetliofiSf meUteZy metUntj
Preterite.
Sing. Misse, misses, mil, that I might put.
Ptur. Missions, missiez, misseni^
The compounds of tbrs verb are,
Adnuitre^ to admit.
Commitire, to commit.
Comprometlre, to compro-
mise.
Dcmtltre, to turn out, to
remove.
Se dimtitre de^ to resign.
OmtUre^ to omit.
Ptrmetlre, to permit.
Promeltre, to promise.*
Remetire, to deliver up^
to put back again, to
recollect, to put off, to
defer.
Soumettre, to submit.
TransmtUre, to transmit.
MOUDRE, TO GRIND.
iNriNiTiVE Mood.
Present. Moudre^ to grind.
Part. act. Moulant, grinding.
Part. pass. Moulu, ue, ground.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Mouds, mouds, moud, I grind, or zai grinding.
Plur. Moulons^ moulez, movlent,
Imperfect.
Sing. Moulois^ mouhis^ mouloit, 1 did grind, or was grind-
Plur. JUoulions, mouliez^ moiiloient, ing.
• The partictpie actiTe of this verb (promuinj;), when used ad-
jcctively and expressing the mei^l qualities of sonebody, is ren-
dered in French bj qui promet, or pr^mUtoU beatuoup, or dont U y
(L^'Or avoU beti'ucotip a espirtr: ex.
Le Major A, itoit un qficier qui Major A. was a rery promuing
promettoii beauooap, ou dont 11 qffietr^
J avoii beaii««iip i ccp^rer,
296
Preterite.
Sit\g. Moulus^ moulusj mouluty I ground, or did
Plur* Moulumes, moulutes^ moulurent^ grind*
Future.
Sing. Moudrai^ moudrasy moudra, 1 shalI,or will grind.
Ptur. Moudrons, mtmdrez^ moudrontj
Conditional.
Sing. Moudrois^ moudrois^ moudroit^ I should, would,
Plur. Moudrionsj moudriez^ moudroietU^ 4^c. grind*
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Moudsy tnoule, grind t|iou.
Plur. MoulonSf mouleZf tnoulmt^ ,
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Sing. Moule^ moults^ nwule^ that I oaay grind.
Piur. Moulions^ mouliezy moulent.
Preterite.
Sing. Moulusse^ moulussesj moulut^ that I might grinds
Plur. Maulussions^moulussiezjtnoulussentj
The compounds of this verb are,
Emoudre^ to wet. Remoudre, to grind again.
EXERCISES on the foregoino VERBS and
THEIR COMPOUNDS.
Do not fear to tell her what you' think of it. -. - I
ie lui penser^y*
will speak to her to oblige you, but I know she
jpour,p.
docs not fear me. - - Why do you not believe me I - - -
29^
Th^y (are afraicl) of lieing exposed to some daogers*
' - We would not believe him, though be should tell
the truth. - - Why would you not ? - - - You should not
v6rit6^(» devoir
-speak so imprudently before I know not whom,
devant,p»
who slanders every body. - - - Thtse flowers would
fitur^L
grow much better* if jou watered them oftener. - -^ *
arrostr^y*
Put out the candle^ and do not pretend to sleep*
eteindre^v, 0i)
- <- - Were I in town, I would tell them all that
€n,p. ^
I think (abaut it). • - - Say nothing to her, believe
penser^ en^pro. ne rien
me. - *- I lyiU tell it to you tonaorrow. • - I esteem ,
estimer^y.
year daughter much, because she told me sin*
cerely that she would do neither. - - • They who
say all tliey know, will readily say what they
* volontien^Bidy*
do not know. • - Tell the truth with modesty : they
who do not k>ve it^ will always respect and fear it, * •
If I see your father, shall I tell him you are afraid of
lui
not succeeding? - *- • Do you think me capable of
riussir
forgetting my friends so soon ? No, I da not. - - You
ot*6/icr,v.
always contradict me when I speak* - - - It is pru*
dent and humane not to speak ill of any body;
de
* See the rule, page 128.
398
but it is a meaoness to speak ill of your bene-
Cf,pro. bassesse^f. de fetcn-
factors. - * We often do good to those who
faiteur^niM souvent^TxAv, 6ien,nn.
are not worthy of it, and harm to those who
ma/,m.
do not deserve it. - - - Will you tell me, after
miriteryVm
this, that I am not your friend ? - - I hope she
will not tell them what happened to me y ester-
leur ■
<Jay. 1 was telling it yesterday to several friends of
mine, and every body began crying. - - - I do not
* pleurer.
like Miss D. because she speaks ill of every body*
parceque^c*
• - Her father has transmitted her all bis fortune^ but
lui
fiot his virtues. • - Sylla proscribed above Ibiir
phis defiiv*
thousand Roman citizens. - - Does Mr.< R* write to
Romain dtagen^m.
you (now and then) from Paris ? - - - Do yoa
de temps en iemps^zdy.
know his direction ? - - - Would you not write to him
adresse^f.
if you knew it ? - - - We were writing while
pendant que^c*
they slep^ - - If your brother come here, detain bint,
and tell him that I have something to show him.
a /aire voir
- - - The last time they wrote to him, they desired
prier^y.
him to send them the invoice of the goods, and he
de leur' facture^f. marchandises,
has still omitted it in his letter- - - What are you
encare,adv.
• See the note, page 194.
299
doing now ? - - - - I am making a cap Tor your sis-
ten - - Do not do that, I will do it myself. - - I would
do it with all my heart if I could. - - What would
de
you have done, if you had been in my place ? - - -
sucm a, p.
Why do you not fry that fiah f • - - Tlie 6rst time
/ow,f.
you come. to see me, I will show you some
(by the fut.)
flowers in my garden which will surprise you. - - -
- - - Silk-worms generally hatch at the end of the
, Les vers a soie
spring. - - - These rose-trees grow perceptibly,
printtmps^m. , rosier, m, a vue c(^G6t/,adv.
and those tulips would soon open, if it were a
faisoit^v.
little warmer. - • Though they should deduct ten
c/iatid^adj. Quand^c,
per cent,' they would get still enough.
pour gffgw<*'iV« «ficor«,adv.
- - I never buy (any thing) at Mr. P***'s 5 for, he
acheter^v, rien cbez ccir,c.
always (asks too much for) hi* goods. - • - I will
surfairCyV. . niarchandise^L
undo my gown to-morrow, and do it up again imme-
aur-k"
diately. - - - The first time you mimic any
champ^^dv. (by the fut.)
one, I will punish you severely. - - 1 would introduce
priBenitr^y.
your sister to Mrs. F. if I knew her. - - - She would
consent to that, if you would promise her to come
vouloir lui de
here. - - - They were playing while you instructed
them. - - You truly join what Is useful to what rs
•»raimenf,adv.
800
agreteble. - - - Did not oar soldiers join dexlerify
adresst^.
to valour f •; - - iryoa do not Ulce great care of
prendre^v.
V your flowers, tlie frost will destroy them. • - - Mr.
S. says be will get Hd of his horse (at the) begin^
au commence"
Biog of next month. - - You would put out the fire, »f,
97ien/,in.
&c. - - - Undo that, make it up again before dinner,
and never defer until to-morrow what* jou can do to-
a,p.
day. - - • Your daughter joins to the love of study the
desire of surpassing her companions. - ^* • Always
• compagne^L
virtuous, still handsome, she malces herself
toujours j2idy.
more enemies than friends; but a day^ will come,
when every body will do her tbe justice abe
que^c. rendre^v, lui
deserves. - - She reads the History of England every
nUriter^v*
day from three o'clock till five. -"-I will read
dtpuis heurt jusqu*a^p»
j6ut letter as so<;ia as I am dressed. - - Tbe
(by the fut.) fca6ii/e,p.p«
inhabitaats of W*** have elected Mr. V. W. for
their ropresentative in parliament. - • I was reading
rtprSsentant^m* \au
MarmofitePs Tales when you came in. - - • Mr.
Confe,m. entrer.v.
R. wrote to ike some time ago^ that when he
was in London, the Earl of E*"^* told him
a Comie^m*
we should soon see a great chants in the
changtrmnlftn.
301 ,
wiaiitry. •--£[€ often writes tome, tnd alirajs con<*
minisUre^m*
chides bis letters tbast^(Be so kind ds. to) send me
Avoir la honti de
some Dews, whatever it may be. - * Put these books in
en
their places ag^in. - - - I believe he did it through
par.p.
spite. - - -Shall I pat another trimming to your
dcpiL gamiture^L
gown ? - - I read last year a very good book, but I
cannot remember > the author's name. - • - - What
grammar do you read ? • • . Whatever merit a master
has, he cannot succeed m teaching young people
rtussir d,p«
if he do not join practice to theory. - - • I would put
all your china in that closet if I had
poreelaine^f. cabinet^m,
the key of it. * - You could not do it in too days, if
^ en
I did not help you. - - We could not permit him
atder,V.
to go out, though they would. * - - Why do not you
de quand^c*
abstain from wine, since it hurts you i —
puisque^c^ faire mal^v.
He promised to pay me the ' tenth of this month,
dc
but he has now put me off to the third of Decern-*
ber. • - • He submitted to it with the greatest pa«
at sQumtUre
tience. - - You promise enough, but yon seldom
raremer7/,adv«
keep your word. — Mr* D. is a very promising
/entV,v.
young man. - - It is he who told moi that, be-
Ce,pro. , * CF-
• See Tth it page 86*
302
fore the inveBtton of water and wiDd-mills the &n»
tant
cients used to grind their corn in mor«
avoir coutume^v. de gram,m« dans mor"
tare. - - Will they not admit Mr. Z. in thetr society ? - *
lter,m«
No, they told me that they would not. - - The Eng*
lish fleets have performed actions worthy to be
faire^v* de
transmitted to posterity. - - - Your brother - promises
me every day to amend, but, &c« - • Were I
de se corrigeryV,
their master, I would not permit them to go out io
leur de
day I was writing to you when your servant
brought me your letter.
NAITRE^ TO BE BORN, TO RISE.
Infinitive Mood.
Present, Kattrt^ to be born.
Part. act. Naissant^ being born, rising*
Part. pass. Nt^ ce, been born.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. .A/atf, nais^ nait^ I am bora.
Plur. J{aiss(m8y nalssez^ naissent^
Imperfect.
Sing. J^aissois^ naissoia^ naissoUf I was born*
Plur. Jfa^ssions^ naissiez^ naissoientj
Preterite, .
Sing. J^aqv's, n^quis^ nnquit^ I was boroi
Plur. Haquimes^ naquUes^ naquirenty
3Q3
Future.
Sing. Xaitrai, naitrQs, n«£(ra, I sball^orwiJl beborn.
Plur. J^^attrons^ nailrez^ natirontj
Conditional.
Sing. JSTflf/row, nailrois^ nai/roif, I should ,<t*c.be born.
JPlur. Maitrionfii naitrkz^ rwitroient^
iBirERATivE Mood.
Sing. J^ais, naisse^ be thou born.
Plur. Xaissons^ naiss€Z, naissent^
*
Subjunctive Mood*
Present.
Que ' (pit que
Sing. J^ais^e^ naisses^ name, that 1 may be bprn.
Plur. J^aissions^ naissiez;^ naissent^
Preterite.
Sing. Xaquisse^ naquisses^ no^uf/, that I n)]§ht be boror*
Plur. Xaquissions^naqtiissiez^naquissmty
The compound of this verb is, .
Rmaitre^ to be born again, to revive.
NUIRE, TO HURT,
is conjugated like CONDUJRE^ but makes, in its
participle passive, nut.
OIXDRE, TO ANOINT.
This verb is seldom used, except in speaking of sacred
ceremonies wherein oil is made use of. It is conjugated
304
PAITRE, to jfksd, to grase,
PAROITRE^ TO AFFEAR) TO SBEW,
and its compounds,
Camparcitrt^ to appear, to | Disparottrej to disappear^,
ivake one's evidence, |
are conjugated like CONKOITRE.
PEINDSEy TO FAINT, TO DRAW,
PLAJNDRE^ TO FiTT^
and St Plaindre^ to complain,
^re conjugated like CRAWDRE.
PLAIRE^ TO FXAASBl
Infinititb Mood*
Present. Plairtj to please.
Part. act. Ptaisanl^ pleasing*
Part. pass. Plu^ pleased*
IewicatiVe Mooo*
Present.
Sing. Plais^ plais^ plaii^ I please.
Plur. PlaisonSy plaistZj plaisent,
Imperfect.
S\ng0 Plaisois, plaisoisy plaisoil^ I did please, or wds
Plur* Plaisions^plaisiez^plaisoientj pleasing.
Preterite.
Sing. Plus^ plus^ plut, I pleased, or did please.
Plur. Plumes^ plutesj plurent,
Future,
^'^ng. Plairai^ plairasy plaira^ I shall, or wiH ple^sev
r*^ Plairons^plairezj plaironi^
905
ConditionaU
Sing. Plairoia^ plairms^ plairoii^ I siibuld, would, c$rc«
Piur. Plairions^plairuz^ plairoieni^ pleas€«
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Plais^ plaise^ please tbou«
Plur. Plaisonsy plaisez, plaismtj
Subjunctive Mooi).
Present.
Que que que ,
Sing. P/am, plaises^ plaise, that I may please.
Plur. Plaisions^ plaisiez, plaiseni^
Preterite.
Sing. Plusse^ plusses^ plutj that I might please.
Plur. Plussions^plussiez^ plussttUy
The compounds of this verb are,
Complaire, to humour. ^ Diplaire^ to displeas'e.
PRENDRE, TO TAKE.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Prendre^ to take.
Part. act. Prenani, taking.
Part. pass. Prisj ise, takes.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Prends, prends, prend, I take, or am taking.
Plur. Prenons, premz, prennent,
Imperfect.
Sing. PrenoU, prenais^ prenoUj I did take, or was taking.
FlMT. PrenionSf preniezj prenoient,
Preterite.
Si»g- Pris, pris^ prU^j took, or did take.
Plur. Primes^ priles, prirent^
26*
/w
Futore*
Sing. Ptmird^ prtniras^pnndra^ I shall, or will take;
Plar. Frendrons^ prendrez^ prenirontj
Conditional*
Sing. Prendrois^ prmdrms^tndrcit^l sbouldi would, 4^c.
Plur. PrendrUmijprtndriez^pnndrokni, take.
Sing.
Plor. Prmonsj
Imperatite Mood.
Prendsj prennt^ take thoui
prentz, prennent,
SuBjtrKCTjYE Mood.
Present
Qm fiM que
Sing. Pretifu, prennes^ prttme^ that I may take»
Plur. Prenianty prmitz^ prmmmi^
Preterite.
Sing. PrUst^ prisses^ prit^ that I might take.
Plur. Prissions, prissiez^ prissmi,
The compounds of .this verb are,
Apprendrej to lea^n.
■ de^ nouvellesy
, to hear of.
Comprendre^ to adprehehd,
to understand, to in-
clude.
Desapprindpi, to unlearn*
Entreprendre^ to under-
take.
Miprendre^ to mistake, to
be deceived.
Reprendre^ to take again,
to chide, to rebhke.
Surprendrtj to surprise.
PRODUlREy TO PRODUCE,
MEDUIRE^ TO REDUCE, TO BRING TO,
are conjugated like COJStBUIRE^
RESTREIJ^JDJ^E^ to restrain,
is conjugated like CRAJJ^DRE.
SOT
RIRE^ TO LAUGH. '
iNi^lNlTIVfi MOO0«
Present. Sire, to' laugh#
Part. act. Rianif laughing.
Part. pass. Ri, laughed.
Ikdicatitk Mood.
Present.
Sing* Ris, ^f *^ I iaoghi or am laughing.
Plur* RionSy rxtz^ rient, -
Imperfecta
Sing. Rimsy rioii^ rtoi/, I did laugh, or was laughing.
Plur. Riions^ riitz^ rwUnt^
Preterite.
Sing. Ris, ris, n/, I laughed, or did laugh.
Plur. Rimes, rites^ rirent.
Future.
Sing. Riraij rirasj rira, I shall, or will laugb«
Plur. Rirons, rirez, riroiit, :
Conditional.
Sing. Rir€is, rirois^riroU, I should, could, <Jrc. laugh.
Plur. Ririonsj ririez, riroient,
ItfPSRATiTi: Mooft.
Sing. Risj rte, laugh thoii.
Plur. Mons, riet, rieni.
Subjunctive Moon.
Plvsent.
Que que que
Sing. Rie^ ^ ries, rie^ that 1 maj laugh.
Plur. Rihns) riiez, rtefi/,
Preterite. ""
Sing, Rissif risses, riU that ( might laugh.
Plur. Rissions^ rissiez^ rissent^
The compound of this verb is,
Sourircj to smile.
SEDUIRE, TO SEDUCE,
IS conjugated like COJfDUIRE.
SUFFIRE^ to suFncE, to be sufficient,
is conjugated like CONFIRE : but its participle
passtre is avffi.
SUIVRE, TO FOLLOW.
Infinitive Mood,
Present. Suivre^ to follow.
Part. act. Snivanl^ following.
Part. pass. Suivi^ ie, followed.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Su^^ suis^ suit^ I follow, or am following*
Plur. Suivons^^ stiivez^ suivent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Suivois^ suivois^ suivoit^ I did follow, or was follow-
Plur. Suivionsysuiviez, snivoitnt^ ing.
Preterite.
Sing. Suivis^ suivis^ suivit^ I followed, or did follow*
PI ur. Suivimes^ suivUes^siUvirenii
Future.
Sing. Suhmij mivras, suivroj I shall, or will follow*
Plur. Suivrons^suivrtZySuivrontp
SCO
Conditional*
Sing. Suivrois,' sxtivrois^ ^smvroit^ I should, 4^c. follow*
Plur. SuivrionB, suivriezj suivroient^
Imperative Mood*
Sing* Suis^ suive^ follow thou*
Plur* Suivons^ suivtZj suivent,
Subjunctive Mood*
Present*
Que que que
Sing* Suty§i suives^ suive, that I may follow*
Plur* Suivionif suiviez^ suiventy
Preterite^
Sing* Suiyisse^ suivisses^ amvU^ that I might follow*
Plur* Suivissionsytuivissiez, suivusent^
The compounds of this verb are,
S^Ensmivre^ to follow from* Poursuivreyio pursue*
Se TAIRE^ to hold onx's tongue,
is conjugated like PZ^/A£.
TEIIfDRE, TO DIE,
is conjugated like CRAJNDRE.
TRABUIRE, TO translate,
is conjugiated like CONDUIRE.
TRAIRE, TO MILK*
Infinitive Mood*
Present* ^ Traire^ to milk*
Part* act. Trayant^ milking*
Part* pass* Traits aite^ milked*
310
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Trais^ irais^ trait^ I milk, or am milking*
Plur. TrayojiSj trayezy traitnt^
Imperfect.
!5ing. Trayois^ irayois^ trayoit^ I did milkyor was milking,
Plur. Trayions^ trayiez^ trayoitnlj
Preterite is wanting.
Faturc.
Sing*. Trairaiy trairas^ traira^ I shall, or will milk*
Plur. Trairons^ trairez, trairont^
Conditional.
Sing. Trairoisy iretiroisytrairQUy I ahould, <{^e« milk*
Plur. Trairions^ trairitZi irairoicnt^
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Traisj /rate, milk thouT
Plur. Trayons^ trayez^ traient^
Subjunctive Mood.
Present*
Que qiu que
Sing. Traie^ traies^ traie^ that 1 may milk.
Plur. Trdyions^ irayiez^ traimi,
Preterite is wanting.
The compounds of this verb are,*
Abslrairty to abstract.
Distraire^ to distract.
Exfraire. to extract*
Rentraire^ to fine draw,
Soustraire^ to subtract.
Retraire^ to milk again.
311
VAINCRE^ TO VAN<IUISH, TO CONQUltft.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Vaincrt, to conquer.
Part. acr. Vainquant^ conquering.
Part. pass. Vaincu^ tie, conquered.
Indicative Moop.
Present.
Sing. Vaincs^ vaincs^ vainc^* 1 conquer. ,
Plur. Vainquons, vainqucz^ vainquent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Vainquois^ vainqums^ vamquoit^ I did conquer^
Plur. yainquions^vainquuzy vainquoitnt^
Preterite.
Sing. Vainquis^ vainqiiis^ vainquit^ I conquered.
Plur. Vainquimes^ vainqinles^vainquirtnt^
Future.
Sing. Vaincrai^ vaincrasj vaincra^ I shall, or will con-
Pi ur. Faincron^, vaincrez^ vaincroni^ quen
Conditional.
Sing. Vaincrois^ vaincrois^ vaincroU^ I should, <$^c. con-
Plur. Vatncrions^ taincriez^ vaincroienti quer*
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Vaincs^ vainque^ conquer thou«
Plur. Vainquons^ vainquez^ vainquent^
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Que que que
Sing. Vainque^ vainquf^^ vatnqne^\\\zi I may conquer.
Plur. VainquionSfVainquiez^ vainquent^
* The singnlar of this tense and the imperfect are rery little used.
Preterite.
Sing. Vainquisse, vain^issesy vainquitj that I might
Plur. VainquissionsyVainquiifsieZyvainquissenij conquer*
The compound of this verb is,
Convaincre, to convince.
I
VlVREy TO LIVE.
Infinitive Mood.
Present. Vivrt^ to live.
Part. act. Vivanl^ living.
Part. pass. Fecu, lived.
Indicati'Ve Mood.
Present.
Sing. Vis^ visy vit^ I live, or am living.
Plur. VivonSy vivez^ vivent^
Imperfect.
Sing. Vvoais, vivois^ viooil, I did live, or was UvYn^«
Plur. VvDions, viviez^ vivoUni,
Preterite.
Sing. Vicusy vicus^ vicui, I lived, or did live*.
Plur. V6c&mesyv6culeiyv6curen(,
' Future.
Sing. Ftvrat, 'ovoras^ vvDra^ I shall, or will live.
Plur. Vivronsj vivret, vivront,
Conditional.
Sing. Vivrois, vivroisj vivroit^ I should, would, irc» live*
Plur. Vivrums, vivrUz^vivroient^
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Fis^ vivtj live ihou.
*lur* Fivons^ vivez^ tivenf^
313
SUBJURCTIVB Moo©.
Present.
QUe qtu que
^ing. Fire, vives^ vive^ that I may live.
Plur. Vivions^ vhitZi vivent.
Preterite.
Sing. Ficusse, vecus^es^ vicAl, that I might live.
Piur. Fieusfhris, vittMs$ieZy vtciuseniy '
The compounds of this verb are,
Revivirej to revive* Survivrtj to outlive.
EXERCISES UPON the roRsooiNo VERBS and
THEIR COMPOUNDS.
* Mj brother was born in Paris, on the eighth of Feb-
Fuarj, one thousand seven hundred and eighty-one. • -
The same men who seem not to fear death when
they are in .good health, often dread it when
«f* redouter^y.
they are sick. — What does your sister complain of ?
The swallows generally disappear towards the
hirondelltj^. vwa^p.
end of autumn. • - Vou do not seem to pay anyv
auiomne^* Jaire^y^ «o»
att^[ition to what I say to you. - - This man paints
. very well, I assure you. ^ - - Why woi^ you
assurer^y,
hurt him,.he never did you «ny harm ? - - I abould
lui fairc^y. malym.
pity and succour him if it were n^ his £atuk. « ^ -
' f?e,pr0« ■-/
8T~" . /
314
You shall disappear as .soon as you have »•
(by the fut.)
ecuted oigr orders, and take care not to speak
aytz^w. 5atn,in« dt
to any body, for you know that walls have ears*
car,c. muT
.• - - • The last time I saw your sister she ap-
peared to tne. thoughtful and melancholy She
roxir^ pennft^dy m6lancolique^SiAj* Ce
is a lady that pleases every body. - - - She appears
a »
quite^ young: how old is she? - - - Does she not
learn drawing ? - - Your brother has not included his
desstin,nt, .
tailor's bill in the account which he has
iailleur^tn* mSmoin^m, compte^m.
given roe. - - - I see you do not complain of him
rentlre^v. *
without a cause. - - I really am surprised (at it), but
»o» en,pro.
he always smiles at (every thing) I tell him. - - ^s sur«
de tout ce q&t
prising as this seems to you, yet it is true. - •
cependant^^dv, ee
At last the enemy surprised and defeated them in the
Enfin^dv.
space of twelve days. — Jf they had wished, they
^pace^m*
might have taken the town three days sooner, but the
. soldiers were sq exhausted with fatigue, that tbey
ipuisis^p.pw df,p. - '
could not even hold their guns. - « - May these
m^me,adv. Puitsmt
brave men lon§ enjoy the glory which they have ac-
jauir dt
quired. - - 1 sincerely wish they may. - - - Children sel^'
* Tifut^ adv. before an adjectire beginning with a consonant or a«
ite, agrees with it.
315
dom forget, when they continually
m€ni,adv. . lorsque^c* continueltement^^dy,
exercise their minds to study. * - If my brother do npt
extrcer^'v.
come this week, as he promised me, if you will, we
Will go and see him in the .country. - - - Does ho^t
Mrs. H. appear much concerned at her daugh-
Mnu bien '^igce.p.p. de
ter's death?- - When yoi^ see Mrs. B. I am
(by the fut.)
certain she will please you. - - - Did you never see
5i2r,adj.
'faert - - The children who (shall be born) from this
iiappy marriage, will be the drligTit of their
father aD8 mother. - • She joins to the qualities of the
body those of the mind. - - Take some pears, and carry
them to yaur brother. — Every time 1 sec him, 1 take
him for a foreigner. - - My sister and I learn Frencbj
itranger^vn*
and understand very welLall that (is said) to us in that
ri dit
learn all the rules,
langueS" Quand.c.
ihey would not (be sufficient) without practice. - - 1 did
' s\iffirt,w.
not understand what you said. - - - Do not undertake ta
de
undeceive her; believe me, you will lose your time.
ditrtnnper^v. - '
- - - Virtue procures and preserves- friendship, but
obtenir^w conserver^v.
vice, produces - hatred and quarrels. - - - If you
vice^mm haine^f* qnerelle^L
complain U> the master, 1 will complain to the
316
mktres&k - - Tliough you should undertake to prove
Quand de
the contrarj, she would not believe you. - v Why did
not yoQ take the same road as we ? - * - He (is not
pleased) in his situation, now he sees all the dangers
seplaireyV.
of it. - - He has suffered much, and none of his friends
lias pitied iiim. - - The idea^ of bis misfortune pur-
td^6,f. malheurjm.
sues him every-where. - - When did you hear of him ?
par-^ou<,adv. apprendrt det nouveltes
^ - - Captain D. told my father that he had seen
a
him and spoke to him at Madras. - - - We often
mistake when we judge of others by ap-
se miprendre^v* juger^y.
pearances; and often a- person displeases us by the
verj* quality by which another has pleased us.
fn^me,adj. ,
-'- - The people who often ^eem the roost zealous
g«n?,m. z6Uy^dj.
are not always the most constant. - - - Leave nic
Laiirer^Vm
that book a little longer, do not take it again. - - -
peu
That apple-tree pro^upes no fruit. • -They retook
pqmmiir^va.
pur ship. • - Go and speak to Mr. — ; but above all
*^ 9tir,p«
do not laugh. - - WouljJ yeu not laugh, if you were
in my place? - - • We laughed much yesterdajr at
"<ry, ad?, it used here adlectiyely, and f i|;9i6e« #a^.
317
tbe^ play. - • - She was all agreeable ladjr, she was
ever smiling when any one had the honour
/o?i;our5,adv.
of speaking to her. - - He seduced her by his fine
promises. - • Whatever he may undertake, be never
will succeed, he is (too much) addicted to the
/ro/>,adv. adonn6^p.p»,
pleasures of this world. - - - Young people tell
gens,m.Si{»
what they do, old people what they have done,
vieillard^m.
and fools what they. intend to do.- - -We
5o/,m. se proposer^v* de
learn much more easily the things which
yact7ewienf,adv.
we understand than those which we do not. - - If we
comprendre ^
ga together to my brothcr^'s, shall . you be able
chez^p*
to fallow us? - - I will follow you step by step. - ^
»<» pas a pas^zdv.
Why do you follow me as you do ? - • You may set
,comme
out when (you please), we will follow you. - • Hold
il vous plaira
your tongue, you do not know what you say. - - -
What books do you translate?- • My master says I
shall soon translate MarmontePs Works. - - We should
GEurre,f.
have conquered them if we had fought ; and, believe
comhattrejY.
me, you (might have^) done^ much' bettter^, if you had
auriez
. foUowed the advice which he gave you. - - - They
«7t
518^
have debated, the qMslifn a Icmg time without
(i^eing .able to) reaohre it - • They wete quite trans^
powwir
ported witti joy when they (heard of) the happy
ile,p. npprendrt^y.
iiewa of the peace* - • Every thir^ smiles ia
fiouve//e,f.8ing. dans^p.
nature (at the) return of the spring. - - 7 As long
gu rtiaur^m* prinitmps^w. Tant
as her father and mother live, they never
9tte,adv, (by the fut.)
will convent to her marriage with Mr. R« - - You
will not live long if you drink so niuch* - - She lived
afboul four years after her husband's death. • -
enTtron,p. apres^p.
George HI. the eldest son of Frederick) prince of
aine,adj.
Wales, was born on the fourth of June, 1738, and
GalUs, «^
was proclaimed king of- Great-Britain on the twenty-*
proclanier^Vp
sixth of October, 1760. - - - In whatever country a
maa may live, he is sure to be respected and
de .>
well treated every where, if his behaviour and
manners are regulated by the principLed of a
fneeur^jf.pl. righr^Yi
S0uc4 policy, aiid the laws of the counlry be
5air},adj. poliliqmf^
lives in.
819
OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Verbs which relate to no persoA or thiiigy and which,
has been before observed, are only conjugated in the
rdpenon singular^ 2Lre called ioipersonal verbs : they
generally iare preceded by one of the following pro«^
nouns il or on : of this number are^
// tonne^ It thunders.
II plenty It rains.
On dit^ People say, or^ it is said,(^c.
To which may be added several other verbs, which
become impersonal when employed in the sapde man-
ner: ex.
JL voui convient d^itre mo- It becomes you to be md^-
ileste^ dest. ""
II fait beau^froidy &c. It is fine, cold, &c.
II fail grand vtnt^ The wind blows high.
// 5«mWc, It seems.
// s*tnsuit que^ It follows that.
// vautmieux^ It is better, <^c.
These verbs, like others, whether regular or irregular
have their diflerent tenses, and are conjugated in the
same manner as the personal verbs from which they are
derived. The learner having gone through the other
eoiyugations, the verbs of this class may the more easily
be dispensed with. It will only be necessary to select
one that is not derived, and show the manner of conju-
gating it, only premising, that the compound tendes are
formed, like others, by joining the participle passive to
one of the tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir^ to have.
CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS.
iNFim'TiVE Mood.
Present. Pleuvoir^ to rain.
Part. act. Pleuvant, raining.
Part. pass. Plu^ rained.
330
Indicative Mood.
Affirmatively.
Present, Upkutj it rains, it does rain, it is raining.^
Nfegativelj.
// nepleutpasj it does not rain, &c.
Interrogativelj.
Plent'il ?
Jie pkui'il pas ?
does it rain ?
does it not rain ?
Imperfect. Ilplenvoit^ it rained, it was raining.
Preterite. Jiplut^ il rained, or did rain.
Future. lipUuvra^ it shall, or will rain.
Condilional. Ilpleuvroit^ it would, siiould, tt-c. rain.
Subjunctive Mood,
Present. QuHl phuvcj ih^t it may rain.
Imp^fect. Qu^tlplutj that it raigtit rain.
The following being of the first conjugation, J shall
only give the third person, present tense,' of the iiidica^
tive mood : the learner may easily find out the rest.
// arrive^ It happens; from arriver^ to happeo-
// bruinty it drizzles ; bruiner^ to drizzle.
// iciairtj it lightens ; ^c(atrer, to lighten. ^
// gele^ it freezes ; geltr^ to freeze*
// grile^ it hails ; griUr^ to hail.
// netge, it snows ; miger^ to snow.
// tonne^ it thunders ; tonnw^ to tliunder.
// importt^i matters, importer^ to concern »
il concerns.
3SI.
EXERCISES UPON THESE VERBS.
Docs it rain? - - It rained just now, but
touid-rheure^^dv.
it does nol rain at present. - - * • Was it not raining
moin/eiia?t/,adv.
when yoa came? - - 1 advise you not to go out
conseilUr^v^ de
this morning, I think it wHl soon rain. • - I am
bientol^zdv.
sure It would rain if the «wind *was 'nol^ so* high^ - -
sHl »o» - fairt^s* grands
Do you know what happened to my cousin
whilst he was in tpwa? - - I foresaw what
pendant que^c. tn privoir
would happen. - • The roads were very slippery
chtmin^m^ glissant^zAy
yesterday, because it, drizzled the whole day. - - - Did
you observe how it lightened last
r&narqutr^v. ^ co?nm6,adv.
night? - - If it did not freeze 1 would go to siee them
•o^w)if,v.
to-day - - - ft hailed this afternoon^ and it will
aprh'mid%\ai»
certainly snow to-night. - • It thundered much
ccite nuiL 6eaucoti/),adv.
yesterday, and 1 think it wilt still thunder to-
croire^w encore,adv.
day. - - - It matters little whether you do your ex-
que (subj.)
crcise now or later^ provided it be well
pounm que^c.
done - - - It greatly concerns children to
beancaup^^dv. aux de
avoid idleness, because it is the parent of all vice
£viUr^v. mere.f.
and destroyer of all virtues,
dtstruclrktf.
' 522
The verb Avoir^ to have, conjugated intiper&onally
With y, adverb of place,
Infinitive Mood. *
Y avoir. . .
Indicative Mood. /
Affirmatively.
Present. ^11 y a, there is, there are.
Negatively.
Jl i\^y nfa»^ there is not, there are not.
Interrogatively.
Y a-t-il ? is there? are there ?
^AT'y a-iAlpas f is there not? are there not?
Imperfect. // y avoit^ , there was, there were.
Preterite. // y «u/, there was, there were.
Future. II y aura, there ^all, or will be.
Conditional. // y auroUj there snould, would, 4rc. be.
Imperative Mood.
QuUl y at/, let there be.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Imperfect.
QuHl y ait^
QuHl y fuly
thai there may be.
that there might be.
Compound Tenses*
II y a cw, there has, or have been.
// y avoit eu, therie had been.
// y eut 6M, ^ there had been.
// y aura eii, there shall, or will have been.
II y auroit eu, there should, ^c, have been.
QuHl y ait eu, that there may have been.
QuHl y ${it eu, that there might have been.
M3
EXERCISE UPON THIS VERB.
There- are three ladies who -(are waiting for) you
- attendrt^v.
In your brother's study. - - - Is there any fire in the
cabinei.vn, ^
parlour ? - • No, Sir, there is none. - - There were two
tneu below who asked to speak to jou. - - Was
. £n 6a6,ad«(. a
there not formerly , a (coffee-house) at the
autrefois^dv^ cff/c,m.
corner of this, street? - -^ - There werq great re-
cain^m* riu^L ^ re-
joicings in France when peace was proclaimei}. - -
jouissance^f. proclam£e^p,p»
I was telling you that there will be a grand concert
rftr«,v.
and afterwards a ball and supper in the course
ensuite^adv. * C(mran/,m«
of this month. - - There would be no harm If you
• ) fnal^fn»
would learn'*' your lesson better. -» - IVly brother says
nttetijp,adv.
that there has been a bloody : engagementbetireen
sanglant^^d). comba/,m.
an English frigate and a French one, . and there
frigate^f. frigate
have been many men killed on both sides. - - - There
de part et d^autrt.
would have been a great riot yesterday in the
imeutiyf.
Strand, if the magistrates had not sent many constables,
connitables^m.
who dispersed the mob.
populaCey(.
•
* The conjunction 5t, i/, is used only before the present or imper-
fect of the indicative mood and iheir compounds ; and sometimes
elegantly- before the com|>ound of the imperfect of the subj. mood.
a24
There w, immediateJy followed by the negation^ no
and a participle active, must be rendered by on ne petit
pas^ onne' sauroit^ "with the participle in tbe ififioitive
mood ; the other tenses^ as there was^ there will be, there
would 6e, used as above, and made by the aame tenses
•f the verb pouvoir only r ex.
, On ne peut pas, or, on ne There is no going out to-
saaroit sortir aujour- day because of the <raiii ;
JPhui a cause de la pluie, that is, one cannot, &c.
On fupouvoit Pappaiser, There was no pacifying
htm*
On ne poorra pas jouer ite* There toUI he no acting
main, mon pert est tres to-morrow, my father is
malade, . very ilK
EXERCISE ON THIS RULE.
There is (sacb a deal) of snow that there is no going
tant, adv.
out of the house. - You speak so low and so quick
6(i9,adv. . vf/€,adv.
that there is no hearing nor understanding what
entendre,v» comprendre,\.
you say* - - My brother runs so fa^ that tb^fe is
vt/ifadv.
BO following him. *- There was no walking yesterday
Ater,adv.
in the streets of London on account of the ^rt« - - His
a cat{5€,p. houe^L
argumeots were so convincing that there was. no re-
re-
plying to him. • -• There wilt be no skating in the
pliquer,v* patiner,y.
park to-morrow because it thaws. - - There will be
digeler,v.
Jko going to the play next month, be-
com6die,{. prociiitn,adj. p0rc€
cause the play-house will be shut. - - - There wcraiid
9ue,c. ^6dtre,itt0
825
4
be jio^lifiBg ^itb you, if yoa were always io the same
6tiez^\\ dt
honoar* " - If a horse knew his strength^ there
U cannoilre^y* force^f.
would be no mastering' him*
dompUr^v.
This Verb t7 y a, when used to dehote a quantity of
time, is sometimes i*endered in English by it w, it was*
&c. when the English preposition since is rendered
(in French) by q^e : but in all cases where the English
phrase can be rendered negatively, qus must be accom-
panied by the negation ne : ex»
II ya irois semaines qiie tt is three Weeks sinU
votreptrs est arrive^ your father arrived*
II y a long'tems que je ne It is a long while since I
vous ai 911, saw jou, or, I have not
seen you this long
while*
EXERCISE UPON THtS RVtfL
tiowl^ong is it since we (saw one another ?) It is a
Combteit,adv« «e voir^v.refl.
year since I met your brother in Italy, and
reneimirer^rh en
it is six months since I heard of him; - • -
entendre parUr^Vk
How long is it since you wrote to your mother ? - « .•
it is but . two months. « * It was a week sinte I had
ne que semaine^f.
seen your brother^ when I met him by chance in
par hasard^^dv.
a. (coffee-room.) • • How lohg was it since your friend
ca/2,m* , / >.
bad left France when he wi»ote to you ? i - It was
/atmr,ir;
three months. ^ - It may be two years sinbe Mr. Ilobeft
28 '
set out for the Indies. - - How k^g is it sinde yon
partir^y. Indtz*
were in England? • - It is (such a) long while mcae \
ti
learned German, thatlafamt forgot k.
Alltmand^m*
It often happens that the verb thtrt w, or it isy &c*
is understood : in this case, one of the words, Ogo^ thtse^
or for thescj is expressed as ^ substitute : ex.
II y a trots mois 91/e /o- I was in France threi;
toi$ en Franc€^ ot^fiiw moBths agp.
en France il y a troif
raois^*
ll y a quatre am qiu man My brother has been dead
frtrt eat mort, these four years.
. £2^ERCIS£ UPON THIS 'RULE.
He is the same man whom we saw a quarter of an
C^est , quart *^
ikout ago. - - When did you see my father ? • - I saw
him (a fortnight) ago. - • We have not heardt from my
quinze jours
brother these two years. • - You do not seem . to
paroitre^y.
be so lively as you were three years ago. • - I would
en;oti^,adj.
have written to you a month ago, if I had known
savoir^y*
your direction. - - - •! have not seen your sister these
adresseyf.
* From this iastance it. may be observed, tkftt, if the verb ilya^
&c. begin the sentence, the word que must immediatelj follow the
noun of number; but, if it be transpojeed;, que must be omitte4t The
first construction is to be preferred. The iearner must at the same
time observe, that in the above sentence, the verb, wbich^ in Eng-
lish, is in iheton^pound of the pre^etU,, l^.rend^red in French bjr t*ie
jpretent of the indicative, and when in the compound of lhtis(^erfcef
by the imperfect of the same mood.
-(i See page 193, • ' ^- ^ " .
S«7
jioijiir iQo&tbs. - - My fatber has been ill these
six weeks* - - He has .been in London these five years,
a
mid (itisfi^id) he therle enjoys a considerabb fortune.
Von cfi/,v.
.- -.- We have neither seen you nor your sisters these
tbrfee dSys..
It also happens, that neither the verbs, nor any of
the words, ago, these^ or for ihess, are expressed in the^
sentence : ex. -
liy a neuf am que ma tmie
dtmeure dans ee . voisi'
:. ,nage^
11 n'*y a pas plus d^une hture
016 nous ptchi^ns tci,
// y Qvoit deux ans que ma
scB^r ilM tn France
quandfy allai^
,J>t^u avoit-il pas svs mqis
qu'^elle demeuroit avec
nous quand elk tneurut ?
11 y aura six ans a J^oel
que voire frere est chez
Mohs* O.
JTy aura-'t'il pits un an au
mois d'Aout prochain que
voire scBur est a Paris ?
My aunt has lived nine
yc:ars in this neighbour*
hood.
We have not been above
an hour, fisbing^bere* *
My sister had been two
y^ars. in France when I
went there.
Had she not lived six
.months with us when
she died ?
Your brother will have
been a| Mr. O's. six
years at Christmas.
Will not your sister bare
been a year at Paris
next August ?
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
S6me people* have no pity on their poor
gen5,p]. de
fellow-crealures. • - Some people* fancy
semhlablfj persontie^f. 5*mifigtnef,V.
** Tbes^ sentences are the same ^B thtre arc seme people wAo, ke,
II y a d$s ^tn* qvi^ &<?,
MS
that tbejT can learn a lai^uage witboBt
pouvoir^y*
studying. • - - My brother has been four years at
6ludier^v*
Mr. W's. academy,* and my father told biai that be
should stay there two ye^rs more. • • 1 had been three
rester^v.
years in England when that happened. - - I had net
ar river ^y.
been three months in France, when my brother returned
from America to London. - - Mr. N. bad only
ne que
learned French seven months when he wrote me
a letter in that language. - - - Had not Mr. David
languejm
been four years and a half in Spain when bis sister
was married ? - - My father and mother had not been
(gone out) above a quarter^ of an hour when
*orfir,v. plus cfe,adv. «<>»
he arrived. - - - We had been playing at cards
aux carie^U
for two hours jffhen you came^in. - - Thomas will have
cn/rer,y.
been at the college two years the . tenth of next
co//ege,m«
month.
The verb iire^ to be, becomes in^^ersonal when fol-
lowed by a substantive, or one of the pronouns p^rspnal^
possessive, or demonstrativej and is always conjugated
with the pronoun demonstrative ce, whether speaking
of persons or things : ex.
* AH the sentences in this exereise, should begin with the imper-
sonal verb riy a, II y am/, &c.
^39
€PM H \oi fui Pordonnej It is the km that pfe*
scribes it.
Oest moi qui Pat fait. It is / who have done it.
Chst mbn bienfaiteur, It is my benefacton
€*est eux, or, ce sont eux, It is they who have related
qui mt Pont fapporti, it to doe.
From the la^t instance, it appears that it is, &c. fol-
lowed by a pronoun of the third person plural, may be
rendered in French' two wa^s ; but, when is it, &c. is
used in asking a questibn, it is generally put in the sin-
gular, thougli ^the pronoun be in the plural number :
fex.'
^st'Ce eux qui Pont fait, Is it they who have done it ?
EX£RC1SB UPON THIS RULE.
It is prosperity which cominonly^ makes*
prosp6ril6,U rendre,y*
men haughty and proud, '' but it is adversity
^er,adj. orgtiei7/etix,acr). .
that makes them wise. - - - It^ras the custoni
rtndre^v^ coutume^t.
among the Spartans to inure Ih^il*
ekejs^p. Spartiate^h ds endurctVfV.
children early to the fatigues 6f war.
de bonne Aetif e,adv. travail,tn\ gutrrejl.
- «. It is not I who occasioned the qaarref) it is
.<Jauwr,v. quttelltf.
you #b6 began first. - - - It was envy
avez comfneneie le ^ envte^f.
which caused the first murder. - - Is it not you who
caustr^v. meurtre^m*
wrote lo Misa A. ? No, it is Misiii Rose's sfeSer.
tnez 6cr%t,v. * .
- • If you do not sucdeed,. ii will not be.nj £ldt«
.f(ussir,y. faute,t,
" ^ If you happened to lofte the friendsliip of your
'Btnir aperdre^r.
88*
say
parents, it would be the greatest inisfortane which
malhtur^nu
erer* might^ happen to yoa. • - It is my friend
jamaisj^idr. pbuvoivyY. arriver^v.
who told me that it was your father whom we saw
yesterday. - - Speak to my brothers, for it is they
car,c.
who told it me. - - - Why do you not accuse
Pourquoi^Vkdv.
my sisters ? - - It is they who have done all the
mischief. - - • You blame my aunts, but is it they
ma/,m. hldmer^f. tantef.
who have offended you ?
' offenstr^y.
He^ she^ thty^ immediately followed by »&o, whom^
or thai^ and such as^ whether separated in English or
not, but implying people in general, are often made
into French by the impersonal chsi^ with an infinitive
followed by qut de before a second infinitive, and if
the sentence be negative, c^esi nepas must be used:
observe well these examples,
Oesl etre fou que de He is a fool who loses his
perdre le terns a ces time in those trifles. .
bagaUlUsy
C'est ne pas gouter les Such as love nobody, do
plaisirs de Pami(i6 que not enjot/ tbo pleasures
de n^aimer personnej of friendship.
C'est trop presumer ih soi They are too cmuitisd who
mime que d'agir ainsi^ act so*
EXfiRClSE UPON THIS BULE.
He is a blind man who does not
«oi aveugle^^dj* t<^
perceive all the dangers which surround ns
ehvironner^v*
in thi/^deceitful . world. - - - Such as are satis-
<romp€ur,adj. con-
S3l
lied ' witb their lot arc happy. - - -.He
tmi^ziy de 5on,pro« sori^m*
does not know . .the court who relies
connoUre^y. cour^L sefier^T.
(on the) promises ,whicb (are m&de) there* - - They
aux • onfaityV^
are strangers to the charms of society: who shun
sociit6^L fuir^fi
company. - They are idle who do not know the
paresseux^^dj. connoitre
value of time. - • They obey the commands of God
temps^m. aux
who love their neighbottfe, and do not reproach
son prochain^siugm
them v(4th their small defects. - - He is notaCaris-
lui '<?^ ses
tian who seeks t<» hurt his neighbour and speaks
a ' 'Domit,m.
ill of him on all occasions. - - - They do not under-
dans f.
itand tLeir own interest who neglect study.
)?ropre,adj.
The verb titi^ to be, becomes also impersonal every
time it is followed by a noun adjective used in a vague
indeterminate sense, and relates to no particular object ;
in which case the verb is generally; preceded by the pro-
noun tT; and when used to denote the state of the wea-
ther, it is rendered bj the third person singular of the
verbyatre, to make or do : ex.
// es/ extraordinaire^ &c. It is extraordinary, ((-c.
//fait beau terns ^ It is fine weather.
Nt faisoit-t7/>a^ chaud ? Was it not hot ?
SXERCIS£ UPON THIS RULE.
It is surprising .' to see you so hiz|r and in-
itonnant^zAy dfs
SUeniive after havin| been pafiisbed - sevieci^
ly for these faults. - - It is always dangeroiiyi
fnenfiddv*
to (keep company with) peof^e ijitbout any prin-
d€ frSquenler^Y* . personne aucun priri'
ciple of religioo* - - Does it nin ? No, .SiTi .
CfM^Dii. Mansieur^m.
it is fine iTeatber. - ^ Was it not vefy cold ? - - It will
froid^m.
neither be coM ctor bot^ r - It hs(d (beeo a) h%h
nt,c. nt,c* faire^y* granfll,adj.
wind, and 1 think it will soon ffeese. - - It^is not so
penacryV.
ccdd as it was (at the) begianitsg ofrthis euNitb.. - -
au commencement^m*
Do you think (that) it is hotter ih Italy than here ?
presjixAj.
The learner must observe, that the following verb is
ahsohiUly imptnonal throughout all its tenses, and that
nothing is more disagreeable than to hear young people
say, Jefaut^ vousfaut^ onfaut^&LC. to prevent wbicb^ as
much as possible, some examples are here set down.
InrmfTtVE Moei^.
Present. Falloif-, t6 be needful, reqalisite, titct^B^tj.
Part, pa^^ Falh, been needful^ (i^e.
Affirmatively. > Sing.
Present.., Tlfaut quejefassej 1 must do.
Ilfaul que tujasses^ thoii must do.
llfaut quHlfasse^ be must do.
II fuut quelle fasscj she must do.
Plural.
ilfaul que nous fassions., we must do.
llfaut que.Twug fassiez^ . you must do.
UfauiquHlsj or elUs faaunty they must d<>.
333
// nefaul pa» quejefasse^ I mast not do.
M nefautpaa que vwjls fassitz^ you must not do, ^c«
Interrogatively.
FauUil que je fosse ? must I do ?
Faui-il que nxmsfassiez ? must you do ?
J^efauUih pas quejefasse ? must I not do ?
}te fcmi'il pas que vcfusfassiez f must you not do ?
Imperfecta Ilfalloit quHl icrivii,
Preterite. II fallui quHl pariti,
Future. Rfaudra quHl vienne,
it was necessary, &c.
for bim to write,
he was obliged to set
out.
be must come,beshaH
be obliged to oome.
Condit* Ilfauiffni quefuUasiej I should go, or it
would be necessary
for me to go»
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. QuHlfailk^ »lhat it may be necessary, ^e^
Imperfect. QuHlfallut^ that it might be necessary. ^ -^
As to the compound tenses of this verb, they are
foroied by adding its participle passive to the third pet-
son singular of any of the simple tenses of the verb avoir,
to have : ex. // afallu^ il avoiifallu^ &c.
From the foregoing instances, it is easy to see, that,
when the verb falloir is ' used in the present or future
tense of the indicative mood, the following verb must
be rendered by the present of the subjunctive ; but
when it is used in the imperfect, preterite, or conditional
present of the indicative, the verb following must be
rendered by the •preterite of the subjunctive : ex.
II fauti or il faudra que
je fasse.
I must Jo, I shall be obliged
to Jo, or, it will be neces-
sary for me to do.
9H
tl falloit, or, il fallut ^t^ I vms obliged, ofy it was
jk parlasse, necessary for me, to
y>eak.
Il/audrtni queje vendisse, Ishbuld be obliged, or^ it
wotild be necessarjr/or
wi«, ta selL
iXEkciSE UPON T^iS^KCLE. * '
If you go to Coxheath to-daj you must
aujourd^hui^^dy*
(cottie back) to-morrow.*.- - * - Yon may ^ go 1q
revnir^y. pouvoir^v.
London tbis morniog, belt remember that y,ott mtt«t
sQuvtntz-vims
be (bat:k) at (bree o'clock. - - - -You must get
^ retour se
up to-morrow moroiog at four o'clock. - - • «
Custom must not always prevail over reason. - ^ - •
5ur,p.
Shall I be obliged to. carry them there? -- -
falloWyY, mener^y.
Must I not sb6w you my work? - . - - You
ftitintrer^v. iont'»*age,m.
must bave been well (acquainted with) the places
connollrB^y^ efidroit^m.
\o expose youri^elf in that manner. - - ir h<g
pouTyC. c{e,p.
wished to pay his debts, he Would be obliged
vouloii,v* «o^ dette^f*
to sell all his property. - - If your brothers had not
6ten,m.
ceased to quarrel, it would have been ne-
cesser^y* de quereller^y.
ceseary* for them to part. - - - - You must . not
86 8ip(]krtr^ym
• After the wpi-ds 6e«er, ntctsiary^ ntcdful^ expedient^ goad^ «»n-
fotaible^ 8cc, joined to the V«i4> to tt^ cooynsgkted itap^tsoUuIlj^ tH<s
prepo8itioii/ar is to be rendered by guc, with the following irerb in
the sabjunctife mood, either present or preterite, accordinr to tl^e
tenie of the preceding mk.
as5
Have ' 'fmp ooiititfy so soob, M your frl^ndi op«
pose it*
The same observation is tobeiiiadcop ih^^verj^wilpi^
mieux^ to be better, ased impersonally ; and tbe adie^.
fiVes houfd^ffieihi impossibk^ nict»8mr€^ u propos^ &c. join-
ed to the verb itre, ased in the third person siogujaf
only: ex.
II n^est pas bon qaci v<m$ It is not good for yotf. t^
' soyez seul^ be aIone«
// vaut mieuz que vcus ayez It is hetter for ym tq bpive
• eompogm^, company.
.^. IJ?t|BRClSI^. UtON THIS nJJhJfy
It is difficult to y6u to improve if you
faire d$s progifi^s^ *
do not apply better to study. - - It fvas impo9.^it4^
s^appliquer^v. 6tude/.
for you to have succeeded unless you had taken
a moins gue^c^ne* (by tjie sub.)
mofe convenient measures. - • It would be expedient
conrena6^,adj. ^ aj^ropos
for you to read this book from the beginning
* * depuis^Yi.
to ' the end - - Believe me, it is better
jti«9u'd,p. finf* vaUnr mieuic^v.
for you to go there to-morrow, for it will snow
c(ir,c.
soon. - - i. - Will it hot be better for me to be at
ftten/d/,adv.
school too soon than too late? - - - Would it not
i4^3dv• tord,adv. ^
be better for him to go and speak to ihem himself,
than to sehd his servant? - • - Ft is good for us
dt domestique^m^Si f.
to hWp ' one anotber in our troubles.
s^aider^v. « ^ peinej.
The aliote verb fdllmr^ being 11164 befem ,ihe voiii
to havt^ followed immediately by a noun suHstantiire^
may be rendered without expressing the auxiliary verb;
instead of which, insert one of the following conrjuBctifO
pronoqns, me, /e, /ui, f%ousy vous^ or /eur, according to.|Jie .
number and person : ex. . , '
II mefaut des livru^ I must Aafe, or, I want
J books* ;,,
// lui faut un chapeau. He must have^ or, be
wants ahat.
11 hxifaut un bonnet^ She must have, or, she
wants a cap*
. N. B. If the Verb to have be expressed in Preaeb* it
Diust be rendered by the subjunctive mood :
tl faut que faie des livres, 1 roust'' fi^te, or, I want
books* '■ . ; '
This'^inethodt however, is not so elegant as the
formed*
feitXRCiSE UPOif TffiS KDLKi .
i sbatl want paper, pens, and ink* - • Wha^^o
falloir^Vk
you want ? .* - I trant nothing (for the) present, bat I
a
think I shall soon want a French grainmar. - • ^
pemer^y.
My brother has an old hat, and be will tfoon
vieux^zij*
.Want a new one. - ^ If you lik^ . to
neu/,adj. en,pro* aimez^v* a
speak much, you must have (a good deal) of
6i«i,adv. ^
circumspection not to (speak III) pCpthe|v& ^ . •>
retenue^f. pour ne pqs midirei^y.
Since I cannot find my book,' t tnuit bare
Puisquiyt*
another^ * * If we wisli io duccee4 ib our voiler-
i?otifoir,V.
3S7
taking, we must have, (a great deal) of patience. - - -
6eaixcoti/>,ajdv.
My brothers have lost their buckles, they must have
boucU^f.
others.
Before the conclusion of this section, it will hh pro-
per to say something about the pronoun indefinite on,
v^hich commooljr precedes a verb used impersonally
(viz. in the third person singular) in French, and in
English is generally made by a passive voice : ex.
On m^a permis de chanter, I have been allowed to
sing.
People have allowed me,
&c.
On lui n defendu de sortir. He has been forbidden to
go out.
One has forbidden him,&c.
In this case^ the verb which, in English, is in the
passive voice, must, in French, be turned into the ac-
tive, when the English nominative becomes the regi-
men of the verb in French, the sentence beginning
with on^ and translated as if the English were, one has
allowed me to sing, one has forbidden him to go out.
In French^ passive verbs are seldom used.
""* It is the same with,
On dii, It is said, or people say.
On mt dit^ 1 am told.
On dit a voire frire^ YouV brother is told.
On disoit, ) It was said, or people said,
On rftf, ^ . or were saying.
On dira, It will be said, or people
will say.
On dira a nos enfans, ' Our children will be told,
or one will tell,&c.
On a dit, It has been said, or people
have said.
On nous a dit, , Wc have been told^ or one
has told us.
29
338
^ EXERCISE UPOH THIS RULE.^
In time of ivar, peace is always spoken of. *> -
£n,p«
Where is your brother? it is not known. - - - -
The death of the invincible admirarLord Nelson
IS daily lamented, and will be
tou9 les jours^^dv. regrtUtr^v^
so a long tiaie. - * • - I was told yesterday that
your brother has l^een punished for his idleness;
had your father been told of it, he would have been
very angry with him. - - People will be eager
con^re^p. s^empresser^Y*
in buying your book, and it will be read with avidity.
dc,p.
• - Learned men- are found in villages, as well as in
towns. - - - It is reported on all sides that we shall
de eo/^,m.
soon have peace, but the news has not yet been
received, though it be ardently (wished for),
/ ardemment^zdv* aouhaiier^Ym
however, it is thought that the secret expedition
will sail in a few days« - - It will be be-
mettre a la voile «^ peu de
lieved that you blame me. - • it would not be supposed
that you praise us. • - 1 have been assured that he has
threatened him*
* It is very import a&t cJwayi to bear in mind the preceding rule*
and examples.
339
- RECAPITULATORY jpCERCISE on the
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
{RevieiD them carefully before you write,)
There is no going out to-day, it rains apace.
a T?«r^f,adv.
Do not make so much noise, there is no hearing
s'^entendr'e^w
one another. - - Is it cold this morning? Yes, Sir, it
is very cold ; however, I am told it is not so cold as
cependant
it was yesterday. - - "JThe weather is very inconstant
in this country, it was very hot yesterday, it is
pays^m*
excessively cold to-day: it did freeze ttiis morning,
/res.adv.
it hailed at noon, , it' rained in the afternoon, and
midi^ ««« apres-midiy
now it drizzles. - - It sometimes lightens when it
quelquefois^adw. ^
does not thunder, but (as often as) it thon-
^outts lesfois que^c*
ders, it lightens. • - - If it be fine weather next week,
«
I shall go to London, but if it be bad weather I
shall stay at home. - - - It is a pleasure to see
re»/er,v. au logis. • de
bees (coming out) of their hives when it is
abeilkyL sortir^v, rucheyU faire^y.
a sunny day. - - - Had I known you were returned
6n7/an^,adj. revtnir^Vp
from the continent, I would have gone to see yon
itre co^
long ago. - - - My father and mother were told you
were in England ten years ago, but you neither saw
|)or wrote to them* - - Everybody agrees there
convenir^Y^
340
are fine women in Grest-Britain, but there is not
dans BretagneyL
such good winq as in France* - - r^-It greatly
8i en heaucoupjSidv*-
concerns children to avoid bad company.- --
aux dt 6vUer^y»
If there were any real virtue in the world, should
we (meet with) so many false friends ? • • - If he
trouver^y*
behaved well, there would not be a man
se comporter^v, * *o»
^ (in the world) that 1 should esteem more. - - - No
au monde^ e5/tmer,v.subj*
object is more pleasing to the eye than the sight of
plainly. vue^L
. a man whom you have obliged, nor* (is) any music
est-il
so agreeable to the ear as the voice of a man
ortilhfm
who owns you for his benefactor. - - - Such
recimnoitrt^y.
as support the conduct of idle and obstinate
. encourageryy,
scholars, make themselves contemptible. - - They are not
mSprisable^adj.
acquainted with the human heart, who rely upon
/aire fondly*
the vain promises of men. • - You have already been
dija^ady.
told that (nobody in (he world) has prepossessed me
against you, how many times must I repeat
con/re,p. com6ien,adv. falloir^y.
it to you? - - I was told yesterday that you were very
ill, and I am truly glad to see you so well. - - - -
de bien portanU
* R est and csM? are often nied elegantly in Freneh, htily «<»
and y a-t-il ?
• S41
> * . *
There is/ no persuading you when you have a . mind
^ *<>» envie
not io believe what you are told. - - • More virtue is
requisite to • support good fortune than bad. • - -
poHVjp*
Much art and nicety are requisite to
dilicatt^t pwir^'p. .
please every body. — It noiatters little .whether it b«
a s que ce
my servant or yours who carries the letter to the
porter.Y.
post. - - • You roust honour your father and mother if
pOStt^fm
you will live long and happy. •-^ - It is more glp-
DOw/oir,v.
rious. to conquer one's passions than to conquer
de vaincre^Vi aes . cotiquirir^v.
the whole ' world. - - Sir, I, want a pair of boots,
€n<ier,adj.
you have some in your shop that will suit
boutiqfte^f. convjtnir^y*
me. - - - It is reported that the Russians* have beaten
Russe^m.
the Turk^ ; it is said so, but it is not yet known as a
Turc^m.
» certain fact. - - It is thought Sweden has declared war
fait^tn, SuedeJ.
against France. - - - It is true; but it is much
d ^ vrat,adj.
feared lest the Swedes should be
craindre^y. que^c. S^itdois ne, (by the pres.subj.)
beatef), though they fight most courageously.
se batlrt^w. iris ^
- - • - Have the letters been received which were
/
expected vyesterday ? No, buf the mail is ar-
altendre^y. / mallt^t.
rived, and they will be delivered this morning.
dt>ln'6ieer,v.
•" 29*
343
SECT. V.
OF PARTICIPLES.
Participles are either active or passive. The par-
ticiple active^ in French, always ends in ant: ex. par-
lant ; punissanl, and in English in ing: ex. speakings
punishing^ &c. It is always, in its own nature, inde-
clinable: ex.
Jc vois des hornmes e< des I see men and women
femnus venaAt d nous^ ■ coming to us.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
The persons whom you saw with us are people
gens.pL
fearing God and loving virtue She met your
father and sister (as she was) coming here. - - - My
en ict,adv.
mother was told (the day before yesterday) that
avant'hieTydidw
your sister, remembering the injuries she had
se ressouvenir^y. des
received from your brother, refused to
rtgues^p.p. de la part de, d€
see him, and we are all glad to hear it. - -
de apprendre^w.
Your aunt, having given the necessary orders to your
cousins, (set out) immediately for London. - • - Did
partiryY.
you not see them coming to us ? - • How many oxen,
^ bavf^nim
sheep, and horses I hear afar off lowing,
6re6t>,f.pl. entendre^y. de^ /otn,adv. mi/gtr^v.
bleating, and neighing ! * - Do you not admire these
hlUr^y. henniryY*
343
Iambs, Bkipping in joor father-tn-law's meadow?
agneauytn. bwidir^v^ prairitjl.
N. p. In order to distinguish between active partici-
ples, and many adjectives which are spelt alike, bat
which must agree with the nominative, consider whether
there is an action expressed, or whether the word im-
plies merely an attribute of the noun, thus, in these two
sentences,
Jt vois desagneauxy bondis- I see lambs skipping in the
sant dans la plaint^ plain*
J^aime a voir Us agneawe I like to see skipping lambs,
bondissans, errer dans la wandering in the plain.
plaine,
The first conveys this idea, that the lambs are nam
skipping, whilst the second implies that an attribute of
lambs is to skip.
When the participle active in English is preceded by
anotber verb, an article, or a preposition, it roust be ren-
dered in French by the verb in the infinitive mood, and
it is sometimes used as a substantive : ex.
Faut'it que je parte sans Must I set out without
lui parler ? speaking to him ?
La pauvrete du corps est The impoverishing of the
la richesse de Pdmep body is the enriching of
the soul. -
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
I assure you there is a great deal of pleasure in
«,p.
teaching diligent scholars. --• We are told there
enseigneryV* *
will not be so much danger in travelling, as there
a voyager^v. que
was before. - -Lewis the Great had especially thesu-
5ur/ou/,adv.
perior and rare talent of knowing and choosing men
of merit. • - - He left the bouse without seeing bis
344
father, and even without speaking to his mother.
f»^y?te,adv.
- - 1 should despise a man who is capable of
t^ fnepriser^v.
deceiving his friends. - - After haying (waited for) her
tromper^v* attendre^v.
a long while, 'she (sent me word) that she was not
•oo ' envoy tr dire^v* ■>
ready to (go out.) - - She spends all her time in
prit.^dj.d i- passerby. A
reading or writing. - -Mj mother takes an infinite
pleasure in admiring the situation of your house. - The
d situalion^.
grace of God will always keep us from sinnine.
empicher^v. pichtr^Ym
- - 1 often admire the rising and setting of the sun.— -
/evef,m. couchtr^m. ioleil^m.
The defending of k bad cause is worse than
. deftfise^f. mauvat>,adj.
the cause itself.
mime*
The participle passive is sometimes declinable, and
sometimes indeclinable.
It is declinable, , . »
First, when it is joined to the verb itre^ to be, forming^
a, passive verb, and agrees with the nominative case of
the verb in gender and number ; and when it is not at-
tended with any auxiliary verb; in this case it becomes
an adjectiye or at least perfoMiis the same office.
Monfrert est aime. My brother is loved*
Ma saur est aimee, My sister is loved.
Mes cousins sont partis, My cousins are gone.
Mfs cousinessont parties. My cousins ftre gone.
EUp paroit affligee, She appears afflicted.
Elles paroisseiit affligees, They appear afflicted.
345
N. B. There is no exception to the above Itile ; but
it is very important to remember that in the compound
tenses of the reflected yerbs, the verb i/re is employed
for the verb avoir ; ail such cases will come under the
next rule, as if the verb itre were the verb avoir.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
I have been told your brother-in-law is gone to
beau'frere^m.
the Continent. - - - I have not seen your mother
Tic,p.p.
since she arrived from France; does she appear
dipuis quCyC.
satisfied with her journey ? - - - My brothess are gone to
de voyage^m.
Dover, and intend to pay you a visit when
se propOBtr^v. de rendre^Y. ««^ .
they are (come back). - - - The houses which are
(by the fut.) rtvenir^r.
built in the winter are not so wholesome as those
5am,adj.
which are begun (in the) spring and finished (in the)
au "^^ au
middle of summer. - - The wicked are always tor-
e/e,m. mdchant^^dypL hour*
Riented, and the righteous are comforted by their
reler^v. jvste^idj. consoUr^y.
own conscience. - - Virtuous people are esteemed
ptrsonntyt*
and respected by those who are so. - - - 1 assure you
dt
that Mr. Brown's wife appears much afflicted
ftmmtS* fort^TiAv*
at the death of her husbstnd, but her sons appear
de mart,m.
as much affected by it as sbe.
f(wcfcef,v.
346
Secondly, with the verb avtnr, the participle ij^stead
of agreeing with the nominative, must agree with the
direct object^ which is a noun or (in this instance) a,pro«
noun governed in the accusative ccwe, hut that direct
object must precede the participle^ otherwise that parti*
cipie does not agree with it; thus in this phrase, j^at
vu ma saur^ the participle does not change, because
ma 9(sur which is the direct object, does not precede,
but in this phrase cUst ma scdur quefai vue, the parti-
, ciple agrees, because que relative pronoun, which repre-
sents ma sciur rs placed before that participle.
In the compound tenses of the reflected verbs where
the auxiliary itre is employed instep of avotV, if jou
suppose this last verb to exist where Stn is used, the
above-mentioned rule must direct you. By the same
reason that we say il Pa tu6e (he has killed her,) we say
elle s^est tuee^ which is the same as if we could say elUa
sqi tu6e, she has herself killed, she killed herself.
JW vu Madame Wright ti I «aw Mrs^ Wright and
Vai entendae chanter^ heard her sing.
J^ai lu tons les livres que I have read all the loofci
Vims m^aviz pretes, which you Itnt me.
Avez-vous vu les marchan- Did you see the ' goods
dises quefai rP9ue8, which I have nceivedm
Vous Vavez souvent priee You often desired her to
de passtr chez vous^ call at your bouse.
EtUs se sont repenties de They have repented of
kursfautes^ their faults*
EXERCISi I^PON THIS RULE*
The resolution which she has taken of going into
a
the country surprises me very much; I have spoken
^ ittmner^y. tres fort^^dv*
to her myself, but I have net (been able to) learn
pouvpir^V*
the reasons which have induced her to it. - • - Miss
engageryV. Mile
Farren was an excellent actress, I have seen her
actrice^t
847
play several times. - - I am very sorry for the
' • fdchi^Sidj. de
trouble that affair has given tt> your aunt. - - If you
peine^L tante^f.
can come with me, I will show you the lady
montrer^y^
whom I have heard sin^. - - What stuff have
enlendre^Y.w itoffe^L
you chosen ? - - The letteF which you have written to
cAotst,p*p.
me in French was tolerably well ; 1 have shown
en passahhmeni^'^LiN.
it to' your aunt, who is much pleased
/re^,adv. confent,adj,
(with it). - - 1 have not yet received the goods,
en,pro. marchandist^U
which you sent me by the iship . Good-
vaisstdu^m.
Will. - - Ladies, have you returned him the letters
^ Mesdames, rendr0^y. *
which he had desired you to read ? - - - Where
prier^v. de ^ Ou,adv.
did you buy those gloves ? I bought
acheter^Y*
them in France. - • Alexander conquered Asia with
Asie
the troops which his 'father Philip had disciplined.
troupe^. r
- - The fauHs which he had committed, greatly
&eaucoti/7,adv.
increased his prudence. - - He has spent all the
augmenter^Vm
treasures which his father had amassed with so much
irisor^m*
care and labour. - * I shall never forget ' the good
(m6/t«r,v.
services which you have done to. my mother.
seroict^m. ^ rtndre^y.
- - Of all the letters which my brother has received
S4E
to-day, there is not one (of them) for
au;our(r&usadv.^
me. - - The reasons, which you have given us, have
satisfied us. - - What books iiave you lost ? - - The
fine aetions your brothers have done in
6eau,adj. action^f. faire^y. en
America deserve great praises, and (ought to) be
Amerique m6riter^v. louange^L devoir^v*
transmitted to posterity. - - The three country
houses, w4iicb your father is said to have bought,
maison^
are extremely fine and well situated. - • The
5t<ue,p.p.
soldiers, whom they obliged to (set out,) are
^oldat^m. * ^ a
(coDief back) already. - - - My sisters have
rrtenir,v. ♦ -
quarrelled the whole day, and are now reconciled.
9€ quereUer^y^
The participle passive is indeclinable wbeo the par-
ticiple is not preceded by a direct object j or pronoun
governed in the accusative case.
This happens when the object follows, as in this
phrase J^ai vu ma saur^ or when another verb governs
the pronoun ) as in this phrase, // nefaut jamais s^ccarier
de la bonne route que Von a commence a suivre ; here
sutvre governs que and not commence. ^
La maison que fat fait bdtir^ The house I have built.
C^est tme belle chanson^ je It is a fine, song, 1 have
Pai entendu chanter plu' heard it sung many a
sieurs fois^ time.
J^if suis alU avec elk et Pai 1 went there with liep,
vupemdre, and saw her picture
drawn.
349
La tangut que fat com- The language I have 6«-
mence d*apprendre est gun to learn is very
fort utik^ useful/
In the above instances the pronouns are not governed
by the participle passive, but by the yerbs chanter^
peindre, and ajffrtndrt.
EXERCISES UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE.
I have given him a fable to translate. « - 1 cannot
a traduirtiV.
forget the good actions^ which I have seen
V
you do. - • - Th^ goods which you ordered me k>
de
send, are arrived ; permit me to show you the letters
de '
which he has seen me open from Germany. - - -
Aliemagne^(.
Have you already read the books, which 1 saw* you
buying ?----! have bought the clothes fop
which you saw me, bargaining. - - - The history
marchander^y.
which 1 have b^gun to read is not entertaining. - -
A ainusant^^idj.
She has written i;nore books than you ever have
^Vzmat«,adv.
read. - - The lady whom I saw singing is hand-
some and young, but the song which 1 have heard
sung is the best, as to words and music, that
quant
your brother ever wrote. - Miss B. has spent
passerby.
• Observe Hhat the participle, though it should not agree with
books, livres^ it should agree with the pronoun.wtM, so that it should
be spelt fue if addressed to a female.
30
350
two or tliree dajs With yoor sisterB, and saw their
l?otr,v, les
(picture drawn) ; their cousins were in the next
peindrtyV. - ' *
room, and mj sister saw tbein painting in minia-
ture. ' * enjp.
It is often difficult to ascertain which is the AVec/
6b;>c/ ; a simple method is, to add one of these pronouns
loho or idiai to the participle, 'and then the answer w411
point out that object: thus, for this sentencce, ma sceur
sUst. ca^s6 VipauU^ ask my sister, brokt — what ? — her
shoulder; .this, then is the object, but ^sNpaule follows,
the participle does not change.
Sometidnes a preposition is understood, o&expressed
by the pronoun, as in this sentence voild la dame dont
faiparli ; the pronoun dont is not the direct object,
with, which; only the participle can agree; it is- the-
genitive ; besides; the Verb perler^ in this instance is
neuter, and therefore cannot govern a noun in the ac-
cusative case : ex.
Les Anglois se sont ren' The English made them"
dm fameux dans cette 5e/i^e5 famous in thia war?
guerre,
Telles sont ses objections ; Such are his rObjections ;
j^y ai pensi^ I fcave thought of them*
EXERCISI^ UPON THESE REMARKS.
Daughter, I had warned you of it. - - You
avertir^v^
would have rendered yourself celebrated by your talents
renrfre,refl.v.
aad beauty, if you bad i^ot shown them so much vanltj.
»Mon/rer,v.
- - - He is the man (of whom) our neighbours have
Oest dont
complained. - - It is your fault. Miss, I hs^ve already
*e ;itoinrfre,refl.v.
Scolded you (about it).
t^ronder^r.
351
Lastly, when the auxiliary verb and the parti-
ciple passive are used impersonally. Du (when nOt
signifying owed), />u, and vou/t<, are ^Iso indeclinable:
ex. '
Lespluies qu^il a fait^ The rains which we hav^
had.
Je vous ai mouirt la re- I have shown you the gfa«
connoiisanu quefai du, titude 1 ought*
Ma sceur a fait lout ce My sister baa done every
qu'elle a pu, thing she could*
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE*
The storm, which we had yesterday, bafl
Umpite^f.
done (a great deal) of damage to our
caiLsir^v* ' beaucoup^idy. dommagt .
ships. - - - The abundant showers which we have
*^ pluie.^.
had this week, have prevented me from going
empfcher^v.
into the country. - - • The high winds which
a gran(i,adj. ren/,m.
tbey have had in the covnty of Kent, have (blown
comt6^ni» renver^
down) many houses and trees. - - At last he has
wr,v. £njJn,adv. •
returned me all the sums which 1 had Jent to
rendrtyV. sommej.
him> and which he had owed me so long. - - - 1
devoir ^Y*
have not* paid all the attention which I. ought to
/atre,v.
the advice your father gave me. - - - She has ob-
avis^m. o6-
tained from the king all the favours she would.
ienir^w frduJU
352
- - - My brother might have improved more,
fairt des progres
but he has not o^ade all the efforts he could.
effort^m.
0
N. B. The rules on this subject, which have been re-
garded as being extremely intricate, and numerous,
may be reduced to three, viz. Ist, The participle when
attended with no auxiliary agrees with the nominative,
like an adjective. — 2d, When attended with the verb
eire, the participle constantly agrees with the nomina-
tive. Lastly the participle when attended with the
verb avoir agrees with its direct object^ only when that
oT)je.ct precedes the participle; and in the compound
^tenses of the reflected verbs, the auxiliary verb itre
must be regarded as filling the place of the verb avoir,
and subjected to the same rules, that being an anomaly
in the language.
EXAMPLE UPON THE JOREGOIira RULES.
J^ai re9U le$ lettres que I have received the letters,
vous rn*ave2 ecrites au which you wrote to me
sujet de Paffaire^ que je with respect. to the affair
vous avois proposee : e^. which I bad proposed to
apres les avoir lues aucc you: and after having
attention^ fai reconnu, rea(2 them with attention,
comrnt vous^ que^ si je * 1 perceived^ as you did,
Pavois entreprise, fy that, if 1 had undertaken
aurois irou\e des ob- it, I should have met with
stacks que je n^avois pas obstacles, which 1 had
prevus, not foreseen*
Requ is indeclinable, because it is not preceded by
any regimen ; icrites is declinable, and agrees in
gender and number with its direct object, or accu-
sative, expressed by the pronoun relative gtic,
which precedes the ^erb and relates io letters ^ pro^
posie likewise agrees with ^tie, by which it is prec^<lLed,
353
and which relates to the word affaire ; lues is declina-
ble on account of its regimes ks^ which precedes it
and relates to letters; reconnu is indeclinable, because
it is not preceded bj anj regimeo to which it. can re-
late; entreprise^ on the contrary, is degiiHable, and
takes the gender and number of the conjunctive pro*
noun l\ which is i& direct object and its antecedent,
relating to affaire; trouvi is indeclinable, because it ift
not preceded but followed by its accusative obstacles ;
privus^ on the contrary, is dectinable, because it is pre*
ceded by its direct object 9^69- whi^ relates to 06-
staclesm
Clearness is the principal quality of the French Ian-
guage^ therefore equivocations in the use of the partici-
ples should be carefully avoided : ex. Je les ai ranges
en oxdrej speaking of papers, may signify 1 have sei
them in order, or T have them and they are in order ; in
such a case a different regular turn should be chosen
with which this language abounds.
SECT. VI.
INDECLINABLE PARTS OF SPEECH.
^ Under this head are cotnprehended adverbs^ preposi^
iionsj conjunctions^ and interjections.
OF ADVERBS.
Adverbs have been distinguished, according to their
several significations, into adverbs ofplace^ time, quality^
quantity^ number^ order, affirmation, negation, doubt, inter-
rogation, comparison, collectioH, separhtion, &c. But this
classification, however ingfjnious, is far from being
exact 2 it was therefore judged, that, if those of the
most frequent use, and which, when compounded, form
a particular idiom, were carefully sekcted, and arrang-
cd in aq alphabetical series, it wqpld be more to the
advaqt3g€5j^f ib^ learner.
30*
354
TABLE OF ADVERBS.*
Ahondammmt^ abundanilj, plentifully.
a PAbandon, at raiidoti), in confusion, in disorder.
D^Ahord^ at fiibt, immediately.
Absolument^ absolutely.
D^Accord, grant it, done.
AgrSablemtnt^ pleasantly, comfortably;
Ainsi (de meme), so, thus, in the same manner.
Aisimtnt^ easily.
Mai aisiment, with difficulty.
Dans tin an ^Ttci, a year hence.
JUannit qui vienU the next year.
En ami^ friendly.
a PamiabU^ amicably.
En arriere^^ tomber en arriere^ to fall backward.
a reculons^ marcher a reculons^ to walk backward.
Assezj enough.
Assuriment^ certainly.
Aujourd'^hui^ to-day.
Time to t lyaujmrd^hui en huii^ this day se'nnigbt.
come. ( D^aujourd^hui en quinze^ this day fortnight.
Clly a aujourd*hui huit jours ^ this day week, this
Timel • day se'nnight.
past. \ Ily a aujourd^hui quinze jours, this day fortnight.
l^Ily a aujourd^hui un an, this day twelve months.
Autant, as much, as many.
~^^4iutmi plusy so much the more.
D^auiant moins. So much the less.
Toul Ms^^' \ -l"^^ ^®' J"^* ^* '""^''' ^^^^y ^*'*^'
Dor6navanty in future.
a tdvenir, for the future, hereafter.
a PAngloise, after tlie English manner, fashion, or way.
a PItaiienney after the Italian, ^c.
a la Fran^oise^ after the French, c^c.
a la Turque, after the Turkish, ^c.
• Simple adverbs arc ^enexallj placed after the verbs', alid in com-
pound tenses between the auxiliary and the participle pal^sit«. «* <
355
' EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERTS.
Our garden produces all kinds of {i^i& ^ plenti-
sorte^L
fully. ♦ - Your sister left all her things in dis- '
laisser^y.
order. - - You did not know me ai first. ^ - He ivould
vouloir^y.
absolutely do it. -'• If you please, I will go to
vouloir^v*
London with you. Done, - - I hope we shall spend
passerby.
the day pleasantly^ - - Have we not spent it 50 .^ - - -
My brother learns his lessons easily^ and I toiih dif-
Jiculty. ' " A year hence you will (be able to) speak
, pouvoir^v.
French tolerably well. - - My father'' says I shall go
to *France next year. - - - It was done so an-
ciently. - - 1 had tbe honour of seeing you formerly^
but I do not recollect where I bad that pleasure :
se rapptler^v. 0
I believe it was at Mr. P's. who received us
friendly. - - - Your brother and mine have settled
reg/«r,v.
their affairs amicably. - - --Make two steps back-
pas^tt\.
ward. - - He who walks backzoanISs cannot see his
way. - - Have you played enough ^ - - - Ceriainly
you must be tired. - - - We do not expect him
devoir^Y. fatiguer^v. attendre^y^»
* Sec tbe article indefinite, page 41.
S6&
to-dttjf. • - If it be 6ne weather^ I shall, be back
faire^y. de retour
tfttf datf^H^iflhL - - I shall see ;ou this dujf fortnight
if I am* well. - - This day^ wetk I was (at yoar house)*
chez vous.
- - o Th%8 day mtmth I met your brother. - - I came
here this day twelve months* - - - He has as
tdjadv^
much money and as many friends as you* - - I was
so much the more persuaded of what you told me,
that I dismissed him this day three weeks. - - -
• renvoyer^v*
I will do it sa much the kss^ as I promised him not
que
to meddle with that affair. - - - My sister has
de se mtUr^y. c{f,p*
JQst as mticft wit, and njust as amiable as yours. • - -
, «i que •
Your son has given you some trouble, but I
peine^fm mais^c*
hope he will give you pleasure hettafler. - - If' you
forgive him this timt, he will not do it for the
fuiute. ' ' " In future, I never will trust him*
se fer^Vm
any more. ^ « She dresses ^ter the English
^<» ^ s'^habiUer,y.
fashion,, but she li^es after the Fr^ch tsay. - - She
vivre^y.
plays afier ihe kalian manner. * - Your sister has a
cap . after ihe Turkish fashion* • • Cone h«re,
6onne/,m.
go there, look every where.
cherchir^y.
* See note page 322.
357
ADVERBS.
s ' - , > off/dowo, down with, below,
a, or en basi )
En badinant^ for fun.
JSeaucoup. I ^y^^jj^ many, a great deal.
d beaucoup pre$^ nothing near, (with ne before and pas
after the verb.)
De beaucoup^ by much, greatly.
Bien, well, very.
.X)e 6on ccBur, heartily, with a good will.
Dt bonnt foi^ ) . i
Sincerement^ i *^
De bonne heure^ betinils.
De bonjeu^ fairly.
De bon matin^ early.
De boiiche^ by word of mouth.
a la bonne heure^ in good time, luckily, well and good.
a bon droits deservedly.
a bon marchi, cheap.
a bride abattue^ fall speed.
^d el la^ to and fro.
a cause de quoi, on what account.
a ctla pres^ that excepted.
Cependani^ in the meanwhile, nevertheless.
u chevaly^on horseback.
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVEABS.
^at8 off^ gentlemen, and sit down* - - - The^ whole*
army^ surrendered and laid down their arms
se rendre^y* meUre,y. ks
upon the ramparts of the citadel. - - There is a man
belazoy whom you will see with pleasure. - - Though*
Quoique^ c.
we said it for fun, he was very angry* with us. - -
con<re,p.
There were many ladies, and we had a great deal of
pleasure. - - You may say what yoii please,
jM>ui?otV,v. i/ vous plaira^Vf
* Se« conjunctions that govern the eubjnnctive, page 490.
^59
but she id nothing nmr so handsome as her sU-
ter. • - He has by much increased his CDrtune. - - -
Whatever yon do, do it well. - - If you do not do it with
. 41 good wiUf I will do it mjaeJf. - - He has acted very
sinttrtly in that business* - - Do you speak meere/jf f
- - We will get up te/«m€5. - - Have I not won
fmrly ^ - - We will (set out) early^ that we may arrive
^ ajin qiu
before the heat of the day. * - - It (is
avant ehakur^f* valeir
better to) tell it him Jy word of mouA^ tbaa to
mieux^v. c2s
write to him. - - Sir, I have done my exercise. • - WtU
thdmeita*
and good. - - He has obtained it dtstrvtdiy* - » 'Uf
ohtenir^y*
father has bought a horse very chtap* - • jDo y«u see
those two horsemen^ . who come to «& finll spted ? - • •
cttoaiier^m.
They wandered to and fro without^ knowing wbither
alkr^v*
to go. - o On what account is he angry with me ?
- - That excepted^ 1 have nothing to reproach him
' a reprocher^Vm lui
with. • - - I shouM speak, bnt, m Ifte niBanwhilt^ I
«o» derdiVjV.
(hold roy'toRgoe). - - Miss White is very handsome,
se taire^Vy,
neverthekvs, I do not love her* • * • Some Xfrent
Les %mi
io London U\ a coach, othei^ on horsthaclu
en,p. ««« a
* Without, tant^ requires the present iafinitivi^
S6i
A&VERB&
Cmnbien^ How much, how it^i^jy h«# ?
Combien y a-t-il que, '\
Cofnbien de temps y a*/-ti que, I
Cambim y avoH-il qut, I ^^ , j
Depws quand, C »
Combien deiempsj
Pendant combien de iemps^
m
N. B. 1. ^w t7if(€&, &0W fhany^ hcftVy are rendered in
French by que before an admiration : exr
Que vous itesjolieJ Hqw pretty you are ! *-
. 2. We make use of conAien y a-i-il que^ when th^
action mentioned in the interrogation has not yet t^»*
ed; and then the verb, whfch (in EngUsfa) is in tbd
compound of the pre^sent, must be rendered (in French)
by the present of the indicative mood z «x*
Combien y a-t-il que v&ut How long have you been
£tfs^ or, depuis quand in London ?
it^S'Vous a Londres ?
3. If the verb (in English) be in the con^poiindof th&
imperfect, it is lo he rendered (in French) by the im-
perfect of the indicative : ex.
Combien y avoitM que tous How long had you beetf
itiez, or, depuis quand . in Loudon^ when he
. ttiez'vous a Londres died?
quand il mourUt f
4. If the action have entirely ceased, we make use of
pendant combitn de temps^ With the fallowing verb in the
compound of the present : ex.
Pendanr combien de temps How long were you in
avez'vous 6li a Londres ? London ?
360
5. How longi in the sepse otfor what tinie^ is also
rendered by pendant comhien de Umps^ with the verb in
the sani^ tense as it is in English : ex*
Pendant comhien de temps How long do you intend
vmts proposeZ'V0U8 de 16 stay in Italj ?
rester en Italic ?
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
How much do you owe hi'm ? - - - You see to how
many dangers and how many reproaches we are
liaMe. - - - How many times shall I bei obliged to
expos6,p»p» • ^ de
bid you to (be silent?) • - - How troublesome
dire^Y* de se taire^Y. importun^^dj*
you are ! How sorry I am for* having displeased
de
you ! - - How much 1 should be obliged to you, if
you would grant me that favour ! - - How tang
accorder^v. ^
have you been learning French ? - - How long have
they been in Paris ? - - Hqw long had you been in
a
London, when you married ? - - How long had you been
se marier^Y.
learning Italian, when you wrote to me ? - - How long
Italien
have your parents been in England ? - - How long
ptre et mere
had your brother been in Germany, when we left
* , quUier^v.
it? How /owg were you in Holland ? - - How long
en
did your cousin learn the mathematics ? - • How long
* The prepositions; rfe, pour and d, alwayi govern the present
infinitive and iti compound.
361
have that gentleinan and lady (been waiting for)
aitendre^y.
me? - 'Mow long has your relation been dead? - * «
'How long had he been in his regiment, when he ,
died ? - - How long was he ill ? - - How long does your
malade ?
uncle intend to leave his son on the continent? - -
8t proposer de
How long had your father and mother proposed
to stay in America? - - Why (are you proud) of
de en ^ s\norgaeill%r^v •
your beauty ? You do not know hpw long it will last.
ADVERBS.
€omh%m y a-Uil d!^{ci ? How far is it hence t
Dans combien de temps ? How long will it be before?
Comme^ as, like, how.
Comme ilfaut^ soundly, as it should be.
Comment^ how*
a contre'Caur^ against our will.
d contre'setis^ the contrary, or wrong \^ay, in a wrong
sense,
d contre-femps^ unseasonably.
a corjfis perdu^ hand over head, desperately.
a Pecart, > aside.
a part, )
a c6le, by the side of it.
u cote Pun de P autre, abreast*
De ce ctti'cU on this side.
Dfi C6 c6/c^/a, on that side. • »
De c6ti et d^autre, up and down, about*
De tons cdiis, on all sides, on every side*
(hup sur coup^ one after another.
31
36» .
EXlRCISft OPOH TBXSK ADTSRB8.
How far is it hence to Dbver ? - - Hotd long will it be
Douvres ?
before yea ^send me ^back the books I lent joa ? - -
renvoyer^v.
They are punished as they deserve. - - - My father's
le
house is like yours, it is very badly built* - - -
ma/fadv.
See how it rains. - - - Have they not been beaten
soundly? - - - This exercise is done as it^hould be.
- • How can you speak thus ? - - We went to the play
against our will. - - You bold your book the wrong
way Your brother took in a wrong sense all
that I said to him* - - - Our master arrived very
ce que
unseasonably. - - • The French rushed on the
fondre^y.
Austrians desperately. - - Lay this aside. - - - Put
Aulrichien^m.
that by the side of it. - - I perceive two ships sailing
apprevoir^y.
abreast. - - Let us walk on this side^ and our companions
will go on that side. - - They run uj^and down all day,
^
and do (nothing but) play. - - How dare you run about
ne que
while your mother (is waiting for) yon ? -^ -
pendant que^c.
The enemies were victorious on all sides. - • - We
hear on every side^ that peace will very
apprendre^y. bUn
soon take place. - - - They drank three bottles of
avoir lieu^y."
Tgundjr wine one after another.
S63
ADVERBS.
Davani<^e, more.
g,tL„ I ""■•'"»■••
Deja^ already «>
Demain^ to-morrow.
Le lendemain^ the day after.
Apris defnaiuy the daj after to-morrow*
DemHrement^ lately.
Ci'dessus^ above.
Par disstis, above, over and above.
Srz;™.} »»^'"«»«-
a dicouvert, openly.
d deaseifij on purpose, designedly.
a droite^ to the right.
a dcubU efitente^ with a double meaning.
Encore^ again, yet, as yet.
Enjin^ at last.
Ensuiiey afterward, then*
Entieremmt^ entirely.
Expris^ on purpose*
a Picartj out of the way.
it Pmtour^ round about.
a Penversj the wrong side outwards.
a Penvi^ in emulation.
aux envtronB^ thereabouts.
En nuUe mantere, in no wise, (with ne before the verb.)
In Jw»S, } *' "*>"''' ^* '^'^■^y-
En temps et /i«u, in a proper time'and place.
En tau8 cagj whatever may happen.
En un din i'ail^ in the twinkling of an eye.
En sursaut, suddenly.
' S64
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS*
I know how that happened, talk no more of it. - -
Look within and yoa shall see it; - - She was within
and I was without^ - - Have you alrtofly done your exr*
ercise ? - - 1 will call upon you^ to-morrow, and
passerby, chez^p.
the day after we will go and sec my uncle. - - - W6
will pay you the day after to-morrow if we can. - -
I was lately (at your house). - - You will find it above*
chez vous.
- - - I like your garden and walks above all.
aimer^y.
T - There is a stone, look underneath, you will find
something curious. • - • Sp^ak and show yourself
singulier*
€penly. - - - We were half dead. - - - I never do
things by halves. - - They killed him on purpose* - -
They did say so designedly. - ' Go to the right. - -
My brother always speaks with a double meaning. - - -
I have told the truth, and they do not yet believe me.
• - Jit last the rebels retired into the woods with
se retirer^y. dans^p, boisnin.
a great loss. - - Do first what you have to do,
perte,{. Faire^y.
afterward you shall go out - - - He did it tniinljf
to please you. - - I came on purpose to see yoi*.
«ouf,p.'
- - • Take all these papers, and put them out of (he
way. - - How can jou find the place> if you always
turn round about ? - - - You have (put on) your
mtUrt^v*
waistcoat the wrong, side cgftf^rds. - - • My brother
veste^U
and yours work in emulation of one another. - - •
He lives in London of thereabouts* - - • I will do it in
a
nozoise* - - 1 was stopped at noon* We will teU him
lui
what we think in a proper time and place* - • - WhaPf
ever may happen^ I (do not care) for it* • - He did
se souder^v*
it in the twinkling of an eye* - • This morning I
awoke suddenly^ but I soon (ell asleep again.
s^iveiller^y*
ADVERBS,
Facilement^ easily,
Fidelementy faithfully.
a hfois^ together.
Combien defois ? how many times ?
Vnefois^ once.
Deuxfois^ twice.
Troisfois^ thrice, three times.
Tant defois, BO many times.
Parfois^ now and then.
Fortement, strongly.
Fort^ very.
Fort etferme., stoutly.
31*
S66
ifondy thoroughly.
Defond en combk^ from top to bottom, to all intents
and purposes.
De fronl^ a breast.
Gatemmen^ genteelly, politely.
Goutte a goutte^ by drops.
Cruere ou Cruires^ (with 4|| before the verb,) little, but
little. •
a la hite^ in haste.
La h / i "P there, up stairs, above stairs.
D^heure en heure^ hourly, every hour.
flier, yesterday.
Hier-au «otr, last night.
Avant'hier^ the day before yesterday. ,
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
Your brother learns eost'/y, but he forgets almost
oublier^v.
as easily as he learns. • - In the last battle our troops
V
fought (with the) French, all the soldiers and
livrer^y* aux
officers did their duty faithfully: the enemy sur-
pl.
rendered at discretion, and were obliged to (march
a de sor'
out) of the country in a filtl - - Let every one speak
tir^T. Que
in bis turn, for if you speak all together^ how can
a
I ^ear what you say ? - - How many times did I tell
entendre^r,
jou to write to your parents ? - - I spoke to him only
de pere et mere ?
onct^ but I saw him twict. - - My father generallj
goes to Germany thrice a year. - • I told it you /Aree
Allemo^lM
367
times* - - I saw him so many times* - - Do jou go
often to London ? I go (there) now and ihen^ - - The
souvent^2idy. y
king strongly opposed the enemy in the action*
s^opposer a mtUef*
- - - Your little sister is very pretty. - - - In all
that (which) they undertake they always act
agir.y.
stoutly, - •» My brother knows French thoroughly. - -
savoir le Francois
They demolished the house from top to bottom* - -
I travelled in a post-chaise drawn by three horses
abreast* - - Always behave gen<ee%. - - Your brothers
came to see us, and we received them politely* - -
The wine runs from the hogshead by drops* - - Give
couler^Y* muid^m*
him but little wine. - - *Ncver^ do* things in
Jiejamaisj^dv,
haste* - - Is Mr* D. above stairs ?'' Go up stair's^ you
will find what you (look for) in the drawer
chercher^y* tiroir, m*
behind the door* - - After having (waited for) him
derriere^p* attendre^y*
hourly^ he arrived at last* - - We see the army
increasing every hour* - - I went yesterday to London*
grossir^y.
- - h rained very much last nighty and it has frozen
very hard this morning* - - The day before yesterday
tris-fort
1 met 3'Ottr brother, who was riding on horse-
se promener^^y*
back.
ADVERB&
ict, here*
let autouTj hereaboots*
Idpres^ hard bj.
Jfici, heDce.
JD'tct en quinzejours^ within a fortnight.
Par ici^ this way.
Par id par la^ here and there.
a Pinsiant^ immediatelj, instantlj.
Jamais^ eirer.
Nt jamais^ never.
ajamai$^ for ever.
JusttmmU just, precisely.
Jusqu?a quand ? how long ? ^
JW^u'tct, hitherto, as far as this.
Jmqut'la^ so far, as far as that.
Jusqu^ou ? how far ?
Dejour^ in the ^ay time.
Dejour a autre,^ ^^^^ ^ ^^ ^ ^^j,
De jour en jowr, > -^ ^ » ^
De deux en deux jour f^ ^
De deux jours Pun^ > every other day.
Toil* les deux jours ^ 5
Dans quinzt joursy in a fortnight.
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
Did I not tell you to stay here ? - - How
de
many miles is it hence to Hampton-Court ? - -
(There must) be (a great deal) of game hert-
II dotr,v.imp. gi6ier,m.
ahouts* - - How long has he lived hard hy? ' - How
demet<rer,v,
far is it hence to Canterbury ? - - 1 will (call upon) your
Caniorbiry passer chez
brother wilhin a fortnight. - - Come this way, - - Your
309
books are scattered here and there* - - Come back
epars^ady '
immediately i - - Tbey instantly invited him to dine
with them, - - I do not believe that he ever will follow
(by the subj.)
your advice. - - My father never will see him again.
conseil^m*
- - Great men will for ever be celebrated in history.
- - (This is) ji^t what I say. - - How long^ O
Fbt7a,adv.
Catiline, will jou abuse our patience ? - • -
Catalina abuser^v»de
Hitherto the enemy has done * nothing considerable.
de
- - Learn this piece of poetry as far as that. - *
poisie
How far will you go ? - - You always come to see me
by night, why do not you come in the day-time f • -
de
We expect from day to day to receive news from
de
the Continent. - - We are daily exposed to great
m.
dangers. - - My master comes here evfry other day,
- - I shall go to France and Italy in a fortnights
ADVERBS.
ia, there, thither.
La autour^ thereabouts.
La has^ yonder.
De let, ? ,.
Par Id, that way.
Loin, far.
De loin, afar off, at a distance.
S70
Long-tmnpf^ a long while, loDg time.
Lors^ theo, at the time*
Pour iorsj J
DisAom^ from that time*
Mal^ ill, wrong*
Matntenant^ notir.
Mtdiocrtmmi^ indifferently.
Mimty even, yet.
De meme^ so, in the same manner.
Miiuxy better.
De mieux en mieuxj better and better.
MoinSj less.
Moins—'Moins^ the less— «the less.
a moins^ for less, at less.
Au maim, da mnns, ? , ^ ^^ ^
Tout au moint^ 5 ' '
En mains de rien^ in a trice.
^ATai'Demen^ plainly, ingenuonsly.
NaturelUnunU naturally, by nature.
au Jfaturel, to the life.
•ATe m, ni, neither — nor.
Konpas^ nepas^ fu painty nm^ no, not.*
De nuitj by night, in the night-time.
Ohligeammenty kindly, obligingly.
Ou, where.
OBSERVATION ON THE ADVERB ^Ou.
The adverb of place, Ou^ where, is most commonlj
and more elegantly turned into French by que after the
two other adverbs tct, here, /d, there, to prevent the hia-
tus caused by the meeting of the two vowels j and some-
times after nouns expressing the place ^here sonaethiDg
has happened, been done or committed, especially when
• Ptu^ with the negation ne before it, merely expresses a negative,
withoat affirming it, whereas potn/ denies and affirms at once* J'ai
often denies but partly, or with some modification ; pointy on tbe
contrary, always denies absolutely, totally, and without any reserve.
371
the sentence begins* with the verb itre^ to be, vaed. im-
personally, as, it if, it toas^ it will 6e, &c« : ex*
Oest id que nous Pattm- It is here (where) we are
dons^ waiting for him.
Ce fut la que je le vis pour It was there (where) I saw
la premiere fais J him for the first time7
Cefut en plein sinat que It was in full senate
desar fut inhwnainemeni (where, or in which)
assassins^ Caesar was inhumanly
murdered*
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
It was there or thereabouts that I met him. - - Do
Ce
you see that tre^ yonder. - - Thmee I went to France|
and soon after to Germany. - - If yon go that way
€y^ris,p0
yoH may call at Mr. H's. - - We are yet far from
pouvoir^v. passer chez
our house. - - I see many ships afar o^ - - I saw him
yesterday, but it was at a distance. - - You made me
wait a long while. - - The fight bsted a long
combat, m. '.
time. - - He was ill at the time of my arrival. - - Then^
I believe you. - - From that time I* began to
commenceryV.
speak to him. • • Does your son behave ill now ? - -
When I do wrong, I repent very soon. - - They are
tort 6ien/6/,adv.
now in England. • - The tree that 1 planted grows
indifferently. « • Virtue is amiable even in an enemy.
372
You blame him, and neyeMhelesci yon aci in the
agir.v.
same manner* - - You work better than your sister. - •
She reads French better and better* • - My cousin
le
has less money and Inerih - - The less you work
(by the fut.)
the less you will improve. - - - He will not do
/aire des progres*
it for less. - - There are now in America 30,000 men
at the least. - - If jpn cannot come, at kast write
to us. - - He replied plainly to all my questions, and
I am much pleased with him. - - What he does, he
bien satisfait de,p.
does it naturally. - » Miss Nicholas picture is
portrait^m.
drawn to the life. - - I will neither see him nor
fait,p.p.
speak to him. - - My mother and sisters (were to) go
devoir^v.
next week to France, but my father says, that he
neither can nor will expose them to the dangers of
touloir^v.
a journey through a distant country. ^ - I (asked
dans 6loign6 de»
for) a glass of wine, and not a glass of water.
mander^v.
- - Will you come with me? ^o, for you always
car,c.
travel by night. - - Always speak kindly^ * -, ^Aere did
you meet them ? - * It was where I saw your brother
^ for the last^imQ. * * -^ It was at Caernarvon zohtre
373
Edward the Second (was born,) the first who bore the
Edouard naUre^v.
title of Prince of Wales. - - It was near the walls of
Galles^f, muraitle
Corunna in Spain, where (or near which) the brave
la Corogne
Sir John Moore was wounded, and di^d a
chevalier^m. Jean ^^
few hours after; England will long regret the loss
of that great general. It was there also where that^
famous' battle^ (was foughO) (in which) both our
se donner^v^ cu «o^
officers and soldiers showed so much courage. * - It is
not amidst the pleasures of this world where (o^^amidsi
parmi^p.
which) wc find happiness; it is in the bosom of inno-
sein^m.
cence and peace where (or in which) we ought to
(look for) it. * - It is in the county of Huntingdon
chercher^v. prarnnct^L
where the best cheeses in the kingdom are made*"^
ADVERBS.
JD'ow ? whence ?
Par oily through what place ? which way ? through
which ?
Oui^ yes.
D* mitre en outre^ through.
Pas dpas^ step by step.
De pari et dPaulre^ on both sides.
JsTullepart^ nowhere, any-where.
a peine^ hardly, scarcely.
Pck-mile^ helt^T-skelter.
* fee rule?, page 337. , ;
32
374
Peut'itre, may be, perhaps.
Pcu, little.
Peu dpeu, by little and little, by degrees.
a peupres, > almost, very near, thereabouts.
Dans peu^ in a short time.
Depuis peu. lately, not long ago, a little while ago.
a pied^ on foot.
Pitds nus^ barefoot, barefooted.
Aupis aller^ let the worst come to the worst*
De pis en pis^ worse and worse.
Dc plein gri^ with a good will, freely.
De pleinpied^ on the same floor.
a pletnes mains^ largely.
Plus^ more, above.
Plus — P/iiff, the more — the more.
Plus q(i'*il nhnfaut^ more than enough.
Auplus^ tout auplvs^ at the most.
De plus en plus^ more and more.
a plus forte rnison^ much rather, much more so.
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
Did my brothers tell you whence they caffie? - -
Which way are they gone? - - The hole through
which they (made their escape) was so small, that I
s^echapper^v. ^
do not know how they could (get out). - - Do you know
sortir^v*
your lesson? Yes^ Sir. - - The barrel is pierced
bariLm.
through. - - I will follow j^ou sUp by step, - - -
The battle was cruel and bloody, and
combat ^m. . * san^lani^^^y
kept up (a long time) willi an equal advantage
se mainUnir^v^
o:i both sides, • - I can find my book no-xrherc. • - -
375
(There is no) going any-where in winter. - - He speaks
en .
so low, that I can hardly hear what he says. - - - The
Spaniards pursued them so closely that they
Espagnol^m. de siprts.z&v.
entered the town helter-skelter. - - - ,1 shall see you
dans
perhaps to-nriorrow. - - He has Utile money. - - If you
give me a verb, I will learn it by Utile and little* - -
She is as tall as you, or thereabouts. - - I heard that
your sister will (be married) in a short lime. - - Have
se marier
yon (heard from) your mother lately 1 - - 1 received a
letter from her not lung ago. - - I was on foot, and
he was in a coach. - - I often pity the poor little
chimney sweepers, who walk barefooted in
cheminie ramoneur^m.
winter - - - Let the roorst come to the worsts I will
(get rid) of it. - - - Your brother writes worse
se defaire^y.
and worse. - - He submitted to it with a good will. - -
se sovmettre
All our rooms are on the same floor. ^ - He is so cha-
ritable, that he gives alms largely. - - I shall
aumdne,f.sing.
never more complain of the rude reception
malhonnete^^idj. accueil^m.
which your uncle has given to my father. - - - 1 have
fait.p.p.
written three letters, neither more nor less. - - You
are above twenty years old. - - - The more we arc
plus ie
S7«
above others, the mon it becomes us to be
au dtssus c7e,p. de
modest and bumble.* - • - You give me more than
mougk. •> - How many coats have you ? - - I have sis
at the most. - - 1 shall endeavour to deserve your kind*
ness more and more* - - If i have done that to ob-
pour^p.
lige my frietid, 1 would much more so do it for my
relations.
farent^m*
ADVERBS.
PlutSty sooner.
Point du touty not at all.
a point Homme seasonably.
Tout a paint, in the nick of time.
a proposy seasonably.
Pourquoi ? or que ne ? why i
Depris, near, nearly, narrowly.
Dts a present, from this moment.
Presque, almost, hardly.
Presque jamais, hardly ever, (with ne before the verb.)
Presque lovjours, most commonly.
De propos deliheri, on purpose, purposely, deliberately.
Par casfortuit, by chance, accidentally.
Par derriere^ behind.
Par dessus le marchi,. into or over the bargain*
Par en bas, downward.
Par en haut, upward.
Par malice, through ill-nature, out of ill-nature.
Par megarde, unawares.
Par terre, upon the ground, down.
* Se« the rule page 63.
377
EXEECISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
My father arrived jesterday sooner than we ex-
"^ ne '
pected him. - - - Do you like that book ? JVo< at
alL - - - Ypu come very seasonably^ and your brother
came in the nick of time. - - He speaks little^ but he
fcM,adv.
speaks seasonably* - - - IVhy do yotS not learn your
4
lessons better? - - Why do not you come yourself?
- - Your dog is so snarling, thai (there is no) ap-
Aargncwa7,adj.
proaching him near. - - - He narrowly escaped
b^ing killed. - - - /n the, first place, I must tell
d*etre,v.
you, that 1 shall punish you, if you do not
behave better. - - From this moment I begin to
se Comporler^y. ^
believe that you are altered. - - You are almost
chart ge^p.p.
as tall as I am. - - He is hardly ever at home. - - We
chez lui.
dine most commonly between three and four o'clock.
en/re,p.
- - They killed him purposely. - - I met him by chance.
" - That has happened accidentally. - - He struck
. f rapper, Y.
his enemy behind. - - - He gave me three yards of
aunt
muslin into the bargain. - - Shall I begin dovm-
mousseline
ward or upward? Begin downward. - - He has
torn my book through iil^ature. - - If I ha^e
dechirer^y.
32*
S78
done him any harm, certainly I did it unawares. * -
du
I always find yQor books and hat upon the ground*
- • It was Peter who threw me down*
jetet,y. , ,
ADVERBS.
Quand? when?
Depuis quand? bow long is it since ?
Que? wh^f how? •
Quelquefoig^ sometimes.
a quoi bonf to what purpose?
Raremenl, seldom*
Da r^te^ y
a rebours, the wrong way*
i recutons^ backward.
* a la renverse, backward, upon one's back.
Ju or a rtz de chauss6e^ even with the ground.
Stns devani dtrriirt^ preposterously.
^ms dessus dessous, topsy-lurvy.
^eioussens, ? every way.
X)e tous US sens^ j '' '^
Separiment^ separately.
StulemenU only.*
jDe sangfroid^ in cold blood.
De suiie^ together, one after another.
^'"/«*f*'Uflerward.
Far la suiU^ J
Sur le champ^ directly, upon the spot.
Suremcrti^ safely.
EXERCISE VIH)!» THESiB ADVERBS.
Whtn shall i have the pleasure of seeing yotf? - -
J!fow fcng is it since you lived in London? - - Why do
a
♦ Only is often also M pressed, in French, by ne before the T«rb
— 4^4U afiei itg Uteii it b^ pomes » ci>njuoclion.
379
jou not come to see us sonutimes ? * • To what pur*
pou shall I write to him t - - He writes to me verj
nldom* ' ' As to the rtst^ do as jou please. - • You
vouloir^vSxxU
do (every thing) the varong way. - -. You bold your
book the wrong zoay* - - He fell upon his back, • - -
If you walk backward^ you will fall backward. - - Our
eating*room is even with the ground. - - You pul all
salle^
your things preposterously. - - She has left (every
thing) topsy-turvy. • - - You may find it every"
poutoir^y.
where. - - He defeated them separately. - - I only saw
him once. - - He committed (he murder in cold
meurlre^m.
blood. - - They go together. - - He will give you much
pleasure afterward. • - Do directly what I bid
dire^v.
you. - - We arrived safely.
ADVERBS.
Tant^ so much, so many.
Tant mieux^ so much the better.
Tant pis^ so much the worse.
Tantdt^ by and by, sometimes.
Tantdt — Tantot^ sometimes — sometimes.
T6t, >
Tot ou tard^ one time or other, sooner or later, soi^n or
late.
Tani soitpeu^ very little, ever so little.
Tard, late.
38Q
a Umpa^ time enough, in proper time.
Dt long'tempif^ for a long time, this long while.
De Umps en tmps, ) ^ ^ f ^.^^ ^^ ^^^^
De temps a autre^ 3 '
d tort^ wrongfully.
d tort ou a droit., right or wrong.
d tori et a trovers, at random.
Trop.^ loo much.
Toujours^ always, ever.
Pour toujours, for ever.
Tous Its jours, every day.
Tour a tour, by turns.
r<m/, quite^ wholly, thoroughly, entirely.*
Tout a coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once.
Tout has, softly, with a low voice.
Tout (Pun coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once.
EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS.
He has so much money, and so many goods,
that he does know what to do (with them.) - - -
*<^ en, pro.
(It is) so much the better for me, but it will be so
C^est,\\ ce
much the worse for you. - - My father will come back
revenir,y.
by and by. ^ - - Sometimes you write well, some*
times you write very badly. - - My father says I shall
soon go to France. - - Have patience, you will suc-
ceed one time or other* - - Tlie sun is the em-
blem of truth, which dispels, sooner or later, the
dissiper^W*
• This adverb takes the nature of a noun adjective, and becomes
declinable, in French, when placed before another adjective femiDiue
beginning with a consonant and an h mute : ex.
Cts femmtt paroissoient tout These women seemed quite fright-
tffrayttt tt iouits consitrnUs, eued and quite dismayed.
381
vapours of slander. - - Did h^ give you any meat 1
He gave me very little. - - You arrived lat$y but I
came in proper time. - - I have not (beard from) my
brother for a long time. - • Come and see us now and
then. - - - You accuse him wro»gfuUy. - - - Right or
wrong be will - speak, and always speaks al
vouloir^v.
random. - - Give him a little money, but never give
him too much. - - You always contradict me when I
speak. - - O my children ! be ever good, and you will be
ever happy. • • 1 bid you adieu /or ever. - - I go every
dire,v.
day to town. - - We will dance by turns. - - I am
quite tired with repeating the same things. • • My
de
sisters were quite transported with joy when they
de
beard the happy news of the victory. - - Misfortunes
come sometimes suddenly upon us. • - Speak softly.
- - - A storm arose suddenly^ and the sailors
s^clever^Y.
were quits frightened. >- - The ladies I saw at the
a
play were quite young and happy« • • He has more
brilliancy than solidity. - - • Science is estimable,
brillant solide.
but virtue is more so.
davantage^^dx.
382
ADVERBS.
Tout afaiU quite.
Tout a Pkeure^ this minute, presently.
Tout droits straight along.
Tout de borij In good earnest.
Tout de son long^ all along.
Toutfranc^ frankly, freely.
Tout haut^ aloud.
Tout outre^ through and through.
i^ lout bout dechamp,-)^^^^^^^
a tous coupSy J '^
a tous i^ards^ in all respects.
De tontes ses forces^ with all his or her miglit.
Par tout^ every-where.
Par tout OM, wherever.
a vide^ empty.
Auplus vite, with all speed.
Void, here is, behold.
Voild, there is, behold.
d vue d^ail^ perceptibly.
r, there, therein, within, thither.
EXERCISE UPOK THESf: ADVERBS.
You are quite altered. - - I will do it presently. - -
changi.
If you do not come this minute^ I shall go and
fetch you. - - Go straight along. - - Do you be-
c/iercAer,v.
lieve it in good earnest ? - - He was lain down all
coucAe,p.p.
along* - - He acts frankly^ and speaks aloud. - - He
ran him through and through^ - - Sh« speaks
percer^y.
393
at every turn, without knowing what she says. - -
sans^p. savoir^y.
Ske is better than her sister in all respects. - - He
struck me with all his might. - - I have (looked
frapper^y. cher^
for) you every-where. - - I will follow you wherever
cher.y.
you go, - - - Set out quickly. - - Her misfortunes
(by the fut,) malheur^m.
touch me to, the quick. -- The coach was returning
s'cn r6/owrner,v.refl.
empty. - - Go with all speed to Mrs. Lucas, and
chez^p.
tell her to come directly. - - Here is my room, and
de
there is yours. - - These children grow percep-
grandir^y.
tibly. - - Go thither instantly.
tout de suite^^dy.
SECT. VII.
OF PREPOSITIO^rS.
Prepositions are divided into the three following
classes. First, those that govern the genitive or abla-
tive case. Secondly, those that govern the dative.
And, lastly, those that govern the accusative.
First, the following govern the genitive or ablative.
Autour de^ about, roqud.
d cause de. because of, on account of.
a cause de vous^ de /ui, dV//e, de nous^ Sic. on your, his,
her, our, ^c. account.
a coli de^ aside, by.
d convert de^ free, secure, or screened from.
djleur de. close to, oven with.
a moins de, under.
364
aforct de^* by dint of.
a raisan cfe, at the rate of.
a Pabri Je, sheltered from.
a Pigal de, in comparison of.
a Pigard A, with regard, with respect, as to, concerniDg.
a lafavmr rfe, by means of.
a Pinsu de, without the knowledge of, unknown to.
a la fnaniire rfe, ) .^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ manner or fashion of.
a la mode ae, 5
KM a vi8 de^ 5
^"t^^?' J on this side.
^u de/rt de, on that side, on the other 8id6.
Jlu dehors de, out, without.
Au dessus de^ above, over, upon.
Au dessous de, under, below, beneath.
Au devani de, before.
jllUr au devani de, to go to meet.
Au derriire de, behind, in the back part.
Au dedans de, in, within.
Au lieu de, instead of.
Au milieu de, in the middle of.
Au prix de, en comparaison de, in comparison to.
Aux environs de, about, round about.
Ensuite dc, after.
FaiUe de, for want of.
a la hauteur de, (sea term,) off.
Hors de, out of.
Le long de, along.
Loin de, far from.
Pres or proche dc, ) „^^^ ^^ „• *, . ^.
/I V 5 '> near, or nigo, bVi
Aupres de, J ^ ^ j
Pour Pamour de moi, de hit, d^elle^ de voiis, &c. for my
sake, for his, her, your sake, ire.
Tout aupres ile, close, hard by.
a Pepreuve de, proof against, (able to resist.)
• This proposition is ftomelimes Englished by with : ex,-
XI phure a force de rire. He cries vrUh laughing.
385
BXERCiSE UPON THESE PREPOSITIONS.
Come ibis way ; we shall walk round the meadow. - -
prairie^f.
I have sent nothing to your brother because of his idle-
ness, but I forgive him on your account • • Sit down by
that lady's sister* - - Endeavour to set yourself
miUre^y.
free from blame. - - - We are not yet secure from all
danger. - - - Cut that sorrel even with the ground,
oseilk^t.
- - - He is become a very good master by dint of
study and practice. - - - He will not sell it tinder
vouloir^r.
twelve guineas. - • - My brother bought yesterday
twenty pair of silk stockings at the rate of fourteen
shillings and sixpence a pair. - - - Under that tree
Sous^ p.
we shall be sheltered from the rain. - - - Your horse
(is worth) very little in comparison o/" his. - - - WiOi
vahir^v*
regard to what you say, I do not mind it.
All *i / 1 . . 9<^^^cier,v. en
" - All the prisoners (made their escape) by means of
s^ichapper^y.
the darkness of the night. - - - Your brother is
obscuritcj,
gone to London zoithout the knowledge of your
mother. He (left off) Latin unknown to his
guitter^v»
father Now the English ladies (dress themselves)
- , „ . ^ s^habiller^v.
after the French fashion, . . Mrs. Tart lives in
dtfiHurer.y.
33 '
386
the Strand cDcr^gaintt CathartAe-street. - - We now
CalMrine
live on this side of the river. - - Do not you say that
demeurer
you met my father on the other side of the bridge ?
- - Why did you stay out of the house ? - - Afrs. A.
is very proud, she (thinks herself) above every body,
se croire
and consequently she (looks upon) every body as
rtgarder^ym
heneath her. - • Did you observe the elegant
remanpHr^y*
lady who ivas in the box below you ? - - There
fogc,f.
is a large tree before the house. * - I am
grand
going to meet my aunt, will you accompany me ? - >
My uncle has a rich plantation in the back
part of Virginia. - - There is a fine statue within the
f.
garden. - - He took my hat tn^ /«ad o/* his. - - Let us
go in the middle of the meadow. - - - My house (is
va-
good for) nothing in comparison of hers. - - He
/oiV,v.
walks two or three times a* day about the garden. - -
/(»V,f.
We drank tea, after which we went to
prendre^v* quoi.p ro.
the play. - - I can do nothing for want of money. - -
They were off the Cape of Good Hope when ihey
Cap.io* Espirance^i,
were taken. - - Do not push me out of the
;>ot4*5er,v.
• Remember the observations after the article tm, wic, a or aD,
at the bottom of page 48.
587
room. - - He is gone iifo»g the riv^r. We are sti*
/iir frtm our houte. - - 1 met your friend Mr. A.
fwar the church. - - My mothcF was buried nigfc this
marble pillar.* - - He passed hy me without knowing
5mw,p. connoilre
me. - - I do it for your sake as well as for iheint,
- - My best friend lives close to the Royal Exchaage^
demeurer Bourse^L
and he lived formerly close to Su James's palace. - -
The officers and soldiers were lodged in barracks,
caserne^i*
cannon and bomb-/)roo/l • - My shoemaker very
canon^m. bQm6e,f.pl.
much wanted to n^ake me a pair of boots water-
disireTyV. de
proof but I had not money enough to pay
;>wr,p,
him.
Secondly, the following govern the dative,
Conformiineni^ according, pursuant.
^jZ^^a, \ ^*'"* ""*"' ^^^" *^' ^« ''^^ ^«' *^-
Par rapport d, with respect to, on account of.
Quant d, as for, as to.
EXERCISE UPON THESE PREPOSITIONS.
A candid and sincere man always speaks and acts
according to what he thinks. » - He has been punished
pursuant to an act of parliament. - - Yesterday we
parlement^m.
(waited for) him till five o'clock (in the) morning. • -
du
• Up r«le, |>age 44.
388
^fbey feogbt with ebfttinacy on both sides until the
de$ deux
beginning of ihe night. * - If I had not stopped him,
«n/rce,f.
he would have good even to Dover* - • We accompa*
ttrt
(lied them as far as Rochester, and they pursued
their way to Canterbury. - - I will do it zoith respect
chemin
to you, but never on account of them. - • As for me
1 will not give him a penny. ^ • As for us we were
soti,m.
(very much) dissatisfied, I assure you. - • As to what
ires
people may say, I do not (care for) \U
gen5,pl. pouvoir^v. (ful.) se soucier de,v.
Thirdly, the following require the accusative.
Apris^ after.
jyapresf after,* according to.
Avant^ before.
Avtc^ with.
d travers^ cross, through.
Chez^ in, to, at, among*
Chez mot, chez <of, chez /ut, chez e//e, chez nousj Stc* at or
to my, thy, his, her, our, ^c. house.
Oonlre^ against.
Dansj in, into, within.
Z)«, about, through.
Depuis, since, from.
Derriere^ behind.
jDe5, from*
Devant^ before.
De dessusy from the top.
De dessous^ from under, from beneath.
Durante during.
• We mnke use of this preposition in the sense of afttr ia the fol-
lowing diction and others similar :
nn^ d^aprh un bon maiire^ He paints after a good muster.
J5n, in, into, like, as a, at.
Entrtj between.
Enters^ towards, with regard to.
Environ^ about.
Exeept6^ >
Hors^ > except*, but, save.
Hormis^ 3
Moytnnant^ for, provided.
^al^i'^^'X notwithstanding, in spite of.
Ovctre^ beside.
Par^ by, through.
Par deqa^ on this side.
Par dtld^ on that side.
Par dtrriire, behind.
Par dessus, above, over.
Par dessoHs^ under, below.
Parmi^ among. -
Pendant, during, for.
Pour, for.
Sans,^ without.
Sauf, saving, but with.
S0U8, under.
Sur^ upon, about.
Touchant, concerning, about.
Versy towards, to.
EXERCISE UPON THESE PREPOSITIONS.
He arrived here an hour after ypu. - • Miss A.
paints after nature. - • According to her assertion, it
is false. - - Let me drink before you. - - Did you
Lat5«6r,v.
not see her walk with her father f ... It was
Ce
the ancient Britons, who cut a road through
Breton, chemin^m.
this roountaiD. - • - Such was the custom among the
33*
3W
Romans. - • I was going to your Tunuc : but ds I kave
met jou, we will go to my house, where we shall dine*
- - Do not lean against that wall. - - Gro and
s^appuyer^v. mi/r,m. «o»
take a walk in the garden. - - I am going into ony
/aire un tour
room. - - (Keep joursell) wilhin the limits of de-
Se /«ntr,v. borne
cency. - • I spoke to your father about your affairs. - •
His father died through grief. • - I have not (heard
from) her since her departure. - - Go into my room }
you will find a letter behind the looking-glass »
mtVotr^m.
(be so kind as) to bring it to me. - - Fronh this mo-
avoir la bonti de
ment I believe you. - - Do not put yourself before
me. • - We saw the camp/rom the top of the bill. - -
I saw lifrom under a tree. • - He behaved well during
your absence. - • My sister is in England. • - He be-
haved like an honest man in that affair. - • He acts as
a tender father who loves you. - * Tell nobody what
passed between you and me. - - Be not unjust towards
se passer
your neighbours. - - It was about four o'clock when
proc/tatn,m.sing.
we (set out.) • - Take all that you please excqtt my
voulairj(^(uU)
sword. - - I give you all my books, but the History of
391
It
FrtBca. • - They were all drowned xooc my frleiid* • ••
He will do it for two guineas, * « I ^alk every day
noiwithslar^ing the had weather. • - I. hope you will
succeed in your undertaking in 5pt7e o/* Mrs. Slander.
riussir
• • Beside his own money, he spends all his sister's*
- - It is said that Gibraltar is (blocked up) (y land
hloqutr^v.
and &y sea. - - I have passed through France and
Italy. - - We have passed through Germany. - - He
Alkmagnu
lives on this side^ and his brother on that side of
London. - « *He is a coward who attacks his enemy
behind. - - Let us see whether you can jump over
««»c. sauter^v.
the table. - - Look under the door, and you will see
it. - - Envy, jealousy, and slander, always reign
nUdiaancejf.
among authors. - - What have you done during my ab-
sence ? - - 1 have (been expecting) you for a long time.
- - Your aunt has seht me some books for you. - - -
Without him what could 1 have done ? - • A woman may
pouvoir
please vsithout tbeauty, but she cannot succeed without
virtue.t • - He always (goes out) withoui me. - - The
army marched three days and thrie nights tvilhout
stopping. - - He (carried away) all my furniture, smiing
s^arreter. meubles^m.fL
• S«e page 106. i Uae no article.
S&2
mj hid. - - Da I not \Wt* aeeorUng to the mla
regk,{.
which you have preacribed ? • - I found your buckle
prescrtre,y» boucUfh,
under the chair. - - - Yoa said yea had left it upon
chaist^f. laisterjYm
the table. - - How could I lend you a guinea ? 1 had no
money about me. — Did not my brother write to yoa
concerning that aSkir? - « It was towards the evening
Ce
when he arrived.
gti€|C.
OBSERVATIONS on some PREPOSITIONS.
Above. This preposition, when preceding a noun
expressing time or nufn6er, so as to signifjr more than
or longer than^ is to be rendered in French by plus de:
ex.
Le . cmnbat dura plus de The fight lasted above
deu9i hewnn^ two hours.
EXERCISE. XSFOn ISIS PREPOSITION.
My brother was not Above twenty years old, when
he (was married). - - He made .us wait above a week. - •
se marier.
My father's ' country-house is ^very handsome, but it
coats him above six: thousand pounds. • • In the last
sea-fight which took place between the French and
avoir lieu
the English, above twelve hundred men p[erished in
the action '.(qn th^) side of the French^ aod the
da
* Sf^e the N. B^ before the Exercises upon the fir&t.CoDjjogatfon,
v>aG:e 178. Vtvrey means, to live, to ezist^ Demeurtr^ nueans, to liTe,
reside.
393
EngliBb. took ahofu Siteen sfaipt of the liae* « • It k
above a year since my cousin set off for Jamaica.
que partir^y* Jamnnqat^f.
At is most commonly rendered by a, and some-
times by one of the French articles ati, d. /a, a P, aux^
according to the gender and number of the noun fol-
lowing : ex.
Koiu itioM a diner^ We were at dinner*
EUe est a la mautm^ She is at home*
Iljoue bien aux carUs^ He plays well at cards.
EXEECISB UrON THIS PREPOSITION*
If you be at Rome, live as they do at Rome* - -
vivre en.
We will (get }ip) next week at six o'clock* - - When I
se Itver
called upon. Mn B. he was at breakfast. - - (Every
passer chtz
thing) I have is at your service* - • My brother is ol
Mr. H's. academy* - - Were you at Mrs. C's* ball last
week ? - - Yqp always travel by night at the peril of
your life* • • I will pay you at the end of the year. - •
My mother is ai the height of happiness* - • He plays
comb/e,m.
very well at chess, and his companion begins
ichtcsym.^X.
to play a little at draughts* - • He did it at the insti-
i2ames,f.pl*
gation of his friend*
After nmms or verbs denoting angtr^ derisUm, joj/y
provocation^ resentment^ sorrow^ surprise^ or concern^ at is
rendered by one of the following articles, de^ dti, de la^
de r, des : ex*
394
/{ H moque A vMtt, He laughs at you*
Je nu rejouis de voire I rejoice at your good
hovAniry ' lock.
Jioua fumnus surpria de ce We are surprised at what
que vous diUs^ you say.
llXEftCISt UPON THE SA8t£ PREPOSITION,
Exasperated at his conduct, he told bipi never te
/rrt/<,adj. dt
laugh at poor people. - - We always (ought to) rc-
se maquer^ devoir
joice at the good ^o^tufne Vbich befalls our neigh*
arriver^v.a
hours. - - I arti vexed at the news which we received
J&ch6
last week. - - A good Christian never shows any re-
sentment at the injuries which are ofiered to him. - •
/aire
He always smiles at (every thing) which is said. - • A
ttrnt
patient man never grieves at his misfortunes. - •
s*attri$ter^*
I cannot help being surprised at her manner
s^ifnpSchtr^v.de
of answering. - - I am concerned at the loss which
fd€h6
you sustained in your trade. * • He was so mortified
egsuyer^v, eommerce^m»
at the disobedience of his sons, that he died through
de
grief.
jft IS rendered by chfz^ when, in English, ft precedes
the word house^ either expressed or understood, and the
same rule is ;o be observed with respect to the prepo-
sition to : ex.
JUioKschez voire frere^ I was n^your brother's*
/r vaU chta Madame I am going to MrSi
Lucae^ Lucas\
3l|A
KZBItCllSE P^ON TBS SAME PREPOSITIONS.
I called upon Miss Brown this morniiig, as I liad
passer chez
promised your mother^ but she was not at home. • -
a
Where was she then ? She was at her aunt%k • - I
done f ^
thought my friend was at his father's, but I mistook^
se tfwnper
for he was at his uncIe^s. - • How long have you heeii
car
at Wc. H's* ? - - We lodge al my friend^s; but We board
manger
at the pastry-cook's. - » If you go to my brother, tell
him to come to my cousin's, where I (am to) spend
de ... passerby*
the day, and we will go together lo his friend's.
By, when preceding a numeral adjective immeJiatelj
followed by another adjective expressing the dimtmion
or superficies of an object, is rendered in French by sur,
and when it precedes a verb in the participle active, it
is then rendered by en : ex.
Cetle chanibre a dix pieds This room is ten feet
de longueur sur sept tt long by seven and half
derm de largeur^ wide.
En agissant ainsi^ vous By acting thus, you will
vous ferez des enruniisj get enemies.
EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION.
My box is a foot and a half deep by two wide and
four long. • - The general (drew up) his army in order
ranger^v, en . '
of battle, on a plain three miles long by two
i
and half wide. - -^ - Oor (acbool-roooi) at Alfred
ecoU^L
H«a»e, CamberweUi if forty feet long hj
tbirtj-ftiz wide, and our garden contains above
4m acre of land. - - You will soon ipeak Freocii
by applying so. - - Yoi^r faitber sets a considerable
M^appliquer fairt^y.
fortune 6y buying cheap and selling dear. - - Hen
acquire learning hy working and not ly sleeping. • •
Water bellows a stone, not hy falling with force,
creurer,T.
but fty failing often ; so men become learned, not
hy studying witb force, but 5y studying often.
fiy, after tbe verbs io stll^ to 6iiy, to work, and the
like, preceding a noun of weight or measure^ day, M
numth^ oryeor, is rendered into French by £, au, a fa,
d r, aux^ according to the gender and number of tbe
following noun : ex.
Je ne vends rien a la I sell nothing by the
livre, pound.
// ackeie toujours a Patine, He always buys by the ell.
J^ou9 travaillons k I'Aetire, We work by the hour, or
ou a la joumie^ by the day.
EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION.
Always buy tea by the pound, and never by the
ounce, you will grl it cheaper. - - I never buy my
avoir
cloth by the ell, but by the piece. - • It is a sad thing
to buy coals by the bushel. - - How do you sell yonr
de
brandy ? We sell it by the gallon, and not by lh«
bottle/ *^ - H« ^cH« fak irtne iy Ae ^sea. * * - 1 p«II
i§gi hy ihe himirifd, and chcsirats iy the qtiarter.
- - How dkif 7<m measure ycwr cambrk ? 6y the cit,
or iy the yard? - - Da ycm buy cidfer iSy the hogsfcead,
tonneau^mB
ct ty iht pipe f - * Does your father work by the
fl^eek or tfce monftb f - - Ro, Sir, he works by (he year.
Wefl J r alwajs thought he worked by the piece.
By, immedfately following the verbs io kitt^ to wound^
to knock down, and the like, is made into French, by
cPun coup de^ when it expresses the effect, blow, thrust,
stroke, firing,&c. of an instrument by which a man was
either killed, wounded, fee. provided the blows have
not been repeated : if the blows have been repeated, we
make use of a coups <fe, in which case it is most com-
monly rendered in English by with: ex.
II fut blessS d*un coup de He was wounded by an
Jleche, arrow.
Ila Passommerent a coups They knocked him down
dc bdlon^ with a stick.
EXERCISE UP0!» THESE PREPOSITIONS.
Achilles was killed (at the) siege of Troy by an
AchiUe au Troie
arrow, which Paris, king Prlam^s Son, (let fly)
dicocher^y.
at his heel.* (Unable to) catcl the thief,
(aion,m. M'epouvoir a</ra|l0^«
they knocked* him^ down* with sticiis.. « ^ « At last
£n/in,adv.
4hc king, having broke his battle-axe ai^d sword
♦ Sec rutee, pages 101 aad 401.
34
99*
was (knocked down) iy m 6toM^ and laleeo . prboMr*
renversiyp»p. fait^p.p»
- * - WDIiam the Sectmd was killed In/ aa arrow in tht
New-Forest. - • - My brother was wounded by a gon,
and my cousin was killed hjf a cannon-balL - • Edward
bouht de canon,ai.
the First was wounded in Palestine mtk a poisoned
f.
dagger. • - * He is so strongi that wUh bis fist he
pmgnardytn,
coald kDOck down an ox. - • - He threw my brother
dosrni and almost killed bim with his feet. - ^
par terre,
They killed him not with stones, but with arrows. • -
The soldiers kill one another voith bayonets, and the
se tuer
officers with sabres and swords. - - He killed his dog
with kicks. - - The city of Vera Cruz has been destroy-
ed by cannon-shot.
For^ after reflected vtrbs^ as also those which denote
thanksgivings &c. is rendered by one of the following
articles, d«, du, de la^ de T, des : ex.
Je me rijouis du service 1 rejoice for the senrice
^^f/ vous a rendut ei jt which he has done to
Pen remercierai dematn, you, and will thank bim
to-morrow ybr it«
EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION.
I am very grateful for all the kindness
re^onnoMfan^adj. bon^^,f.
you have bad for me. - • He is very sorry /or the
SM
gdef lie has cattsed you. • * When we have reached '
atUindre^v,
Ike age of reason, we are often sorry, but too late,
for iH^ time we lost when we were young. • - My
brother desired me to. thank you for the part you
de
took 10 his troubles. - - Every one leaped for joy,
peine^(. tressaillir
when the happy news of peace arrived. - - A child
who cares little for the author of bis life,
se soucier^y. jot«rs,m.pI.
is an unnatural being. - - An ODgrateful 8on will be
(fena/ii r6,adj,
punished (one time or other)/or his ingratitude.
From^ preceding the name of a man or toomatts or one
of the personal^ possessive^ relative^ or interrogathe^ pro-
nouns, after the verbs to go^ to come^ to sendj &c. is gen-
erally rendered in French by de la part de^ or de ma, de
5a, de not re part, de votrepart^ &c.: ex.
Jlllez^ de ma part chez Go from me to Mr. D.
Mons. D.
Je viens de sa part, I come from him or her.
EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION.
Go from me to Miss Dunkin's and tell her I shall
hd
be glad to see her: do, stop a little, tell her that
de . >-
you come from my cousin, who has something very
pretty to show her. - - From whom do you come ?
'said she^ to me>. - - Madame, replied I to her, 1 come
riplifuet^y.
from my parents, . who sent me. • - Well, answered
pire et mire
4G0
•hOf aoj oue is alwajn welcome, who comes /rom
them* - - Send from me io Mr. Lucas, and let him
fairt
JiBOw that I am (very much) vexed at the letter I
tris dt
receiTed from him ; i never could have ei^pected
s^attendre^y.
,to receive such an affront /romisdi old acquaintance.
a eonnoissanuf*
In requires eome attention from tbe learner, who is
to observe that dan» is followed by the article, a pro-
noun, or any word which may define tbe noun, when, on
the contrary, m seldom admits of the article, whether
expressed in English or not : ex.
n est dans la maison^ He is in the house.
JSlie est en AngUterrty She is in England.
EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION.
He always keeps himself (shut up) in his room. - -
Take all the linen which I shall want in our jour-
linge^m*
ney, and put it into my box. - - Walk* into the parlour.
- - We livie in the county of Surrey. - - Is there a good
Are in the room ? - • Ovid, one of the finest poets of
the Augustan age, expired in the seventeenth
jcar of our Lord, at Tomi, near Yarna. - - Is
your sister in France f - • No, madam, she is in
* To walk or sitp Mo is tranilated by entrer followed by dms ia
French ; but to wUk or take a walk Is #e jirememr.
401
Spain. • « How long do you intend to stay in town f - -
Sir, do you keep house 2 - - No, we live fri
(ready furnished) lodgings. - - When we are in
gamt,adi. chambre^f. on
peace, people talk of war j and when in war, thry
on on
talk of peace. * - Your eldest son behaved {like a)
en
hero. - - If my son behave like an honest man,' I shall
act towards him as a tender father. - - /n what does
human happiness consist ? - • If you wish to be happy
and esteemed in this world, live like a man of
honour and probity. - - lie walks in the garden with
his friend. - - He is gone to spend the winter in
Italy. • • The American' navy' officers^ have acted
marine
like heroes.
/n, after words denoting pain^ hurting^ or wminding^
and preceding one of the possessive pronouns in con-
junction with anj part of the body, is to be rendered by
one of the following articles, d, ati, a la^ a T, aux, and
the possessive pronoun left out 5 and when in precedes
a noun denoting a part of time, it is not to be expressed
in French : ex.
// lloit bless6 au bras et He was wounded in his
mn a la jambe^ arm, and not in his leg.
Vous le trouverez ioujmirs You will always find him
ihtz lui le mating at home in the morn*
ing*
34*
im
EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION* ^
Mj brother has constantly (a pain) in his head, and
I have Tery often a pain in my teeth. - « Never e^it
any fruit which is not ripe, for there is nothing
more apt to give you a pain in your stomach. - • My
companion, by jumping over a form, (fell dowo),
6aRC,m. tomber;^*
and was much hurt in the shoulder. - - Your brother
was wounded in the arm, but not dangerously, and
my cousin was mortally wounded in the head. • -
My master comes generally in the morning. - - I will
call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening go
to the play.
On or upon. This preposition is rendered by de after
the verbs to dtptnd^ to live^ to mbsisty and the like ; sod
by one of the followipg articles, de, du, de to, dt f, dtt^
after the verb to play ^ preceding the name of an instru*
ment : and before the days of the week and the names
of the mouth, preceded by a numeral adjective the
above preposition must not be expressed : ex.
// vii de pain et d'eati, He lives on bread and
water.
Voui jouez du violon^ et il You play on the vioUo»
jotie de la^ibl/e, and he plays on the
flute.
Cela arrioa le dix-huii du That happened on the
most dernier^ eighteenth of last moatbi
4dt
BXSRCISK UPOir THIS P|iW08l9IOT»
We all depend vptm divine mercy. • • A
mi$iricord^f.
good end generally depends an a good beginning. « -
Men do not live only on bread and meat, but on the
grace of Qod. •« * Birds subsist tipon what they can
cateb. - - Wtiat do you live upon^ you who never eat
any meat ? - - In winter 1 live on milk and vegetablesy
and in summer I live upon bread and butter, cheese, and
all sorts of fruits. - • Upon what instrument does your
fcister play ? - - She plays very well on the harpsichord,
and she is now learning to play on the harp. - - Come
on Friday early, and I will go to see you on the Saturday
following. • - Why did you not play on the violin on
Wednesday lastf - • On June the eighth, 1376, died
Edward, prince of Wales, the delight of the
(in the pL)
nation, in the forty-sixth year of bis age. - - On the
third of June, 1664, the English obtained a great vtcto*
remporier^y.
ry over the Dutch o& Harwich, took eighteen
9ur. Hollandois^m*
ships, and destroyed fourteen more.
Over. Thi» preposition is commonly rendered io
French hy sur} but it must be rendered by tbe partici*
pie passive of the verbs ^ntV, passer ^ achevw, when it
denotes an action ended $ ex.
404
n a Pavmtage tur vavt, He bas the advantage
over you.
Voire frere pariit des qu€ Your brother set out as
lapluiejutp^s66ef • soon as the rain wa9
over.
Le dtner est-il fini ? Is dinner c^er f
EXERCISE OPON THIS PREPOSITION.
A coach passed aver bis bodj and killed him* • •
Tttllia, Tarquinius' wife, the unnatural daughter
Tarquin d6natur6,aSj*
olf Servius, king of Rome, ordered her coachmafi
ordonner d
to drive over the dead bodj of her father. - • In
de passerby*
going to London, did you go aver Westminster
passerby.
bridge ? - - Yes, but in coming back I passed mr
Blackfriars bridge. - • They dissolved the armj
disperstr^y.
as soon as it iras resolved that the campaign was
ever. - - In France they drink coffee as sood as
on prendre le
dinner is oroer. - - You may go and walk when
(by the fut.) ^
the rain is oroer. - - They fought well, and the
(by the fut.)
battle was soon over.
WiOi is rendered by *c?fln#, wheii it is used before
nouns denoting the purpose, design, or motive of the
agent : ex.
// le fit dans PaUente dfilte He did it with sn ex-
hkn ric^mpenei^ peclation of being we»
rewarded.
«lf
SXERCISE UPON THIS PREP08IT101I.
He poisoned his brotlier with the hope of
empoisonntr^v*
iDberiting his estates* - - Mj brother is gone to
hifiitr^y^di 5ten,in.
your house mth the design of scolding yon
gnmdtr^Vm
iwdU * - He who beats another with Che intention of
killing him, is a murderer (at the) bottom of bis
au
heart* • - He did it vnih the intention of pleasing
jou, and not with any design of hurting you. - - I
went last week to Mr. Olympus, with the expecta-
tion of receiving the money which 1 lent him a
month ago, but he was not at home. - - I live mih
the hope of receiving it (one time or another)* - -
He said so mih a design of deceiving yon, if he
could.
With fluist be made by JU after the following
verbs, to starve^ to dit^ to do^ to dispense^ to meddle^
to encompass^ to load^ to cwtr^ to »trike^ and those
denoting fulntts : likewise after the^ following adjec-
tives, amorcuSf charuud^ pleased, ditpliusid^ mdowedi
^c. ex*
Elle meurt de froid et de She dies with cold and
/(Bfim^ hunger*
Jt suis content de ce pu I am pleased wUk what I
fm^ ' liave.
49$
BZERCISE UPON THB SAME PREPOSITION.
Lazy people (ought to) die with hunger and
devoiryV*
cold. - - The winter was so severe, that I was djing
TDtth cold. - - Tbey are so rich^ that they do hot know
what to do wit^ their money. - - I hope you will dis-
jfue «4>«
pense me vitk that disagreeable (piece of work).
besogne,f.
- - Do not meddle otA my afiairs, meddle zcith jour
own. • It is reported on all sides that that city (is to) be
encompassed w^ walk. •> - Do you see that waggon t
It is loaded zoiih goods. - - Do you wish your bouse
que
be covered zoith slates or tiles t • He was overwhelmed
soUfV* tuiUjL . accabUjStdy
with grief. - - The enemy, struck with terror and
astonishment, ran away. - • Honour me with your
commands. - - I have filled my cellar with good beer
and excellent wine. - - Narcissus, seeing himself in a
Narcisst
clear fountain, fell (in love) with hia own
<kvenfr,v. amourettx,adj.
person. • - I am charmed wUh the agreeable company
of your sister. - - As to us, little satisfied wiik his
answers, we took oMier measures. • • Are you not
407
pleased with the behaviour of your son Thomas ? • *-
You would be wrong to be dissatisfied. lojA
avoir tort^ de mecon(en<,adj.
him, for he behaved (like an) honest man in
se conduire^y. tn
that affair, and be is endowed with many good*
dou^.adj*
qualities. - - The man who meddles wt<& nobody^
affairs, but quietly lives in peace, seldom makes
himself enemies.
With is rendered by emirt after words denoting
anger or passion : and before nouns denoting the
matter^ imtrxwunts, tools, or ezpi'essing how and in
what manner a thing is done or made, it is rendered by
one of the following articles, d, au, a la, a T, aux, ac-
cording to the gender andif number of the following
noun : ex.
Madame voire mere est tres^ Your mother is very angry
fdchee contre vous, toith you.
Une table a (tVotV^, A table with drawers.
Dessiner au crayon, a la To draw with a pencil,
crate, with chalk.
Se battre a Vep6e^ au pis* To fight with swords, with
tolelj pistols.
£XEBCIS£ UPOir THE SAME VREPOSITIOV*
My brother was in^. such^ a passion^ with me, that I
si (Oico/Ire
thought he would have beaten me. - • I believe what
croire,y*
you say, but I was very angry with her when she
told me she would not do it. - * I live near the river,
4M
wai if 700 witt coiM to tee me, we will f sh znAr a
vou/otV,v.
Ml o» a line. - - Voiir biMlMf md ny eoma
idigM frflfr 6Bbre» aad putols ; tb« fonner was
singt» MOg.
liModect ia- bis thigh, ani the latter in bis side. • -
My howe be» been b^llt ukh Ikne and sand. • - Did
Mfi» ArfoM sfaow you He picture sli^ baa draws
with India ink ? • - No, but she ahowed me taer
aaolbcor^i^ pictuffardana wkh chalky I assure yoo tt> is
CToyoftifVnm
wry lilie. - • Do notiga scaear that waH, it is newlj
r$ne»Miimiy9iij* micr,ni.
paiatfid »ift (white lead^ • « I bought a penknife zoiA
two blades. - - Tlie Americans foaght bravely
lame. st hatire
«i#A ibe Eagiish at New-Qrleans.
Jfo>uv€lk
Wiih'ifi not to be expressed after some verbs, sucb as,
to meet with^ io trust wilh^ <o suppltf with^ to reproach vnthf
&c. It is likewise to be suppressed where it expresses
the situation^ position^ &(*• of a person, or wiien it is used
in the sense of havings holdings &c. : ex.
// a essuyi bien des cha* He has met with many
grins^ troobhes^
J^Tous lui foumirons kfui ce We will supply him wiA
dont il aura besoin^ every thing he may want.
II se promine toujours un He always walics mA a
Hvre a lit mainy book in his band, tfeat
is, havir^ or holding a
409
EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION.
He met with (so maDy) mortifications from his
essuyeryV*
sons, that through grief he fell ill and died
de tomber^y.
almost with despair. - - - When you meet
de renconirer^r.
a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty,
but endeavour to furnish him with the means
f7ioyen,m.
of emerging from his misery. - - I have trusted Mr.
soriir^y*
N. with my son^ education, with the utmost coti-
fideiice that he will answer my expectation. - - Th^
New River supplies London with all the water which
the inhabitants stand in need of« - - I reproached
avoir besoin^v.
her with her ingratitude towards her benefactors. - • '-
He always walks round his garden with a stick in his
&^on,m.
hand. - - Never speak to any body mth your hat on
k a
your head. - • He is represented on horseback, toith
a sword in. his right-hand and a horse • pistol
V6p6$ argan pisiohty m*
in his left.
gauc/Ke,adj.
With(3ui {sans): this preposition is sometimes ex-
pressed (in English) by the imperfect or compound of
the imperfect of the verb to ie, preceded by the con*
junction i/*, and sometimes by but for: ex.
35
410
Sans vous, je ne sais ct que If it were not for you^ I do
jt devkndrois^ " not know what would
become of me.
Sans lui, mon frcre auroit Had it not been for him^
itipuni^ my brother would have
been punished.
Sans elle, je serois tnori de But for her^ I should have
fainij starved.
EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION.
Without the assistance of the divine Providence,
secours^m*
what are we? What are we capable of? - - - Accord-
ing to what you tell me, and what I have heard,
entendre;v*
she has (a great deal) of wit and merit ; and, but for
that large scar which she has in her fore^
grand^^dj. cicatrice^f*
head, she would be very handsome. * • - Had it not
been for the help of good and honest people, what
could you have done t- - If it had not been for me,
he never would have paid you. - - Were it not for rich
and charitable persons, what would become of the
poor and needy ?- - Our neighbour fell into the river,
voisin^m.
and but for my father, who was passing that way, be
would have been drowned* - - Were it not for emula*
se noycr,v.refl.
tion, (every thing) would languish in the world*
tout
411
SECT. VIII.
OF CCWJ[7JVCr/0JV&
Most of the conjuDctioDs are adverbs and preposk
lions, but always attended by de or que. They have
been divided into copulative^ comparative, disjunctive^ ad*
versative, casual, dubitative, exceptive^ conditional^ continu'
ative^ conclusive, &LC. Instead of following this arrange-
ment, it will be of more importance for the scholar to
understand, that different conjunctions require different
states of the verb. Some require the following verb in
the infinitive mood^ others in the indicative^ and others
again in the subjunctive*
These require the following verb io the infinitive
mood*
Afin de, in order to. —
a worn* de, or ) „,^^^^
a moms que de^ y ,
Avant que de,* J
^u lieu de, instead of.
^ecr«.««ede,or)f f f
Depeurdej S
Excepts de, except to.
Faute de, for want of.
Jusqu^a^ to that degree that, till.
Loin de, far from.
Plutot que de, rather than.
EXERCISE UPON THESE CONJUNCTIONS.
In order to learn well, we must study with (a
on devoir,v.
great deal) of attention. - - It will be impossible for
you to learn French unless you be diligent. - - Let us
de
* This is now little used.
413
breakfast be/ore we begin (anj thing)* - • A prudent
rien
man (ought to) think several timesi be/ore he acts. —
agir.y.
He is gone to churcli. msttad of coming with us. - - •
1 would not do it for fear of displeasing yea. - - He
19 capable of (every thing) except of doing good. - •
tout
Par want of sending for a surgeon in
envoyer cherchtr^v. chirurgien^m. i
time, he lost his arm. - - . He carried his inso*
pmisser^v,
lence to that degree that he spoke injurious words
c?»r«,v. parole,!.
to him. • - Your cousin has humbled himself, <t8
s^humiiier^Y*
he fell (on his) knees before the idoL - - Far frm
a
exciting them to fight, I did all that I could in ordtr
a
to prevent them. - - She would do (any thing) (in the)
tout ou
world rather than speak to him. - • Rather than studj,
be loses bis time, or spends it in trifles.
passer
The following require the verb in the indicativi mooi*
Ainsi que* as.
Tout ainsi qucy * just as.
Apris quBy* softer that, after.
acameqiie,\ u__.p
Parte que, J ^^c^^se-
d ce que, according as, or to*
d condition que, on, or upon condition that.
a mesure que, * in proportion as, as.
Jiu lieu que, whereas.
* See the rale, page 4)7.
413
Dis le fn<munt que, * the momeDt thaf.
Jlussi long-Urns qut, * as long as.
^tjusi loin que, * as far as*
Aussitoi que, ^
D^ahbrd que, f # ^. „^^„ ^^
T\> * ' >*a8 soon as.
jJts que, C
Sitdt que, J
Attendu que, considering that, seeing that.
Comme, or ) „,
En taut que, $ ^^'
Defagon que, ^
De maniire que, f
De sorte que > in such manner that, so that, so*
Si bien que, i
Tellement que, ^
Depuis qu§, ever since, since*
Puisque^ since.
De mime que, even as.
JD^ou vient que, how comes it to pass that, why.
Lorsque, ) * .
Quand, 5 ^'^®"-
Mais, but.t
Outre que, beside that.
a peine — ^ue, •hardly, scarcely — but, or when.
P'^dantque,^^ ...
Tandis que, 5 ^'^"^*
Peul'itre que, perhaps.
Tant que, '^ as long as.
Que — de — ne, than, only.
Autant que,* as much as.
t This conjunction, when beginning a sentence, is always render-
ed by mau. In the middle of a sentence, th? word but as on^ is
always rendered by ne before the verb, and que after it: ex.
Je n'ai parli a totre ffltt que I have spoken to y6inr brothef
dtuxfoU, but twice.
36*
414
D^avdant ^ue, whereas, for so much as^ since.
EPautant plus — q%u^ so much the more, the more,— as.
Taut 9«e, for all that.*
Toutefois^ yet, nevertheless*
TouiesUsfois que^ every time, as often as, whenever.
Sinon que^ except that.
Si, if, in case, whether. (Were /, Si J'etois.)
EXERCISE UPON THESE CONJUNCTIONS*
I called at your sister^s, as you had desired me.
passerby* prier^v*
- - 1 punish you as you deserve (it). - - jljler you
were gone, I began writing. • - I love you becam
you behave better than your brother. - - - According
as I see, you are very well. - - He will write to you,
on canditum that he shall speedily receive
pronfiptement^zivm
your answer. " • ' In proportion as we study, wc
become learned. - - A skilful gardener pulls up
habile arrachery^
weeds as they grow. - - - Your brother
mauvaise herbe^L crottre^v.
learns his lessons, tohereas you do nothing. - - 7%(
moment that I saw you, I knew you again. • - I did
not stay in Italy, as long as you did. - • I followed biffl
(with my) eyes as far as I could. ^ ^ As soon as ihey
des
Jad taken the general, the army surrendered. - * Wby
£d you give it. to him, considering that you hdi
promised it te me? - • I did not come to see yoti)
* 8ee ihe rule, page 132.
415
steing Ih&t I did not know that you were ill* • • -
You (look at) me, as if I bad taken your book. • *
regarder^y^
I win lend you ray horse, a$ you are my friend. - *•
So you will not come when I call you t - • • He
beat him so that he almost killed him. - • •
Your mother is quite altered, sinct I saw her
chang£^p»p.
last. - • - - You must stay at home, since you
demierementj^dv. au logts,
are not well. - - The thing happened even as I had
foreseen it. - - How comes it to pass that^ I have not
seen your friend until now ? - - Why, in proportion as
we grow older, do we not grow wiser ? - • - When
devenir^W
you are going to undertake an affair of importance,
«o»
permit me to tell you, that you (ought to) consult
de
your friends before you begin it, When she had
to*
done speaking* she (fell asleep). - • Did you not see
s^endormir;\\
Mr. Brown this morning ? - - Yes, hut I could not speak
to' him. - - • Sometimes those who meddle with our
affairs hut to serve us, are those who do us most
pour u plus
harm. - - - The misfortunes of others seem to us
tort^m. sembler^v»
hut a dream in comparison to our own. * - - if you
songe^m*
416
could give me but half of the money you owe me^ I
shoald be (very much) obliged to you. - - - Beside ihat
he does not apply as be should, be is often absent
refl.
from school. - - - We were hardly arrived, when it
began to rain. - - - While jou lose your time, your
a
brother improves fast Play on the harpsichord,
beaucoup^^dv* clavedn^m.
while I write my exercise. - - Perhaps the master will
forgive me. • - Though you should cheapen for
marchander.y*
two hours, I could not abate sixpence. - - Our father
punishes and rewards us according as we deserve. - - -
le
Speak as long as you please, I will not :grant you
what you ask me. * - He had rather do harm
atmer^y. niteux,adv.
to his companions them (be doing) nothing. - • - If
faire^v.
you loved to study, as much as you love to play, I
a
should have (no occasion) to complain. • - I avoid
auc^m sujet^m* iviter^v.
slanderers, as mudi as I fear them.* - - - You may
midisani^m.
believe me, for so much as I was present when he
said so. - - This proceeding was the more extraor*.
dinary, as it was contrary to the laws of the king*
dom. - - The belief of another life appears to
croyance^f^
413
me 80 much iht more conformable to truth, its it in
the more necessary to virtue. - v^Virtue reigns $o
much the more sovereignly, as it does not reign by
force and fear. - • For all that be is rich, I cannot
esteem him. - - ^ Ail men (seek after) riches, and
recher cherry,
yet we see few rich men happy. - - I see the king and
queen every time I go to Windsor. -> • He interrupts
me 08 often ae I speak. • - Whenever I go to London, I
meet him. - - She said nothing to me except that it
was impossible (for her) to do what you required of
/fii,pro* de vouloir^y.
her. - - I know not whether he would come, even though
you should desire him. • - /n case Mr. S. calls
passer;v*
here, tell him I am not at home. •- If you do it, you
will be punished. - - Tell me sincerely whether be
did it or not. - • We should spare ourselves
s^ipargner^ir.
many troubles, were we more prudent.
peine^f.
The conjunctions that have this mark * affixed,
as it appears in the preceding ones, when followed,
in English, by a verb in the present of the indica*
tive mood, and connected with another verb denot-
ing futurity, require the verb, which, in English, is
f)ut in the present^ to be rendered in French by the
iiture.
418
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULfe.
You will be rewarded just as you deserve* - -
After jou have done jour exercises, you shall (go out.)
deooiryW.
- - I will explain these rules to you, as we read them.
- - The moment that you burn this letter, the danger
will be over, - - We will follow you as far as you go.
• ' As long as you (keep con9pany with) those people,
friquenttr^v. gtns^
never come to my house. - • We will (set out) as soon
as we have dined. -'^As you deserve, you will be
rewarded. - • Send me Miss White, when she has
done writing. - • You will write the words accordf
finiyp.p»de
ing as I dictate them. - ' As long as you behave
St comporttr^v.
well, you will be dear to me - - • In short, said this
good king, I shall only (think myself) happy in as much
St croirt
as I cause the happiness of my people*
fairt
It has been remarked in the degrees of comparison,
that every comparative must be attended by the con-
junction qut^ than ; it must now be observed, that, if
it precede a verb in the infinitive, que is to be followed
by de. But if the verh be neither in, nor can be turned
into the infinitive, the conjunction must then be attend-
ed by nt ; that is, qut before the noun or pronoun, and
ne before the verb : ex.
419
/{ vaut miiux €tre nMl- It is better to be unfor-
heuretix que d^tire coU' tunate than criminal.
pabk,
Man pere est rtoenu My father came back
plutot que nous ne Pat- sooner than we ex-
tendions^ pected him.
EXERCISE UPON THIS E0LE.
It is more pleasing to enjoy good health,
agrcabky^dy
than to possess a large fortune. - • It is harder (to
grand,adj. de
be revenged) of an enemy, than forgive him* • - -
se venger^y.
It is better to (make a sacrifice of) a limb, said the
sacrifier^Y.
surgeon, than to let him die. - • When the thunder
roars it is less dangerous to be in an open field,
gronder^v*
than to take shelter under a tree. • - Should you
se mettre devoir
not apply more than you do; you, especially, who
refl.
(are to) be useful to your country ? - - - That would
give me more pleasure than you imagine. - - Did you
refl.
not receive your goods sooner than you thought ?
- - How many people can say to themselves, Had I
se dirtyV.
employed my time httttr than I did when I was
young, I should be (in good circumstances) now. - - -
a mon aise
Diseases come faster than they go away.
s*^en retourntr{v.
42».
Thefdlowing reqaire the vefb io tfae svhjunctive mood*
Mn qat, ) ^j^ j^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^^
Pour que, )
Jlvani que,* before.
Au or en cos que, in case that, if, suppose that.
A maifU que^ ^
Q}U — ne, 3
Bien que, ^
Encore que^ > though, altbougfa, for all that, as.
Quoique^ )
jDe peur fue, 5
Dim veuti/e mie, God grant.
Plaiie^ or p/uf a Z)ieu que^ please God, or would to God.
a Dim tie plaUe, God forbid.
goniiM ?u«, J ^^^ ^^,^g ^^^^
jBror»oM«, 5 ' / '/ / -n/;.^ •v' /-
Jti^^tt^a ce qtie,* till, untiL ( ^^^^ ^i«t4^i?,yJ^f:<e^^^^
JLoin ftie, far from. /'^^'-/^ '< ^^ f^' '^ ^ ^* * t.e^.
^ono&5(aitf que, notwithstandiog that.
Pour peu que^ how little soever, however little.
Sans que, without that.
Soil que, whether, — or.
Supposons que, suppose, let us suppose that.
Tant s\nfaut queje, I am so far from*
Tant s*enfaut qu\l or elle, be, or she is so far from.
Tant s^enfaut que nous, or vous, we, or jou are so far from.
* Thes« conjunctions require the negation ne before the verba fol-
lowing them : ex.
A moins qu*il neiefasse^ Unteu he does it.
De crainte, or de peur qnHU nt t{cnn$nt, For fear, or hit they comfc.
421
EXERCISE UPON THESE CONJUNCTIONS*
I will explain to you every diflScuIty, that you
may not be disheartened in your undertaking. - - -
dicouragtr^v*
Carry that money to Mrs, Nolle, in order that she
may pay the writing-master when he comes. - - - A
(hy the fut.)
wise and prudent man lives with economy when
young, to the end that he may enjoy the fruit of
his labour when he is old Before you begin an
(by the fut.) ^
action, consider well, and see whether you can bring
it about; for, it is the end that crowns the work*/-''!'-
a bout
In case jou want my assistance, call me, I shall be
nearyoa. - - 7/1 do not call upon you this afternoon,
I will write to you Suppose you should lose your
friends, what would become of you? - - You will
never be respected, unless you forsake the bad
abandonner.v.
company you keep You cannot finish (to-night),
unUss I help you. - - - 1 will not lend it you,' unless
you promise me to return it to her, as soon as vou
de rendre.y. ''
have forgiven^me. . . They are not happy, /Aou»A
433
tbey be rich. - - The general arrived yesterday morn-
ing (at the) camp, weary and tired, but very season-
/a#,adj.
ably; immediately he gave his orders to
/>offr,p.
begin the action, though be had not yet all his
engager^y.
troops. - - - Although yoo have a good memory, this
is not enough to learn any language whatever,
pour,p«
you must (make use) of your judgment. - - For a2(
St «erDir,v.refl.
that she has no fortune, I do not love her the less for
it. - - - As zealous as he appears, I know one
action of bis life which is neither Christian nor
equitable. • • I lend you my violin althwigh ydu did
not return it to me the other day. - • - My mother
rtndre^y*
will come to see you, for fear you should forget to
go to the play with her. - - - t will not give you
that penknife, Usi you should make a bad use of it.
- - - - I will go to London to-morrow, for fear he
should come himself. - - - I will write again to
your brother to-morrow, Usi he should not
(present of subj.)
have received my last letter. -• We avoided an engage-
ment, for fear we should be taken> their force being
433
superior to ours. • - God grant yott be not disappointed
troniperyW*
in yoar hopes ! - - - Would to God I had been there! I
would have conquisred or perished. - - God forbid I
vaincre^y*
should blame your conduct. - - Your business never
will be done properly, unless you do it yourself. • • I
shall not go out to-day, except yon go with me. - •
They fought with fury on both sides,
se haitrt^v. acharnement
till night came. - - 1 shall not set out, till 1 have
dined. • - I am going to Write, till we go out. - • Far
from hating him, I wish him^all kinds of prosperity.
- - - I forgive you this time, provided you promise me
to be lazy no more, and pay more attention to
de faireyV*
what you are told. • - 1 will give you leave to dance,
permission de
provided you give me your word of honour
parole^L
not to overheat yourself. - - Why did you tell
de s^6chauffer,Y%
me my father was arrived, notwithstanding you
knew the contrary ? - - He is so quick, that
prompi^diiy
however little he is contradicted, he (flies into a passion)
shmporter^y.
in an instant. • - • However little you give her
she is of so^ good^ a^ temper*, that she is always
naturel^m.
434
pleased* - - •> Can you touch it mthout my bratber
content^^dj.
perceiving it ? - - Suppose we dine here to^^ay,
s^apercevoir de
and to-tnorrow at our bowse* • • I am 90 far
from blaming you for assisting him, that, (on the)
(comp. of the pres. inf.) an
contrary, I (very much) admire your conduct. • - •
He is 90 far from despising ber, that, on the con-
trary, he respects and honours her. - - - It is to
far from raining, that, on the contrary, I think
we shall have dry and hot weather during all this
week.
The conjunction «, if, or whether^ instead of being
i*epealcd in a sentence, is more elegantly rendered by
9tie, with the verb following it in the subjunctive fliood)
as, instead of saying.
Si votis venez chtz moi, et If you call upon me, and
8% V0U8 ne me trouvi^ do' not find m^ ^^
pas^ home,
It is more elegant to say,
Si vous venez chez moi^ et
que vous ne me trouviez
pasy &c.
Que must also be repeated in the second part of a
sentence, as well as the pronoun, when there is a con-
junction in the first part of it ; in this case gue requires
the following verb to be put in tbe^me mood as the
preceding: ex.
4U
Des que je Paurai vu tt As soon as I have seen liiii
que je /tit aurai parU, and spoken to him, I will
je.vous leferai savoir^ let you knoWit.
Quoiqu*il stnt plus rtche que Though he be richer than
V0U8, et qtaPil 4rit de meil' you, and have better
leurs amisrf friends.
BKfiRCISB OrON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES.
If your father do not arrive to-day, and if you
quefi^
want money, I will lend you some. - - -^
avoir besoin de
Jf jou should see your sister, and speak to
her, &c« • ' If you study and take pains, I
assure you that you will learn the French
language in a very short time. - - Whether
you sing, or dance, do it with grace and atten-
tion. ' ' ' If you love rae, and (be willing to) oU
lige me, do not go to France with her. - * If men
were wise, and would follow * the dictates of
/umtere,f.
reason, they would (save themselves) many sor-
s^ipargner^y.
rows. ' ' • If you meet my brother, and he speak
to you, do not answer. - . - So ifiat you saw and
spoke to her. - - Though you have good relations,
parent^m*
36*
yoar merit be Icdowq, and yop do not yva^t
manqutr dt
friends, yoCir projects will not .suQoeted m^itbout your
brother's assistance. • - Jls ijfHm as I b^ve dressed
myself, and breakfasted, I will go to see him. - -
WhiU^jou play and lose jQur money, yojir .aister is
learning her lesson. - - We ,must pity him who bas
celui
no talent, and Qnly despite ^im w^fao bas no virtue.
- • - Play on the organ, wh^le I read my brother'i
letter and answer him. - • - Beside that be never
studies, and is always ,in the coontry, he bas not
so much wit as his sister. - - I will exprlain to you
every difficulty (in or^der) that you may take
dourage and learn well. ^ - Thomh you should have
the besi master in England, and learn all the rul^
of the grammar, if you do Dot put them id practice^
you will never speak good French. • • God gra^
you may succeed in your pursuits, and obtaiJ? the
entreprisej.
favour you solicit so ardently ! - • - fVhtlhtr
Soii ?tt«
God (raise up) thrones, or pull them down;
ikver^v. abaisser^Y* <^
whether be communicate bis power to priflce»t
f#ti jtte puissanctyf.
4^7
or ;wiUidrAir it to bifpself, -.an^ onljr l^ave them
retirer^r,
thqir own wqakne^s ; hp t^acbiQs ihnm Shew dutf
in a sovereign mannien - - Whether you speajc or
d€,p.
(hold jour tongue,) you will Obtain nothing from
se taire^Ym
me ; but whatever you qoaj ^9ja ftpea^ AP ihm you
«iay never offend any one* - * :Your brother ^old me
personne,
he was young, and «wa«'*' 'but twenty ^years -old when
^be was made a captain; i think he was better in-
formed and had more experience than you have. - «
iiistruit «<o*
i can assure you, that both our officers and soldier?
have behaved nobly, and performed prodigies of
/aire
valour, 4hotj^ the enemies were superior in num-
ber, and had the advantage of the ground.
terrein*
It is here necessary to observe, that verbs denoting
wish, tot//, command, desirtydoubt^fear^ignorance, enlrtaty^
persuasion^ pretension, surprise, &c. always require the
conjunction que after them, with the following verb in
the subjunctive mood*
In short, in those dispositions of mind where the will
is chiefly concerned, or whenever we express a thing
with some degree of doubt or hesitation, then the verb,
which, in English, is put in the infinitive mood, the
participle active, or the future tense, must, in French,
be put in the subjunctive mood : ex.
* See the remark after the Terb itrtj to be, page 174.
4S8
Croyez-vottf qv?il soit hanr Do you believe him to be
nitef honest?
Je doute que vous k fassiezy I doUbt of your doing it.
Je ne crois pas qu?elU I do not believe she will
vienntj come.
See Falloir^ and the rules after it, page 332.
Pay the utmost attention to the
EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECBDfNO RUIAS*
You wish him to pay you ; he has no money, I am
obliged to lend him some every day* « - I do not
de
think that true philosophy may be less useful to
women than men ; but I remark, that the most
remarquer^y*
part of those who meddle (with it) are but
se tniler^y, en
very bad philosophers, without becoming better
wives for it. • - 1 do not believe that your mother will
arrive to-day. • - - She wishes you may succeed
pouvoir^y*
in all your undertakings. - - I fear* she (will go
craindre,y^ s^en ait-
away) without speaking to me. - - 1 much fear he
Zer.v.
will come sooner than you expect him. - - Do
atlendre^y*
you not say you are surprised that William has not
Guillaume
spoken to you (ever since) last week. • - - For my part,
depuis Quant a moi^
I am not surprised at it, for he is always pouting.
bouder,v,
* The verbs craindre and apprikender when attended with no
negation, require that ne should be |)laced before the verb which
follows : ex. Jt craim quhl ne mmirty I fear he will die.
4«9
. . Do you tbiok ht will succeed, and obtain the place
croire^v*
be aims at ? • - You have had much trouble, aud we
aspirer^v. peint^
all fear lest her^fter she should give you much
(pres.of 8ubj.)
more. - - If you believe him to be your frieiid, why
then do not you Coliow his advice ? • - It is necessary
for you to go thither, and assure hiin^ that I am very
que
thankful for all bis kindness* - - I wonder that
reconnoissant dt^
Mr* R» has not yet asked your sister in marriage. « « •
If yon !8e.e her andfshe speaks to you, do not answer
faer. - • Order her io do it. * - Do you imagine
Dire^Vm sHmaginer^v*
^we 2ae sure itbey will come 4o-^igbt ? - • - X)o you
iHiink it is possible ior jwu to (bring it about) ?
crotVe,v. de tn venir a bout,y»
• • It is just we ahould BuSbri^aince we deserve it. - ^
I do not say I liavw seen it« «• - He (was afraid) lest
craindre^y. que
you liquid come vrttile be was ,(gone out). « - «
soriir^y^
Our master has ordeted) that we should (get up) to-
se kver
novrow morning:earIy. - - STou did not think that sbe
(wanted to) deceivte you, when she told you tbat.
vou/otV)V..
- - I wottdterr you should doubt, that it is your
iire surpris^y* ce
daughter who told it me. • • • Do you think my mother
4^0
will let U8 go to the ball next week f • - Were Mr. S. I
discreet and williDg to undertake that aflfair, [
would communicate it to him immediately. ^ - It|
sur le champ.
will be better for you to go and speak to him yoiu" I
self, while he is town, because I do not doubl*of
his undertaking it« - - Were I certain that you wooU
nt with the subj. pres.
speak to him about it, I would desire him to come
prier de
and dine with us to-morrow; for I (am to) see him to- \
night at his brother's. • • I am certain that be will
satisfy you: are you certain he will satisfy mef-** |
Your uncle is very glad you have written to j(^f j
father. -- 1 will give you no rest, unless you arcff- |
que ne , .
conciled with your mother. • • I do not believe it is i
she who has done it. - • Do you believe it ? - * l^J I
brother is not well, and I doubt (very mucb) of |
forU
his coming to see us before next spring* - " :
Do you think he is on the road ? - - I doaW |
<n,p. «<^ route f
whether he will come before next weelr« '
n4tvan/,adj«
I did not know you had studied geography so lo0f /
• After the verbs DtnUgr and Mer, when these verba are attend** )
with a ne^tion, ne is employed with the verb which foUows: *>•
Je newUpasfueceiane wit^ I do not deny that it ii ao*
43t
It must be observed, tbat, after tbe verb voulmr^ the
verb to have is not expressed, but rendered in French by
que. ft must also be observed, that the sign of the fu-
ture tense, shall^ when it refers to the will of a person,
and meaning, / choose^ I do not choose^ do you choose ? &c«
must be rendered in French by the present tense of the
iDdicative mood of the verb vouloir^ according to the
xiuaiber and person, with the following verb in the sub-
junctive mood : ex.
Je veux quHlfasse cela^ I will have him do that.
Je veux que vous me mon* You shall show me that
triez cette lettre^ letter, that is to say,
I choose you should
show, &c.
VouleZ'Vous queje danse? Shall I dance ? that is, do
you choose, &c*
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
You would have your daughter return to-
vouloir^y. rercnir,v.
morrow, but that is impossible. - - I will have your
father know what you have 4pne : you must stay
rester^y*
here till he comes. - - Your mother would have you
come directly ; why do you not you come then ? - - I
absolutely intend that she shall go thither
tomJoiVjV.
directly, and tell bim, that, whether he be ill or
se porter
well, I will have him set out as soon as he has re-
ceived my letter. - - I will have you see my house,
and tell me what you think of it. - - She shall not go
penser^v*
«S9
iMo the eonBtrjr, anless I go with ber. • « My fetber
woaM haT0 me and my brotlMr walk all tlie
way. - - Your sister thall go with me to Croydon, aad
cAemtN,m«
Dot you. - - Yeur father will ha?e yon go to Franee
in a month ; I am very glad of it, however I wonld
not have you do things loo precipitately. - - - Shall
my brother show you his translation ? - - Your brother
asked me whether he might go home to-morrow ; I
told him he might go whenever he thought he
croire,v.
should be wanted: but you shall remain here till
you have learned all your lessons. - - I know a gen-
tleman who is going to Paris ; shall I tell him to call
passer
upon you? I would not have you go to Germany
chez
without understanding French well, as that language
will enable you to learn German much sooner than
meltre m iiai dt bien
you expect. - - Your brother shall not go out to-day.
s^aitendre.
- - Will you (be so good as) to go and carry that letter
avoir la bonti dt *<>»
to the post ? No, I cannot leave my play. But I tell
you, that you shall (go there) ; I would have you pay
tnore attention to what you are told*
433
Quin fti«);Or dani^ preceded by a superlative, require
the following verb in the subjunctive mood, and when
gui stands as a. nominative to a verb, denoting a condi-
tion, it also requires the following verb to be put in the
subjunctive mood : e%»
C^st la plus belle femme qui She is^the handsomest wo-
puisse se voir^ man that can be seen,
Oest It plus michani gar^on He is the most wicked boy
qneje connoisse^ that 1 know.
Je veux une femme qui soil I will have a wife who is
belle, handsome:
that is, I will not have any woman for a wife, but
on condition she be handsome.
EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.
Do you say you are surprised, that he has not
yet written to you t I assure you it is not to be won-
, ffV/oiiner
dered at ; for, he is the most negligent man I know.
- - - It is necessary for you to go thither, and assure
que
him that he has done nothing that should
/ 1 , . devoir^y,
(make^me* angry»). , - He is the most charitable man
jacher^y.
we have in this neighbourhood; his purse is open
to the poorest men be can find. - - - Did
you not tell me you (sought for) a master who had
cAercAer,v.
a good pronunciation, and was endowed with (a
J done de
great deal) of patience? • . When a father is capable
of leaching bis children, he is the best master whom
37
434
they can have. -^ - 1 know nobody thai improf«fl
foitt des progris
more than Miss K— — ; and when she was learoiBg
French^had she learned it by mles, she would 8|
k
write, and translate now much better than Miss &— ,
though she was two years in Prance. * - Has not yovur
brother some friends whom he can trust ? - - Your
sefierd^Vm
father has bought the finest horse that I have ever
seen. - - Is there any lady that appears more reasonable
than she does 7 -* * If you ever choose a friend, I wish
you may choose one whom you esteem, and who
may be an honest man. •* « It (will be better for) you to
valoir mieux
go and speak to him yourself, instead of writing to
him, because I do not doubt of bis undertaking and
(bringing about) your adair; he is the most diligent
vmir i boul de
and the most careful man We have in this country. - *
Before you begin ahy thing of importance^ coRsult
some body who is your friend, and on whom you caa
rely, - - - Do you know itny body Who goes to
faire fondly*
France ? - - I havis soihething to sedd to my sister. - «
If you do not follow thjr ddvicei believe me, it will
43S
be the gireatest misfortune that can happen to yon,
• - Babylon wai^ the finest city that ever was built. - •
The best reason I can • give you ia, that I
(was not) we)]. <* *> If you lend me a horse, lend me
St porter^y,
one that gees well. - * - The God who has created us,
and who created the univene, is the only one
to whom we owe homage, and the only one whom we
(ought to) fear«
SECT. IX.
OF INTERJECTIONS.
Interjections, as before observed, serve to express the
sudden epotions of the soul*
There are several sorts, viz.
Of i^^ig'^Vii'fl***? admiration^ aversion^ silena, tailings
encouraging^ warnings &c. such as,
Allons^ gat ! come, be cbeerfol !
m^ courage ! come, come on !
jBon ! good !
Ah^ man Dieu! oh, my God !
Ah^ ouida / ay, marry !
JHii, quelle joie ! O, joy I
d'cie// O Heaven!
f'hfi ' fy upon ! shame !
Hold^ ho ! ho there I
Hilas ! alas !
Malheur a! wo to !
Misericorde ! bless me !
Prenez garde^ gare ! have a care J
Paix^ chut^ St ! hist, hush !
Silence! silence!
436
KXIRCI8B UPON THE INTERJECTIOWB.
Come, friends, let us rejoice ! - «- - Good ! here are
se rijouir^v*
news for jou, brother. - - - Fy, (yH Robert, yoo do
not think of wb«t you say. • - Oh ! bow^ lovelj'a*
ptnstr^y* a que
virtue* is* modesty^ ! Why do yon not endeavour to
s^efforctf;^. it
acquire it ? • - Alas ! who can express^the lonneDti
I suffer heref • . • Man without religion, never
having bis heart or mind at peace, can, alas!
tsprii^rsu en,p«
be hui a very unhappy creature. - - - Wo to yoo!
usurers, misers, unjust possessors of (other people^s)
Vfuner,m. ai7are,m. au(nit,pro.
goods, hearken to these word^: The treusvtes
6ien,m. 6couter^v. «o» parvlej.
of iniquity (will be of no service) to you. • • 0
ne servir de rien
(lazy people), go to the ant, consider what she
partsseux fourmi^f*
does, and leari^ from her, wisdom and iodostry.
Bless me ! I am undone ! - Hush tb^re ! silence!
perdUip.p. i
• . Oh ! the dismal effects which laziness pro-
duces ! - - How^ tremendous" an« ofiice' is' ^"^*
Que <srrti/e,adj. U ^ \
of» a* judge' ! What wisdom, what integrity, wfec 1
knowledge, what sagacity of mind, what experif^^^f \
scienee^f.
(are required !) I
ne faut^l pas avoir^v.
437
REBIARKS AND EXERCISES on the WORDS
de^ d, and pour.
Having, in ibis manner, gone through the respective
parts of speech, there will be no occasion for a syntax.
It will, however, be necessary to give some rules for
ascertaining the proper use of the particle de or d, and
the preposition pour^ before a verb in the infinitive
mood, and then to point out, by way of exercise, some
idiomatical expressions that most frequently eccur in
the French tongue**
When two verbs come together in a sentence, the
latter, having no subject expressed nor understood, must
be put in the infinitive mood, whether the English sign
<o, be prefixed or not*
In the following cases, the infinitive mood must
never be preceded by a particle.
First, when the verb in the infinitive stands nomina*
tive to another verb : ex»
Aimer egt un verbt, To love is a verb.
Secondlt, after the following verbs, alhr^ crotVe, d^
voir^ faire^ il fautj savoify valoir mieux, venir^ pouvoir,
oser^ vouloir^ and pen^er^ when rendered by to he like pr
near*
EXERCISE on this RUiLE.
To know how to give seasonably is a talent eytry
body has not. - - To be able to live with one^s self,
and to know how to live with others, are the two
great sciences of life. - - I had rather doit
aimer mieux^f*
* The great nombcr of idiomatical exprsirioivi in the Freiuih Ian*
guage has long been considered as an almost insuperable difficulty in
the way of its easy acquirement ; however, this difficulty is daily
decreasing ; these peculiar expressions are now gtvSng way to a reg-
ular construction, and are very Ht41e used by th« htpi writers.
37*
43*
now than later. « - Why dare yon not undertake it !
I tbiok you might succeed. - - He says he will lend
you bis gun with all his heart, because you know
fusilj m.
bow to make use of it. - - Aristotle, though be was
«o» se servir^y,
so great a philosopher, was never able to penetrate the
cause of that prodigy. - - Tell him, that he may set
out when (he pleases). • • You never could
il lui plaira^y* pouvairj r.
come more seasonably. - - We (are to) go to VauxbaU
to*morrow. - - 1 am going to see your brother. - -
(Is it not better) to set out now, than wait
Valoir muuXyV, dt attendre^v*
any longer ? - - - If you think to oblige her,
■ plus croire^Y*
you mistake. - - We (were to) have had a ball ycster-
se tromptr^y.
day, but my sister was not well. • - You did very
right, for you ought not to speak to bim. - - 1
5i«n, adv. car^c. dtvoir^Ym
(had like) to have fallen twenty times (in) coining
pemer^y. *<^
hither, - - To instruct, please, and move the pas-
^mouvotr,
sions, are the three principal qualifications requisite in
qualile nicessaire
an orator. - - If you would read this book, I could
voul(nr;y. ' pouvotrjVm
lend it to you for four or five days. - - He wishes to
vouloir^
learii without taking pains.
petite, f. sing.
4S9
^be particle de is put before a verb Id the infini-
tive mood : First, when any of the followiog words,
of, from or witA, are used before the participle active of
any verb. (See the rule upon the participle active,
page 343..)
Secondly, after a noun substantive joined immedi-
ately to a verb, either without any article at all, or with
tbe following articles, le, la, or les.
Thirdly, after the following adjectives, dacent, glad,
impossibk, necessary, sorty, worthy, vexed, and the like.
Fourthly, after the following verbs : to advise, to ap*
prehend, to bid, to cease, to command, to conjure, to coun*
sel, to defend, to defer, to deserve, to desire, to endeavour,
' to entreat, to fear, to hasten, to long, to order, to permit, to
persuade, to pray, to promise, to propose, to refuse, tore"
member, to threaten, to tell, to Toarn, to undertake, <^c. and
the greater part of the reflected verbs.
And lastly, after the conjunction que, preceded by the
comparative d&gr«e.
EXERCISE ON THIS RULE.
I have desired your brother, to lend me some
prier,v.
money. - • My mother ordered me to tell you, to
ordonner,y.
go and speak to her directly. - - Did you not permit
him to go out this morning ? - - I am surprised to
sortir^y^
find you so ill. - - I have not desired you tq play. » -
Bid your sister to send roe my book. - - We
Dire,y. a
(were afraid) of displeasing you. - - What do you
craindre,
advise me to do in such a case ? • - My sister
conseilltr,y»
and 1 intend to (call « upon) you on Friday next*
passer,\. chez,y* y(^
4^
I im Tcry glad to hear jou ace better. - •
apprendre^w.
She does net pretend to speak French aa well m
Mtpupur^y* de
you. - - We are tired of repeating to 700 the 1
tfai»gi so often. « * If you finish your exercise soon
you will have the pieasare of walking, while the
others will have the trouble of working. - - Hastea
sehdier^
to tell her not to go thither (any more) ; for, she
it d* pluSf adv.
would be in danger of losing her life. - - En-
la
deavour to please your oiasten by your application to
d
study. • - Do not you remember having said yoa
would carry me to the camp ? - • I)& not they
mener^y*
deserve to be encouraged, who undertake to serve
m6riter^v» *
the public ? - - We are all glad to hear you have
overcome your enemies ; we should have been sorry
to have heard the contrary. - - What a fool^ you* areF
apprendrcj <^
to grieve so, when you have so much reason to
s'affliger.y.
rejoice ! - - Never endeavour to speak French on less
you have a good pronunciation. • • I shall never refuse
to do you a service, (as long as) it is iq my power.
rendre^y. *^ .
- - Have you a mind to do what you have pro-
♦<3^ envte,
raised me ? - - I cannot give yoir the book you asked
* See the rule, page 106.
441
aie for, my brother has not (thought . fit) to send
»o^ juger a proposyV*
it me back again. - - I desired you to bring your
sister with you ; why did you not ?♦ - - I forbid
defendre^ym
you to speak or write to him (any more). - • Would
davaniagey adv.
you not be very glad to read and speak Italian ? • -
- • Condemn the opinion of no one hastily, but
endeavour to regulate your own by the line of
s^tfforctr^y. «o^
truth. - - Who can hinder me from speaking or
v6nl6^ f. empScher^y,
writing to her ? - - (Give* me* leave') to tell you, that
Permettre^y.
you do very wrong to disoblige your aunt. - • He
ma/, adv.
(was not contented) to demolish the temple and pull
se conienter^ v. a-
down the statues, but, &c. - - Is there (any thing)
haltre^y. rien,
more glorious, than to change apger into friendship ?
- - - (1 long) to see your mother, and tell her all
// me tarde^y»
that I think (about it.)
en,pro.
The particle a is to be placed before a verb in the
infinitive mood : Firsts after the auxiliary verb, arotV,
to have, immediately followed by a substantive or an
adverb, expressing a futurity in the action : ex.
J^aiplusiiurs htires d icrirej I have many letters <o write.
Secondly, after nouns substantive joined to the verb
arotV, or nouns adjective joined to the verb ftre,
signifying to be addicted, apt, bent, diligent, disposed,
*.jDo»7, 18 understood, and mutt be expressed in French.
448
dreadful^ eaiy^ Jit, hard^ imUnedf qukk^ ttatiy^ wljiti,
Uied^ &c.
Thirdtjfj after the folIowiDg adjectives, odmtVoMc,
good^ dexUrouSj handsome^ scarce^ the last^ the firsl^ the
second^ &C*
And, lastly^ after the following verbs, to amut^ to
aspire or aim a/, to begin^ to condemn^ to continue or go
on^ to compel or force^ to design^ or destine^ to dispose^ to
employ or sp«nd, /o encourage^ to engage, to excite, to
exhort, to help^ to induce, to invite, to learn, to please^ to
serve, to take a pleasure or delight in or to^ to teach^ to
ikitJCf &c»
EXERCISE ON THE PRSCEPINO VERBS.
Come hither, Paul, I have something to commuDi*
cale to you* - - We have much to fear in our present
situation, and a (great many) hazards to run. • - '
cannot go to the play to-oight ; for, I have five or
six visits to pay. - - Is there any thing pleasantcr
rendre, v. agreable^
to behold than the flux and reflux of the sea ? - - We
voir,
(ought to) learn how to subdue our passions,
*^ subjuguer,y»
conquer our desires, and suffer patiently the most
cruel misfortunes. • - She is always the first io
disgrdce,U
(find fault with)^ what I do. - - Do not gather
trouver a redire a
that apple, it is not yet goodto eat. - - Mr. N* ^^^
me you had a country-house to let. * * Mr. F.i>^
louer^ V.
.very agreeably roan, always ready to serve his frienosj
but he has the misfortune to be inclined to gamioS*
443
» . « Your master ddes not love yoQ, t>eeatise yM an
iiot diligent in learning your lesson. - - - We had for a
long time nothing to eat but the fruits which we had
gathered. *- <- ^^ The greatest part of men spend their
time either in doing nothings or doing what they ought
not to do. • •» What you say of her is very hard
difficile^ a^.
to believe. «• * Tell him, I have no complaint to
make about his conduct. • - • Whj do you oblige her
de
to ask my pardon, since she is not inclined to do it her-
me,pro,
self ? - - - I believe she takes a delight in tormentinf^
me. * • - Life is so short, that we should employ all
our days in preparing ourselves for the other world. - -
There is no more danger to fean - * • Use yourself,
S^aceoutumer^ v.
said a father to bis son, to practice virtue : that alone
will help you to bear with patience all the vicis^
supporUr^v,
situdes of fortune. * * ' Never amuse yourself in read-
ing bad books. - - - Vou can never spend your time
paher^ v.
better than in reading and studying the history of your
own country. - - Learn to speak well ; but, above all,
to speak truth. - - That^ science which teaches us to
dtre, V.
see things as they are, is highly worthy of cultivation*
- - - An honest man always takes pleasure in obliging
his friends. • - - Does your master teach you how to
translate English into F^rench ^ • • - t)o you begin 16
translate' French^ well ^ - - - Why did you hot oblige
him to pay you what be owes you ? - - - Why do you
444
not (get ready) io set out with U9 1 - -MloTelo
a^appriterj V.
discoarse with polite krid sensible people.
N. B. For the sake of euphony, the following verbs,
to begin^ io continue^ to constrain^ to engage^ to exhort^ to
compel^ or /orc«, to endeavour^ to obliatj may be succeed-
ed by de, or d, as most convenient.
The preposition pour is to be used before a verb io
the infinitive mood, when it expresses the caust^ the
design^ or the end, and then the English particle to mj
be expressed by in order fo, to the end^ or /or to. Tbii
preposition is also used after the adverbs, enough^ on pur-
pose^ too^ too rnuch^ or less ; and before aa infinitive in
the beginning, of a period.
EXERCISE ON THESE RULES*
I will do (every thing) in my power to please him. • •
Good rules are useless, if the attention, indusrry, ao^i
assiduiti^i*
patience of the scholar be not put into practice to learn
them. - - Mrs. B. has (too much) pride to confess ishe
(is in the wrong.) « - To understand* geography* welV
avoir tort
we must, &c. • - I assure you that I came (on purpose)
on expris
to see you. - - - She will do all that is in her power to
oblige you, and prove to you that she is truly jo'*^
friend. - - The wicked live to die, but the righteous
die to live. - - She has vanity enough to believe all
you tell her, - - What makes the misfortunes of kings?
is not to have friends bold enough to tell them ti^
truth. - - I wrote to you some time ago, to let
you know, that your brothers were arrived. • • S^
445
promised me, that he would do (every thing) to de-
serve the hooour of your protection. - • • I sent yea*
terday my servant to your aunt's to desire her to
send^ me^ back^ again' the book I lent her a month
ago, but she was not at home. - - We did all that
fairt^ V.
we could to pas» the river, but could not (accom-
en ventr a
plish it). - - - To convince you that I am ready to do
houtm
you any service, (be so kind as) to command me.
avoir la honU^v.
- - - Why did you not punish her for having done
what you forbade her to do ? - • - A man should live
devoir^
a century at least to know the world, and many other
connoitre^
centuries to (know how to) make a proper use of that
savoifj ctmvenable^
knowledge.
SECT. X.
OF IDiOMATICAL EXPRESSIOJ^S.
ON THE VERB AVOIR, to have, &c.
Avoir mala la t6U, * J^^,*^^'^? the head-ache, or
' I a pam in the head.
Avcnr mal aux oreilhs, j ** !»''y^ '°'^ ""' °'- « P«»
' C m tne ears.
a ' J t to have sore eves, or a pain
Avoir mal auxyeux, J in the eyes. ^
Avoir mal an ntz, \ *° •»^''^'* '"^ '">«^' ^"^ »
' I paiD in the nose.
Avoir mal a la hmcht, \ *<» ^^"f ». ""f ™°"V^' ^
' ( a pain in the mouth.
Avoir mal aux dents, ilrc. to have the tooth-ache.
38
446
We say, after the same manner, Avoir froid aux mains^
auxpieda^ 4^c. to be cold in one^s Lands, &c« ex.
Tai froid a la liUy aux My head, my bands, and
mains^ el aux pie ds^ my feet, are cold*
Avoir bcauj to be in vain : ex.
Yousavez beau parler^ It is in vain for ^ou to talk.
Avoir beaucoup de peine^ to have much ado*
Avoir de la peine a^ to have difficulty in ; ex*
J'ai de la peine a vous croire^ I can hardly believe you.
Avoir besoin de^ to want, to have occasion for*
Avoir la bontc de^ {daigner\ to be so kind as*
Avoir connoissance^ avis de^ to have notice of*
Avoir cours^ to take, to be in vogue.
Avoir honte^ to be ashamed.
Avoir la mine de^ to be like, to look like : ex*
Vous avez la mine d'^itre You look like a man ofun-
intelligent^ derstanding*
Avoir pitie d«, to pity.
Avoir part au gdteau^ to share in the booty.
Avmr bonne mine : ex.
Vous avez tres-bonne J you look very nell to-day.
mine aujoura/hu%^ > o j
Avoir plus depeur que de mal^ to be more afraid than fauri
Avoir raison de^ to be in the right to.
Avoir 50tn, to take care.
Avoir tort dc, to be in the wrong to.
xn ' r ' J ^ to have no Qccasion or business
N'avoir que f aire de, J of or for.
JPavoir garde dc, or 1 are ex- < to be sure not to,
Se garder bien de, 3 pressed by ( or, by no means.
Aller son train, to go one's own way.
Aller trouver quelquhm^ to go to somebody.
Venir trouver, to come to.
EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES.
I could not call upon him this morning, because I
bad a pain in my head. - • My brother would have
come with me, but he has a sore leg, and is obliged to
447
keep bis hed. - - I heard your mother had the
garcler h
tooth-ache : Is it true ? No, madam, but she has
a pain in her side which prevents her from (going
empicher^
oui.y- - - - I have not vet finished my exercise ;
for my hands were so cold^ that I could not write a single
word ; besides, I had much ado to find my books, I
did not know where (to look for) them. - - It will
be in vain for you to write to me, 1 never will answer
you. - - - I can hardly believe what you tell me. - -
/( is in vain for me to speak to her, she still goes her
own way. - - - Miss N. cried very much yesterday, but
I think she was more afraid than hurt, - ^ It has been
in vain for him to torment your sister, she never would
tell him what happened to her when she was at Mr.
P^s. - - - Go to him, and tell him that, unless he re-
turns me my books in a very short time, 1 will desire
•oi peu
his father to send them to me : when you have told
him that, do not (wait for) his answer ; come to me im-
mediately, I shall be at your mother's, where I (am to)
dine, and thence go to the play with the^ whole* family.
' ' ' In vain 1 give myself trouble, I am not the richer
for it. - - - Your sister does not look so well to-day as
she did yesterday. - - • Am I not in the right to go
there no more ? - - - I will take care to prevent them
from coming hither. - - - Believe me, I have long sus-
pected them, and now I am very certain (hat both your
cousins and they have had a share in the booty. - - - fF«
should often be ashamed of our finest actions, if the
448
world knew all the motiTcs which produce tbein. - - •
You are in the wrong not to (ask for) his horse, be would
lend it to yoo. - - - Why should I borrow his horse,
when I have one (of my own ?) - - I have no occasion for
a nun,
bis. • - - Be 80 kind as to carry that letter to Mr. H'ff,
but be sure not to tell him who sent you. . - 1 hope
you will by no nuans go there again, after what has hap-
pened to you. - - - He was so altered, that she had
much ado to recollect him, but he now begins to lookxtry
remeitre^
welL - • Somebody having advised Philip, Aleian-
der's father, to banish from bis states a man who bad
spoken ill of him, 1 shall by no means do it^ answered
be, he would go every where and speak ill of me»
ON ETRE, TO BE.
Casonaise, ^ ^^ ^^ .^ ^^^ ^.^^„„.
Etre < en bonne passe, V stances
( Wen dans ses affaires^ 3
ri, L- ^ J 11 (to be in favour tfiU
Etre bun aupres dequelqu*un, < ?
' ( some one.
r,, , ; , ( to be out of favour with \
Lire mat avec quelqu^un. < ^ 1
' ' ' ( some one.
f tobe chargeable, trou- i
Eire a charge a qiitlq\Cun^ < blesome, or a burden
f to some one. I
Etre but a but, to be equal.
Etre de mot/ze, to go halves.
T?i - t *A J r '1 J 5 to be within mus-
Etrealaporiiedufusil, du canon, ^ ket-8hot,guD-8bot.
Etre a la portee de la voix, to be within call.
Etre 1^ ^^ ^"^'* ^^^ ? *° ^^ "P^" ^^^ brink, or very
( sur le point de, > near to.
Etre en etai de, ) . ^ ui * ir j
Ivoir It moyendt, \ '^ ^* **''« '^ *«^'**'
449
KXfiacISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS*.
Your brother is in good circumstances now. - •
Somebody told me he was in favour with the king. - -
Yes, it is true, but heis out of favour with my father,
because heis tioublesome to the family. - - Well, Mr.
Eh Wen,
R. and he are equals. • - - I thought Mr. A. and Mrs.
D. went halves in that affair, but I beard the contrary.
- - - Suffer me to tell you, you do very wrong to treat
permettre,
her as you do, you undoubtedly muEt have forgotten
she 15 in the queen's/arour. - - - Well, though she be in
the queen\s /avour, do you imagine I am not to tell her
what I think of her conduct ? - - - The two fleets were
within gun-shot^ and very near beginning the engagement,
combat^ m.
when we left them. - • We will be within call. - -
Why do you not take a coach now and then ? said she
to me. 1 would willingly take one sometimes, replied I
to her, but I cannot afford it.
ON FAIRE^ TO MAKE, OR DO.
Faire cas df, to value, to esteem.
Faire un tour de promenade^ to take a walk.
Faire le malade^ to sham sicknes?. *
Faire Vicole buissonniere^ to play truant.
Faire beaucoup de chemin^ to go a great way.
Faire le bel esprit, to set up for a wit.
Faire fond sur quel qu*un, to rely upon one.
Faire savoir, (envoy er dire,) f '° J**,end "Trd! **" '"^'"''"'
Faire voile, or ) . . .,
Mettred la voile,] ^°'^^''''^'
Faire faire, to bespeak, to get naade, to oblige one to do.
38*
45a
Fairt d€ son mieux^ to do one's best.
Fairt semblant^ to pretend.
Faire de sonpis^ to do one^s worst.
Kt fairt que de^ to be just, or
Vmir de^ to have but just : ex.
// ne fait que A^arriver^ He is hut just arrived.
Ne fairt que, to do noxhing but.
Se faire des amis^ des ennemis, to get friends^ enemies.
Se faire des affaires, to bring one's self into trouble.
a r ' C to be conceited, to have a good
o'en faire accroire^ < • . r % ir
•^ ' ' i opinion of one's self.
Oen est fait de wiot, 1 am undone, it is over with me.
CPen 6toitfait de iut, be was undone, it was over with hifflr
r*? ^ r^-i j^ 11 ? she will be undone, it will be over
Chnserafaiid?elle, J ^j^^ ^^^^
C^en sermfait de nous, ^ ^\^^^^^^ be undone, it would
^ ' < be over with us*
The English verb, to cause, preceding the verb lobi^
immediately followed by a participle passive, is render-
ed in French, by the verb /atVc, and then the verb/o^
is not expressed, but the participle passive is turned
into the infinitive mood : ex.
/Hiu fit co'uper /a /e/e, He caused his head loht
cut off.
EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS.
Do not lose that ring, for I value it much : it is a par-
ticular friend of yours who gave it me. - - I would go
and take a wallc, if I were well. - - Do you not sA<»»
sickness now and then? - - - Did not your brother pto]/
truant last week ? - - - That man goes a great TDoyfo^
a trifle. - - Mr. P. sets up for a rvit, wherever he goes*
You may rely upon what 1 tell you. - - He succeeds
better in being conceited^ than in giving others a
a a ^
-^d opinion of himself. - - 1 begin to be (very much)
451
satisfied with fais brother, lyho now does his best^ and
will soon be able to write a French letter to his father.
- - - Let me know whether he will pay jou or not. - - -
We shall set sail about the fifteenth of next month. - - •
- - Why did not you bespeak three or four pair of shoes^
more ? - - - Send word to your brother, or let him
know^ that there is a letter for him here. - - I will give
him an exercise, and oblige him to do it in my pre-
en
sence. - - - She told mc if she a?cre obliged to do it.
she would do her zoorst* - - She pretends not to
dej
listen, bat I assure you she does not lose a word of what
you say. - - We were but just (come in) when it bega»
to rain. - - - It would have been over with us^ could the
enemy have known what passed in our camp. - - You
do nothing but play from morning till night. - - - -
That young lady will get friends every where. - - -
If you do not take care, you will bring yourself
into trouble. - • Permit me to tell you, tbat they
de
are too much conceited. • - - Your brother is undone^
if his master come to know of it. - - The king caus-
ed them to be put to prison.. - • He caused a superb
palace to be built.
ON DirFfiRENT VERBB»
Aimer mieux^ to have rather, to choose rather.
Se donmr bUn des airs, J '° ^**';5 ^ S^«^^ ^^^^ "P"" '^^'^
// nefautpas sHtonner^ it is no wonder.-
II me tarde de, I long to.
453
Petmr^ to be like. (Followed by a verb in tbe infinitive
mood.)
^, J - ?to lay the fault or blame upon one,
S^en prendre a, J to look to one for.
S'y Wen prendre, or Cto go the right way la
S'^y prendre de la bonne fagon^ ^ work.
S^y prendre mal^ to go the wrong way to work.
e, 1 , , 4 , Cto go quite a different, of
S'y prendre lout autremenl. J |^^^j^^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^^
Prendre en mauvaise party to take amiss.
Venir a bout dej to bring about, to accomplish.
EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS.
I choose rather to (set out) now than later. • - She
told me she had rather speak to any other person than
to Mr. L. - - They had rather hav^ bad you slay ii>
que, eubj.
Italy two or three years longer. - - - Do not you IhiDK
de plus.
Mts.H. takes a great deal vpon herself? - - - It is no von-
der that I do not speak French so well as you ; yoabavc
been several years in France, and I nerer was there.
- - - I hope your brother will succeed in his undertak-
ing ; for, he goes the right way to work^ and I amcertaw
that he will bring il about. - - - Your cousin, on the
contrary, will always be poor; for, he goes the wroni
way to work in (every thing) he undertakes. - - She
longs /osec your falher, and tell him you behaved well
all the time of his absence. - - - I had like (to hare
itre,
been) killed in coming here. - - If he lose, he wt/i/flj/
the blame upon you. - - - Why do you lay ih i^^^^
upon her ? she was not even in the room when ^^'^^
'qppened. • - - Should not your sister succeed, wbon^
453
would she lay ihe fault upon ? • • - Yaa say you
long /o speak French ; and I tad, I assure you. <• - "
I long to tell you sortietbing, nevertheless I do not know
how to communicate it to you for fear of disoblfging
you, - - - When you have a mind to tell me
something disagreeable, you should go quite a different
way to work* - - 1 beg of you not to take amiss what I
prier^ ^o*
tell you. - - Do not begin a thing, unless you are sure
to brins it about.
de ^
ON DIFFERENT VEBBS.
St passer dc, to do, to live without, or to be easy, without.
Savoir ban gr6^ to take kindly of.
Trouver mauvais que^ to take ill if.*
Trouver a redire a, to find fault with.
Tenir maison^ to be a house-keeper.
Tmir boutique^ to be a shop-keeper.
Tenir parole^ to keep one's word.
^ ' (to he in a person's power : ex.
// ne tient qu^d moi, a vous, It is in my, your, his, her,,
a /ut, a elk, ire. power, &c.
line tient pas a moi, a vous, It is not my, your, fault
<J^c. que, &c. if4
S^en tenir d, to stand to.
Vouloir du bien a, to wish one welU
En vouloir a, to have a spite against.
Je souhaiterois pouvoir, I wish I could.
// y va, il y alloit, de voire rie, your life is, was, at stake*
II y va, il y alloU, d. man konneur. [ •"^.^tToed i;T'
Je ne laissepas de, nevertheless, or for all that, I.
* With the following Terb in the subjunctive.
t With the following verb in the subjunctive, and ne before it.
454
EXKKCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS.
When I have wine, I 'drink some; but when I have
none, I am easy without it. - - - If you will ht so kind as
to write to my father, to let bim know my situation, I
shall take it kindly o/you, and promise you never to
find fault with what you may recommend to me. - -
I wish I could do you ihzt service, I would do it with aH
my heart. - - - I hope you will not take it i//, if 1 write
que
to your uncle (at the) same time. - - I shall stand to
en
what you say. - • - Hie has been a house-keeper these five
and twenty years. - • He might have succeeded much
better than he has done, had he followed his uncle's ad-
vice and mine ; but he never was satisfied, and was cou^
txnu^Wy finding fault with what we were telling: him. - -
However little you send him at present, he will take it
kindly of you. '-'Wis in her power to live in the coon-
de
try, and be very happy there. • - // will soon lie in your
power to make us happy. - - I assure you it shall nolle
de
my fault, if you do not succeed ; for I wish you well. - -
Since it lies in your power to recommend Mr. P^. to your
de
friend, why do you not do it ? - - When you see bim,
you may assure him, that, since it is in mypomer to do
it, I will not forget him. - - - Ymi have a spite against
my brother ; because it was in his power two or three
times to oblige you, and he never would. - - - I wish I
could persuade you how sorry he was for it ; but his
honour z&a^coitcenied in not doing it: and, though you
de
be very angry with him, he would, nevertheless, {or, for all
that^) do you service if it were in his power. - - Had 1
455
thought he would have refused me that favour, I never
would have asked it (of him ;) I might very well have
done without it. - - You ought to have thanked him for
de
that attention, instead of being angry with him ; but
contre
when your sisters heard that you could not obtain his
leave, they took it amiss^ and have (ever since) had a spite
conge
against him. - - When they told me (of it,) I would most
le
willingly have represented to them (how much) they
were in the wrong : but I would by no means do it ; for I
know it is in their power to do me (a great deal) of harm,
and I do not wish to get enemies. • - - - Every body ad-
mires her humanity; for, though he has behaved in so
de
ungrateful a manner towards her, she would, neverthe-
kss^ have done him service, if he had lived.
GENERAL AND PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES.
OF THE UNDERSTANDING OF LANGUAGES.
The understanding of languages serves (for an) in-
intelligencey f. de
troduction to all the sciences. By it we come
parvenir^ v.
with very little trouble at the knowledge of (a great
peine^
many) fine things, which havts i:ost those who in-
a
vented them (a great deal) of pains. By it all
times and countries lie open to us. By it
tiecUy m. pays^ ilre^ v.
we become, in some measure, contemporary to all
de
456
ages, and iDhabitaots of all kiogdoms. It (enables)
nutire en ctai
us to coDTerse with the most learned men of all
de
antiquity, who seem to hare lived and laboured for
us. We find (in them) many masters, whom (we are
t7 noiu
allowed) to consult at leisure ; many friends who
utptrmis de
are always at hand, and whose useful and agreeable
conversation improves the mind. It informs us of
enrtckir,v.
a thousand curious subjects, and teaches us eqoall;
(how to derive an advantage) of the virtues and vices
a profiter^^f.
of mankind. Without the assistance of languages,
seeours^ m. langw^i*
all these oracles are dumb to us, and all tbete
pour, p.
treasures (locked up ;) and, for want of having the
fermer^y.
key, which alone can open us the door (to tbeoi,) we
f eu/,adj« tffi, r.
remain poor (in the) midst of (so many) riches, and ig*
au
norant in the midst of all the sciences.
OF STUDY.
We (come into the world) surrounded with a clood
natlre^ v. *
of ignorance, which is increased by the false pre*
judices of a bad education. By study, the formef
is dispersed, and the latter corrected. It g'vcs
* See the observation on the preposition vfUhj page 405.
467
proportion and exactness to our thoughts and rea-
justtsse^i.
sonings ; instructs how to range in due order what-
«oi convenable
ever we have to speak or write ; and presents us with
dire,v. »o^
the brightest sages of antiquitj as patterns for our
modtle^m.
; conduct ; those sages, in this sense, we may call, with
I Seneca, the masters, and teachers of mankind* But
Senique precepteur^w.
I the usefulness of study is not confined to what we
borner^v*
I: call science; it renders us also more fit for business
( and employment ; besides, though this study
(/ejo/M5,adv. qnand^c*
i were of no other use but (the acquiring) a habit of
, de t
I labour, (the softening) the paips of iti (the pro-
curing) a steadiness of mind and (conquering)
t fermete^f* t
J our aversion to application or a sedentary life, or
whatever else seems (to lay a restraint upon) us, it
J «<>» assujettir^v.
would still he of very great advantage. In reality,
it draws us off from idleness, play, and debauchery.
rehVer,v. «o^
It usefully (fills up)f the vacant hours of the day, and
renders very agreeable that leisure, which, without the
assistance of literature, is a kind of death, and, in a
tspictS*
manner, the grave of a man while he is alive. It ena-
I These participles active are to be rendered in French bj the in-
finitive, and the conjunction and preposition should be repeated be-
fore each.
39
458
bles tts to pass a right judgment upoD other me&-$
labours, to enter into society with men of undersfanding,
en esprit^
to keep the best company, to (have a shdre in)
friquentcTyV. prendre part a
the discourses of the most learned, to furnish out matter
for conversation, without which we must be sileBt ; to
render it more agreeable and more useful, by iotermiz-
ing facts with reflections, and setting the one by the
releverjV*
other.
SECT. XL
SCHEME FOR PARSmO A SENTENCE.
As it is very essential to the thorough learning of a
language, not to mistake one part of speech for another,
we finish this grammar by giving a classical and methodi-
cal scheme for parsing a sentence* The examples,
with very little change, may suit any language.
Article. Qaestiimt i Is it definite, partitive or indefi^
nite? What gender? What number?
ExampleB. Le poiivoir du roi, the power of the king ;
la liberie des hommes, the liberty of men ; J'ai du pain,
de la viande, des ponames ; I have breads meat^ apples ; Is
soeur de Pierre, Peier^s sister.
Application. JLe, definite art. m.— dti, contraction of
de 2e, genitive defi. art. m.«^La definite art. f.—des, con*
traction of de /es, genitive defi. art. both genders, pi. — </u,
in the sense of some^ part. art. m. — de la, in the sense of
some, part. art. f. — des, in the sense of some, part, art*
both genders, pi. — de indefinite art. both genders and
numbers, geni. and abl. — a dat. indef. art.
* Repeat this same preposition before each verb*
459
Substantive.. Qm^imm: What gender? What num-
ber? If the noun is singular, name its plural ; if plural,
name its singular.
Es^mples. Le pouvoir du roi ; la liber U des faommes ;
le prix des denries^ the price o/* provisions.
^plicaiionp Pouvoir^ substantive, m. pouvoirs for its
pi. — -Libertt^ subst. f. libertes^ for its pK — Prix^ subst*
Ills, prix for its pL — Iknrief^ subst. f. pi. denret for its
singular.
Adjective. Questions : What gender? What number?
What does it agree with in the sentence ? If it be mas-
culine, name its fern. If it be feminine, name its masc.
Examples. Un beau chapeau, a fine hat ; ces femmes
sonijolies^ those ladies are pretty j cette fille est orgueil*
ieustj th&t girl is proud*
Application. Beauy noun adj. m. agrees with chhpeau ;
it has belle for its feminine.*-^Jo/i<5, noun adj. f. pi.
agrees with femmes; it has joli for its masculine. —
Orgudlleuse^ noun adj. f. agrees with Jille ; it ha^ or*
I gueilkux for its masculine.
Pronoun. Qi^tuxns : U it persona), conjunctive, pos*
eessive, relative, demonstrative, interrogative or indefi*
Dite ? What gender? What number ? With what does it
agree in the sentence ?
I Examples. Elle a mon livre, she has my book. Ceitt
plume ne vaut rien, this pen isg&odfor nothing. L'bom-
me qui vous parlott, the man who was speaking to xfou.
II y a plusieurs annees, several years ago. Quel homme ?
What man ?
Application. Elle^ pronoun pers. f. agrees with a.
Mon^ pronoun poss. m. agrees with livre. Cette^ pro-
noun demonstr. f. agrees with plume. Qui, pronoun rel.
both genders and numbers, agrees with homme. Plu-
sieurs^ pronoun indef. pi. both genders, agrees with
annies. Quel ? pron. int. m. agrees with homme.
Verb. Questions: Name its infinitive — its person —
its number — its tense — its mode.
Examples. Pendant qu'ils itoient ensemble, j'en/encJu
Bonner midi ; while they were together^ I heard twelve
o^clock strike. Quoiqu'il paroisse heureux, n^enviez pas
460
BCD sort ; though he may appear happy^ do nol envj h;
situalion*
Application^, Etoient^ from etre ; 3d pers. pi. imperf.
tense, indie, mood. EnUndilSy from entendrt; Utpen.
sing, preterite, indicative mood* Paroisse^ frompamiTt
3d pers. sing. pres. tense, subjunc. mood* £nvMz,froiii
envier ; 2d pers. pi. imperat. mood*
Preposition. What does it govern in the sentence?
Examples* Avant midi; sans argent; before no(n>;
without monty.
Application. Avant^ a preposition, governs mii
iSarw, a preposition, governs argent.
Conjunction. What mood does it require? Name
the verb it acts upon in the sentence.
Examples* Lorsque le roi entra, Ti^hen thekin^cm
m. Quoiqne vous soyez riche, though you be rick Je
lis pour m'amuser, / read to amuse myself*
Application. Lorsque^ 2l conjunction, requires the
indie. Here it governs entra. Quoique^ a conjunction.
requires the subjunc. Here it governs soyez. Po^t)^
conjunction, requires the infinitive. Here it govern
amuser.
Adverbs and interjections. Only name tbem.
Examples. Ah ! mon ami, agissez prudenvmni ; ab,
my friend^ act prudently.
Application. Ah is an interjection. — PrudtrMMK^"^^
an adverb.
DE LA VERSIFICATION FRANCOISE.
LES vers, k oe les considerer que sous le rapport de
leur mecanisme, sent des paroles arraugees selon cer-
taines regies fixes et determinees.
Ces regies regardent sur-tout le nombre des sjllabes,
la cesure, la rime, les mots que le vers exclut, les li-
cences qu^il permet, et enfiD les difiierentes manieres
dont il doit £tre arrange dans chaque sorte de Po^me^
Des diffirentes especes de Vers franqois.
Od eompte ordinairement cinq sortes de vers franfois.
C^est par le nombre des sjUabes qu^on les distingUQ*
1^. Ceux de douae syilabes, comme :
Dans le r6«duit ob-scur d*a-ne al-co-ve en-fon-c^e
S^^-le-ve an lit de plu-me a grands frais a-mas-s^e :
Qaa-tre ri-deaux pom-peux, par un dou-ble con-toor,
J^VL d^*fen-dent Pen-tr^e A la clar-t6 du jour.
Ces vers s^appellent alexandrins^ hiroiqaes ou grands
vers*
2^* Ceux de dix sjllabes, comme :
Du peu qu^il a le sage est sa-tis-fait.
3^. Ceux de buit syllables, comme :
L^hi-po-cri-te en fjraii-des fer-ti-le,
Des Pen-fan-ce est p^-tri de fard ;
II sait co-lo-rer a-vec art
Le fiel que sa bou-che dis-tille.
4^, Ceux de sept syllabes, comme :
Grand Dieu ! vo-tre main r^-clame
Les dons que j^en ai rc-^us.
El-le vient cou-per la trame s^
Des jours qu^eMe m^a tis-sus,
Mon der-nier so-leil se l^ve,
Et vo-tre souf-fle m''en'ldve
De la ter-re des vi'Vans ;
Com-qae la feuil-le s^-ch^
Qui, de sa ti-ge ar-ra-cb^e,
De-vient le jon-et des yents.
5^* Ceux de six syllabes, comme :
A soi-m^me o-di-enx
Le sot de tout s'ir-ri-te :
En tous licux il sM-vite,
Et se Irou/e en tons licux.
39*
462
Les vers qui ont moins de six syllabes ne sont guere
d'usage que pour la poesie Jjriqae, et quelques peliles
pieces badioes.
DE LA CESURG.
La cesure est un repos qui coupe le vers en Jenz
parties ou hemistiches.
Ce repos doit etre a la sixieii^ syllabe dans les grands
vers, et a la quatrieme dans ceux de dix sjllabes.
L'esprit et I'usage de la cesure sont tres-bien exprimes
dans ces vers de Boileau.
Que toujours en vos vers, - le sens coupant les mots,
Suspende rhemistiche, - en marque le repos.
Sar les ailes da temps -la tristesse s^envole.
Qae le mensonge - un instant vous outrage.
Tout est en feu - soudain pour Pappujrer ;
La v6nt6 • perce enfin le nuage,
Tout est de glace - k vous justifier .
II n^y a que les vers de douze et de dix syllabes qui
aient une cesure.
Pour que la cesure soit bonne, il faut que le sens au-
torise le repos ; ainsi dans les vers suivans, la cesure
est defectueuse.
N'oublions pas les grands- bienfaitsde la patrie.
Faites voir un regret - sincere de vos fautes.
Mon pere, quoi<|u^i] eut-la t^te des meilleures,
Ne m^a jamais rien fait-apprendre que mes heures.
La cesure ne vaut rien dans ces exemplcs, parce qiie
le sens exige que le mot ou est la cesure, et celui qui le
suit, soient prononces tout de suite et sans pause.
Mais la cesure est bonne dans les vers suivans :
Ses cbanoines vermeils - et brillans de sant^
S^engraissoient d^une longue - et sainte oisivete.
Ici la cesure est bonne, parce qu^on peut faire uoe
petite pause apres un substantif suivi de plusieurs ^d-
jectifs, ou^M^® plusieurs adjectifs qui suivent ou qui
precedent *ur^ubstanlif.
I. Remarque. Le dernier mot du premier hemisticbe,
peut se terminer par Ve muet, pourvu que le mot suivant
commence par une vojelle.
^^'Ami lui dit le chantre encor pile d^borrenr,
N^insulte pas de gr&ce k ma juste terreur.
n tr^pigne de joie. il pl?ure de tezidresse^
4C3
II. Rem. Leg pronoms cela^ celuu ce/ui-la, efc. et de
qui, mis pour* dont^euvent aussi terminer ie premier
hemisticbe, ou recevdir la cesure; on souffre cette ne-
gligence, mais il faut^ae la permettre rarement; elle
donne toujours aux vers un air prosaique.
il n'est fort entre ceux que tu prends par centaines,
Qui ne puisse arrSter un rimeur m scmames :
B^nissoDs Dieu de qui la puissance est sans homes.
Les vers de dix et de douze sjllabes sont, comme toue
les autres, assujetis aux regies dont il nous reste a parler.
DE LA RIME.
La Rime est la convenanc^ de deux sons qui termi-
nent deux vers. Quelquefois on exige aussi qu^ii y ait
convenance dWtbograpbe, que deux sons seroblables
soient representes par les memes lettres.
Ou me cacher ? fuycns dans la nuit infernale.
Mais que dis-je ? nion p^re y tient I'urne fatale.
Le sort, dit-on, Pa mise en ses iF^v^res mains.
Minos juge aux enfers tous les p&les humains.
On distingue deux sortes de rimes, la feminine et la
masculine. La premiere est celle des vers qui se termi*
nent par un e muet, soil seul, soit suivj d'une s ou d'n/.
Traraillez k Joisir, quelque ordre qui tous pressft,
Kt ne vous piquez point d^une folle Vitesse.
il veut les rappeler, et sa voix les efiraie ;
lis courent ; tout son corps n'est bientdt qu'unc plaic.
Dans quels ravissemens, k votre sort li^e,
Du reste des mortels je virrois oubli^e.
Un jeune homme, toujours bouillant dans ses caprices,
Est pr6t k recevoir Pimpression des vices.
C^est peu qu^en un ouvrage od les fautes fourmillent,
Des traits d^esprit semes de temps en temps p^tillent.
Ces vers feminins ont uoe syllabe de plus que lea
inasculins : mais comme Ve muet sonne foiblement dans
la syllabe qui termine le vers, cette syllabe est comptee
pour rien.
La rime masculine est celle qui finit par une autre
lettre que i'e muet, ou seul, ou suivi d'une «, ou enfin d'n/.
Chaque vertu devient une divinity ;
Minerve est la prudence, et V^nus la beauts.
Le travail est souvent le pdre du plaisir ;
Je plains Phomme accab16 du poids de son loisir.
Remarque. La syllabe dient ou aient, qui se trouve
dans les imparrails et les condttionnels des verbes, forme
464
une rime mascoline, parce que cetie syllabe a le sonde
Ve OBvert. Aiosi iea vers saivans soat maaculioa*
Anx accovdf d^Aaphion let pierres se nonroicnt,
£t tur Uft mors Th^baius en ordre t^^levoiept,
RIMES RICHES £T SUFFISANTES.
Les rimes masculines et f^minines se diviaeni eo
riches et en suffisantes,
h La rime riche est form6e.de deux sons parfai-
tement semblables, et souvent repr^senl^s par les
mSmes lettres.
Indomptabk Tanreau, Dragon imp^tneux,
8a croype le recourbe en replk tortoeux.
De rage et de douleur le monstre bondiesant
Vient aux pieds det ehevaux tomber en mugissant*
An moment que je parle, ah, mortelle pens^e !
lU braTent la fureur d^une amante insens^e.
II. La rime suffisante est celie qui n'a pas une con*
venance aussi exacte de sons et d'ortiiographe.
H^Ias ! Dieux tottt-puissanB, que no pleun toqs appaisenL
Que ces vains ornemens, que ces voiles me p^sent !
Quelle importune main, en formant tous ces ncends,
A pris BOiB sur men front d^aBsembler mes cheveox ^
III. Dans la rime nrfascuiine, on n'a guere ^gard eo
g^Q^raly qu^au dernif r son des mots : ainsi maison rime
avec poison ; pi£t6 avec pure f 6 ; proces avec succes*
IV. Mais dans la rime femininr^oD fait une attention
particuliere au son de Tavant derniere syllabe, parce
que ceiui de la derniere n'est ni a$sez plein, ni assez
marqu6, pour produire une conformity de son sensible et
agr^able a Poreillt. Ainsi mere et mare, audace et Justice,
estime et diadhne ne rimeroient pas ensemble, quoique
ces mots se terminent par la mSme sj'llabe re, ce, me.
Mais 'Bisihlt et sensible, monde et profonde, jftsiice et
precipice, usage et partage, peuvent rimer ensemble,
parce que ces mots ont une convenance de sons dans
les avant-^iernieres syllabes*
y. Comme la convenance de sons est essentielle a
la rime, on ne saurott bien faire rimer les syllabes
breves avec les longues, les / mouili^es. avrc les / non
mouillees, etc. comme matlre et metre ; juute et route ;
jmne (qui nVst pas vieux) et jtxjLne (nbstin^ocr) ^ la
mie et la//e ; piril aipuiril, etc. Ainsi J. B. Rousseau
465
a manqu^ a son exactitude ordinaire, quand il disoit &
son ami ;
£t sur ce bord emailli
OvL NeuUli borde la Seine,
Reviens aa vin d^^uviU
Meier les eaux d^Hypocrine.
VI. L'e ferm^, Vi et Pu, soit seuls, soit suivis dea
consonnes /, 5, t ou z, ne ferment pas de bonnes rimes,
si dans les deux syllabes rimantes iis ne sont pr^c^d^s de
la meroe consonne. Ainsi bonteet donn^^vtrtus et requs^
amis et avis^ cultivez etportez^ ne rimeroient pas bien*
ChoUissez des amis de qui la pi^t6
Vous soit un siir garant de lour fid^lit^.
Ami droit et sincere on doit a ses amis
Garder fid^lement ce qu^on leur a promis.
VII. L'observation precedente a lieu pour I'a dans
les verbes: il donna et il amm, il porta et il'r^va, il
immola et il saura^ ne rimeroient pas ensemble. Et en
g^n^ral elle est d^usage pour tous les sons commiins k
on grand nombre de mots. Ainsi les sons ant ou en/, eu
et on ne riment bien qu'autant quails sont pr^c^des des
memes lettres, comvae puissant^ choMant ; agrimmt^ rigV'
ment ; passion^ mission ; ambitieux^ religieux ; vieux^mieux^
Mais Ics mots suivans ne rimeroient pas bien ensem-
ble : puissant^ chanalani ; raison, passion ; heureux, re- .
ligieux^ etc.
VIII. Quand la rime est form^e par des sons pleins,
comme ar^ asy al^ or^ 05, ot^ er, es, tty at, ei, ot\ 0ti, eau^
eu, ou ; par an^ am^ en, em, ton, oin ; en un mot par des
voyelles pi ec^d^es d'une ou de plusieurs consonnes,
alors on n'exige pas que la lettre qui precede soit la
roeme dans les mots qu'on veut faire rimer. Par ex-
emple, embarras et combats, gros et sots^ progris et sue*
cw, mer et en^lr, ouvert et sovffert, soitpir et d6sir^ espoir
et devoir, jamais et parfait^, pain et f^iam, nuit et conduit^
ttmoins et besoins, soutiens et conviens^ et autres sembla*
bles peuvent rimer ensemble.
IX. Un mot en e, a;, ou z^ ne peut rimer qu'avec un
mot termine par Tune de ces trois consonnes. Ainsi
admirable et tables, risible et plausibles, le secmrs et le
jour, la vaniti et vous miritez^ la foi et les lois^ le cour-
roux et le genou, etc. ne rimeront pas bien ensemble.
496
Halt hit et Bw, ^ourroux et Ioua, cilesUs et ttt de-
fe; /e5, vanitis et vous m6dUez^ clefs et vous rac/ez, le 4u*
cour« et ie cour;, forineront de boones rimes.
X. Dans les verbes ot> et oily ajant )e son de Pe
ouvert, ne riment guere qu'avec un autre verbe. Quoi-
que yaimois et jamais^ dannois et harnois^ pla^oit at jaceff
man^uoi/ et banquet^ je deplaqois et /e5 ^i/cce«, se termi-
nent par Ie mefne son, Pusage ordinaire est de ne les
pas faire rimer ensemble*
XI. Les terminatsons, en/, otenf ou aient, ne doivent
rimer qu^avec des verbes qui aient les memes termi-
naisons : ils privent^ ils 6crivent ; ils Itirenly ils bureni;
quails surfassent^ qul^'ih effacent; etc* mais ils meprismt
ne rimeroient pas bien avec enlreprise ; la surfact avec
ils aurpassmt.
XIK La convenance des sons et d'orthographe ne
peut autoriser la rii»e du met avec lui-DieB)e, d'un stm-
pie avec son compose, nl meme de deax mots derives
de )a meme racine, quand ils se ressemblent trop poor/a
tignificftttoft. Ainsi la rime est defectueuse dans ces rtni
Je connob trop les Grand?, dans Ie malbenr amisy
Ingratft dana ki fortune, et biestdt envsmU,
Eile est tout-al-fait vicieuse dans ceox-ci :
Les chefs et les soldats ne se connoissent phts ;
J/un ne peat commander, Pautre n^ob^it plus.
Xin. Mais deux mots entierement semblables parU
son et Forthograpbe riment bien ensemble,, lorsqu'ilsont
des significations difierentes. X^es derives sont dans I^
meme cas, sHIs n'ont plus un rapport sensible pour le sens.
Prends-moi Ie bon parti, laisse^laL teus les Usatea :
Cent fraacfl au denier cinq, combien font-iU ? vingt itvrei*
Nobles, souvenez-vous qu^ime naissance illuttu
Des sentimens di> coeur regoit son plus beau luatte,
Dieo punit les forfaits que )e« reis ont cotnmif,
Ceox quMlt n^ont poi-nt veii^^, et c^xjcl quails out perviuF*
XIV. Les deux hemistiches d*un vers ne doivent pas
rimer ensemble, ni mdme avoir une convenanc0 d^
sons, comme :
II ne tiendra qn^a toi de partir avec mot.
Aux Saumaises yWur# pr^arer des torturet.
467
XV. Le dernier hemisticbe d'an vers ne dolt pas
HOD plus rimer avec !e premier du vers precedent on du
vers saivant.
II faut, pour les aToir, employer tons vos totnt ;
lis sent k moi, du ftioins toot autant qu'*k mon fi^re.
Un fiacre, me cbuvrant d'un d^Iug« de bone
Centre Xe mor vouin m'^rase de sa roue ;
£t, vonlant me sauver, des porteurs tJihumaina
De leur maudit b&ton roe donneUt dans les reins.
XYL II faut encore etritet* la rime dans ks premiers
hemistiches de deux vers qui se suivent.
Sinon domain matin^ si vons le trouvez bon,
Je mettrai de ma main le feu dans la maison*
Quelquefois cependant la rime des premiers hemis-
tiches D^a rien de choquant ; c'est lorsqu^elle se fait par
la repetition d'une pensee, d'ane expression qu^en rte*
{iroduit k dessein, pour fixer davantage I'attentioii do
ecteur; comme:
Qui chercbe traiment Dieu^ dans lui seul se repose ;
£t qui craint vraimtnt JDteu, ne craint rien autre obose*
Des termes que U vers esoclut.
I. Les bons Poetes rejettent avec soin tout les
termes durs, on difficiles a prononcer, oo has et pra<
saiques. Rarement lis se servent des conjonctions que
les orateurs emploient souvent pour Her et arrondir
leurs periodes ; telles que cUst pourquoi^ parte que^
pffurvu que^puisquBy de maniire^ defagon que^ ae ^ofU que
ou en sorte que, outre, d^aiileun, en ^et^ etc.
II est un beureux cboiz de mots barmonienv ;
Fujrez des mauvais sons le concours odieuz.
Le Ters le mieua rempli) la plus noble pens^e,
l^e pent plaire k Pesprit, quand roreille est bless^e.
II. Un mot termine par une autre voyelle que l'«
muet, ne peut 6tre suivi d^un mot qui commence aussi
par une voyelle ou une h muette; ce seroit un hiatus.
Gardez qu'une Toyclle k courir trop h&t6e, '
Ne soit d^une voyelle en son chemin heurt^e^.
Ainsi les phrases suivantes ne formeroient pas de
vers :
Que Paimable vertu a peu d^adorateurs J
Evitezilc soucf, et fuyez la colere.
46a
III. Comme la conjonclion ef a toujours le son de Ve
ferme, elle De sauroit non plus dans le vers etre suWk
d^uoe vojelle. Oq ne pourroit pas dire en vers:
Qai sert et aime Dieu, possede toutes choses.
Mais on dira bien :
Qui connoit et sert Dieu, possede toutes choses.
lY. Les voyelles nasales qui, dans la prononciation,
ne doivent pas etre liees avec le mot suivant, ne peu-
vent avec grace etre suivies d'un mot qui commence par
one voyelle* Ainsi la rencontre des voyelles nasales
et des voyelles simples est desagreable dans ce vers:
Un grand notn est un poids difficile l^ porter.
Ah ! j^attendrai long-temps, la nuit est loin encore.
Cependant cette rencontre pcut se souffrir, quandia
I>rononciation permet de pratiquer un petit repos entrc
e mot qui finit par un son nasal, et le mot qui com-
mence par une vojelle ; comme dans ce vers de
PAthalie de Racine :
Celui qui met un frein a la fureur des iiot?,
Sait aussi des m^cbans arr^ter les complots.
V. L'e muet final et precede d'une voyelle, comme
dans donneen aimSe^ Asie^ eyivie^ la />ate, la joie, la prait^
la rut^ entrevue^ etc. ne peut entrer dans le corps do
vers qu^au moyen de Pelision j ainsi )es yers saivaDS
8ont mal construits :
Au tracers du Soleil, ma vue s'^blouit.
lis Yous louent tout haut et Tomjouent tout bas.
II avout sa faute et demande pardon.
Mais C€ux-ci sont reguliers k cause de Pelision,
La joie est naturelle aux dmes innoc^ntes.
A quels mortels regrets ma vie est r^serv^e !
VI. L'e muet, dans le corps du mot et precede d'anc
voyelle, est compte pour rien dans la prononciation;
sou vent meme on ne Pecrit pas. 1 1 agriera, critra^ loutra^
rehiement^ devouement^ etc. ne font pas plus de sjllabe^
que agrirUy crtra, loura^ rentment^ divoAmenU
ENJAMBEMENT DES VERS..
Les vers n'ont ni grace ni harmonie, quand on rcjette
au commencement du second vers des mots qui dependent
necessairement de ce qui se trouve a la fin du premier*
4S9
Quel qae soit voire ami, sacbez que mutuelle
Doit etre ramiti^ ; naeme ardeur, iiieme z^le.
n n'^est done point d^amis, pour la derniere fois
Je le r^p^te en€or : pea connoissent les lois
D^une Traie amiti^. .
Dans le premier vers, mu/tt«//e depend n^cessairement
de ces mots doit itrt Vamilii.
Dans les derniers, ces mots i^unt xrau amitie sont de-
pendans de ceux-ci, les lois^ et Ton ne pent les s^parer
dans la prononciation.
Ces enjambemens sont proscrits dans la haute po^sie,
mais ils se tolerent dans les fables et dans les autres
pieces de style familier.
SI n^annioins la depcndance d'an vers s'^tendoit jas-
qu^a la fin du suivant, en sorte qu'a la fin du premier il
y eut un petit repos, Pharmonie loin d'etre^bless^e n'en
seroit que plus sensible.
L^ git la sombre enTie, k I'oeil timide et louche,
Versant sur des lauriers les poisons de sa boucbe.
Ce malbeureux combat ne fit qu^approfondir
L^abtme dont Valois vouloit en vain sortir. — Volt.
Des licences qu^on se permet dans les Vers.
Ces licences consistent dans certaines dispositions de
tnots, dans Pemploi de plusieurs termes dont la prose
n'oseroit se servir, dans le retranchement d'une lettre.
DES TRANSPOSITIONS.
L On place avec grace les regimes composes avant
les mots et les verbes dont ils dependent.
Ji la Religion soje2 toujours fiddle,
Les mceurs et la vertu ne sauvent point sans elle.
C^est Dieu qui du niant a tir^ Tunivers ;
C^est lui qui mr la terre a r^pandu les mers.
Sans Dieu rien n^eilt 6t6^
Et lui seul det morttU fait la f(6)icit^.
Ji voiu former U ccsur appliquez-vous sans cesse.
IL On place entre Pauxiliaire et le participe, entre
le verbe et son regime, des mots qui n'y seroient pas
so^fierts en prose.
Un vieillard v^n^rable avoit, loin de la Coury
Cherch^ la douce pais dans un obscur s^jour :
Dieu fit daru en dUett desceadre la sagesse.
40
47©
Les transpositions, qdand ell^ sont naturelles, et
qu^elles n'embarras^ent pas le sens de la phrase, donneiit
de la grace et de la nobiestse a la po^sk ; mw elles ne
▼alent rieo, lorsqu'elles- i;endeDl le vers dor, on qu'elles
obscurcissent la pens^e, coniine dans les vers suivaBS :
Quoi ! Toit-on rcTetu de P^tote sacr^e
lie pf§tre de Vauitl 8^ait6ter & Tefitr^e ?
Craignez 4e voire orgtteil de vout rendre la dupe.
Que toujoors ]a fierU, Phonneur, la biens^ance
De cetlefoUe ardeur s^oppose k la naissance.
Dt8 moisprcpres a la Poiskm
La po^sie 0e ser t en g^n^ral des memes mots que ia
prose ; cepeadant il y a qoelqnes expressions que fes
Podtesempioient heureaseinent,etqui8eroient d^ places
dans la prose. Telles sont an/if ue pour oncten .* coursur
pour cheval: PElerntl^h Tres-Huut^U Taut-Puissani pour
Dieu : Ufianc pour U snn^ le vtnir^ : le glaive pour r^6e :
les humains^ les mortelsi la race de Japei pour Its hommes:
hymen ou hyminie pour mariage : espoir pour espirance:
le penser pour la pens6e : jadis pour autrefois : naguere
ou nagueres pour il v?y a pas long-lemps : labeur pour
travifil : repeniance pour repeniir : soudain pour atissiioi:
ombre clernelkj somhres lords pour Venfer^ etc.
O^ sont, Dieu de Jacob, tes antiques booths ?
On fait cas d^on coursier, qui, fier et plein de cceor.
Fait paroitre en courant sa bouillante viguear.
L^Eternel en ses mains tient seul nos destinies.
C^lebrons dans nos chants la gloire du Tr^s-haut.
Si quelque audacieux embrasse sa qnerelle,
Qu^^ la fureur du glaive on le livre avec elle.
Souvent d^un faux espoir un amant est nourri.
Les Dieux m'en sont t^moins, ces Dieux qui dans mon flatic
Ont allum^ le feu fatal k tout mon sang,
Ces Oieux qui se sont fait une gloire cruelle
De s^duire le coeur d^une foible mortelle.
Soumise a mon ^poux, et cachant mes ennuis,
De son fatal barmen je cnllivois les friiits.
On n^aime plus comme on aimoit jadis.
Va dans T ombre eternelle, ombre pleine d'envie ;
Et ne te mSIe plus de censurer ma vie.
La lecture des boos Poetes fournira une foule d^autres
expressioQs propres a la po^sie.
471
Nous eerWons eo prose je crois^ je vm^ je dis^ je sais^
je vis^ yuverlisy etc. Le^ Poetes, selon le bespio, em*
l^ioiefit ou retranchent 1^; dans ces mots* lis ecrivent dc
meme jusque ou jusquesy encore ou encor^ grace au del ou
grdces au CieL lis eoiploieni aussi alors que^ pour lorsque^
cependant que pour pendant que^ avecque pour avec^ etc.
Les bons Poetes se servent rarement de la plupart de
ces dernieres licences ; et ceux qui se liyrent a la poesie
ne doivent pas oublier le precepte de Boileau.
Sur tout qu'en vos Merits la langae r^v^r^e,
Dans vos plus grands ezces vous soit toujours sacr^e ;
Knvain vous me frappez d^on son m^lodieux,
Si le terme est impropre ou le tour vicieux ;
Mon esprit n^admet point un pompeux barbarisme, -
Ni d'un vers ampoul^ Porgueilleux soUcisnie.
Sans la langne, en un mot, Pauteur le plus divin,
Est toujours, quoiqu^il fasse, un m^chant 6crivain.
DE L'ARRANGEMENT DES VERS ENTR'EUX.
Dans les dlfferenles manieres dont les vers doivent
etre arranges, il faut eonsid^rcr la rime et le nombrc
des syllabes.
Le nombre des syllabes est arbitraire dans les pieces
libresetdans la poesie Ijrique ; mais il est determine
dans les autres pieces serieuses, qui sont la plupart ecri-
tes en vers de douze syllabes. Ainsi dans le Poeme
^pique, I'Eglogue, PElegie, la Satyre, I'Epitre, et dans
la Trag^die et la haute Com^die, il est d'usage de n'em-
ployer que le vers Alexandrin.
Quant a la rime, deux vers masculins peuvent Strc
suivis de deux vers f^minins, el vice versa ; ou bien un
vers masculin est suivi d'un ou de deux feminins, et no
vers feminin d'un ou de deux masculins.
On appelle vers o rime* plates ceux qui sont disposes
de la premiere fa90Q, comme les suivans.
De figures sans nombre, eg^yez votre ouTrat^e ;
Que tout y fasse aux ycnx une riante image :
On peut ^tre k la fois et pompeux et plaisant,
Et je hais un sublime ennnjeux, languissant.
Un po^me excellent oii tout marche et se suit,
N'fest pas de ces travanx qu'un caprice produit :
11 vcut du temps, des soins ; et ce p^nible ouvrage
jamftis d'un ^colier ne fut Paprentiseage.
472
On appelle vers a rimts eroUies ceux qui sotit ordoQ-
n^de ia secoode fnaniere^comine ceux-ci daus lesquek
Rousaeao dit en parlant de Circe furieose :
S& Toiic redootable
Trouble les enfers,
Un bruit formidable
GroDde dans les airs,
Un Toilcf effrojable
Cottrre PUmver^.
Mais quand on n'observe d'autre regie qne de ne pas
mettre de suite plus de deux vers masculins oy feminins,
et qu^on fait suivre un vers masculin ou femintn d'an ou
de deux vers d'une rime diSerente, alors ils s'appellent
vers d rm%8 melees^ comme ceux-ci :
Ah I HI d^une panvret^ dure
Nous cberchons k nous affranchir,
Kapprochons-nous de la natiire.
Qui seule peut nous enrichir.
For9ons de funestes obstacles ;
R^servons pour nos tabernacles
Get or, ces rubis, ces m^taux ;
Ou dans le sein des mers avides
Jetons ces richesses perfides,
1/unique aliment de nos maux.
Lorsque les vers sont en rimes plates^ ils ont ordi-
nairement le /neme nombre de syllabes* Mais lorsqu'its
sont a rimes croisees ou a rimes melees souvent ils ont
nne mesure in^gale.
Dans ies vers a rimes plates, oVst on d^faut de faire
revenir deux rimes masculines ou fifminines deja em-
ployees, de maniere qu'elles ne soient s^parecs de deux
autres semblabies que par deux rimes d'one espece dif-
ferente, comme dans cet exemple :
Soudain Potier se Uve et demande audience .*
Chacun, i son aspect, garde un profond iilence.
Dans ce temps malheureux par le crime infeciSy
Potier fut toujours juste, et pourtant rerpeclL
Souvent on l^avoit vu, par sa m&Ie iloqueneSy •
De leurs emportemens r^prkner la licence^
£t, conservant sur eux sa vieille auioriti^
Leur montrer la justice avec impuniti.
473
L'oreille est aassi choqu^e par la convenance de sons
dans les rimes masculines et feminines qvi se suivent)
comme dans ces vers, d'aiilettrs pleins de belles images.
* . Tel des antres da Nord 6chapp6$ sur la terre^
Pr^c^d^s par les vents, et suivis du tonntrre^
D^un toarbillon de poodre obscurcissant les airs^
liCB orages Ibagueax parcourent VUnw$ra,
On compose a rimes plates les grands poiemes, tels que
r£pop^e, la Trag^die, la Comedie, PEglogue, TEUgie,
la Satyre, I'Epitre ; a rimes crois^es, TOde, le Sonnet,
le Rondeau ; et k rioies melees, les Stances, PEpigram-
me, les Fables, les Madrigaux, les Chansons.
11 n^y a d'autres regies k observer dans les grands
poemes pour la distribution des rimes, que d'^viter la
consonance, et de ranger les vers masculins et feminins
deux a deux les uns apr^ les autres. Nous ne nous ^ten-
drons done pas davantage sur cet article par rapport a TE-
pop^e, a la Trag^die, etc* Nous ne dirons rien non plus
des autres regies de ces poemes. Ces dissertations nous
mdoeroient trop loin. ConsultezTArtpo^tique de Boi-
ieau, et les meilleures poetiques anciennes et modernes*
Mais Pordonnance des vers dans plusieurs petits
poemes a des regies fixes et particulieres* Ce sera le
sujet des articles suivans.
DES STANCES.
Une Stance est un certain nombre de vers, apres les*
quels le sens est fioi. Dans une Ode elle s^appelle Strophe.
Une stance n'a pas ordinairement moins de quatre
vers, ni plus de dix. La mesure des vers y est arbi-
traire; ils peuvent etre ou tous grands ou tous petits,
ou bien mel^s les uns avec les autres.
Les stances sont appelees regulieres^ lorsqu'elles ont
un meme nombre de vers, un meme melange de rimes,
et que les grands et les petits vers y sont ^galement
distribues. Elles sont appelees irrtgulieres^ lorsqu'elles
n'ont pas toutes ces convenances.
Pour la perfection des stances, il est nteessaire,
1^. Que le sens (inisse avec le dernier vers de chacune.
40*
474
3^« Que le dernier vers d'une stance ne rine pas
avec le premier de la suivante*
3°. Que les stances d'une meme piece commenGefit
et finissent par des rimes de meme nature; c^est^-dire,
que si le premier vers d'une stance finit par une rime
masculine, les premiers vers des strophes suivantes doi*
vent ^galement etre mascuiins, II est cependant boo
de remarquer que quoiqu^en general il ne soit pas per-
mis de mettre de suite quatre rimes de meme espece,
cependant plusieurs auteurs I'ont fait d'une stance a
Pautrc, parce quails ont regarde chaque stance d'uoe
piece comme Isolde, et comme independaote de ceite
qui suit. Mais nous crojons que cette licence ne peut
etre toler^e que dans les chansons.
Si une stance est seuFe, elle prend un nom particulier,
du nombre de vers dont elle est compos^e. ElJe s^af-
pelle Quairain^ si elle en a quatre ; Sixain^ si elle en a
six ; Dixain^ si elle en a dix. Et quelquefois a raison
du sujet, c'est une Epigramme^ nn McdrigaL On ap-
peloit autrefois Octave une stance de butt vers.
On voit que toutcs ces stances sont du nombre pair.
II y en a aussi du nombre impair, de cinq, de septetde
neuf vers.
RtlGLES POUR LES STANCES DE NOMBRE PAIR.
I. Stances de quatre vers*
Ces stances sont plusieurs quatrains joints ensemble,
ri li^s par un sens qui dure jusqu'a la fin de la piece*
Entre le premier vers masculin ou f^minin, et celuiqui
Jai repond,on met un ou deux vers d'une riuie differente,
comme dans ces versou I'Amiti^fait elle-meme son por-
trait.
J'ai le visage long, et la mine naive,
Je suis sans finesse et sans art.
Mod tetnt est fort uni, ma couleur assez viTe,
£t je ne met9 jamais de fard.
Mon abord est civil ; j^ai la boiicbe riante,
£t mes yeux ont mille douceurs :
- 'Mai« quoiqae je sois belle, agr^able et cbarmante,
Je regoe sur bien peu de cceurs.
475
On me protette uses, et presqne toos les honmes
Se vaotent de suivre mes lois :
Mais que j*en connofs peu dans lemMe oik nous lommes^
Dont le oceur r^ponde a mi^oiz \
Ceux que je fais aimer d^une flamme fiddle^
Me font Pobiet de tous leurs soins ;
Et qnoique je vieilhsse, ils me trouvent fort befle,
£t ne m^en estiment pas moins.
On m^accuse pourtant d^aimer trop a parottre
Oik Pon voit la prosp^ril^ ;
Cependant il est vrai qu^on ne me peut connoStre
Qu^au milieu de TadTersit^.
Autre exemple :
Dans ce gallon pacifique
Od president les neof eoeurs,
Un loisir philosopbique
T^offre encor d^autres douceurs.
lA^ nous trouverons sans peine
Arec toi, le verre en main,
L^bomme apris qui Diog^ue
Courut si long- temps en vain.
£t dans la douce all^gresse
Dont tu sais nous abreuver,
Nous puiserons la sagesse
Qu^il cbercba sans la trourer. — ), B. Roussbau.
Remar^uc* Les veritables quatrains n'ont aucune
liaison pour le sens, et la morale eD est ordinairement
la matiere. Exemple :
Ne demandez h, Dieu nt gloire, ni ricbesse,
Ni ces biens dont P^clat repd le peuple ^tonn^ :
Mais pour bien commander, demandez la sagesse ;
Avec un don si saint tout vous sera donn^.
Ecoutez et lisez la celeste parole,
Que, dans les livres saints, Dieu nous donne pour loi. >
La politique bumaine au prix d^elle est frivole^
£t forme plus souvent un tyran qu'un bon Roi.
II. Stances de six vers*
Elles sont composees d'un quatrain et de deux vers
d^une meme rime, qui se mettent au commencement oa
a la fin. D'ailleurs les vers d'un quatrain se melent de
la meme maniere que ci-dessus.
Si les deux vers d'une meme rime sont au commence*
ment, alors a la fin du troisieme, on met ordinairemeDt
un repos, et le sens ne doit pas s^etendre jusqu'au qua-
476
trieme. Ce repoa donne beaucoap de gr&ee el d^bar-
rooDie a cette aorie de stances.
On peut voir, par lea exemples Buivans, qae ce repot
peat etre plus ou moins marqu^, et qu'il n^est pas
rigoureusement exigi dans les sixains.
Ce n^est done point assez que ce people perfide,
De la tainte cit6 profanateiir stupide,
Ait dant tout POrient port4 ses Standards ;
£t paiflible tjran de la Gr^ce abattue,
Partage k notre vne
La plus belie moiti^ du trdne des C6sact*
Des TeiUes, des traTaux un foible cceur s^^tonne.
Apprenons toutefois, que le fils de Latone,
Dont nous soivons la cour,
Ne nous vend qu^^ ce prix ces traits de vive flamme
Et ces ailes de feu qui ravissent one 4me
An celeste s^jour.
La place de ce repos varie^ et est taotot apres ie
second, tantot apres le quatrieme vers, dans les sixains
ou les deux vers d'une meme rime sont a la fin de la
strophe, comme dans les stances suivantes*
Seigneur, dans ton temple adorable,
Quel mortel est digne d'entrer ?
Qui pourra, grand Dieu p^n^trer
Ce sanctuaire impenetrable,
Oik tes saints inclines, d^un oeil respectneux,
CoDtempIent de ton front P^clat majestueox ?
Ce sera celui qui du vice
Evite le sentier impur.
Qui marcbe d'un pas ferme et silr,
Dans le cbemin de la justice ;
- Attentif et fiddle k distinguer sa voix,
Intrepide et severe k pratiquer ses loix ;
Celui devant qui le f>uperbe,
Enfle d^une vaine splendeur,
FaroSt plus bas dans sa grandeur
Que Pinsecte cacb^ sous Pherbe ;
Qui bravant du m^cbant le faste conronn^,
Honore la vertu du juste infortun^.
TIL Stances de huit vers.
CeB stances ne sont ordinairement que deux quatrains
Joints ensemble. Le sens doit finir apres le premier i
477
et les vers de tous les deux s^entrelacent, conome nous
I'avons d^ja diu Exemple :
Tel en un sacr^ vaIlo»,
Sur le bord d'une onde pure^
Croit i Tabri de PAquiloa
Un jeune lys, Pamour de la nature.
Loin du monde eleve, de tous les dons des Cieox
II est orn6 d^s sa naissance ;
Et da m^cbant Pabord contagieux
I9^altere point son innocence.
Racine, ehtturs d!*Athalit^
Si quelqne jour ^tant rvre
La mort arretoit mes pas,
Je ne voudrois pas revivre
Apr^s un si doux tr^pas :
Je m^en irois dans PATerne
Faire enivrer Alectoo,
Et b&tir une taverne
Dana le manoir de Plyton*— Maitrb Adam.
Ces stances peuvent aussi commencer par deux vers
sur tine meme rime, et les six autres sont sur des rimes
crois^es. Quelquefois aussi ces stances n'ont qu'un six-
aiu sur deux ou trois rimes, apres quoi viennent deux
vers de meme rime.
Ces melanges de rime peuvent ais^ment se concevoir,
sans qu^il soil n^cessaire d^en citer des exemples ; d^ail-
leurs lis ne sont pas communs*
ly. Stances dc dix virsm
Les stances de dix vers ne sont autre chose qu'uu
quatrain et un sixain, dont les vers s^entremelent selon
les regies ordinaires. Elles tirent leur harmonie d^un
premier repos plac^ k la fin du quatrain, et d'un second
apriis le septieme vers. Ex.
C^est un arret do Ciel, il faut que Phomme meure ;
Tel est son partage et sop sort :
Rien n*est plus certain que la mort,
Et rien plus incertain que cette demi^re heore.
Heoreuse incertitude, utile obscurity,
Par ou ta divine bont^
A Teiller, k prier, sans cesse nous convie !
Que ne pouTons-nons point aveo un tel secours^
Qui nous fait regarder tous les jours de la vie
Conuoe le ^erpier de nos jours S
478
Les Cienx iDsirQisent la teire
A rev€rer leur auteur ;
Tout ce que leur globe ensevre.
Calibre QQ Diea Cr^ateur.
Qael plus sublime cantique
Que ce concert mag^iiSque
De tous les celestes corps I
Quelle grandeur infinie !
Quelle divine harmonie
K^sulte de leurs accords !
^EGLES POUR LES STANCES DE NOMBRE IMPAIR.
Lc8 Stances de notnbre impair ont toutes, trois vers
Bur une meme rime, ford ouna nee des vers y est
d'ailleurs arbitraire, cxcepte qu'on ne peut mettre que
deux rimes seroblabkjs de suite, et qae fe quatrain par
lequel commencent les stances Je sept W de neuf ren,
doit eUr^ tetmn^ par im repos*
Stances de dnq vtn.
O rives du Jourdain ! 6 champs aim^s des Cicox I
Sacr^s monts, fertiles valines,
Par cent miracles signal^es,
Du doux pays de nos ayeux
Serons-noue toujours exil^es ?
Pardonne, Dicu puissant, pardonne k ma fbiWesW,
A Paspect des m^chans, confus^ ^pouvant^,
Le trouble m''a saisi, mes pas ont h^stt^ ;
Men z^le m*a trabi, Seigneur, ye le confesse,
En vojrant leur prosp^rit^.
Stances de sept vers*
Si la loi du Seigneur vous toucbey
Si le mensong? vous fait peur^
Si la justice en votre cceur i
K^gne aussi bien qu^en* Totre boucbe ; I
F«rlez, ^]s des hommes, pourquoi
Faut-il qn^une haine farouche
Pr^ide aux jugemens que vous lanc^z sur ipoi f
Stance de neuf vets.
Quel rempart. quelle autre banian
Poiirra d^fendre Pinnocent
Centre la fraude menrtridre
De Pimpie adroit et puissant?
S» laogue aux feintes pr^pai^,
479
Reii^mUi k la fl^ehe ac6i^e
Qui part et frappe en un moment
C^est un feu lig^er dans Pentr^e,
Que suit un long embr&sement.
DU SONNET.
Boileaa feitit qa^Apollon,
Voulant pouster k bottt toua les rimeiin Aran^ois,
Inventa du Sonnet les rigoureases lois,
Vottlut qu^en deux quatrains de meture pafetUe,
La rime avec deux sons frapp&t buit Mt I'^reilk ;
Kt qti'ensuite six vers artistement rang^t
Fussent en deux tercets par le sens partag^s.
Sur-tout de ce pod me il bannit la licence,
Defendit qu^un vers foible y p4t jamais entftr^
£t qu'un mot d6jk mis os&t B*y remoatrer.
Dn reste il Penrichit d^une beaut^ si^rSme :
Un Sonnet sans defaut raut seul un long Podme.
Le Sonnet est compost de quatorze vers d'une me-
siire ^gale, et pour Fordinaire de douze syllabes ; ces
vers sont partag^s en deux quatrains et un sixain.
Les rimes masculines et f^minines des deux quatrains
sont semblables, et on les entremeie dans Pan, de la.
meme maniere que dans Pautre.
Le sixain se coupe eh deux tercets, c^est*a-dire, en deux
stances de trois vers. Ces tercets cofnmencent Pun et
Pautre par deux rimes semblables, en sorte que le
troisieme vers du premier, rime avec le troisieme du
second.
II faut eviter que le melange des rimes, dans les quatre
dernlers vers du sixain, soit le meme que dans les qua«
trains.
Le second vers de cbaque quatrain doit avoir un
l-epos. Les deux quatrains et les deux tercets doivent
etre terminus chacun par un repos encore plus grand.
D'ailleurs tout doit etre noble dans ce Poeme, pen-
s^es, style, elocution. Point de repetitions, point de
redondance. La force et I'elevation en sont les princi-
paux caracteres.
On voit cependant des Sonnets, dont les sujets ne
sont pas sublimes; le style alors en est mediocre, et
doit I'^tre. Voici deux exemples du Sonnet. Le pre-
480
inter dans le genre simple, exprime la nature meme dc
Sonnet*
Doris, qai sait qu^auz vers quelqoefois je me plais.
Me demande od Sonnet et je m^en d^sesp^re.
Qttatorze Ters grand Dieu, le moyen de lea faire !
En Toil^ cependant df|^ quatre de faits.
Je ne pouvais d^abord trouver de rime, mait
En fesant, on apprend 4 se tirer d^affaire.
Poursniv^ons ; les quatrains ne m'^tooneront gu^re.
Si du premier tercet je puis faire les frais .
Je commence an hasard, et si je ne ro^ abuse,
Je n^ai pas commence sans Taven de ma Mnse,
Puisqu^en si pea de temps je m^en tire si net.
J^entame le second, et ma joie est extreme ;
Car des vers commandos j^acD^ve le treizi^me.
Comptez s^ik sont quatorze; et voild le Sonnet.
AUTRE SONNET,
Grand Dieu tes jogemens sont remplis d^^quil^ :
Tonjours tu prends plaisir a nous 6tre propice ;
Mais j*ai tant fait de mal, que jamais ta bontd
Ne me pardonnera qu^en blessant ta justice*
Oui, Seigneur, la grandeur de mon impi^t^
Ne laisse k ton pouvoir que le choix du supplice.
Ton int6r£t s^oppose 4 ma fi6iicjt^,
Et ta d^mence m£me attend que je p^risse.
Contente ton d^sir, puisqn^il Oest glorieuz ;
Offense-toi des pleurs qui coulent de mes yenx :
Tonne, frappe, il est temps, rends-moi guerre pour guerre.
J'adore, en p^rissant, la raison qui Oaigrit :
Mais dessus quel endroit tombera ton tonnerre
Qui ne soit tout couvert du sang de Jesus-Cbrist.
DU RONDEAU.
Le Rondeau n^ Gaulois a la nairete.
Tel est le caractere de ce petit podme« Toutea sortes
de vers y sont propres, excepte les Alexandrins qui ont
trop de gravite* II y entre treize vers de meme mesurey
sor deux rimes.
On peut faire dans le Rondeau ce qu'on ne fait point
dans les autres Poemes. Cbmme il ne doit y avoir dans
les huit derniers vers que trois rimes f^minines, on peot
mettre de suite sur trois rimes masculines le cinquieme,
le sixieme et le septieme. Mais on fait rarement ce
melange dans les cinq derniers vers.
481
Le Rbndcati a ieux repos nfecftssaires, Tun aprfes le
cinquieme vers, I'autre apres le refrain.
Le refrain qui sc place apres le huilieme vers,ct a la
fin de la piece, n'est autre chase que la repetition d'un
ou de plusieurs mola du premier vers. II doit avoir un
sens lie avec ce qui precede, et etre amene delicate-
ment. Le premier des deux Rond^^aux qui suivent, ex-
plique les regies du poeme.
Jlla/ot, c^tsifaii de iiioi,^ar Tsabean
M^a coDJuM de Itii faire un Rondeau :
Cela me met en iine peine extreme. . ^. , ,^^^ ^ 4^^^/ /
Quoi treize ver»> huit en eau, cinq en erne ! ' ' ^
Je lui ferois anssi-t6t un bateau.
En voila cinq pourtant f^n im moncean :
Fesons-en huit en invoquant Brodeau,
Et puis mettons par quelque etratagdme,
J\Safoi^ c" est fait.
Si je pouvois encor de mon cerveau
Tirer cinq vers, Pouvrage seroit beau : .
Mais cependant me Toilsl dans Ponzieme,
Et si je crois que je fais le douzidme :
En yoWk treize ajust^s au niveau.
Mafoi^ c^tHfait,
AUTRE RONDEAU.
Lt hel esprit^ an siecle de Marot,
Des dons du Ciel passoit pour le gros lot ;
Des grands seigneurs il donnoit accointance,.
Menoit par fois a noble jouissance,
Et qui phis est fesoit bouillir le pot.
Or est pass^ ce temps ou d'un bon mot.
Stance ou dixain, on payoit son ^cot ;
Plus n'en voyoDs qui prennent pour finance
Le bel etprit.
A prix d^argent Pauteur, comme le sot,
Boit sa cbopine et mange son gigot ;
Heureux encor d^en avoir snffisance !
Maints ont le chef plus rempli que la panse t
Dame Ignorance a fait enfin capot
Le bel esprit,
DE L'EPIGRAMME.
L^Epigramme pins libre, en son tour phis bom^,
N^est souvent qu^i^n bon mot de deux rimes orn€.
Cette piece ne doit contenir quVutant de vers qu'U
en faut pour exprimer vivemeDt la peosee on le boo mot
41
48S'
qui en est I'^me. C^est pourquoi le nombre n'en est
pas determine, non plus que U mesure et le melange
des rimes. Ezemple:
Ci-git ma femme : ah ! qu^elle est bien
Pour son repos et pour le mien !
Vn Mapster s^empressant d^etouffer
(^uelque rumeur parmi la populace,
D'an coup dans I'oeil se fit apostropher,
DoQt il tomba, fesant laide grimace.
Lors un frater s^ecria : place, place ;
J'ai pour ce mal un baume souverain.
Perdjrai-je Poeil f lui dit messer Pancrace ;
Non* mon ami, je le tiens dans ma main.
AUTRE EPIORAMME.
Entre Racine et PaSn^ des ComeiUea
Les Chrysogons se font moderateurs :
L'un, k leur gr6, passe les sept menreilles ;
L'aatre ne plidt qu'auz versificateurs.
Or maintenant, Teillez, graves anteurs,
Mordez tos doigts, raroez comme corsaires,
Pour m^riter de pareils protecteurs.
On pour troover de pareils adversaires.
DU MADRIGAL.
Le Madrigal plus simple, et plus ndble en son tour,
Respu« la douceur, la tendresse et Pamour. — B011.SA17.
Ce petit poeme ne differe que par-^ de PEpigramme,
dont la pointe est souvent aiguisee par la satyre.
Ezemple :
L^autre jour Tenfa&t de CjthdM,
Sous vfifi treille a demi gris,
Disoit, en parlant i sa mdre :
Je bois k toi, ma ch^re Iris.
V^nus le regarde en colore :
Maman, oalmez votre counrouX|
Si je Tous prends pour ma bergere,
J'ai pris cent fois Iris pour tous.
NoTA. Le Sonnet et le Rondeau ont aujourd'hui perdu toate leur
Togue, et il est tr^s-rare que Ton s^exerce dans ces denz genres de
poisie.
LATELY PUBLISHED BY
BICHAMDSOJSr 8^ LOBP,
A
IjKanaal of Jftntcfr ^fft^^t^,
AND
FRJBNCH CONVERSATIONS:
ADAPTED TO WANOSTROCHT'S GRAMMAH.
ContaiDing an extensive collection of words and dialogued
under each rale, with examples ftom the
best French Authors.
UtiUiiB bomiiii nihil eat qakm rect^ locnii.
FJuRd. Lib. IV, Fab. XIL
BY N. M. HENTZL
ADVERTISEMENT.
LONG experience has shewn, that to acquire the habit
of conversing in a foreign language, the surest method for
the learner, is to commit a great number of phrases em-
ployed in conversation and adapted to the rules of the
Grammar which he goes through.
Most persons, who har^ studied the French language
ivith care, find little, or no difficulty, in reading our Authors,
ADVCRTISE^Eirr.
bat very few indeed find themselves able to con Terse with
flaencj. For the purpose of rerooviDg this difficulty, a list
of many books, or manaals of coDvcrsation, has been pub-
lished ; some containiog ^iseful matter, many without
method or accuracy, all arranged in chapters, or under
heads, taking the most common subjects which may be the
topics of conversation, as if the mind, transformed into a
mechanical engine, could apply snch chapters to all cases
which may occur in discourse. A book therefore is still
needed, which being adapted to one of the best Grammars
in use, may — ^First, give to the learner a number of phrases,
placed under each role, anali^ous to the exercise which is
to be written. Second, incorporate with those phrases all
words in common use, arranged, as far as possible, accord-
ing to some fixed principle. Third, introduce gradually the
idioms of the language, banning with the most simple.
Such is the plan of the Manual which we have added to
Wanostrocht^s Grammar. Every number, or division, co^
responds to a rule, and we have added a quotation, from
some of our best poets, to almost every paragraph. For
the phrases, our principal source has been the last edition
of the Dictionary of the Academy; the Grammaire des
Grammaires has been onr guide throughout ; for the selec-
tion of words we have consulted mapy vocabularies — that of
Mr. PorriiETON has appeared to us to be the most ctimplete.
A KONDEAU. '•
The French Kondeau consists of thirteen
lines. The burden, or refret, should be placed
after the eighth line, and also at the end, and
should contain one or more of the words of
the first line. It should also have a connected
sense with what precedes, and be introduced
delicately.
Ma foi^ c^est fait de moi, car Isabeau
M'a conjui^ de lui faire un Kondeau :
Cela me met eu une peine extreme.
Quo! treize vers, huit en eauy cinq en erne !
Je lui ferais aussi-tot un bateau.
En voil2i cinq poujtant en un monceau :
Faisons-en huit en invoquant Erodeau,
Et puis mettons par quelque stratag^me.
Ma foi, c*e8t fait.
Si je pouvais encore de mon cerveau
Tirer cinq vers, I'ouvrage serait beau:
Mais cepehdant mc voil^ dans I'onzi^me,
Et si je crois que je fais le douzi^me,.
En YoUk treize ajustes en niveau.
Ma foi, c*est fait.
* Tis done with me, for my fair Isabeau
Has called upon me for a French Rondeau.
This task imposes on me pain extreme :
Eight lines must rhyme with eau, and five with
erne.
I'd sooner build for her a huge bateau.
Yet here are five lines in well ordered row : —
To eke out eight, I must invoke Brodeau,
And then^resotting to some stratagem,
' 2Vs done, my I^abeaut
From my exhausted brain could I make flow
But five lines more, the tiling would really go;
I'm in the line eleventh it would seem,
And could I reach the twelvth, I'd surely deem
The whole" arrangad precLssly *conime il faut.'
' Tis done, my Isabeau.
c. F. B.
/r r
i 1^ r
/
-/
^.^A
^ /. -^-
.y^- x^-^J
This book Bhould be retuxrzxed tx>
the Library on or before the IasI; dat;e
stamped below.
A fine of five cents a day is ixxoixrx*ed
by retaining it beyond the epeoified
time*
Please return prompt^.
T/
/
^
HARVARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY
^
THE GIFT OF
EDWARD HICKLING BRADFORD
(A.B. 1869, M.D. 1873)
OF BOSTON
August 23, 1917
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11